with Notifier NFS2-640 Releasing Control Panel

INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Serial Number _______________________________________________

Date of Installation ____________Date of Commissioning ___________

UNITED Fire Systems

1 Mark Road
Kenilworth, NJ USA 07033 Manual Part Number 10-500003-00B
908-688-0300 Version 1.0
www.unitedfiresystems.com October 2020
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

INDEX
Section Description Page

Index i
List of Figures ii
List Of Tables ii
Hazard Identification iii
Foreword iv
Warranty v

1 General
1.1 Introduction 2
1.2 Features 2
1.3 Functional Description 6
1.4 Configurations 8
1.5 Options 8
1.6 Approvals 8
1.7 Applicable Standards 8
1.8 Applicable Manuals 8
1.9 FM Approved Assemblies 9

1.10 Installation
1.10.1 Location 11
1.10.2 Unpacking, Placement, and Leveling 11
1.10.3 Serial Number 13
1.10.4 External Attachments 13
1.10.5 Prior To Placing In Service 21
1.10.6 Placing In Service 21

1.11 Operation
1.11.1 Automatic 21
1.11.2 Manual 21
1.11.3 Restoring To Service 22

1.12 Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance 22

Tyco Manual TFP1461 – Tyco DV-5A Automatic Water Control Valve, Double
2
Interlock, Preaction, Electric/Pneumatic Actuation

3 General Air Products Manual OILLESSINST – Compressor

4 United Fire Systems UFS-710 – NAMD-1 Nitrogen/Air Maintenance Device

5.1 Notifier Manual 52741 – NFS2-640 Control Panel Installation

5.2 Notifier Manual 52743 – NFS2-640 Control Panel Operation

5.3 Notifier Manual 52742 – NFS2-640 Control Panel Programming

i
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure No. Description Page

1 Illustration - PREACTION-PAC™ Shown With Enclosure Doors Closed 1

2 Illustration - PREACTION-PAC™ Shown With Enclosure Doors Open 3
3a Diagram - Functional Description (Compressor) 4
3b Diagram - Functional Description (Pressure Maintenance Device) 5
4 Diagram – Overall Dimensions 11
5 Diagram - Location of Pallet Bolts and Leveling Feet 12
6 Diagram - Piping Attachment Details 14
7a Diagram - Terminal Strip Wiring Detail (Compressor) 16
7b Diagram - Terminal Strip Wiring Detail (Pressure Maintenance Device) 18

LIST OF TABLES
Table No. Description Page

1.9 FM Approved Assemblies with Notifier NFS2-640 Releasing Control Panel 10

ii
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

HAZARD IDENTIFICATION
Carefully read, understand, and follow instructions identified by these symbols.

DANGER
The use of the word “DANGER” identifies an immediate hazard with a likelihood of death or serious
personal injury if instructions, including recommended precautions, are not followed.

WARNING
The use of the word “WARNING” identifies the presence of hazards or unsafe practices that could result
in death, personal injury, or serious property damage if instructions, including recommended precautions,
are not followed.

CAUTION
The use of the word “CAUTION” identifies possible hazards or unsafe practices that could result in
personal injury or property damage if instructions, including recommended precautions, are not followed.

IMPORTANT
The use of the word “IMPORTANT” identifies special instructions, not related to hazards, that should be
followed.

iii
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

FOREWORD
This manual is written for those who install, operate and maintain UNITED Fire Systems PREACTION-
PAC™ sprinkler valve assemblies. The manual contains installation, operation, and maintenance
information for these assemblies.

IMPORTANT
UNITED Fire Systems assumes no responsibility for the installation, operation, or maintenance of any
systems other than those addressed in this manual. The data contained in this manual is for information
purposes only. UNITED Fire Systems believes this data to be accurate at the time of publication, but the
data is published and presented without any guarantee or warranty whatsoever. UNITED Fire Systems
disclaims any liability for any use that may be made of the data and information contained in this manual
by any and all parties.

IMPORTANT
The UNITED Fire Systems PREACTION-PAC™ sprinkler valve assembly is a vital part of the fire
protection of any facility where these units are installed. Life safety and property protection depends on
continuing proper operation of the assembly. The owner of the PREACTION-PAC™ is responsible for
the condition of the assembly and its continued proper operation. UNITED Fire Systems strongly
recommends that all owners of PREACTION-PAC™ engage the services of qualified, trained fire
protection professionals to design the system containing the assembly, and to install and maintain the
assembly.

UNITED Fire Systems PREACTION-PAC™ sprinkler valve assemblies are to be installed and
maintained by qualified, trained personnel in accordance with:

• This Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual P/N 10-500003-00B.

• National Fire Protection Association No. 13, “Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler
Systems.”
• National Fire Protection Association No. 25, “Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and
Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems.”
• National Fire Protection Association No. 70, “National Electrical Code®”.
• National Fire Protection Association No. 72, “National Fire Alarm Code®.”

Any questions on the information in this manual should be addressed to:

UNITED Fire Systems

1 Mark Road
Kenilworth, NJ USA 07033
908-688-0300
www.unitedfiresystems.com

iv
 LIMITED WARRANTY
PREACTION-PAC™

What Does This Warranty Cover?

This Limited Warranty covers all manufacturing defects in material and workmanship in all equipment
supplied by UNITED Fire Systems for new PREACTION-PAC™ sprinkler valve assemblies.

How Long Does The Coverage Last?

This Limited Warranty lasts for either eighteen (18) months from the date of shipment to the original
purchaser or twelve (12) months from the date of commissioning by UNITED Fire Systems or a trained
distributor, whichever comes first.

What Will UNITED Fire Systems Do?

UNITED Fire Systems will repair, replace, or refund the purchase price of, at its option, any defective
PREACTION-PAC™ equipment at no charge.

What Does This Warranty Not Cover?

 Equipment that is not supplied by UNITED Fire Systems is not covered.
 Equipment that has not been installed, commissioned, operated, and maintained per the instructions in
the applicable UNITED Fire Systems instruction manual is not covered.
 Equipment that has been repaired, modified, or otherwise tampered with not in accordance with the
applicable UNITED Fire Systems instruction manual is not covered.
 Any problem that is caused by abuse, misuse, or an act of God (such as a flood) is not covered.
 Transportation and shipping charges to return equipment to UNITED Fire Systems or for UNITED Fire
Systems to return repaired or replacement equipment are not covered.
 Consequential and incidental damages are not covered. Some states do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so this exclusion may not apply.

What Are The Customer’s Responsibilities?

 Ensuring that the UNITED Fire Systems equipment is installed, commissioned, operated, and
maintained per the instructions in the applicable UNITED Fire Systems instruction manual.
 Where applicable, ensuring that checklists supplied by UNITED Fire Systems are properly used and
completed at the time of installation, commissioning, operation, and maintenance, and such checklists
are retained as records of proper completion.
 Noting and recording the serial number(s) of UNITED Fire Systems equipment.
 Notifying UNITED Fire Systems or a trained distributor of the need for service under this Limited
Warranty.

How Is Warranty Service Obtained?

If anything goes wrong with UNITED Fire Systems equipment, contact:

UNITED Fire Systems

Division of United Fire Protection Corporation
1 Mark Road Your
= OR = Trained
Kenilworth, NJ 07033 USA
Phone: 908-688-0300 Distributor
Fax: 908-481-1131
www.unitedfiresystems.com

Be prepared to supply the serial number(s) of the equipment requiring service,

and copies of the installation, commissioning, and maintenance checklists, as
applicable.
v
 LIMITED WARRANTY
PREACTION-PAC™

Is This Limited Warranty Transferable?

If the PREACTION-PAC™ equipment is moved from one to another installation during the time period of
Limited Warranty coverage, the PREACTION-PAC™ equipment must be re-commissioned by UNITED
Fire Systems or a trained distributor to be eligible for continuing coverage. There will be a quoted charge
for this re-commissioning.

Is This The Entire Warranty?

This Limited Warranty is the entire warranty given by UNITED Fire Systems to the purchaser of new
PREACTION-PAC™ equipment. Component warranties supplied by component manufacturers to UNITED
Fire Systems that are valid for a longer period of time than the UNITED Fire Systems Limited Warranty
may apply. Contact UNITED Fire Systems for more information. There are no other warranties expressed
or implied, beyond those required by law.

How Do State and Federal Laws Apply?

This Limited Warranty grants specific legal rights per Federal law. There may also be other rights which
vary from state to state.

UFS-113 Rev. 2.01 Nov 2020

vi
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

Upper Enclosure

Operating
Instructions

Upper Enclosure
Door Lock

Manual Release
Valve Door with
Latch (No Lock)
Lower Enclosure

Lower Enclosure
Door Lock

Figure 1 –
PREACTION-
PAC™ Shown
With Enclosure
Doors Closed

Page 1 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

1. GENERAL
1.1. Introduction. The UNITED Fire Systems PREACTION-PAC™ is a fully assembled and factory
tested preaction fire suppression system, including preaction valve, trim, and control panel providing
one complete zone of preaction water sprinkler fire protection. All components are contained in two
steel enclosures assembled one above the other. The system pressure gauges and the required
manual release handle are mounted on the front of the lower enclosure. The system detection and
control panel is mounted behind a door in the upper enclosure with a clear polycarbonate window
allowing visual access to the system indicators. Lockable latches on both doors permit authorized
access to all system components. Both enclosures are finished in powder-coat red paint. Gasketing
provides sealing of the enclosure doors. Knockouts permit easy attachment of external electrical
conduits.
1.1.1.Preaction Valve. The preaction valve installed in the PREACTION-PAC™ is a low-differential,
latched clapper valve that uses a unique direct-acting diaphragm to separate the system water
supply from the system piping. The positive latching system uses the supply water pressure to hold
the clapper shut. When the water pressure in the diaphragm chamber is released, the latch retracts
from the clapper and the valve actuates. The low differential and unique latch and actuator design
of the valve allows the valve to be self-resetting.
1.1.2.Piping. Water inlet pipe connections are located on the lower left and lower right sides of the lower
enclosure. The unused inlet is left plugged. Grooved pipe is used for the inlet connection. The
water outlet pipe connection is located at the top center of the lower enclosure, behind the upper
enclosure. The drain connection is accessible within the lower enclosure, and knockouts are
provided allowing exit of the drain from either side. All pipe connections are done in the lower
enclosure.
1.1.3.Control Panel. A Notifier NFS2-640 addressable releasing control panel is factory-installed in the
upper enclosure. Programming for a basic preaction system is factory programmed and tested.
Additional programming may be necessary after installation to suit field conditions. This manual
provides complete instructions for additional programming. All necessary internal wiring
connections are factory-installed and tested.
1.1.4.Wiring. All wiring from the integral control panel to the valve solenoid and all switches is factory
installed and tested. Where applicable, wiring for compressor power and control is also factory
installed and tested. All field wiring for control panel power, compressor power, detection circuits,
notification appliance circuits, and circuits requiring contact closure is connected to terminal strips in
the upper enclosure. No access to the lower enclosure is necessary to complete the wiring
installation.
1.1.5.Compressor. For assemblies equipped with a compressor for air pressurization of the preaction
sprinkler piping, all wiring and adjustments are performed at the factory. Three sizes of compressor
are available, depending on the volume of installed piping to be pressurized. The compressor is
mounted using molded rubber mounts and bushings to minimize noise and vibration during motor
operation. A compressor disconnect switch is located in the upper enclosure.
1.1.6.Pressure Maintenance Device. Assemblies are equipped with a pressure maintenance device
when the source of the supervisory gas is external of the PREACTION-PAC™, such as a tank-
mounted air compressor or a nitrogen generator. A blank plate replaces the compressor
disconnect switch.

1.2. Features
1.2.1.Attractive and rugged metal enclosure. The entire enclosure is manufactured from steel with
continuous welded seams. The lower enclosure is 12 gauge, while the upper enclosure is 14
gauge. Both enclosures are coated with red powder-coat paint inside and out. Continuous piano-
style hinges attach the doors to the enclosures.
1.2.2.Easy-to-see gauges on front of enclosure. Three pressure gauges are mounted on the front of the
lower enclosure, and are visible at all times. These gauges monitor the air pressure in the system
Page 2 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

piping, the water supply pressure up to the preaction valve, and the water pressure keeping the
valve clapper piston closed.
1.2.3.Easy access to manual release valve. The emergency manual release ball valve is located behind
a small unlocked door on the front of the lower enclosure. Operation of this ball valve opens the
preaction valve, filling the system piping with water. No power is necessary to accomplish this
operation. The key for the lower enclosure main door does not have to be available to accomplish
this operation.
1.2.4.Water inlet connections. The water inlet piping may attach to the lower enclosure near the bottom
on either side.
1.2.5.Easy-to-follow instructions on enclosure front. System instructions, mounted behind clear plastic,
are located on the front of the upper enclosure.
1.2.6.Space for required spare sprinkler heads and wrench. As required by NFPA 13, a built-in storage
location for spare sprinkler heads and a sprinkler wrench is behind the door of the upper enclosure.
1.2.7.Separate mechanical and electrical enclosures. This allows mechanical and electrical trades to
keep their work areas separate.

Spare Sprinkler
Head / Wrench
Control Panel Storage

Nameplate with Part

Terminal Strip Number and Serial
Number

Manual
Release Valve Compressor
Disconnect Switch
(where applicable)

Pressure Gauges

Compressor

Preaction Valve

Figure 2 –
PREACTION-
PAC™ Shown
With Enclosure
Doors Open
(Compressor
Option Shown)

Page 3 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

Figure 3a – Diagram - Functional

Description with Compressor

Page 4 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

Figure 3b – Diagram - Functional Description

with Pressure Maintenance Device

Page 5 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

1.3. Functional Description. Refer to Figure 3a on page 4 and Figure 3b on page 5.

1.3.1.Control panel (1). The control panel receives signals from fire detectors located in the protected
space, as well as signals from various switches within the assembly. The panel processes the
input signals per a pre-determined sequence of operation, and operates outputs for external audible
/ visual devices and building fire alarm signaling, as well as the signal to open the preaction valve
within the assembly. Refer to the control panel instruction manual in Section 5 for details on the
panel and the sequence of operation.
1.3.2.Terminal strip (2). The terminal strip provides a convenient point for landing some of the required
field wiring, and also serves as the interface point between the control panel (1) and the various
connections in the lower enclosure.
1.3.3.Preaction valve (3). The preaction valve is the heart of the assembly. The valve holds back the
sprinkler water until the control panel (1) reacts to the signal from the fire detectors and sends a
signal to the valve actuation solenoid (4). In single-interlock assemblies, actuation of the valve
actuation solenoid (4) sends water into the sprinkler pipe. In double-interlock assemblies, fusing of
a sprinkler head from heat is required, along with valve actuation solenoid (4) actuation, to send
water into the sprinkler pipe. Refer to Tyco Manual TFP1461 in Section 2 for more detailed
information on the preaction valve.
1.3.4.Valve actuation solenoid (4). The valve actuation solenoid receives the signal from the control
panel (1), and actuates the preaction valve (3). The solenoid is the Victaulic Series 753-E, and is
rated at 24VDC, 0.364 amps, 8.7 watts, 66 ohms. The solenoid is FM Approved under Group I (as
in India). Refer to Tyco Manual TFP1461 in Section 2 for more detailed information.
1.3.5.Waterflow signal switch (5). The waterflow signal switch responds to waterflow in the pipe
downstream of the preaction valve (3). The switch contains Quantity 2, SPDT switches, rated at
10A-125/250VAC, 1/2HP, 2.5A-6/12/24VDC. Contacts transfer when waterflow begins after
preaction valve opens. Contacts automatically restore when waterflow ceases. One contact is
factory-wired to send a signal to the control panel (1). Refer to the control panel instruction manual
in Section 5 for details on the response of the panel to the waterflow signal switch.
1.3.6.Manual shutoff valve (6). The manual shutoff valve is used to shut off the flow of water after
actuation of the preaction valve (3). The normal position of this valve when the system is in service
is open. Refer to Tyco Manual TFP1461 in Section 2 for more detailed information on the use of
this valve.
1.3.7.Shutoff valve tamper signal switch (7). The shutoff valve tamper signal switch sends a
supervisory signal to the control panel (1) when the manual shutoff valve (6) is closed. The switch
contains Quantity 2, SPDT switches, rated at 10A-125/250VAC, 0.5A-125VDC. Contacts transfer
when valve begins to close. Contacts restore when valve is fully open. One contact is factory-
wired to send a signal to the control panel (1). Refer to the control panel instruction manual in
Section 5 for details on the response of the panel to the shutoff valve tamper signal switch.
1.3.8.Compressor (8). The compressor supplies supervisory air pressure to fill the sprinkler pipe
downstream of the preaction valve (3). The sprinkler pipe is pressurized to 13 PSIG minimum and
18 PSIG maximum by the compressor (8). Loss of this pressure, from damage to the pipe or a
sprinkler head, results in a supervisory signal at the control panel (1).
1.3.9.Pressure Maintenance Device (8). The pressure maintenance device supplies supervisory gas
pressure, from either a tank-mounted air compressor or nitrogen generator, to fill the sprinkler pipe
downstream of the preaction valve (3). The sprinkler pipe is pressurized to 15 PSIG by the
pressure maintenance device (8). Loss of this pressure, from damage to the pipe or a sprinkler
head, results in a supervisory signal at the control panel (1).
1.3.10. High / low air pressure limit switch (9). Where applicable, the high / low air pressure limit
switch is built in to the compressor (8). When pressure in the pipe falls below 13 PSIG, the switch
turns the compressor (8) on. When pressure in the pipe rises to 18 PSIG, the switch turns the
compressor (8) off.
1.3.11. Low air pressure signal switch (10). The low air pressure signal switch sends the supervisory
signal for low air pressure to the control panel (1). The switch contains Quantity 2, SPDT
switches, rated at 10A-125/250VAC, 1/2HP, 2.5A-6/12/24VDC. Contacts transfer when pressure
Page 6 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

in the piping falls below 13PSIG. Contacts automatically restore when pressure rises above
13PSIG. One contact is factory-wired to send a signal to the control panel (1). Refer to the control
panel instruction manual in Section 5 for details on the response of the panel to the low air
pressure signal switch.
1.3.12. Compressor disconnect switch (11). Where applicable, the compressor disconnect switch is
used to manually interrupt the 110VAC power to the compressor motor, during inspection,
maintenance, and resetting of the assembly. Only trained personnel should use this switch. The
normal position of this switch when the system is in service is ON.
1.3.13. Manual station valve (12). The manual station valve is located behind a separate door on the
front of the lower enclosure. No key is needed to open this door. To manually open the preaction
valve (3), open the door and pull the lever on the manual station valve forward. The preaction
valve (3) will open, and the sprinkler pipe will fill with water. No power is needed to manually open
the preaction valve (3) in this manner.

IMPORTANT
Fusing of a sprinkler head by heat is necessary for water to be discharged onto a fire, even after
operation of the manual station valve.

1.3.14. Drain valve (13). The drain valve is used to drain the sprinkler pipe after actuation of the
preaction valve (3). This valve is used only during inspection, maintenance, and resetting of the
assembly. Only trained personnel should use this valve. Refer to Tyco Manual TFP1461 in
Section 2 for more detailed information on this valve. The normal position of this valve is closed.
1.3.15. Input connection for 110 VAC power (14). 110VAC is required to power the assembly. This
power shall come from a source in compliance with all applicable codes and standards. Internal
wiring (factory assembled) takes this power to the control panel (1) and, if equipped, the
compressor (8). If local codes require individual 110VAC power sources for the control panel (1)
and the compressor (8), jumpers may be removed from the terminal strip (2) permitting this. Refer
to Section 1.10 for additional information on this connection.
1.3.16. Input connection for automatic fire detectors (15). Automatic fire detectors are required to
provide the signal for opening the preaction valve (3). These detectors are field-connected to this
connection. See Section 1.10, and refer to the control panel instruction manual in Section 4 for
details on these detectors and this connection.

IMPORTANT
Fusing of a sprinkler head by heat is necessary for water to be discharged onto a fire, even after
operation of automatic fire detectors.

1.3.17. Water inlet connection (16). The sprinkler water supply is field-connected to this connection.
One of two optional water inlet connections may be chosen. The connection may be made on the
lower right of the assembly, or by removing the cap, the connection may be made on the lower left
of the assembly. Refer to Section 1.10 and Section 2 – Tyco Manual TFP1461 for more detailed
information on this connection.
1.3.18. Outlet connection to fire sprinklers (17). The outlet connection from the assembly to the fire
sprinklers is field-connected to this connection. The connection is located in the top center of the

Page 7 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

lower enclosure, behind the upper enclosure. Refer to Section 1.10 and Section 2 – Tyco Manual
TFP1461 for more detailed information on this connection.
1.3.19. Notification appliance output connection (18). Notification appliances are required by code to
alert occupants that a fire has been detected. These appliances are field-connected to this
connection. Refer to the control panel instruction manual in Section 5 for details on this
connection.
1.3.20. Output connection to building fire alarm system (19). Most codes require a fire protection sub-
system to signal the building fire alarm system. This signal is field-connected to this connection.
Refer to the control panel instruction manual in Section 5 for details on this connection.
1.3.21. Drain connection (20). Drain water from the assembly must be piped away to a drain. The drain
piping may be connected to the assembly on the left or the right side. Refer to Section 1.10 and
Section 2 – Tyco Manual TFP1461 for more detailed information on this connection.

1.4. Configurations. UNITED Fire Systems PREACTION-PAC™ sprinkler valve assemblies are
available in the following configurations:
1.4.1.Valve sizes: 2” through 4”.
1.4.2.Valve types: Single-interlock and double-interlock available in all valve sizes.
1.4.3. Supervisory gas sources:
1.4.3.1. For 2” valves: 1/6HP compressor and pressure maintenance device available.
1.4.3.2. For 3” and 4” valves: 1/6HP, 1/3HP, and 1/2HP compressors and pressure maintenance device
available.
1.4.3.3. Gas sources are capable of pressurizing piping systems up to the following limits:
1.4.3.3.1. 1/6HP compressor: maximum system capacity is 290 gallons.
1.4.3.3.2. 1/3HP compressor: maximum system capacity is 475 gallons.
1.4.3.3.3. 1/2HP compressor: maximum system capacity is 780 gallons.
1.4.3.3.4. Pressure maintenance device: Refer to the manual of the external source.
1.4.4.Control panel: A Notifier NFS2-640 addressable detection control panel is factory-installed in the
upper enclosure.

1.5. Options – None at this time.

1.6. Approvals. UNITED Fire Systems PREACTION-PAC™ sprinkler valve assemblies, as listed in
this Manual, are Approved by FM Approvals under the heading “Automatic Water Control Valves.”
See pages 9 and 10 for Approved assemblies. NOTE: Although most PREACTION-PAC™
assemblies are FM Approved, custom-built units are supplied from time to time upon request.
Various components within these custom assemblies maintain their individual approvals, but these
custom assemblies are not FM Approved as a unit.

1.7. Applicable Standards. UNITED Fire Systems PREACTION-PAC™ sprinkler valve assemblies
are to be installed and maintained by qualified, trained personnel in accordance with:
1.7.1.National Fire Protection Association No. 13, “Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.”
1.7.2.National Fire Protection Association No. 25, “Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance
of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems.”
1.7.3.National Fire Protection Association No. 70, “National Electrical Code®”.
1.7.4.National Fire Protection Association No. 72, “National Fire Alarm Code®.”

1.8. Applicable Manuals. Manuals supplied by the manufacturers of components used in UNITED Fire
Systems PREACTION-PAC™ assemblies are included with this manual. In some cases, these
manuals contain references that are NOT APPLICABLE to PREACTION-PAC™ assemblies. Care
should be taken to be clear on what is applicable and what is not when referring to these manuals
for installation, operation, inspection, and maintenance instructions.

Page 8 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

1.9 FM Approved Assemblies

Part Number Coding:

G3 – XX – P – X – X - B

Codes Generation III

PREACTION-PAC™. Future Codes control panel:
generations, incorporating major B = Notifier NFS2-640
changes, will be G4, G5, etc.

Codes supervisory gas source:

Codes valve size: 1 = 1/6 HP Compressor
20 = 2” valve 2 = 1/3 HP Compressor
30 = 3” valve 3 = 1/2 HP Compressor
40 = 4” valve N = Pressure Maintenance Device

Codes Single or Double Interlock:

P = Preaction (Other codes reserved 1 = Single Interlock
for future use) 2 = Double Interlock

PREACTION-PAC™ assemblies with indicated part numbers are FM Approved. From time to time,
custom-built units are supplied upon request. The components in these custom-built units retain their
individual approvals, but these custom-built units are not FM Approved.

When the PREACTION-PAC™ is installed where FM Global is an AHJ, follow the requirements of FM
Approvals Class Numbers 1011, 1012, 1013 and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 5-40
dated 2007, especially:

• Alarm control panels for automatic release of preaction sprinkler systems are required to have 90
hours of secondary power followed by 10 minutes of release power and alarm operation.
• Include the installation of Class A (Style D or E) initiating device circuits. All FM Approved
systems / installations must be configured as Class A for Deluge and Preaction Releasing
Service.
• Do not include abort switches to abort the preaction sprinkler actuation function.

Page 9 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

Table 1.9 – Approved PREACTION-PAC™ Assemblies with Notifier NFS2-640 Control Panel

Part Number Valve Size, in. Valve Type Supervisory Gas Source Control Panel

G320P21B 2” Double Interlock 1/6 HP Compressor Notifier NFS2-640

G320P2NB 2” Double Interlock Pressure Maintenance Device Notifier NFS2-640

G330P21B 3” Double Interlock 1/6 HP Compressor Notifier NFS2-640

G330P22B 3” Double Interlock 1/3 HP Compressor Notifier NFS2-640
G330P23B 3” Double Interlock 1/2 HP Compressor Notifier NFS2-640
G330P2NB 3” Double Interlock Pressure Maintenance Device Notifier NFS2-640

G340P21B 4” Double Interlock 1/6 HP Compressor Notifier NFS2-640

G340P22B 4” Double Interlock 1/3 HP Compressor Notifier NFS2-640
G340P23B 4” Double Interlock 1/2 HP Compressor Notifier NFS2-640
G340P2NB 4” Double Interlock Pressure Maintenance Device Notifier NFS2-640

Page 10 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

1.10. Installation.
1.10.1. Location. Locate the PREACTION-PAC™ assembly as shown on the system shop drawings or
design plans. The location should be dry, clean, and within the Approved temperature range of
the assembly (+40 deg F to +110 deg F). Refer to Figure 4 for overall dimensions.
1.10.2. Unpacking, Placement & Leveling. Unpack the PREACTION-PAC™ as follows:
1.10.2.1. Remove the outer carton and any other packing material surrounding the assembly.
1.10.2.2. Open the lower enclosure door.
1.10.2.3. Use a flat-bladed or Phillips screwdriver to remove the (4) bolts holding the assembly to the
pallet. See Figure 5.
1.10.2.4. Close the lower enclosure door. Remove the unit from the pallet, and place in the intended
installation location.
1.10.2.5. Level the unit:
1.10.2.5.1. Open the lower enclosure door.
1.10.2.5.2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, adjust the (4) leveling feet from inside the enclosure until all
feet are firmly in contact with the floor. See Figure 5.
1.10.2.5.3. Using a spirit level, adjust the leveling feet until the assembly is level both front-to-back and
side-to-side.

SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW

Dimension Inches
A 24.00
B 52.00
C 20.00
D 30.00
E 72.00

Figure 4 – Diagram - Overall Dimensions

Page 11 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

Figure 5 – Diagram - Location of Pallet Bolts and Leveling Feet

Page 12 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

1.10.3. Serial Number. The serial number of each assembly is located on a permanent metal
nameplate, located behind the upper enclosure door above the compressor disconnect switch.
The serial number is coded as follows:

G3 – 20P21B – XXXX - XXX

Codes for Generation III PREACTION-PAC

Part number (See Section 1.9 for explanation)

Date code (2 digit month followed by 2 digit year)

3 digit serial number

Note the serial number, date of installation, and date of commissioning on the front of this manual where
indicated.

1.10.4. External Attachments.

1.10.4.1. Preaction Valve. Use Section 2 - Tyco Manual TFP1461 to guide the installation of inlet, outlet,
and drain piping. See Figure 6 for details.
1.10.4.1.1. Inlet Piping. Inlet piping may be attached to the PREACTION-PAC™ in one of two locations:
• The standard connection is at the lower right center of the lower enclosure. The assembly is pre-
piped to accept inlet piping at this location. This location is labeled INLET. Remove the plastic
protection cap from the inlet pipe, and use a field-supplied grooved coupling to make this connection.
• An optional connection at the lower left center of the lower enclosure. Remove the precut knockout
from the lower left center of the lower enclosure. Remove the steel cap from the grooved coupling on
the left side of the tee at the bottom of the enclosure. Attach the inlet piping to the left side of the tee
using the grooved coupling. Remove the plastic protection cap from the lower right center inlet
connection, and assemble the steel cap removed from the tee to the lower right connection using a
field-supplied grooved coupling.

CAUTION
Failure to assemble the steel cap to the lower right center inlet will result in property damage due to water
escaping from the lower right center inlet.
•

1.10.4.1.2. Outlet Piping. Outlet piping is attached to the PREACTION-PAC™ in one location; at the top
center of the lower enclosure. This location is labeled OUTLET. Remove the plastic
protection cap from the outlet pipe, and used a field-supplied grooved coupling to make this
connection.
1.10.4.1.3. Drain Piping. Drain piping is attached to the PREACTION-PAC™ at a nipple located in the
lower enclosure. The drain pipe may exit the enclosure on either the left or right side.
Remove the precut knockout from the chosen side. Attach the drain pipe to the nipple with
two field-supplied grooved couplings and a field-supplied grooved elbow.
1.10.4.1.4. External Supervisory Gas Inlet. External supervisory gas inlet piping is attached to the
PREACTION-PAC™ in one location: the back center of the top surface of the lower enclosure.
The connection point is a ½ NPT female bulkhead (through-wall) fitting. Make the field
Page 13 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

connection by removing the red plastic plug and plumbing to the location with ½ inch pipe,
typically either steel or copper. PLEASE NOTE: This inlet option is only present on
configurations with a pressure maintenance device.

Dimension Inches
A 15.00
B 12.50
C 9.86
D 8.86
E 5.75
F 12.50

Figure 6 – Diagram - Piping Attachment

Details

Page 14 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

1.10.4.2. Terminal Strip and Control Panel. See Figure 7a and Figure 7b for information on connection
to the terminal strip in the upper enclosure. Use Section 5.1 – Notifier manual 52741 to guide
the installation of connections to the control panel. Terminals for 110VAC power accept qty. (1)
10 ga. max. conductor. NOTE: All conductors used for field wiring must comply with NFPA 70 –
National Electrical Code, and control panel manufacturer’s instructions (see Section 5). See
Section 5 for information on power-limited conductor runs.

CAUTION
DO NOT drill or punch the upper enclosure to attach conduit. Use the knockouts supplied at the lower
back of the upper enclosure. Failure to follow these instructions can result in damage to the control
panel. UNITED Fire Systems will not be responsible for warranty adjustment of damaged control
panels when these instructions are not followed.

CAUTION
This assembly contains static-sensitive components. ALWAYS ground yourself with a proper wrist
strap before handling any electronic components or circuits. Failure to do so can lead to equipment
damage from static electricity.

Page 15 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

Figure 7a – Diagram –

Terminal Strip with Compressor Wiring Detail

Page 16 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

LEGEND
FIELD WIRING
COLOR OF TERMINAL
NO JUMPER USED
BLOCK
DEDICATED 110 VAC GROUND FOR CONTROL PANEL (COMPRESSOR WILL ALSO BE GROUNDED THROUGH THIS
1 GREEN/YELLOW
TERMINAL)
2 DEDICATED 110 VAC GROUND FOR AIR COMPRESSOR (USE ONLY IF REQUIRED BY AHJ) GREEN/YELLOW

WITH JUMPER 29 IN PLACE WITH JUMPER 29 REMOVED

110 VAC NEUTRAL FOR CONTROL PANEL
3 110 VAC NEUTRAL FOR CONTROL PANEL AND COMPRESSOR WHITE
ONLY
4 DO NOT USE 110 VAC NEUTRAL FOR COMPRESSOR ONLY WHITE

WITH JUMPER 30 IN PLACE WITH JUMPER 30 REMOVED

5 110 VAC HOT FOR CONTROL PANEL AND COMPRESSOR 110 VAC HOT FOR CONTROL PANEL ONLY BLACK

6 DO NOT USE 110 VAC HOT FOR COMPRESSOR ONLY BLACK

FACTORY WIRING

7 110 VAC GROUND TO CONTROL PANEL GREEN/YELLOW

8 110 VAC GROUND TO AIR COMPRESSOR GREEN/YELLOW

9 110 VAC NEUTRALTO CONTROL PANEL WHITE

10 110 VAC NEUTRAL TO AIR COMPRESSOR WHITE

11 110 VAC HOT TO CONTROL PANEL BLACK

12 110 VAC HOT TO AIR COMPRESSOR BLACK

13 PREACTION SOLENOID WIRING (-) FROM LOWER ENCLOSURE GRAY

14 PREACTION SOLENOID WIRING (+) FROM LOWER ENCLOSURE RED

15 LOW AIR SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (NO) FROM LOWER ENCLOSURE GRAY

16 LOW AIR SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (COM) FROM LOWER ENCLOSURE GRAY

17 WATERFLOW SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (NO) FROM LOWER ENCLOSURE BLUE

18 WATERFLOW SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (COM) FROM LOWER ENCLOSURE BLUE

19 TAMPER SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (NO) FROM LOWER ENCLOSURE YELLOW

20 TAMPER SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (COM) FROM LOWER ENCLOSURE YELLOW

21 PREACTION SOLENOID WIRING (-) TO CONTROL PANEL GRAY

22 PREACTION SOLENOID WIRING (+) TO CONTROL PANEL RED

23 LOW AIR SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (NO) TO CONTROL PANEL GRAY

24 LOW AIR SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (COM) TO CONTROL PANEL GRAY

25 WATERFLOW SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (NO) TO CONTROL PANEL BLUE

26 WATERFLOW SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (COM) TO CONTROL PANEL BLUE

27 TAMPER SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (NO) TO CONTROL PANEL YELLOW

28 TAMPER SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (COM) TO CONTROL PANEL YELLOW

JUMPERS

29 CONNECTS CONTROL PANEL & COMPRESSOR 110 VAC NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS - REMOVE TO SEPARATE

30 CONNECTS CONTROL PANEL & COMPRESSOR 110 VAC HOT CONDUCTORS - REMOVE TO SEPARATE

Legend for Figure 7a

Page 17 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

Figure 7b – Diagram –

Terminal Strip with Pressure Maintenance Device Wiring Detail

Page 18 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

LEGEND

FIELD WIRING

COLOR OF TERMINAL BLOCK

1 110 VAC GROUND FOR CONTROL PANEL GREEN/YELLOW

3 110 VAC NEUTRAL FOR CONTROL PANEL WHITE

5 110 VAC HOT FOR CONTROL PANEL BLACK

FACTORY WIRING

7 110 VAC GROUND TO CONTROL PANEL GREEN/YELLOW

9 110 VAC NEUTRALTO CONTROL PANEL WHITE

11 110 VAC HOT TO CONTROL PANEL BLACK

13 PREACTION SOLENOID WIRING (-) FROM LOWER ENCLOSURE GRAY

14 PREACTION SOLENOID WIRING (+) FROM LOWER ENCLOSURE RED

15 LOW AIR SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (NO) FROM LOWER ENCLOSURE GRAY

16 LOW AIR SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (COM) FROM LOWER ENCLOSURE GRAY

17 WATERFLOW SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (NO) FROM LOWER ENCLOSURE BLUE

18 WATERFLOW SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (COM) FROM LOWER ENCLOSURE BLUE

19 TAMPER SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (NO) FROM LOWER ENCLOSURE YELLOW

20 TAMPER SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (COM) FROM LOWER ENCLOSURE YELLOW

21 PREACTION SOLENOID WIRING (-) TO CONTROL PANEL GRAY

22 PREACTION SOLENOID WIRING (+) TO CONTROL PANEL RED

23 LOW AIR SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (NO) TO CONTROL PANEL GRAY

24 LOW AIR SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (COM) TO CONTROL PANEL GRAY

25 WATERFLOW SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (NO) TO CONTROL PANEL BLUE

26 WATERFLOW SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (COM) TO CONTROL PANEL BLUE

27 TAMPER SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (NO) TO CONTROL PANEL YELLOW

28 TAMPER SIGNAL SWITCH WIRING (COM) TO CONTROL PANEL YELLOW

Legend for Figure 7b

Page 19 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

1.10.4.2.1. Power. 110VAC, 3-wire, single-phase power is attached to the terminal strip in the upper
enclosure. See Figure 7. Terminals for 110VAC power accept qty.(1) 10 ga. max. conductor.
Current draw: With 1/6HP compressor = 10.6 amps; with 1/3HP compressor = 10.6 amps; with
1/2HP compressor = 12.0 amps; with pressure maintenance device = 4.0 amps.

DANGER
Only qualified electricians should connect incoming power to the assembly. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in death or serious personal injury.
A. Turn off circuit breaker at the main power distribution panel.
B. Connect service ground conductor to terminal marked GROUND.
C. Connect primary neutral conductor to terminal marked NEUTRAL.
D. Connect primary hot conductor to terminal marked HOT.
1.10.4.2.2. Backup Batteries. Calculate backup battery requirements, and connect backup batteries, per
Section 5.1 – Notifier manual 52741. The upper enclosure is capable of holding batteries up
to 26 A-h. If larger batteries are needed, use an external battery enclosure per Section 5.1 –
Notifier manual 52741. The maximum battery capacity for this control panel is 200 A-h.
1.10.4.2.3. Fire Detectors (Initiating Devices). Fire detectors (initiating devices), located in the area
protected by the sprinklers connected to the PREACTION-PAC™, are necessary to provide
the signal to open the preaction valve. Refer to NFPA 72 for information on the number, type,
and spacing of fire detectors. Install detectors, wiring, and panel connections per Section 5.1
– Notifier manual 52741. All FM Approved systems / installations must be configured as Class
A for Deluge and Preaction Releasing Service.
1.10.4.2.4. Audible / Visual Appliances (Indicating Devices). Audible / visual appliances (indicating
devices), located in and around the area protected by the sprinklers connected to the
PREACTION-PAC™, are necessary to warn occupants that a fire has been detected. Refer
to NFPA 72 for information on the number, type, and spacing of audible / visual appliances.
Install audible / visual devices, wiring, and panel connections per Section 5.1 – Notifier manual
52741.
1.10.4.2.5. Building Fire Alarm Systems. In buildings with fire alarm systems separate from the
PREACTION-PAC™ detection system, most national and local codes and authorities having
jurisdiction require the PREACTION-PAC™ to provide signals to the building fire alarm
system. The Notifier control panel installed in the PREACTION-PAC™ contains dry contacts
capable of providing the necessary signals. Install audible / visual devices, wiring, and panel
connections per Section 5.1 – Notifier manual 52741.
1.10.4.2.6. Other Connections. From time to time, additional signals from the PREACTION-PAC™
control panel may be required. Such signals can be associated with building management
systems, equipment shutdown, or security notification. Additional dry contacts may be needed
to satisfy all of these requirements.
1.10.4.3. Compressor. Where applicable. See Figure 7a. 110VAC, 3-wire, single-phase power is
attached to the terminal strip in the upper enclosure. The compressor power is factory-wired to
the terminal strip in the upper enclosure. In the default configuration, the same 110VAC source
used for the control panel serves for the compressor. If the local authority having jurisdiction
requires separate power sources for the control panel and the compressor, jumpers can be
removed from the terminal strip. The compressor pressure outlet is factory-attached to the
system piping within the lower enclosure.

Page 20 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

1.10.5. Prior To Placing In Service. Before placing the PREACTION-PAC™ in service, perform the
following steps. Ensure that all discrepancies are corrected before proceeding to the next step.
1.10.5.1. Ensure the entire system is installed per the latest revision of all applicable shop drawings.
1.10.5.2. Ensure all testing has been performed on the sprinkler piping per the requirements of the
authority having jurisdiction and NFPA 13.
1.10.5.3. Use Sections 5.1, 5.2, and 5.3 – Notifier manuals 52741, 52742, and 52743 to perform all
preliminary tests on the control panel, field wiring, and field devices.
1.10.5.4. Use Section 2 – Tyco Manual TFP1461 to perform all preliminary tests on the preaction valve,
trim, and sprinkler piping.
1.10.5.5. Perform all tests required to be witnessed by the authority having jurisdiction. Obtain AHJ
approval of the installation.

1.10.6. Placing In Service.

1.10.6.1. Verify that the control panel is indicating POWER ON, with no alarm or trouble indicators
illuminated, and no error messages on the display.
1.10.6.2. Verify that the water supply is on.
1.10.6.3. Using Section 2 – Tyco Manual TFP1461, verify that all valves are in the proper position for in-
service status. Verify that the three pressure gauges on the front of the lower enclosure are
indicating expected values within expected limits.
1.10.6.4. Ensure that the owner of the system has received adequate introductory training.
1.10.6.5. Turn over this manual and the enclosure door keys to the owner. The manual may be stored in
the pocket on the inside of the lower enclosure door.

1.11. Operation.
1.11.1. Automatic. Fully automatic operation of the system will be conducted by the control panel.
Power from 110VAC and / or batteries is required for the control panel to function in this way. No
manual intervention is required for the control panel to perform its functions. Manual intervention
to acknowledge and silence signals may be performed. Refer to Section 5.3 – Notifier manual
52743 for information on signals.

IMPORTANT
Fusing of a sprinkler head by heat is necessary for water to be discharged onto a fire, even after
operation of automatic fire detectors.

1.11.2. Manual. Manual operation of the preaction valve is accomplished with the manual release valve.
Open the door marked IN CASE OF FIRE OPEN DOOR AND PULL LEVER. No key is needed
to open this door. Pull the lever. No power is needed to open the preaction valve in this manner.
The door may not be closed until the lever is restored to its normal position.

Page 21 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

IMPORTANT
Fusing of a sprinkler head by heat is necessary for water to be discharged onto a fire, even after
operation of the manual station valve.

1.11.3. Restoring To Service. After automatic or manual system operation, follow instructions in
Section 2 – Tyco Manual TFP1461 and Section 5.3 – Notifier manual 52743 to restore the
individual parts of the PREACTION-PAC™ to service.

1.12. Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance. Regular inspection, testing and maintenance of the
PREACTION-PAC™ assembly is essential to the assembly’s continued proper operation. Follow
all instructions in the documents described in this section. Pay particular attention to the required
minimum interval for each item of inspection, testing, and maintenance. The owner of the system
(or their designated representative) is responsible for the overall condition of the system, and
ensuring that all inspection, testing, and maintenance items are conducted as recommended.

IMPORTANT
The UNITED Fire Systems PREACTION-PAC™ sprinkler valve assembly is a vital part of the fire
protection of any facility where these units are installed. Life safety and property protection depends on
continuing proper operation of the assembly. The owner of the PREACTION-PAC™ is responsible for
the condition of the assembly and its continued proper operation. UNITED Fire Systems strongly
recommends that all owners of PREACTION-PAC™ engage the services of qualified, trained fire
protection professionals to inspect, test, maintain, and repair the assembly.

1.12.1. Inspection. Inspection involves carrying out a set of procedures to discover and note any and all
discrepancies that could render the system impaired, inoperative, or ineffective. The result of an
inspection is a comprehensive list of these discrepancies. Inspection does not specifically include
maintenance or repair; however, maintenance and repair can be and usually is conducted at the
time of inspection.
1.12.2. Testing. Testing involves carrying out procedures to discover if tested components function as
intended. Testing is an integral part of performing inspection. Testing is also done after the
performance of some maintenance procedures.
1.12.3. Maintenance. Maintenance involves carrying out procedures to ensure that maintained
components continue to function as intended. Maintenance is usually preventive in nature.
Maintenance can be conducted during inspection.
1.12.4. Repair. Repair involves carrying out procedures to correct the deficiencies found during
inspection, or as a result of other events such as system actuation or control panel trouble / alarm
signals.

Page 22 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.00 – NOVEMBER 2020

1.12.5. Documents Relevant To Inspection, Testing, Maintenance, and Repair.

1.12.5.1. Tyco Manual TFP1461.
1.12.5.2. General Air Products Manual OILLESSINST.
1.12.5.3. United Fire Systems Instruction Sheet UFS-710.
1.12.5.4. Notifier manual 52741.
1.12.5.5. Notifier manual 52742.
1.12.5.6. Notifier manual 52743.
1.12.5.7. National Fire Protection Association No. 25, “Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and
Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems.”
1.12.5.8. National Fire Protection Association No. 72, “National Fire Alarm Code®”

Page 23 of 23
 PREACTION-PAC
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.0 – OCTOBER 2020

SECTION
2
Tyco Manual TFP1461

DV-5A Automatic Water

Control Valve, Double
Interlock Preaction,
Electric/Pneumatic Actuation
 Worldwide
www.tyco-fire.com
Contacts

DV-5A Automatic Water Control Valve Double Interlock

Preaction Electric/Pneumatic Actuation Fire
Protection Systems 1-1/2 Inch to 8 Inch (DN40 to DN200)

General
Description
The TYCO DV-5 a Automatic Water
Control Valves are diaphragm type
valves that can be used in double inter-
lock preaction fire protection systems.
When properly trimmed, the double
seat design of the DV-5a Valve also
provides actuation of fire alarms upon
system operation.
The diaphragm style design of the
DV-5a Valve allows external resetting,
providing for easy resetting of a deluge
system without having to open a valve
handhole cover to manually reposition
a clapper and/or latch mechanism.
Simply re-pressurizing the diaphragm
chamber resets the valve.
The DV-5a features internal and exter-
nal coating of the valve to provide
corrosion resistance. The external cor-
rosion resistance of the epoxy coating
permits the use of the DV-5a in cor- Available End Connections and Weights — lb/(kg)
rosive atmospheres associated with
many types of industrial processing Nominal Valve Size
plants and outdoor installations. End Connection ANSI Inches
(DN)
The DV-5a Valves are offered with the
1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8
DV-5a Valve and separately ordered Inlet Outlet (40) (50) (80) (100) (150) (200)
semi-assembled trim shown in Figures
6 and 7, or, for ease of installation, with 26 25
Thread Thread N/A N/A N/A N/A
DV-5a Valve completely trimmed with or (11,8) (11,3)
without a System Main Control Valve. 25 25 60 95 177 327
Groove Groove
Double interlock preaction systems are (11,3) (11,3) (27,2) (43,1) (80,3) (148,3)
designed for use in applications, such 66 106 190 346
Flange Groove N/A N/A
as refrigerated areas, requiring the (30,0) (48,1) (86,2) (157,0)
maximum degree of protection against
72 116 204 365
inadvertent flooding of the sprinkler Flange Flange N/A N/A (32,7) (52,6) (92,5) (165,6)
system piping. In order for a double
interlock preaction system to automat-
or just the opening of a sprinkler will hold the DV-5a Valve closed by locking
ically activate, two independent events
not allow the DV-5a Valve to open and pressure in the diaphragm chamber
must occur. First, the electric detection
permit water to flow into the normally of the DV-5a Valve. In the event of a
system must operate, and secondly,
dry sprinkler system piping. However, fire, a releasing panel is initiated by a
an automatic sprinkler on the system
operation of just the electric detec- fire detection or electric manual pull
piping must operate. Typically, the
tion system or the opening of a sprin- station, to allow the solenoid valve to
electric detection system is designed to
kler (loss of system air pressure) will open, and subsequently loss of system
operate before any automatic sprinkler.
result in a supervisory alarm to notify air pressure due to opening of an auto-
Operation of just the electric detection,
the building occupants of a condition matic sprinkler will result in opening of
needing attention so as to avoid inad- the dry pilot actuator. Opening of both
vertent flooding of the system piping. the solenoid valve and dry pilot actu-
IMPORTANT ator results in operation of the DV-5a
In the case of Electric/Pneumatic Actu-
Refer to Technical Data Sheet Valve.
ation, a solenoid valve and a dry pilot
TFP2300 for warnings pertaining to actuator connected in series is used to
regulatory and health information.

Page 1 of 20 MAY 2020 TFP1461

TFP1461
Page 2 of 20

Nominal Valve Size ANSI Inch (DN)

Item Description Qty. 1 1/2 (DN40) 2 (DN50) 3 (DN80) 4 (DN100) 6 (DN150) 8 (DN200)
P/N P/N P/N P/N P/N P/N
1 Valve Body 1 N/R N/R N/R N/R N/R N/R
2 Diaphragm 1 545000020 545000020 545000030 545000040 545000060 545000080
3 Diaphragm Cover 1 N/R N/R N/R N/R N/R N/R
4 Hex Bolt, Short 2a 545100001 545100001 545100002 545100003 545100004 545100003
5 Hex Bolt, Long 2 545100011 545100011 545100012 545100013 545100014 545100015
6 Lift Washer 2b N/A N/A 545100021 545100022 545100023 545100022
7 Hex Nut 2 545100031 545100031 545100032 545100033 545100034 545100033
8 Hoist Ring 2 545100041 545100041 545100041 545100041 545100041 545100041
9 Flat Washer 2 N/A N/A 545100024 545100025 545100026 545100025
NOTES c. N/R = Not Replaceable
a. Hex Bolt, Short, Qty. 6 in 6 and 8 inch (DN150 and DN200) assemblies d. Order replacements parts only via Part Numbers given, do not replace Hex Bolt, Hex
b. Lift Washer not used in 1 1/2 and 2 inch (DN40 and DN50) assemblies Nut, Lift Washer or Hoist Ring with common hardware parts

1
1
3
2
7 5
5 3 1-1/2 AND 2 INCH
9 VALVES ONLY
6

3
7 1
4
8

6
4
9 7 5
6 AND 8 INCH
1 2
VALVES ONLY
FIGURE 1
DV-5 a VALVE ASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT PARTS

Flange Drilling Specification Dim. A

Nominal Bolt Circle
Valve Nominal Dimensions in Inches and (mm) Diameter
Size
ANSI ANSI B16.1a ISO 7005-2 JIS B 2210 AS 2129 Dim. B
Inches (Class 125) (PN16)b (10K) (Table E)
(DN) Bolt Hole
Diameter
A B N A B N A B N A B N

3 6.00 0.75 6.30 0.75 5.90 0.59 5.75 0.71 Qty. N

4 (160,0) 8 (150,0) 8 (146,0) 4 Number of
(80) (152,4) (19,0) (19,0) (15,0) (18,0)
Bolt Holes
4 7.50 0.75 7.09 0.75 6.89 0.60 7.00 0.71
8 (180,0) 8 (175,0) 8 178,0) 8
(100) (190,5) (19,0) (19,0) (15,0) (18,0) NOTES:
a. Same drilling as for
6 9.50 0.88 9.45 0.91 9.45 0.75 9.25 0.87 ANSI B16.5 (Class 150) and
8 (240,0) 8 (240,0) 8 8
(150) (241,3) (22,2) (23,0) (19,0) (235) (22,0) ANSI B16.42 (Class 150)
b. Same drilling as for
8 11.75 0.88 11.61 0.91 12 11.42 0.75 12 11.50 0.87 BS 4504 Section 3.2 (PN16) and
8 (295,0) 8 DIN 2532 (PN16)
(200) (298,5) (22,2) (23,0) (290,0) (19,0) (292,0) (22,0)

TABLE A
FLANGE DRILLING SPECIFICATIONS
 TFP1461
Page 3 of 20

Port Sizes, NPT Inch per ANSI B1.20.1

Port Port Description 1 1/2 2 3 4 6 8
(DN40) (DN50) (DN80) (DN100) (DN150) (DN200)
P1 Diaphragm Chamber Supply 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
P2 Water Supply Pressure & Alarm Test 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
P3 Alarm Actuation 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
P4 Automatic Drain Valve 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
P5 System Drain 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
P6 Main Drain 3/4 3/4 1-1/4 2 2 2
P7 System Air Supply 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
SYSTEM OPEN TO ATMOSPHERE WATERFLOW TO SYSTEM

VALVE SYSTEM
WATERWAY AIR
DIAPHRAGM SUPPLY
SEAT
VALVE
WATERWAY ALARM PORT
DIAPHRAGM WATERFLOW
CHAMBER TO ALARM
DIAPHRAGM
CHAMBER
OPEN TO
AUTOMATIC ATMOSPHERE
DRAIN VALVE AUTOMATIC
OPEN TO DRAIN VALVE
DIAPHRAGM
DIAPHRAGM ATMOSPHERE CLOSED
RETRACTS
CHAMBER
OPENING
SUPPLY
VALVE
FROM
WATERWAY
UPSTREAM WATER SUPPLY
SIDE OF PRESSURE &
SHUT-OFF ALARM TEST
VALVE
WATER SUPPLY WATERFLOW FROM WATER SUPPLY
FIGURE 2A FIGURE 2B
SET CONDITION OPERATED CONDITION

DRAIN FROM SYSTEM RESIDUAL DRAIN FROM SYSTEM

VALVE
WATERWAY
DIAPHRAGM
SEAT

VALVE DIAPHRAGM
WATERWAY AUTOMATICALLY
SYSTEM FLEXES TO SYSTEM
DRAIN ITS SEATED DRAIN
DIAPHRAGM OPEN OPEN
CHAMBER POSTION
OPEN TO
ATMOSPHERE

DIAPHRAGM
CHAMBER
SUPPLY
FROM
UPSTREAM
MAIN SIDE OF MAIN
DRAIN SHUT-OFF DRAIN
OPEN VALVE CLOSED
WATER SUPPLY SHUT OFF WATER SUPPLY SHUT OFF
FIGURE 2C FIGURE 2D
SYSTEM DRAIN CONDITION RESIDUAL DRAIN CONDITION
FIGURE 2
DV-5 a VALVE OPERATION, PREACTION SYSTEMS
TFP1461
Page 4 of 20

DIMENSIONS SHOWN NOTICE External trim connections are NPT

ARE APPLICABLE TO threaded. EMEA trim is provided with
The DV-5 a Valves described herein
ALL END CONNECTION NPT x ISO 7-1 thread adapters.
must be installed and maintained in
CONFIGURATIONS compliance with this document, as Pressure Loss
AVAILABLE PER well as with the applicable standards Refer to Graph A
VALVE SIZE of the NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION Actuation Options
ASSOCIATION (NFPA), in addition to Refer to subsections for Electric/Elec-
the standards of any other authorities tric Actuation or Electric/Pneumatic
10-3/16" having jurisdiction. Failure to do so Actuation.
(260 mm) may impair the performance of these
devices.
The owner is responsible for main-
Materials of
1-1/2 Inch (DN40) taining their fire protection system
and devices in proper operating con-
Construction
dition. Contact the installing contrac- Valve Body
tor or product manufacturer with any Epoxy coated ductile iron per ASTM
questions. A536-77, Grade 65-45-12
10-3/16"
(260 mm)
Technical Diaphragm Cover
Epoxy coated ductile iron per ASTM

Data A536-77, Grade 65-45-12

Diaphragm
2 Inch (DN50)
Approvals Polyester fabric reinforced, TEFLON
UL/C-UL Listed coated, EPDM rubber per ASTM D2000
FM Approved Diaphragm Cover Fasteners
Listings and Approvals are based on Aluminum zinc coated steel
13-3/4" DV-5a being trimmed as described in
Common Hardware Trim
(349 mm) this technical data sheet.
• Common hardware pipe fittings are
DV-5A Valve galvanized or black as required and
Components for the 1 1/2 thru 8 Inch are malleable per ASME B16.3.
3 Inch (DN80)
(DN40 thru DN200) DV-5a Valves are • Common hardware pipe nipples are
shown in Figure 1. The DV-5a Valves galvanized or black as required and
are for vertical installations. They are are Schedule 40 per ASTM A53 or
rated for use at a service pressures of A135.
20 to 300 psi (1,4 to 20,7 bar).
• Common hardware compression
The take-out dimensions are shown fitting are brass per ASTM B16
16-3/4" in Figure 3, and flanged connec-
(425 mm) tions are available drilled per ANSI, • Common hardware tubing is Type L
ISO, AS, and JIS specifications (See per ASTM B88
Table A). Threaded inlet and outlet con-
nections are available in NPT or ISO
4 Inch (DN100) 7-1. Threaded port connections are
NPT threaded.
NOTE: PN16 flanges are pressure rated
to 16 bar.
Valve Trim
22-3/8" The maximum pressure rating for the
(569 mm) Electric Pneumatic Double Interlock
Preaction Trim is the lesser of 250 psi
(17,2 bar) or the separately ordered
solenoid valve per Technical Data
6 Inch (DN150) Sheet TFP2180
When the system pressure is greater
than 175 psi (12,1 bar), provision is to be
made to replace the standard order 300
psi (20,7 bar) Water Pressure Gauges
with separately ordered 600 psi (41,4
27-7/16" bar) Water Pressure Gauges.
(697 mm) If the addition of an Alarm Control Valve
is desired or required by the local AHJ,
the Alarm Control Valve noted as Item
H in Figure 8 is to be a separately
8 Inch (DN200) ordered electronically supervised nor-
FIGURE 3 mally open valve.
DV-5 a DELUGE VALVE
TAKE-OUT DIMENSIONS
 TFP1461
Page 5 of 20

FLOW RATE IN LITERS PER MINUTE (LPM)

(1 GPM = 3,785 LPM)
200 400 600 1000 2000 3000 5000 7000 10000 15000
9.0 0,600
8.0
7.0 0,500
NOMINAL PRESSURE DROP IN POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH (PSI)

6.0 0,400
5.0
0,300
)
40

4.0
DN
H(

NOMINAL PRESSURE DROP IN BAR

INC

)
3.0 50
0,200
DN
/2
1-1

H(

(1 PSI = 0,06895 BAR)

)
80
NC

DN
2I

2.0
H(

0)
NC

10
DN
3I

0,100
H(

0)
NC 0,090

15
0,080

DN
4I

H(

0)
1.0 0,070

20
NC
0.9

DN
0,060
0.8 6I

H(
0,050

NC
0.7

8I
0.6 0,040
0.5
0,030
0.4

0,022
0.3
50 100 200 400 600 1000 2000 3000 4000
FLOW RATE IN GALLONS PER MINUTE (GPM)
GRAPH A
DV-5 a VALVE
NOMINAL PRESSURE LOSS VERSUS FLOW

Operation MRA-1 results in a rapid pressure drop

in the DV-5a Diaphragm Chamber. The
The TYCO DV-5a Valve is a diaphragm force differential applied through the
style valve that depends upon water Diaphragm to hold the Diaphragm in
pressure in the Diaphragm Chamber the set position is then reduced below
(see Figure 2A) to hold the Diaphragm the valve trip point. The water supply
closed against the water supply pressure then forces the Diaphragm
pressure. open permitting water to flow into
the system piping, as well as through
When the DV-5a Valve is set for service, the Alarm Port to actuate the system
the Diaphragm Chamber is pressurized alarms (see Figure 2B).
through the trim connections from the
inlet side of the system’s main control Upon opening of the DV-5a Valve, the
valve. Model MRA-1 Manual Reset Actua-
tor opens to constantly vent the DV-5a
Opening of a solenoid valve for Elec- Diaphragm Chamber to "hydraulically
tric/Pneumatic Actuation (see Figure latch" the DV-5a in the tripped position
4) trips the Model MRA-1 Manual until manually reset.
Reset Actuator. Tripping the MRA-1
releases water from the DV-5a Dia- See the Electric/Pneumatic section for
phragm Chamber faster than it additional information.
can be replenished through the
1/8 in. (3,2 mm) restriction located in
the diaphragm chamber supply con-
nection. Release of water through the
TFP1461
Page 6 of 20

SYSTEM PIPING WITH AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS - NORMALLY DRY

MANUAL ELECTRIC ELECTRIC DETECTION SYSTEM SOLENOID

PULL STATION (TYPICALLY 24 VOLTS DC) VALVE
(AS REQUIRED) HEAT DETECTORS, SMOKE DETECTORS, (TYPICALLY
MANUAL PULL STATIONS, ETC. DRY PILOT
24 VOLTS DC)
ACTUATOR

DELUGE VALVE
RELEASING PANEL SYSTEM
(AUTOMATIC DRAIN
SHUT-OFF VALVE
CONTROL UNIT (NORMALLY OPEN)
WITH BATTERY
BACK-UP) WATERFLOW SYSTEM DRAIN VALVE
DV-5A (NORMALLY CLOSED)
PRESSURE VALVE
ALARM
POWER AUTOMATIC SWITCH MAIN
SUPPLY AIR/NITROGEN DRAIN VALVE
(TYPICALLY SUPPLY (NORMALLY
(GRAPH A) DIAPHRAGM CHAMBER DRAIN
120 VOLTS AC) PRESSURE GAUGE CLOSED)

SUPERVISORY
LOCAL
LOW PRESSURE RESTRICTION DRAIN MANUAL
ALARM SWITCH DRAIN CONTROL
MANUAL RESET WATER SUPPLY STATION DRAIN
ACTUATOR PRESSURE
GAUGE MAIN
DIAPHRAGM CONTROL VALVE
SYSTEM AIR CHAMBER SUPPLY (NORMALLY
PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE WATER SUPPLY SHUT-OFF DIAPHRAGM CHAMBER WATER OPEN)
GAUGE (NORMALLY OPEN) (NORMALLY OPEN) SUPPLY CONNECTION SUPPLY
FIGURE 4
DV-5 a VALVE - DOUBLE INTERLOCK PREACTION ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC ACTUATION
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

Electric/ System Shut-Off Valve should be a

listed or approved (as appropriate) indi-
NOTICE
The normally closed, de-energized
Pneumatic cating valve with a supervisory switch
to monitor the normally open position.
solenoid Valve is separately ordered
and selected based on the required
Actuation Detection System
The Double Interlock Preaction System
laboratory approval acceptable to the
authority having jurisdiction. Refer to
System Design Considerations With Electric/Pneumatic Actuation technical data Sheet TFP2180 for spe-
Because a double interlock preac- Trim provides for electric operation of cific laboratory approvals.
tion system requires time for a drop in the DV-5a Valve by a detection system
system air pressure to occur (concur- Consult with the authority having juris-
consisting of electrical devices such diction regarding installation criteria
rently with the response time for the as heat sensitive thermostats, smoke
separate fire detection system) before pertaining to electric actuation circuitry.
detectors, and/or electric manual pull
it will allow water to enter the system stations. Information on the various Due to the functionality of the Model
piping, this system has characteristics types of separately ordered Solenoid MRA-1 Manual Reset Actuator, the
similar to a dry pipe sprinkler system. Valves that may be used with this trim release circuit of the releasing panel
Therefore, the system design con- package is given in Technical Data need only provide the minimum typical
siderations for a dry pipe system are Sheet TFP2180. Nominal installation ten minutes of alarm condition intended
normally applied to a double interlock dimensions for the Double Interlock to energize the Solenoid Valve to
preaction system — including a 30% Preaction System With Electric/Pneu- open. After the ten minute duration, at
increase in design area; a maximum 1 matic Actuation Trim are shown in which point should the Solenoid Valve
minute water delivery time for system Figure 5. become de-energized and close (espe-
capacities of 500 gallons (1890 liters) cially while operating under battery
or more; and, prohibition of gridded The Deluge Valve Releasing Panel back-up), the MRA-1 will have already
system piping. (automatic control unit) with battery automatically opened, thereby prevent-
back-up, fire detection devices, manual ing the DV-5a Diaphragm Chamber
In order to readily perform the System pull stations, and signaling devices
Inspection Procedure described in from becoming re-pressurized, and
that are utilized with the Double Inter- preventing an inadvertent closing of
the Care and Maintenance section, lock Preaction System with Electric/
it is recommended that a System the DV-5a during a fire event.
Pneumatic Actuation must be UL
Shut-Off Valve be installed above the Listed, ULC Listed, C-UL Listed, or FM
DV-5a Valve, as shown in Figure 4. The Approved, as applicable.
 TFP1461
Page 7 of 20

45 Notes:
URE The dew point of the pilot line air pressure must be maintained
IR PRESS below the lowest ambient temperature to which the dry pilot
EM A
AIR PRESSURE IN PSI

YST actuation system will be exposed. Accumulation of water in the

UM S
30 MINIM pilot line connection to the Actuator will lower the air pressure
at which the actuator will open and possibly prevent proper
SURE
ING PRES operation. Also, introduction of moisture into the pilot lines
OPEN exposed to freezing temperatures can create an ice buildup
TOR
CTUA that could prevent proper operation of the Actuator.
15 E OF A
RANG An air dryer must be installed where the moisture content
of the air supply is not properly controlled at less than the
required value.
0 It is recommended that an AMD-3 Nitrogen Maintenance
Device be utilized in dry pilot actuation system applica-
20 60 100 140 180 200 250
tions where the dew point must be maintained below -20°F
(-29°C). Refer to Technical Data Sheet TFP1241.
WATER SUPPLY PRESSURE IN PSI
GRAPH B
DV-5 a VALVE DOUBLE INTERLOCK PREACTION SYSTEM
AIR PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS

WARNING • A maximum 3000 psi (206,9 bar)

nitrogen cylinder in combination with
If the delay between electric actua-
the Model AMD-3 Nitrogen Mainte-
tion and subsequent sprinkler activa-
nance Device described in Technical
tion is anticipated to be greater then
Data Sheet TFP1241
10 minutes, adjust the battery back-up
calculation accordingly. Inadequate
battery back-up may result in failure of NOTICE
the system to operate in the event of a The dew point of the air or nitrogen
fire during a power failure. supply, for a system exposed to freez-
ing conditions, must be maintained
System Air Pressure Requirements
below the lowest ambient tempera-
The required system air pressure for
ture to which the system piping will be
the Double Interlock Preaction System
exposed. Introduction of moisture into
with Electric/Pneumatic Actuation is
the system piping can create ice build
shown in Graph B as a function of the
up which could prevent proper opera-
anticipated water supply pressure. It is
tion of the system.
recommended that the system air pres-
sure be maintained by one of the fol- The Air Pressure Relief Valve is typi-
lowing methods: cally set to crack open at 5 psi (0,34
bar) greater than the required system
• A maximum 200 psi (13,8 bar) plant
air pressure provided in Graph B.
air supply in combination with the
Model AMD-1 Air Maintenance
Device described in Technical Data
Sheet TFP1221
• A dedicated air compressor in com-
bination with the Model AMD-2 Air
Maintenance Device described in
Technical Data Sheet TFP1231
TFP1461
Page 8 of 20

Installation Step 1. All nipples, fittings, and devices

must be clean and free of scale and
Step 10. A desiccant dryer, when spec-
ified, is to be installed between a drip
burrs before installation. Use pipe leg and the Air Maintenance Device.
The TYCO DV-5a Valve is to be installed
thread sealant sparingly on male pipe
in accordance with this section. Step 11. The Low Pressure Switch on
threads only. falling pressure in the Electric/Pneu-
NOTICE Step 2. The DV-5a Valve must be matic Actuation is to be adjusted so
trimmed in accordance with one of the that the low pressure alarm setting
DV-5A Automatic Water Control Valves trim illustrations shown in Figures 6 or is set at approximately 6 psi (0,4 bar)
are designed to be used in freshwater 7, as applicable. below the minimum system service
systems. When the supply is from an pressure requirement shown in Graph
alternative source such as brackish Note: If the addition of an Alarm Control
B.
water, saltwater, or contains additives Valve is desired or required by the local
such as foam, the limited warranty is AHJ, the Alarm Control Valve noted as Step 12. Unused Pressure Alarm
reduced to one year from the time of Item H in Figure 8 is to be a separately Switch connections must be plugged.
installation. An increase in frequency of ordered electronically supervised nor- Step 13. The Pressure Relief Valve on
inspections is required when the valve mally open valve. rising pressure is to be at 5 psi (0,34 bar)
is exposed to such supplies and other Step 3. Care must be taken to ensure higher than the required system air
corrosive conditions or chemicals that that check valves, strainers, globe pressure, or be reset in accordance
could impact valve materials or the valves, etc., are installed with the flow with the requirements of the authority
operation of the assembly. The system arrows in the proper direction. having jurisdiction.
and all components must be designed
accordingly for the increased demand. Step 4. Drain tubing to the Drip Funnel To reset the Pressure Relief Valve, first
It is required to thoroughly flush the must be installed with smooth bends loosen the jam nut and then adjust the
valve and trim assembly with freshwa- that will not restrict flow. cap accordingly, clockwise for a higher
ter and reset to the set condition after pressure setting or counter clockwise
Step 5. The Main Drain and Drip Funnel
each operation. for a lower pressure setting. After ver-
Drain may be interconnected provided
ifying the desired pressure setting,
Proper operation of the DV-5a Valves a check valve is located at least 12 in.
tighten the jam nut.
depends upon their trim being installed (300 mm) below the Drip Funnel.
in accordance with the instructions Step 14. Conduit and electrical con-
Step 6. Suitable provision must be
given in this technical data sheet. nections are to be made in accordance
made for disposal of drain water. Drain-
Failure to follow the appropriate trim with the applicable standards of the
age water must be directed such that
diagram may prevent the DV-5a Valve approval agency.
it will not cause accidental damage to
from functioning properly, as well as property or danger to persons. Step 15. Before a system hydrostatic
void approvals and the manufacturer’s test is performed, the DV-5a Diaphragm
warranties. Step 7. Connect the Diaphragm Supply
Chamber is to be depressurized, the
Valve to the inlet side of the System
The DV-5a Valve must be installed in a Automatic Drain Valve is to be tem-
Main Control Valve in order to facili-
readily visible and accessible location. porarily replaced with a plug, and the
tate setting of the DV-5a Valve (see
Diaphragm Cover Bolts must be uni-
The DV-5a Valve and associated trim Figure 8).
formly and securely tightened using
must be maintained at a minimum tem- Step 8. An Inspector’s Test Connection a cross-draw sequence. After tight-
perature of 40°F (4°C). is to be located on the sprinkler system ening, double-check to make certain
Heat tracing of the DV-5a Valve or its at the most hydraulically demanding that all of the Diaphragm Cover Bolts
associated trim is not permitted. Heat location. are securely tightened. See Table B in
tracing can result in the formation of Step 9. A suitable automatic air (nitro- the Care and Maintenance section for
hardened mineral deposits that are gen) supply, as described in the Elec- torque specifications.
capable of preventing proper operation. tric/Pneumatic Actuation sub-section,
Always open the system control valves is to be installed in accordance with
slowly to avoid a sudden rush of water the applicable technical data sheet.
entering the system. The minimum air pressure is to be
in accordance with the referenced
The DV-5a Valve is to be installed in sub-sections.
accordance with the following criteria:
 TFP1461
Page 9 of 20

A3

C5 L

D
C

F
P4 E C3
P7
A2
A
P5

C2 C4 P6
C7
H P3 A1
J A7
B
P1 C6
P2 M
G
A5
K
A4

A5 C1
Assemble in order
A6 from A to M
1-1/2" (DN40) AND 2" (DN50)
VALVES ONLY
A8

A10
A9

Notes:
1. Port Connections P1 through P7 are described in Figure 2.
2. External Trim Connections C1 through C5 are described in Figure 8.
3. When ordering pre-assembled "DV-5A Valve with Galvanized Trim" or pre-assembled "DV-5A Valve with Galvanized Trim and Butterfly Valve", Items A1
through A10 are provided, as applicably related to valve size, and Item A7 is provided as P/N 52-287-1-124 described in Technical Data Sheet TFP2180.
4. When ordering DV-5A Trim separately from the DV-5A Valve, Items A1 through A10 are separately ordered, as applicably related to valve size.
Water Pressure Gauges for EMEA valve trim are also separately ordered.

FIGURE 5
DV-5 a VALVES
DOUBLE INTERLOCK PREACTION ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC ACTUATION TRIM
SEMI-ASSEMBLED
TFP1461
Page 10 of 20

A3
59
39 22
1
C5 28
34
26 51 27 36
52 19 30
20 20 36
11
54 27 5 36
9
40 36
P4 41
P7 49 48
36
21 29 31
P5 A7 7
A2 57
46
C3
C4 15 36
14 4
C2
P6 56 21 24
32
55 NOTES
43 A1 33 42 17
P3 39 1. Port Connections P1 through
23 16 53 P7 are described in Figure 2.
32 P1 C7 29 2. External Trim Connections C1
P2 through C5 are described in
C6 Figure 8.
47 13 61 3 3. When ordering pre-assembled
20 50 A5 37 "DV-5A Valve with Galvanized
24 60 Trim" or pre-assembled "DV-
38 6 45
58 5A Valve with Galvanized Trim
31 A4 12 58 and Butterfly Valve", Items
35 37 19 A1 through A10 are provided,
25 2 as applicably related to valve
27 1 22 10 size, and Item A7 is provided
37 27 as P/N
8 44 52-287-1-124 described
20 18 in Technical Data Sheet
37
A5 TFP2180
C1 4. When ordering DV-5A Trim
8 separately from the DV-5A
A6 Valve, Items A1 through A10
A10 are separately ordered, as
A8 A9 applicably related to valve
size. Water Pressure Gauges
1-1/2" (DN40) AND 2" (DN50) for EMEA valve trim are also
VALVES ONLY separately ordered.
ITEM QTY. DESCRIPTION CH 1 1/2 IN. (DN40) 2 IN. (DN50) 3 IN. (DN80) 4 IN. (DN100) 6 IN. (DN150) 8 IN. (DN200)
1 2 1/4” GAUGE TEST VALVE 460051003 460051003 460051003 460051003 460051003 460051003
2 1 MRA-1 MANUAL RESET ACTUATOR 545001000 545001000 545001000 545001000 545001000 545001000
3 1 MC-2 MANUAL CONTROL STATION 545002000 545002000 545002000 545002000 545002000 545002000
4 1 AD-3 AUTOMATIC DRAIN VALVE 547932004 547932004 547932004 547932004 547932004 547932004
5 1 DP-1 DRY PILOT ACTUATOR 522801001 522801001 522801001 522801001 522801001 522801001
6 1 PRIMING SUPPLY RESTRICTION 545100051 545100051 545100051 545100051 545100051 545100051
7 1 1/4” PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE 923431020 923431020 923431020 923431020 923431020 923431020
8 2 1/2” BALL VALVE 460501004 460501004 460501004 460501004 460501004 460501004
9 1 1/2” GLOBE VALVE 460471005 460471005 460471005 460471005 460471005 460471005
10 1 1/2” SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVE 923221003 923221003 923221003 923221003 923221003 923221003
11 1 1/2” SWING CHECK VALVE 460491007 460491007 460491007 460491007 460491007 460491007
12 1 1/2” Y-STRAINER 523531006 523531006 523531006 523531006 523531006 523531006
13 1 3/4” ANGLE VALVE 460481010 460481010 460481010 460481010 460481010 460481010
14 1 ANGLE VALVE 460481010 460481010 460481011 460481012 460481012 460481012
15 1 DRIP FUNNEL BRACKET CONNECTOR 922111005 922111005 922111005 922111005 922111005 922111005
16 1 DRIP FUNNEL BRACKET 922111003 922111003 922111003 922111003 922111003 922111003
17 1 DRIP FUNNEL 923431007 923431007 923431007 923431007 923431007 923431007
18 1 COMP. FITTING 90° 1/2” MNPT x 1/2” OD TUBE 1001253-01 1001253-01 1001253-01 1001253-01 1001253-01 1001253-01
19 2 COMP. FITTING 90° 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” OD TUBE 1001420-01 1001420-01 1001420-01 1001420-01 1001420-01 1001420-01
20 4 FLARE FITTING 90° 1/2” NPT x 1/2” TUBE 545100062 545100062 545100062 545100062 545100062 545100062
21 2 FLARE FITTING 3/4” NPT x 3/4” TUBE 545100063 545100063 545100063 545100063 545100063 545100063
22 2 PIPE PLUG ✓ 1/4” 1/4” 1/4” 1/4” 1/4” 1/4”
23 1 PIPE PLUG ✓ 3/4” 3/4” 3/4” 3/4” 3/4” 3/4”
24 2 UNION ✓ 1/2” 1/2” 1/2” 1/2” 1/2” 1/2”

FIGURE 6 (1 OF 2)
DV-5 a VALVES
DOUBLE INTERLOCK PREACTION ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC ACTUATION TRIM
EXPLODED VIEW
 TFP1461
Page 11 of 20

ITEM QTY. DESCRIPTION CH 1 1/2 IN. (DN40) 2 IN. (DN50) 3 IN. (DN80) 4 IN. (DN100) 6 IN. (DN150) 8 IN. (DN200)
26 1 ELBOW ✓ 1/2” x 45° 1/2” x 45° 1/2” x 45° 1/2” x 45° 1/2” x 45° 1/2” x 45°
27 4 ELBOW ✓ 1/2” x 90° 1/2” x 90° 1/2” x 90° 1/2” x 90° 1/2” x 90° 1/2” x 90°
28 1 CROSS ✓ 1/2” 1/2” 1/2” 1/2” 1/2” 1/2”
29 2 TEE ✓ 1/2” 1/2” 1/2” 1/2” 1/2” 1/2”
30 1 REDUCING TEE ✓ 1/2” x 1/4” x 1/2” 1/2” x 1/4” x 1/2” 1/2” x 1/4” x 1/2” 1/2” x 1/4” x 1/2” 1/2” x 1/4” x 1/2” 1/2” x 1/4” x 1/2”
31 2 REDUCING TEE ✓ 1/2” x 1/2” x 1/4” 1/2” x 1/2” x 1/4” 1/2” x 1/2” x 1/4” 1/2” x 1/2” x 1/4” 1/2” x 1/2” x 1/4” 1/2” x 1/2” x 1/4”
32 2 REDUCING TEE ✓ 3/4” x 1/2” x 3/4” 3/4” x 1/2” x 3/4” 3/4” x 1/2” x 3/4” 3/4” x 1/2” x 3/4” 3/4” x 1/2” x 3/4” 3/4” x 1/2” x 3/4”
33 1 REDUCING TEE ✓ 3/4” x 3/4” x 3/4” 3/4” x 3/4” x 3/4” 1 1/4” x 1 1/4” x 3/4” 2” x 2” x 3/4” 2” x 2” x 3/4” 2” x 2” x 3/4”
34 1 PIPE NIPPLE ✓ 1/4” x CLOSE 1/4” x CLOSE 1/4” x CLOSE 1/4” x CLOSE 1/4” x CLOSE 1/4” x CLOSE
35 1 PIPE NIPPLE ✓ 1/4” x 1 1/2” 1/4” x 1 1/2” 1/4” x 1 1/2” 1/4” x 1 1/2” 1/4” x 1 1/2” 1/4” x 1 1/2”
36 6 PIPE NIPPLE ✓ 1/2” x CLOSE 1/2” x CLOSE 1/2” x CLOSE 1/2” x CLOSE 1/2” x CLOSE 1/2” x CLOSE
37 4 PIPE NIPPLE ✓ 1/2” x 1 1/2” 1/2” x 1 1/2” 1/2” x 1 1/2” 1/2” x 1 1/2” 1/2” x 1 1/2” 1/2” x 1 1/2”
38 1 PIPE NIPPLE ✓ 1/2” x 2” 1/2” x 2” 1/2” x 2” 1/2” x 2” 1/2” x 2” 1/2” x 2”
39 2 PIPE NIPPLE ✓ 1/2” x 2 1/2” 1/2” x 2 1/2” 1/2” x 2 1/2” 1/2” x 2 1/2” 1/2” x 2 1/2” 1/2” x 2 1/2”
40 1 PIPE NIPPLE ✓ 1/2” x 3” 1/2” x 3” 1/2” x 3” 1/2” x 3” 1/2” x 3” 1/2” x 3”
41 1 PIPE NIPPLE ✓ 1/2” x 5” 1/2” x 5” 1/2” x 5” 1/2” x 5” 1/2” x 5” 1/2” x 5”
42 1 PIPE NIPPLE ✓ 3/4” x 1 1/2” 3/4” x 1 1/2” 3/4” x 1 1/2” 3/4” x 1 1/2” 3/4” x 1 1/2” 3/4” x 1 1/2”
43 1 PIPE NIPPLE ✓ 3/4” x 4 1/2” 3/4” x 4 1/2” 3/4” x 4 1/2” 3/4” x 4 1/2” 3/4” x 4 1/2” 3/4” x 4 1/2”
44 1 TUBING, MRA-1 DRAIN 545100065 545100065 545100066 535002140 535002160 535002180
45 1 TUBING, MC-2 DRAIN 535000220 535000220 535000230 535000240 535000260 535000280
46 1 TUBING, DP-1 DRAIN 535001220 535001220 535001230 535001240 535001260 535001280
47 1 TUBING ASSY, ALARM TEST INTERCONNECT 535000320 535000320 535000330 535000340 535000360 535000380
48 1 TUBING ASSY, ACTUATION INTERCONNECT 535001320 535001320 535001330 535001340 535001360 535001380
49 1 TUBING ASSY, SYSTEM DRAIN 535000420 535000420 535000430 535000440 535000460 535000480
50 1 PIPE NIPPLE ✓ 1/2” x 3 1/2” 1/2” x 3 1/2” 1/2” x 4 1/2” 1/2” x 5 1/2” 1/2” x 5 1/2” 1/2” x 6 3/4”
51 1 PIPE NIPPLE ✓ 1/2” x 5” 1/2” x 5” 1/2” x 5 1/2” 1/2” x 5 1/2” 1/2” x 5 1/2” 1/2” x 6 1/2”
52 1 PIPE NIPPLE ✓ 1/2” x 5” 1/2” x 5” 1/2” x 4 1/2” 1/2” x 5” 1/2” x 7 1/2” 1/2” x 9 1/2”
53 1 PIPE NIPPLE ✓ 1/2” x 4 1/2” 1/2” x 4 1/2” 1/2” x 4 1/2” 1/2” x 4 1/2” 1/2” x 4 1/2” 1/2” x 4 1/2”
54 1 PIPE NIPPLE ✓ 1/2” x 8 1/2” 1/2” x 8 1/2” 1/2” x 8 1/2” 1/2” x 8 1/2” 1/2” x 8 1/2” 1/2” x 8 1/2”
55 1 PIPE NIPPLE ✓ 3/4” x 5” 3/4” x 5” 3/4” x 6” 3/4” x 7” 3/4” x 9” 3/4” x 11 1/2”
56 1 PIPE NIPPLE 3/4” x 4 1/2” 3/4” x 4 1/2” 1 1/4” x 3 1/4” 2” x 3” 2” x 3” 2” x 3”
57 1 PIPE NIPPLE 3/4” x 6 1/2” 3/4” x 6 1/2” 1 1/4” x 5 1/2” 2” x 5” 2” x 6” 2” x 8”
WATER PRESSURE GAUGE, 300 PSI / 2000 kPa
58 2 923431005 923431005 923431005 923431005 923431005 923431005
(AMER/APAC)
WATER PRESSURE GAUGE, 20 bar / 2000 kPa
58 2 025500013 025500013 025500013 025500013 025500013 025500013
(EMEA)
AIR PRESSURE GAUGE, 80 PSI / 550 kPa
59 1 923431012 923431012 923431012 923431012 923431012 923431012
RETARDED TO 250PSI / 1750 kPa
60 1 LABEL 545003005 545003005 545003005 545003005 545003005 545003005
61 1 LABEL WIRE — — — — — —
A1 1 DV-5A VALVE SEE ORDERING PROCEDURE, SEPARATE DV-5A VALVES WITHOUT TRIM, FOR PART NUMBERS
WATERFLOW PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH,
A2 1 25710 25710 25710 25710 25710 25710
PS10-2 (AMER/APAC)
WATERFLOW PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH,
A2 1 0260 0260 0260 0260 0260 0260
PS10-1 (EMEA)
LOW AIR PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH, PS40-2
A3 1 25730 25730 25730 25730 25730 25730
AMER/APAC)
LOW AIR PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH, PS40-1
A3 1 0262 0262 0262 0262 0262 0262
EMEA)
A4 1 BUTTERFLY VALVE, G x G 51024A 51021A — — — —
A4 1 BFV-300 BUTTERFLY VALVE, G x G — — 59300G030WS 59300G040WS 59300G060WS 59300G080WS
A5 2 FIGURE 577 RIGID GROOVED COUPLING 57715ACP 57720ACP — — — —
A5 1 FIGURE 577 RIGID GROOVED COUPLING — — 57730ACP 57740ACP 57760ACP 57780ACP
A6 1 GROOVE x THREADED OUTLET WELDED TEE 545004000 545004001 — — — —
SOLENOID VALVE NORMALLY CLOSED
A7 1 SEE TFP2180 SEE TFP2180 SEE TFP2180 SEE TFP2180 SEE TFP2180 SEE TFP2180
(SEPARATELY ORDERED)
A8 1 INVERTED FLARE SHUT-OFF VALVEa 545100100 545100100 545100099 545100100 545100100 545100100
A9 1 FLARE FITTING 90° 1/2” NPT x 1/2” TUBE 545100062 545100062 545100062 545100062 545100062 545100062
A10 1 TUBING ASSY, DIAPHRAGM CHAMBER SUPPLY 540000015 540000020 540000030 540000040 540000060 540000080

NOTES
a. Not VdS Approved
CH - Common Hardware - See Materials of Construction section for specifications.

FIGURE 6 (2 OF 2)
DV-5 a VALVES
DOUBLE INTERLOCK PREACTION ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC ACTUATION TRIM
EXPLODED VIEW
TFP1461
Page 12 of 20

Nominal
Valve Inches
Size (mm)
ANSI
Inches A B C D E F G H J
(DN)
1 1/2 2.8 9.7 10.4 15.7 16.8 7.3 10.2 8.0 1.2
(40) (71) (246) (264) (399) (427) (185) (259) (203) (31)
2 2.8 9.7 10.4 15.7 16.8 7.3 10.2 3.8 2.9
(50) (71) (246) (264) (399) (427) (185) (259) (97) (74)
3 3.0 11.4 12.0 16.3 18.6 5.8 13.8 3.9 3.6
(80) (76) (290) (305) (414) (472) (147) (351) (99) (91)
4 3.0 12.7 13.1 16.5 21.0 5.1 16.8 4.5 4.3
(100) (76) (323) (333) (419) (533) (129) (427) (114) (109)
6 4.5 14.0 15.0 18.4 24.8 3.4 22.4 5.9 5.7
(150) (114) (356) (381) (467) (630) (86) (569) (150) (145)
8 5.3 16.8 17.2 19.5 29.1 2.9 27.5 5.2 6.7
(200) (135) (427) (437) (495) (739) (74) (699) (132) (170)
NOTES
1. Dimensions based on drain valves being open.
2. Dimensions do not provide installation clearance.
J B C D

H F

FIGURE 7
DV-5 a VALVE
DOUBLE INTERLOCK PREACTION ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC ACTUATION TRIM
NOMINAL DIMENSIONS
 TFP1461
Page 13 of 20

Valve Setting Step 10. Operate (open) the Manual

Control Station (M) and then open
Step 16. Partially open the System
Main Control Valve (B). Slowly close the
Procedure the Diaphragm Supply Valve (P). After
unaerated water ceases to discharge
Main Drain Valve (D) as soon as water
discharges from the Main Drain Valve
from the Manual Control Station (M) (D). Observe the Automatic Drain Valve
Perform Steps 1 through 20 when ini-
drain tube, slowly close the operating (F) for leaks. If there are leaks, deter-
tially setting the TYCO DV-5a Valve,
lever by pushing it up. Do not close the mine/correct the cause of the leakage
after an operational test of the fire pro-
hinged cover at this time. problem before proceeding.
tection system, or after system opera-
tion due to a fire. See Figure 8. Step 11. After allowing water to flow out
of the Manual Reset Actuator (N) drain NOTICE
Step 1. Close the System Main Control
tube until aerated water ceases to dis- When the System Main Control Valve
Valve (B).
charge, reset the Manual Reset Actua- (B) is partially opened, the pressure on
Step 2. Close the Diaphragm Supply tor (N) by pressing the Reset Knob and the DV-5a Diaphragm Chamber may
Valve (P) and Air Supply Valve (R). hold until water stops flowing from its increase. This increase in pressure is
Step 3. Open the Main Drain Valve (D), drain tube and the pressure builds and normal, and if the pressure is greater
System Drain Valve (E), and all auxil- reaches approximately 15 psi (1,0 bar) than 300 psi (20,7 bar), the pressure
iary drains in the system. Close the on the Diaphragm Gauge (K). Pressure is to be relieved by partially and tem-
auxiliary drain valves and the System will then build up in the DV-5a Dia- porarily opening the Manual Control
Drain Valve (E) after water ceases to phragm Chamber. Station (M); however, do not allow
discharge. Leave the Main Drain Valve Step 12. Inspect the actuation device the pressure as indicated on the Dia-
(D) open. drain connections. Any leaks must be phragm Gauge (K) to drop below the
corrected before proceeding to the supply pressure shown on the Water
At this time make certain that the Supply Gauge (J), since this action may
Pressure Gauge Valves and the Alarm next step. Electric/Pneumatic Actua-
tion drain connection to be inspected result in tripping of the DV-5a Valve.
Control Valve (H), as applicable, are
open. are from the Manual Control Station Step 17. Close the hinged cover on the
(M) and Dry Pilot Actuator (W) shown Manual Control Station (M) and insert a
in Figure 4. new break rod in the small hole through
NOTICE the top of the enclosing box.
Step 13. Verify the ability for the DV-5a
Do not open the Inspector’s Test Con- Diaphragm to hold pressure as follows:
nection and auxiliary drains if reset- Step 18. Fully open the System Main
ting after a system test; otherwise, • With the diaphragm chamber pres- Control Valve (B).
system air pressure will be relieved surized per Step 11, temporarily Step 19. After setting a fire protec-
unnecessarily. close the Diaphragm Supply Valve tion system, notify the proper authori-
(P), and then observe the Diaphragm ties and advise those responsible for
Step 4. Depress the plunger of the Gauge (K) for a drop in pressure.
Automatic Drain Valve (F) to verify that monitoring proprietary and/or central
it is open. • If a drop in pressure is noted, the station alarms.
DV-5a Diaphragm is to be replaced
Step 5. Clean the Diaphragm Supply and/or any leaks must be corrected
Strainer (Q) by removing the clean- before proceeding to the next step.
out plug and strainer basket. The Dia-
phragm Supply Strainer (Q) may be • If the Diaphragm Gauge (K) indicates
flushed out by momentarily opening no drop in pressure, re-open the Dia-
the Diaphragm Supply Valve (P). phragm Supply Valve (P) and pro-
ceed to the next step.
Step 6. Inspect for and clear all ice
plugs where system piping has been Step 14. Open the Air Supply Valve
exposed to freezing conditions and (S) and allow the system to automati-
when there has been a flow of water cally re-establish its nominal system
into the system. air pressure. Observe the Automatic
Drain Valve (F) for leaks. If there are
Step 7. Replace all damaged or oper- leaks, determine/correct the cause of
ated sprinklers. Replacement sprinklers the leakage problem.
must be of the same type and tempera-
ture rating as those that operated. • Nominal system air pressure for Elec-
tric/Electric Actuation is typically 15
NOTICE psi (1,0 bar).
In order to prevent the possibility of a • Nominal system air pressure for
subsequent operation of an overheated Electric/Pneumatic Actuation is per
solder type sprinkler, any solder type Graph B.
sprinklers possibly exposed to a tem- Step 15. Open the System Shut-Off
perature greater than their maximum Valve (X), as will be the case when
rated ambient must also be replaced. resetting a system after performing an
Step 8. Service the air dryer, if appli- operational test.
cable, in accordance with the manu-
facturer’s instructions.
Step 9. De-energize the Solenoid Valve
(V) by resetting the electric detection
system in accordance with the manu-
facturer's instructions.
TFP1461
Page 14 of 20

Item Description Item Description External Trim Connections

A DV-5a Valve N Manual Reset Actuator C1 Diaphragm Supply Connection
B System Main Control Valve P Diaphragm Supply Valve C2 Water Motor Alarm Connection
C Waterflow Pressure Switch Q Diaphragm Supply Strainer C3 Air Supply Connection
D Main Drain Valve R Inverted Flare Shut-Off Valve C4 Waterflow Pressure Alarm Switch
E System Drain Valve S Air Supply Valve Connection
F Automatic Drain Valve T Air Pressure Relief Valve C5 Low Air Pressure Switch
G Alarm Test Valve U Low Air Pressure Alarm Switch Connection
H Alarm Control Valve (Optional) V Solenoid Valve C6 Main Drain Connection
J Water Supply Gauge W Dry Pilot Actuator C7 Drip Funnel Drain Connection
K Diaphragm Gauge X System Shut-Off Valve
L System Gauge (Shown in Figure 5)
M Manual Control Station

L
U
LOCATION
FOR OPTIONAL
ELECTRICALLY C5
SUPERVISED
N.O. ALARM
CONTROL
VALVE S
C
X P4
P7 W
F
P5 T
C2
C4 C3
V
D
P6

H A
P3

P1 C7 M
P2 C6
E

J K
B

Q
G
P
C1
R

Notes:
• Port Connections P1 through P7 are described in Figure 2.

FIGURE 8
DV-5 a DOUBLE INTERLOCK PREACTION VALVE ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC ACTUATION
(Refer to Figures 6 for specific Bills of Materials)
 TFP1461
Page 15 of 20

Care and It is recommended that the System

Inspection Procedure be performed
Step 1. Prior to the water supply pres-
sure being restored to the closed
Maintenance at least semi-annually by a qualified
Inspection Service. The Double Inter-
System Main Control Valve (B), note the
pressure indicated by the Diaphragm
lock Preaction System Inspection Gauge (K) and determine if the pres-
The following procedures and inspec-
Procedure may be followed in lieu of sure is within the normally expected
tions must be performed as indicated,
performing any of the operational tests range.
in addition to any specific require-
ments of the NFPA and any applicable recommended in the Technical Data Step 2. If the diaphragm chamber pres-
standards recognized by the Approval Sheets for the 24 VDC Solenoid Valve, sure is below the normal range, check
agency. Any impairment must be imme- Dry Pilot Actuator, and Model MC-1 for and correct any source of leakage
diately corrected. See Figure 8. Manual Control Station. from the diaphragm chamber prior to
It is recommended that the individuals resetting the system.
NOTICE responsible for the care and mainte- Step 3. After the water supply pres-
If the water supply needs to be shut off nance of the Double Interlock Preaction sure is restored to the System Main
to the DV-5a valve and trim and cannot System develop a working understand- Control Valve (B), reset the DV-5a Valve
be shut off upstream of the system, ing of the system, in general, prior to in accordance with the Valve Setting
close the System Main Control Valve performing inspection and/or mainte- Procedure section.
(B), the Diaphragm Supply Valve (P), nance procedures. These instructions,
and the Water Supply Shut-Off Valve as well as individual instructions for NOTICE
the solenoid valve, dry pilot actuator,
(R). This will allow any trim above the For fire protection systems subject to
manual control station, switches, and
System Main Control Valve (B) to be an emergency impairment caused by
pressure maintenance device should
taken apart for service if necessary. be reviewed. an interrupted water supply condition,
The frequency at which the following it is recommended that consideration
The following procedures pertain to be given to installing a low water supply
procedures and inspections are to be the automatic control valve portion of
performed are to be in accordance with pressure switch with the appropriate
the Double Interlock Preaction System. alarm/indications to monitor the water
the NFPA and any applicable specific Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions
requirements of the standards recog- supply pressure.
and NFPA 25 for care and maintenance
nized by the Approval agency. procedures for all other devices (e.g., Waterflow Alarm Test Procedure
Before closing a fire protection system electric detection, main control and To test the waterflow alarm, open the
main control valve for maintenance system shut-off valves, supervisory Alarm Test Valve (G), which will allow a
work on the fire protection system that devices, sprinklers, etc.). flow of water to the Waterflow Pressure
it controls, permission to shut down Switch (C) and/or Water Motor Alarm.
Before performing the System Inspec- Upon satisfactory completion of the
the affected fire protection systems tion Procedure or Waterflow Alarm
must first be obtained from the proper test, close the Alarm Test Valve (G).
Test Procedure, which will result in
authorities and all personnel who may operation of alarms, notify the proper To ensure drainage of the alarm line,
be affected by this action must be authorities and all personnel who may depress the plunger on the Automatic
notified. be affected. Drain Valve (F).
The owner is responsible for the
Drop in Water Supply Pressure
inspection, testing, and maintenance
of their fire protection system and Below Normal Range
devices in compliance with this docu- NOTICE
ment, as well as with the NFPA and any
applicable standards recognized by the If the water supply pressure is signif-
Approval agency. Contact the install- icantly reduced below the normally
ing contractor or product manufacturer expected static pressure range (as
with any questions. could occur in the case of a water main
break or repair), and there is a subse-
Some procedures in this section result quent drop in the diaphragm chamber
in the operation of the associated water pressure below its normal range
alarms. Notify the owner and the fire (for example, due to a leak in a piping
department, central station, or other connection to or from the diaphragm
signal station to which the alarms are chamber or, a leak in the diaphragm
connected before performing the tests. chamber check valve caused by dirt or
It is recommended that automatic debris in the check valve seal area), a
sprinkler systems be inspected, tested, deluge valve such as the DV-5a could
and maintained by a qualified Inspec- inadvertently trip, if its water supply
tion Service in accordance with the pressure is quickly restored.
NFPA and any applicable standards A drop in the water supply pressure
recognized by the Approval agency. to below its normal range (as in the
case of an interrupted water supply
condition) constitutes an emergency
impairment.
Should this condition occur, immedi-
ately close the System Main Control
Valve (B) and use the following proce-
dure to reset the system:
TFP1461
Page 16 of 20

Electric/Pneumatic Actuation Step 5. Close the System Shut-Off Step 11. Open (energize) the Solenoid
System Operation Procedure Valve (X) after the system air pressure Valve by operating the Releasing Panel
Proper operation of the DV-5a Valve for has been restored to normal. and verify the following:
both opening of the DV-5a Valve in a Step 6. Manually restore the electric • That the DV-5a Valve operates as is
fire condition, or not opening the DV-5a fire detection system to a normal con- indicated by a discharge of water
Valve in a non-fire condition, must be dition in accordance with the manu- from the System Drain Valve (E) and
verified as follows: facturer’s instructions. The Solenoid the Automatic Drain Valve (F). The
Step 1. Close the System Main Control Valve (V) will then be de-energized and Automatic Drain Valve (F) may or may
Valve (B) and then open the Main Drain returned to its normally closed position. not close depending on the flow past
Valve (D). Step 7. Open the System Main Control the partially open System Main Con-
Valve (B) one turn beyond the position trol Valve (B)
Step 2. Manually operate the Releasing
Panel and verify the following: at which water just begins to flow from • That the Model MRA-1 Manual Reset
the Main Drain Valve (D). Actuator (N) has operated as is indi-
• The operation of the Releasing Panel
Step 8. Close the Main Drain Valve (D). cated by water discharging into the
and its associated alarms
Drip Funnel from the 1/2 in. drain
• That there is no leakage from the Dry Step 9. Close the Air Supply Valve (S). tube connected to the Model MRA-1
Pilot Actuator (W) Step 10. Open the Dry Pilot Actuator Manual Reset Actuator (N)
(W) by partially opening the System • That the Waterflow Pressure Switch
NOTICE Drain Valve (E) to relieve air pressure at (C) and its associated alarms prop-
During this procedure, the Solenoid the inlet to the Dry Pilot Actuator (W). erly operate
Valve (V) is opened; however, the Verify that there is no leakage from the
Dry Pilot Actuator (W) should remain Dry Pilot Actuator (W). • That the Water Motor Alarm, if appli-
closed and the DV-5a Valve Diaphragm cable, properly operates
Chamber should remain pressurized. NOTICE
NOTICE
This procedure is used to verify that the During this procedure, the Dry Pilot
DV-5a Valve will remain set if the elec- Actuator (W) is opened; however, This procedure simulates opening of
tric detection system operates but the the Solenoid Valve (V) should remain both the Dry Pilot Actuator (W) (loss
sprinkler system remains in its normally closed and the DV-5a Valve Diaphragm of system air pressure) and Solenoid
pressurized condition. Chamber should remain pressurized. Valve (V) (operation of the Valve Releas-
ing Panel) to verify automatic system
Step 3. Open the Inspector’s Test This procedure is used to verify that the operation.
Connection but be prepared to close DV-5a Valve will remain set if the Dry
it immediately after verifying that the Pilot Actuator (W) operates due to loss Step 12. Reset the Double Interlock
Low Air Pressure Alarm Switch (U) and of system air pressure and the electric Preaction System in accordance with
its associated alarms operate properly. detection system remains in a normal the Valve Setting Procedure section.
The Low Air Pressure Alarm Switch condition.
(U) should operate at the previously
established pressure (see Installation
section, Step 9).
Step 4. Close the Inspector’s Test
Connection.
 TFP1461
Page 17 of 20

Step 3. Loosen the union securing the Step 7. Replace the Copper Tube
Torque Electric/Pneumatic Actuation Trim and Fitting between the Diaphragm Supply
Nominal lb-ft remove the Electric/Pneumatic Actua- Valve (P) and the Inverted Flare Shut-
Valve Sizes (N∙m)
ANSI
tion Trim. Off Valve (R).
Inches Short Step 4. Loosen and remove the union Step 8. Ensure that the unions and flare
(DN) Nuts Hex
Bolts between the Diaphragm Cover and the fittings are securely tightened.
MRA-1 Manual Reset Actuator (N) and Step 9. With the Diaphragm Supply
1 1/2 44 35 remove the MRA-1 Manual Reset Actu- Valve (P) closed, fully open the Inverted
(40) (59,7) (47,5) ator (N) subassembly. Flare Shut-Off Valve (R) stainless steel
2 44 35 Step 5. Remove the Diaphragm Valve screw (approximately 1/2 in.) until resis-
(50) (59,7) (47,5) Cover hardware, then slowly remove tance is met so as not to break the
3 188 150 the Diaphragm Cover and perform internal roll-pin. The internal roll-pin
(80) (254,9) (203,4) internal valve inspection. Clean the stops the removal of the Inverted Flare
valve interior and replace parts as Shut-Off Valve (R) stainless steel screw.
4 396 316 necessary.
(100) (536,9) (428,4) Step 10. Proceed with Step 5 of the
After cleaning and inspecting valve Valve Setting Procedures section in this
6 265 212 interior, and replacing parts as nec- data sheet.
(150) (359,3) (287,4)
essary, reinstall the Diaphragm Cover
8 545 436 by completing the following steps to NOTICE
(200) (738,9) (591,1) assure the Diaphragm Cover Fasteners
are uniformly and securely tightened. If the water supply contains chemicals
TABLE B which tend to attack a polyester fabric-
DIAPHRAGM COVER BOLTS Step 1. With reference to Figure 1, reinforced, EPDM rubber or the five year
MINIMUM TORQUE ensure that the Diaphragm is properly inspection indicates a build-up of debris
oriented and that the proper hardware within the DV-5a Valve that could affect
Internal Valve Inspection arrangement is utilized when assem- its proper operation, then the frequency
Once every five years during the annual bling the Diaphragm Covers. The hard- of the internal valve inspection procedure
operational test procedure and prior ware arrangements differ depending on must be appropriately increased.
to the DV-5a Valve being reset and the size of the DV-5a Valve.
with the DV-5a Valve de-pressurized, With reference to Figure 1, make
Step 2. By first using the Long Hex certain that the Diaphragm is correctly
the interior of the DV-5a Valve must Bolts, support of the Diaphragm Cover
be cleaned and inspected for wear oriented; otherwise, the DV-5a Valve
will be provided before installing the cannot be properly set.
and damage. Damaged or worn parts Short Hex Bolts. Align Diaphragm in
must be replaced. (Replacement of the proper orientation with Valve Body, and Under-tightening the Diaphragm Cover
Diaphragm every ten years is recom- then align Diaphragm Cover in proper Bolts can result in internal and external
mended, or more frequently if inspec- orientation with Valve Body. Hand- leakage.
tions and/or wear and tear warrant tighten all fasteners.
more frequent replacement.) Use only TYCO replacement fasteners
Step 3. Using crossdraw sequence as specified in Figure 1.
NOTICE to assure uniformity, wrench-tighten Do not apply adhesives, lubricants, or
Long Hex Bolts and Short Hex Bolts other substances to the Diaphragm
The Diaphragm Cover may be removed to appropriate torque values. Repeat Valve Body.
between Steps 4 and 5 of the reset- crossdraw sequence two to three
ting instructions, since at that point the times at incremental torque valves
DV-5a Valve should be de-pressurized until reaching the torque valves found
as evident by a zero gauge reading on in Table B.
the Diaphragm Gauge (K) and Water
Supply Gauge (J), as well as no water Step 4. Inspect to assure all Hex Bolts
discharging from the Automatic Drain are securely tightened.
Valve (F). Step 5. Using the union, secure the
To perform internal valve inspection MRA-1 Manual Reset Actuator (N) to
between Steps 4 and 5 of the Valve the Diaphragm Cover.
Setting Procedure remove the Dia- Step 6. Using the union, secure the
phragm cover as follows: Electric/Pneumatic Actuation Trim.
Step 1. Close the Inverted Flare Shut-
Off Valve (R).
Step 2. Remove the Copper Tube
Fitting between the Diaphragm Supply
Valve (P) and the Inverted Flare Shut-
Off Valve (R).
TFP1461
Page 18 of 20

Limited Note: Pressure switches, P/N 52-287-1-124

solenoid valve, and psi/kPa water pressure
gauges are provided.
EMEA
DV-5A Valves with Galvanized Trim
Warranty Separate DV-5A Valves without Trim
Specify: Size (specify), DV-5 a Auto-
matic Water Control Valve, (specify)
For warranty terms and conditions, visit See Table A for flange drilling end connection with assembled galva-
www.tyco-fire.com. specifications. nized EMEA, Double Interlock Preac-
Specify: Size (specify), DV-5 a Auto- tion Electric/Pneumatic Actuation Trim,
Ordering matic Water Control Valve, (specify)
end connection, P/N (specify):
P/N (specify):

Procedure
Grooved x Grooved
Groove x Groove 1 1/2 in. (DN40) ����������������������������������� 550111415
1 1/2 in. (DN40) ���������������������������������� 530010015 2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550111420
The TYCO DV-5a Automatic Water 2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530010020 3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550111430
Control Valves may be ordered as 3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530010030 4 in. (DN100) ��������������������������������������� 550111440
4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530010040 6 in. (DN150) ��������������������������������������� 550111460
follows: 8 in. (DN200) ��������������������������������������� 550111480
6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530010060
Pre-Assembled Valves 8 in. (DN200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530010080 Flange x Flange ANSI
3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550121430
with Trim Flange x Flange ANSI
3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530020030 4 in. (DN100) ���������������������������������������550121440
DV-5A Valves with Galvanized Trim 4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530020040 6 in. (DN150) ���������������������������������������550121460
6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530020060 8 in. (DN200) ���������������������������������������550121480
and Butterfly Valve
8 in. (DN200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530020080 Flange x Grooved ANSI
Specify: Size (specify), DV-5 a Auto-
matic Water Control Valve, G x G Flange x Groove ANSI 3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550131430
3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530030030 4 in. (DN100) ���������������������������������������550131440
connections with assembled galva- 6 in. (DN150) ���������������������������������������550131460
4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530030040
nized Americas Double Interlock Pre- 6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530030060 8 in. (DN200) ���������������������������������������550131480
action Electric/Pneumatic Actuation 8 in. (DN200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530020080 Flange x Flange ISO
Trim, complete with assembled Model 3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550141430
T x T NPT
BFV-300 Butterfly Valve, P/N (specify): 1 1/2 in. (DN40) ���������������������������������� 530060015 4 in. (DN100) ���������������������������������������550141440
1 1/2 in. (DN40) ����������������������������������� 551011415 2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530060020 6 in. (DN150) ���������������������������������������550141460
2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551011420 8 in. (DN200) ���������������������������������������550141480
Notes:
3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551011430 Valves are typically provided with flange Flange x Grooved ISO
4 in. (DN100) ��������������������������������������� 551011440 drilling per ANSI B16.1 (Class 125) or ISO 3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550151430
6 in. (DN150) ��������������������������������������� 551011460 (7005-2 PN16). 4 in. (DN100) ���������������������������������������550151440
8 in. (DN200) ��������������������������������������� 551011480 6 in. (DN150) ���������������������������������������550151460
Upon request, valves can be provided with 8 in. (DN200) ���������������������������������������550151480
Notes: flange drilling per JIS B 2210 or AS 2129. In
Americas pressure switches, P/N 52-287-1- which case part numbers are not assigned. T x T ISO
124 Solenoid Valve, and psi/kPa water pres- 1 1/2 in. (DN40) ����������������������������������� 550171415
sure gauges are provided. DV-5A Valve Trim 2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550171420
This arrangement is available for EMEA Specify: Size (specify), finish (specify), Note: Pressure switches, P/N 52-287-1-
and APAC upon request. Contact your Electric/Pneumatic Actuation Trim for 124 solenoid valve, bar/psi water pressure
local distributor. DV-5a Automatic Water Control Valves gauges, and NPT to ISO threaded trim adap-
used in Double Interlock Preaction Fire tors for external connections are provided.
AMERICAS Protection System, P/N (specify): Separate DV-5A Valves without Trim
DV-5A Valves with Galvanized Trim Galvanized See Table A for flange drilling
1 1/2 in. (DN40) ���������������������������������� 540001420 specifications.
Specify: Size (specify), DV-5 a Auto- 2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540001420
matic Water Control Valve, (specify) 3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540001430 Specify: Size (specify), DV-5 a Auto-
end connection with assembled gal- 4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540001440 matic Water Control Valve, (specify)
vanized Americas, Double Interlock 6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540001460 end connection, P/N (specify):
Preaction Electric/Pneumatic Actua- 8 in. (DN200) �������������������������������������� 540001480
Groove x Groove
tion Trim, P/N (specify): Black 1 1/2 in. (DN40) ���������������������������������� 530010015
1 1/2 in. (DN40) ���������������������������������� 542001420 2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530010020
Grooved x Grooved 2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542001420
1 1/2 in. (DN40) ����������������������������������� 550011415 3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530010030
3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542001430 4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530010040
2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550011420 4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542001440
3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550011430 6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530010060
6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542001460 8 in. (DN200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530010080
4 in. (DN100) ���������������������������������������550011440 8 in. (DN200) �������������������������������������� 542001480
6 in. (DN150) ���������������������������������������550011460 Flange x Flange ANSI
8 in. (DN200) ���������������������������������������550011480 Note: Pressure switches and/or solenoid 3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530020030
Flange x Flange ANSI valves for electric actuation are separately 4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530020040
3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550021430 ordered. 6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530020060
4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550021440 8 in. (DN200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530020080
6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550021460 Flange x Groove ANSI
8 in. (DN200) �������������������������������������� 550021480 3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530030030
Flange x Grooved ANSI 4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530030040
3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550031430 6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530030060
4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550031440 8 in. (DN200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530030080
6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550031460 T x T NPT
8 in. (DN200) �������������������������������������� 550031480 1 1/2 in. (DN40) ���������������������������������� 530060015
T x T NPT 2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530060020
1 1/2 in. (DN40) �����������������������������������550061415
2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550061420
 TFP1461
Page 19 of 20

Flange x Flange ISO Flange x Grooved ANSI Notes:

3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530040030 3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550031430 Valves are typically provided with flange
4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530040040 4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550031440 drilling per ANSI B16.1 (Class 125) or ISO
6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530040060 6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550031460 (7005-2 PN16).
8 in. (DN200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530040080 8 in. (DN200) �������������������������������������� 550031480
Upon request, valves can be provided with
Flange x Groove ISO T x T NPT flange drilling per JIS B 2210 or AS 2129. In
3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530050030 1 1/2 in. (DN40) �����������������������������������550061415 which case part numbers are not assigned.
4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530050040 2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550061420
6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530050060 DV-5A Valve Trim
Flange x Flange ISO
8 in. (DN200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530050080
3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550041430
Specify: Size (specify), finish (specify),
T x T ISO 4 in. (DN100) �������������������������������������� 550041440 Electric/Pneumatic Actuation Trim for
1 1/2 in. (DN40) ���������������������������������� 530070015 6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550041460 DV-5A Automatic Water Control Valves
2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530070020 8 in. (DN200) �������������������������������������� 550041480 used in Double Interlock Preaction Fire
Notes: Flange x Grooved ISO Protection System, P/N (specify):
Valves are typically provided with flange 3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550051430 Galvanized
drilling per ANSI B16.1 (Class 125) or ISO 4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550051440 1 1/2 in. (DN40) ���������������������������������� 540001420
(7005-2 PN16). 6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550051460 2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540001420
8 in. (DN200) �������������������������������������� 550051480 3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540001430
Upon request, valves can be provided with
flange drilling per JIS B 2210 or AS 2129. In Note: Pressure switches, P/N 52-287-1-124 4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540001440
which case part numbers are not assigned. solenoid valve, and psi/kPa water pressure 6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540001460
gauges are provided. 8 in. (DN200) �������������������������������������� 540001480
DV-5A Valve Trim Black
Specify: Size (specify), finish (specify), Separate DV-5A Valves without Trim 1 1/2 in. (DN40) ���������������������������������� 542001420
Double Interlock Preaction Electric/ See Table A for flange drilling 2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542001420
Pneumatic Actuation Trim for DV-5a specifications. 3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542001430
Automatic Water Control Valves used 4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542001440
Specify: Size (specify), DV-5 a Auto- 6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542001460
in Deluge Fire Protection System, P/N matic Water Control Valve, (specify) 8 in. (DN200) �������������������������������������� 542001480
(specify): end connection, P/N (specify):
Galvanized DV-5A Valve Trim Accessories
Groove x Groove
1 1/2 in. (DN40) �����������������������������������540101420 1 1/2 in. (DN40) ���������������������������������� 530010015
(for separately ordered valve trim)
2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540101420 2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530010020 Specify: (Specify Accessory Descrip-
3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540101430 3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530010030 tion), P/N (specify):
4 in. (DN100) ���������������������������������������540101440 4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530010040
6 in. (DN150) ���������������������������������������540101460 Waterflow Pressure Alarm Switch, Potter
6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530010060 PS10-2 (America/APAC) ���������������������������� 25720
8 in. (DN200) ���������������������������������������540101480 8 in. (DN200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530010080 Waterflow Pressure Alarm Switch
Black Flange x Flange ANSI PS10-1 (EMEA) �������������������������������������������� 0260
1 1/2 in. (DN40) �����������������������������������542101420 3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530020030 Air Pressure Alarm Switch,
2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542101420 4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530020040 Potter PS40-2 (America/APAC) . . . . . . . . . 25710
3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542101430 6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530020060 Air Pressure Alarm Switch
4 in. (DN100) ���������������������������������������542101440 8 in. (DN200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530020080 PS40-1 (EMEA) �������������������������������������������� 0262
6 in. (DN150) ���������������������������������������542101460 Model WMA-1 Water Motor Alarm
8 in. (DN200) ���������������������������������������542101480 Flange x Groove ANSI (America/APAC) ������������������������������ 526301001P
3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530030030 Model WMA-1 Water Motor Alarm
Note: Pressure switches, solenoid valves for 4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530030040
electric actuation, water pressure gauges, (EMEA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526301021R
6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530030060 Model AMD-1 Air
and BFV-300 Butterfly Valve are separately 8 in. (DN200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530020080
ordered. NPT to ISO threaded adaptors Maintenance Device �������������������������� 523242002
are provided for External Trim Connections T x T NPT Model AMD-2 Air
(drains, pressure switches, water motor 1 1/2 in. (DN40) ���������������������������������� 530060015 Maintenance Device �������������������������� 523262001
alarms, etc.). 2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530060020 Model AMD-3 Nitrogen
Maintenance Device �������������������������� 523282001
Flange x Flange ISO
APAC 3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530040030
Model MC-1 Manual
Control Stations �������������������������������� 522892001
DV-5A Valves with Galvanized Trim 4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530040040 Water Gauges with bar/psi . . . . . . . . 025500013
6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530040060 600 psi Water Gauge psi/kPa
Specify: Size (specify), DV-5 a Auto- 8 in. (DN200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530040080 (service pressure over 300 psi) �������� 923431004
matic Water Control Valve, (specify) Solenoid Valve for
end connection with assembled galva- Flange x Groove ISO
3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530050030 Releasing Service . . . . . . . . . . Refer to Technical
nized APAC, Double Interlock Preaction 4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530050040 Data Sheet TFP2108
Electric/Pneumatic Actuation Trim, P/N 6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530050060
(specify): DV-5A Valve Replacement Parts
8 in. (DN200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530050080
Specify: (Description) for use with
Grooved x Grooved T x T ISO (specify size) DV-5a Automatic Water
1 1/2 in. (DN40) ����������������������������������� 550011415 1 1/2 in. (DN40) ���������������������������������� 530070015
2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550011420
Control Valve, P/N (see Figure 1)
2 in. (DN50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530070020
3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550011430 DV-5A Valve Trim Replacement
4 in. (DN100) ���������������������������������������550011440
6 in. (DN150) ���������������������������������������550011460
Parts
8 in. (DN200) ���������������������������������������550011480 Specify: (Description) for use with
DV-5a Valve Trim, P/N (see Figure 6)
Flange x Flange ANSI
3 in. (DN80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550021430
4 in. (DN100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550021440
6 in. (DN150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550021460
8 in. (DN200) �������������������������������������� 550021480
TFP1461
Page 20 of 20

1400 Pennbrook Parkway, Lansdale, PA 19446 | Telephone +1-215-362-0700

© 2020 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION and NFPA are registered trademarks of National Fire Protection Association;
TEFLON is a registered trademark of DuPont
 PREACTION-PAC™
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.0 – NOVEMBER 2020

SECTION
3
General Air Products
Manual

Riser and Tank Mounted

Oilless Air Compressors
Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
 OL Plus
& OLT Plus Series
Riser and Tank Mounted Oilless Air Compressors
Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual

Call 1-800-345-8207
or visit our web site for our complete product listing
www.GeneralAirProducts.com version 2.3
07-2019
 Table of Contents

Section 1 - Safety & Warnings

1.1 - Safety Guidelines
1.2 - General Information
1.3 - General Safety Information
1.4 - Safety Notes

Section 2 - Receiving

Section 3 - Installation Location

Section 4 - Mounting

Section 5 - Lubrication

Section 6 - Piping
6.1 - Piping Instructions
6.2 - OL Plus Series Riser Mounted Oilless Air Compressor Installation Drawing
6.3 - OLT Plus Series Tank Mounted Oilless Air Compressor Installation Drawing

Section 7 - Wiring
7.1 - Wiring Instructions
7.2 - Oilless Air Compressor Single & 3 Phase Wiring Drawing

Section 8 - Maintenance Instructions

Section 9 - Troubleshooting Guide

Section 10 - Warranty Policy

If there are any questions regarding installation, operation, or maintenance of this compressor,
please call 800-345-8207

IMPORTANT: ALL INFORMATION SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.

Consult factory for the most up to date version of this manual - 1-800-345-8207.

1-800-345-8207
Section 1 - Safety & Warnings
1.1 Safety Guidelines
This manual contains information that is very important to know and understand. This information is provided for SAFETY and
to PREVENT EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS. To help recognize this information, observe the following symbols.

- Danger indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, WILL

DANGER result in death or serious injury.

- Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided COULD

WARNING result in death or serious injury.

- Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, MAY

CAUTION result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE - Notice indicates important information, that if not followed may cause damage to
equipment.

1.2 General Information

This compressor is intended for installation indoors for use on dry sprinkler systems in accordance with the Standard for
Installation of Sprinkler Systems, NFPA 13 and the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70. The compressor should be sized to
restore and maintain the air pressure in the sprinkler system in accordance with the requirements in NFPA 13.

1.3 General Safety Information

1. Read all manuals included with this product carefully. Be thoroughly familiar with the controls and the
proper use of the equipment.
2. Follow all local electrical and safety codes as well as National Electrical Codes (NEC), Occupational
Safety and Health Act (OSHA), and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
3. Only persons familiar with these rules of safe operation should be allowed to use the equipment.
4. Keep visitors away and NEVER allow children in the work area.
5. Wear safety glasses and use hearing protection when operating the unit.
6. Do not stand on or use the unit as a handhold.
7. Periodic inspection and test of this equipment is required. Consult your installer and local codes
to meet all requirements.
8. Check all fasteners at frequent intervals for proper tightness.

1.4 Safety Notes

- This compressor is not equipped and should NOT be used “as is” to supply breathing
DANGER quality air.

- Motors, electrical equipment and controls can cause electrical arcs that will ignite
WARNING flammable gas or vapor. Never operate or repair in or near flammable gas or vapor. Never
store flammable liquids or gasses near the compressor.

- These compressors are suitable for pumping only atmospheric air. As defined in
WARNING Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet G-7, page 3, atmospheric air is a mixture of
elements and compounds where nitrogen and oxygen comprise more than 99% with all
other trace gasses comprising less than 1%. Do not use this compressor in
contaminated environments or for pumping mixtures other than atmospheric air.

- Compressed air contains liquid water and is saturated with water vapor, which can
WARNING freeze when surrounding temperatures are lower than 32oF (0oC). Component selection
to minimize the effects of water vapor must be considered.

1-800-345-8207
Section 2 - Receiving
Your compressor is inspected at the factory and packaged to protect against shipping damage. When the compressor is
unpacked, inspect for damage or missing parts. All claims should be settled directly with the freight company.

- Do not operate this compressor if damaged during shipment, handling or use. Any
WARNING damage may result in failure and cause injury or property damage.

Section 3 - Installation Location

Locate the compressor in a clean, well ventilated area where air is relatively cool, clean and dry. A 110°F (43°C) maximum
and 40°F (4.5°C) minimum temperature for surrounding and inlet air are recommended. Provide at least 12 to 18 inches of
clearance from any wall or other obstruction that will interfere with airflow over and through the compressor. Blocking airflow
through the fan may cause the compressor to overheat. Do not place the compressor in an area of excessive heat, such as
near a boiler.

Section 4 - Mounting
OL Plus Series (Riser mounted units) may be mounted to a firm level floor, wall or system riser. A mounting bracket and straps
are provided. Tank mounted units must be leveled and anchored to the floor; the vibration isolators (P/N KVP4X4) supplied
with the unit must be used. Both tank and riser mounted units are shipped with a flex hose and union. The flex hose (P/N
P3002MP) is recommended to be installed between the compressor or tank outlet and service piping.

Section 5 - Lubrication
- This compressor is designed for non-lubricated service. Bearings are permanently
NOTICE lubricated. Do not lubricate any part of the compressor or motor.

1-800-345-8207
Section 6 - Piping
6.1 Piping Instructions
- Compressed air contains liquid water and is saturated with water vapor, which can
WARNING freeze when surrounding temperatures are lower than 32°F (0°C). Component selection
to minimize the effects of water vapor must be considered.

Piping between the compressor, accessory items and the sprinkler system must be at least ½” internal diameter to minimize
pressure drop from the compressor to system. Larger pipe size may be required by code and may be substituted with no
adverse effects.

- Smaller line size must not be used and will restrict the compressor flow, lowering
NOTICE capacity and causing the compressor/motor to work harder, which shortens
compressor/motor life. All piping connected to the compressor must be fully supported
and not transfer any loads to the compressor.

If an AMD-1 is used, allow sufficient distance between the compressor and AMD-1 to ensure that the maximum temperature
at the AMD-1 is 200°F or less.

NOTICE
- When an AMD is used with riser mounted units, a riser mounted tank kit (P/N OLR-TK)
is recommended to prevent short cycling the compressor.

All oilless compressors include a relief valve. For riser mounted models, the relief valve is installed on the compressor. For
tank mounted models, an ASME Code relief valve is mounted on the compressor tank. This valve will open at a preset value
above the pressure switch setting to prevent excess tank pressure in the event of a switch failure.

WARNING - Do not attempt to change the safety relief valve setting.

A manual drain is provided on the bottom of each tank mounted compressor. Moisture accumulated in the tank must be drained
weekly. An automatic drain, P/N DVA-2T, is recommended in areas of high humidity.
The compressor outlet piping should contain an accessible drain. As a minimum a manual drain may be used, but an automatic
drain is recommended to remove excess water.

NOTICE
- Accumulation of condensed water in the system can cause corrosion of components
and reduction of system capacity.

NOTICE
- Warranty is void if a separate check valve is not installed to prevent water backflow to
compressor.

1-800-345-8207
Section 6 - Piping
6.2 OL Plus Series Riser Mounted Oilless Air Compressor Installation Drawing

1-800-345-8207
Section 6 - Piping
6.3 OLT Plus Series Tank Mounted Oilless Air Compressor Installation Drawing

1-800-345-8207
Section 7 - Wiring
7.1 Wiring Instructions
- Wiring should be in accordance with the national electrical code and any local codes or
WARNING regulations. Have a licensed and competent electrician ensure that the voltage supplied
matches the compressor voltage.

CAUTION
- Inadequate wiring size can cause insufficient voltage at the compressor during start-up.
Overheating and damage can result to the motor and controls.

- Failure to use the pressure switch may result in overpressure of the compressor or other
NOTICE components in the system. Overpressure of the compressor can result in blown head
gaskets or other damage.

NOTICE
- Grounding Instructions: This product must be connected to a grounded, metallic,
permanent wiring system, or an equipment grounding terminal or lead on the product.

Minimum Recommended Wire Size

The supply wire must be of adequate size and no other equipment should be Model # 1 Phase 3 Phase
connected to the same line. The adjacent table lists the recommended wire OL(T)12516** 12 N/A
size for each model based on a 100’ run and lowest operating voltage. OL(T)25033** 12 N/A
Consult factory for longer runs. The motors supplied are multiple voltage
OL(T)36550** 12 12
motors. A label on the pressure switch cover indicates the voltage the motor
is pre-wired for. If the supply voltage, on site, is different from the voltage OL(T)43075** 10 12
indicated on this label, change the internal motor voltage connections to OL(T)615100** 6 12
match the supply voltage. To change internal voltage connections, remove OL(T)915150** 6 12
the cover plate located on the rear or side of the motor and reconnect the
wire leads as shown on the motor’s wiring diagram. OL(T)1225200** 10 10
OL(T)32016**-LP 12 N/A
On all three phase compressors an arrow on the motor indicates the required
OL(T)55033**-LP 12 N/A
direction of rotation of the compressor. If the compressor rotates in the
opposite direction, reverse the rotation of the motor. Interchanging any two OL(T)86050**-LP 12 12
incoming supply wires reverses rotation of three phase motors. OL(T)99075**-LP 10 12

NOTICE - Single-phase motors include internal thermal overload protection, which has an
automatic reset device.

- Disconnect electrical power before servicing to disable reset devices. Thermal protection
WARNING can automatically start the motor when the protector resets.

On single phase models, the motor is pre-wired to the pressure switch provided, which controls starting (cut in pressure) and
stopping (cut out pressure) of the motor. The pressure switch is factory set. Standard models switch is set at 27 to 30 psig cut
in and 40 to 44 psig cut out. Low pressure models ("-LP") switch is set at 13 psig cut in and 18 psig cut out. Consult General
Air Products before adjusting the pressure switch.
On three-phase compressors, the motor is not pre-wired to the pressure switch. Refer to the three phase wiring instruction
drawing for recommended wiring. A motor starter is required, for all three phase models, to protect the motor from
overload conditions to meet NEC, NFPA70, Article 430. A motor starter is recommended, for all single phase models.
Consult the National Electric Code and local codes for motor starter requirements. Refer to the proper wiring instruction drawing
for recommended wiring to a starter.

NOTICE
- Do not run two phases of a three phase supply through the pressure switch. Serious
damage can result. Warranty is voided if connected this way.

1-800-345-8207
Section 7 - Wiring

1-800-345-8207
Section 7 - Wiring
7.2 Oilless Air Compressor Single & 3 Phase Wiring Drawing

1-800-345-8207
Section 8 - Maintenance Instructions
WARNING
- Disconnect, tag, and lock out power source then release all pressure from the system
before attempting to install, service, relocate, or perform any service.

The following instructions are based on normal operation. If the compressor is in an excessively dusty area, increase frequency
of maintenance checks.

Weekly: Quarterly:
- Drain condensate from receiver and traps - Change filters
- Check for unusual noise or vibration
- Clean air filters (only with non-petroleum based
products) Warranty can be voided if modifications or adjustments are
- Clean all external parts of the compressor and made without consultation and approval from factory
motor personnel.
Monthly:
- Manually test safety relief valve If there are any questions regarding installation,
- Inspect air system for leaks operation, or maintenance of this compressor, please
- Tighten fitting, nuts, and screws as required call 800-345-8207

Section 9 - Troubleshooting Guide

Symptom Possible Cause(s) Corrective Action

1. Check voltage during start. Voltage must be within

1. Low or no voltage
+/- 10% of nominal voltage to start motor. Increase
Motor hums and 2. Shorted or open motor winding
wire size if necessary, to lower voltage drop.
runs slowly or not at 3. Defective check valve
2. Replace compressor
all. 4. Defective pressure switch -
3. Replace check valve
contacts will not close
4. Repair or replace pressure switch

1. Check voltage during start. Voltage must be within

+/- 10% of nominal voltage to start motor. Increase
1. Insufficient voltage to motor wire size if necessary, to lower voltage drop.
Reset mechanism 2. Pressure switch set too high 2. Consult factory, adjust or replace
cuts out or fuses 3. Wrong fuse size 3. Be sure fuses, heaters and/or overloads are
blow repeatedly 4. Piping too restrictive properly rated or set
5. Defective motor 4. Add receiver vessel or increase pipe volume after
compressor
5. Consult factory

1. Add receiver vessel or increase pipe volume after

Unit short cycles 1. Piping too restrictive
compressor
repeatedly 2. Air leaks
2. Repair leaks

1. Dirty intake filter 1. Clean intake filter

Compressor
2. Wrong motor rotation 2. Correct rotation
overheating
3. Air flow to fan blocked 3. Clean air flow to fan or relocate unit

1. Damaged bearings
2. Worn piston cup
Excessive noise in Contact General Air Products for technical support by
3. Broken valves
operation calling 1-800-345-8207
4. Loose fan
5. Damaged fan guard

1. Compressor sized incorrectly 1. Check system size and compressor sizing

System pressure
2. Leaks or restrictions in piping 2. Correct leaks and remove restrictions
builds slowly
3. Dirty intake filter 3. Clean intake filter

1-800-345-8207
Section 10 - Warranty Policy
GENERAL PROVISIONS & LIMITATIONS DISCLAIMER
General Air Products, Inc. (the "Company") warrants to each THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IT IS
original purchaser ("Purchaser") of its new products from the EXPRESSLY AGREED THAT, EXCEPT AS TO TITLE, THE
Company or its Authorized Distributor that such products are, at COMPANY MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED
the time of delivery to the Purchaser, made with good materials and OR IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED
workman- ship. No warranty is made with respect to: WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY.

1. Any product, which has been repaired or altered in such THE REMEDY PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY SHALL
a way, in the Companies judgment, as to affect the BE THE SOLE, EXCLUSIVE AND ONLY REMEDY AVAILABLE
product adversely. TO THE PURCHASER AND IN NO CASE SHALL THE
2. Any product, which has, in the Companies judgment been COMPANY BE SUBJECT TO ANY OTHER OBLIGATIONS OR
subjected to negligence, accident, improper storage, LIABILITIES. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE
improper installation or application. COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT,
3. Any product, which has not been operated or maintained INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES,
in accordance with the recommendations of the LOSSES OR DELAYS HOWSOEVER CAUSED.
Company.
4. Components or accessories manufactured, No statement, representation, agreement, or understanding, oral
warranted and serviced by others. or written, made by any agent, distributor, representative or
5. Any reconditioned or prior owned product. employee of the Company which is not contained in this Warranty
will be binding upon the company unless made in writing and
Claims for items described in 4. above should be submitted executed by an officer of the Company.
directly to the manufacturer.
This warranty shall not be effective as to any claim which is not
WARRANTY PERIOD presented within 30 days after the date upon which the product
The Company's obligation under this Warranty is limited to repair is claimed not to have been as warranted. Any action for breach
or, at its option, replacing during normal business hours at the of this warranty must be commenced within one year after the
designated facility of the Company, any part that in its judgment date upon which the cause of action occurred.
proved not to be as warranted within the applicable Warranty
Period as follows. Any adjustment made pursuant to this warranty shall not be
construed as an admission by the Company that any product was
COMPONENTS not as warranted.
All non-consumable components are warranted for 12 months from
the date of purchase. Consumables are not covered under PROMPT DISPOSITION & RETURNS POLICY
warranty. The unit must have been installed by either a factory The Company will make a good faith effort for prompt correction
authorized distributor or agent in accordance with the factory or other adjustment with respect to any product, which proves to
recommendations taking into account all other local site conditions be defective within the warranty period. Before returning any
not originally noted to the factory. The unit must be operated and product, write or call the distributor, agent or authorized company
maintained in accordance with the Factory recommendations and from which the product was purchased, describing defect and
original design conditions. Failure to provide such proof of the giving date and number of original invoice, as well as proof of
above may void warranty. Factory supplied consumables and proof of scheduled
maintenance. No products will be accepted for return without the
LABOR TRANSPORTATION & INSPECTION Company issuing a “Returned Goods Authorization” (RGA) to the
The Company will repair or replace any product or part thereof Purchaser and unless accompanied by a properly authorized
which in the Companies judgment is proved to be not as warrant- RGA request form initiated by the Purchaser. Return freight must
ed. Labor costs are not covered under warranty. be prepaid and each returned product must have the RGA
number clearly marked on the product. Title and risk of loss pass
All costs of transportation of product, labor or parts claimed not to to buyer upon delivery to the common carrier.
be as warranted and, of repaired or replaced parts to or from
factory shall be borne by purchaser. The Company may require the PRODUCT SUITABILITY
return of any part claimed not to be as warranted to one of its Many States, Localities and Countries have codes and regulations
facilities as designated by the Company, transportation prepaid by governing sales, construction, installation, and/or use of products
Purchaser, to establish a claim under this warranty. for certain purposes, which may vary from those in neighboring
areas. While General Air Products, Inc. attempts to assure that its
Replacement parts provided under the terms of the warranty are products comply with such codes, it cannot guarantee compliance,
warranted for the remainder of the Warranty Period of the product and cannot be responsible for how the product is installed or used?
upon which installed to the same extent as if such parts were Before purchase and use of a product, please review the product
original components. application, and national and local codes and regulations, and be
sure that the product, installation, and use will comply with them.

REV: 4/22/11
General Air Products, Inc.
118 Summit Drive
Exton, PA 19341
P: 610-524-8950
F: 610-524-8965
 PREACTION-PAC
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.0 – OCTOBER 2020

SECTION
4
United Fire Systems
UFS-710

NAMD-1
Instruction Sheet
 INSTRUCTION SHEET
Nitrogen / Air Maintenance Device for Fire Sprinkler Systems
Model NAMD-1

Figure 1

DESCRIPTION
The UNITED Fire Systems Model NAMD-1 is an FM Approved device for controlling the nitrogen and / or air pressure in
preaction and dry-pipe fire sprinkler piping. The device is equipped with a high-precision pressure regulator capable of
providing accurate regulation over a wide range of inlet pressures and gas flows. This is especially important for sprinkler
corrosion inhibiting systems supplying nitrogen to the sprinkler system, since most nitrogen systems provide less gas flow that
a conventional air compressor.

SPECIFICATIONS
Model No.: NAMD-1
Material (other than regulator): Brass
Material (regulator body): Zinc
Inlet: 1/2” NPT Female
Outlet: 1/2” NPT Female
Inlet Pressure Range: 0-175 PSIG (0-1200 kPa gauge)
Outlet Pressure Range: 15-60 PSIG (100-410 kPa gauge)
Maximum Pressure: 175 PSIG (1200 kPa)
Temperature Range: -30°F to +150°F (-34°C to +65°C)
Dimensions (approx.): 9.75” L x 8.25” H (248 mm x 210 mm)
Weight (approx.): 7 lbs. (3.2 kg)

UNITED Fire Systems This document is provided for informational purposes only. UNITED Fire Systems assumes no responsibility
for the product’s suitability for a particular application. The product must be properly applied to perform as
Division of United Fire Protection Corporation intended. The information in this document is believed to be correct at the time of publication. UNITED Fire
1 MARK ROAD Systems reserves the right to add to, delete, or revise any information in this document without notice.
KENILWORTH, NJ 07033 USA
PHONE: 908-688-0300 FAX: 908-688-0218
unitedfiresystems.com Page 1 of 4 UFS-710 P/N 31-100013-002 Rev. 1.04 Aug 2020
 INSTRUCTION SHEET
Nitrogen / Air Maintenance Device for Fire Sprinkler Systems
Model NAMD-1

1. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS – READ AND UNDERSTAND BEFORE INSTALLATION

IMPORTANT
DO NOT disassemble the Model NAMD-1 device!

1.1. Install the Model NAMD-1 device in the nitrogen / air pressure supply line to the sprinkler valve trim.
1.2. UNITED Fire Systems highly recommends installing one (1) Model NAMD-1 device for each sprinkler valve.
1.3. The device may be installed in any orientation.
1.4. Install the device as close as possible to the sprinkler valve receiving the pressure.
1.5. Locate the device in as a convenient place as possible, where the ball valves may be easily operated and the pressure
gauge observed.
1.6. If the rigidity of the inlet and outlet piping is sufficient, no additional bracketing should be necessary. Otherwise, use
standard split ring hangers and hardware to attach the device to the wall or other solid mounting location.

IMPORTANT
The Model NAMD-1 device is designed to operate in one direction only. Refer to Figure 1 to positively identify the INLET
and OUTLET ports of the device.

1.7. Attach the piping from the pressure source to the INLET of the device. Piping shall be 1/2” nominal pipe size minimum.
Use Teflon tape on the male pipe threads of the pipe only. DO NOT permit pipe thread sealant to enter the device.
1.8. Attach the piping from the OUTLET of the device to the proper connection point on the sprinkler valve trim. Piping shall
be 1/2” nominal pipe size minimum. Use Teflon tape on the male threads of the pipe only. DO NOT permit pipe thread
sealant to enter the device.
1.9. Proceed to the COMMISSIONING instructions below.

2. COMMISSIONING
2.1. Ensure all three (3) ball valves on the Model NAMD-1 device are CLOSED.
2.2. Determine proper supervisory pressure for the sprinkler valve which the device is connected to.
2.3. Pull pressure regulator adjustment knob UP.
2.4. Turn pressure regulator adjustment knob COUNTERCLOCKWISE to remove all force from the regulating spring.
2.5. Apply nitrogen pressure from sprinkler corrosion inhibiting system to the device inlet.
2.6. Leak check the piping from the pressure source to the Model NAMD-1 device. Piping should be as leak-free as possible.
Correct all leaks before proceeding.
2.7. Gradually open inlet shutoff valve. Pressure gauge on the device pressure regulator should indicate pressure.

IMPORTANT
When adjusting pressure regulator, always approach the desired adjustment from a LOWER to a HIGHER pressure.

A. If pressure adjustment (as indicated on device pressure gauge) is LOW, turn pressure regulator adjustment knob
CLOCKWISE to increase pressure to desired setting.

B. If pressure adjustment (as indicated on the device pressure gauge) is HIGH, turn pressure regulator adjustment knob
COUNTERCLOCKWISE to reduce pressure 3-5 PSIG below desired setting, then turn knob CLOCKWISE to increase
pressure to desired setting.

UNITED Fire Systems This document is provided for informational purposes only. UNITED Fire Systems assumes no responsibility
for the product’s suitability for a particular application. The product must be properly applied to perform as
Division of United Fire Protection Corporation intended. The information in this document is believed to be correct at the time of publication. UNITED Fire
1 MARK ROAD Systems reserves the right to add to, delete, or revise any information in this document without notice.
KENILWORTH, NJ 07033 USA
PHONE: 908-688-0300 FAX: 908-688-0218
unitedfiresystems.com Page 2 of 4 UFS-710 P/N 31-100013-002 Rev. 1.04 Aug 2020
 INSTRUCTION SHEET
Nitrogen / Air Maintenance Device for Fire Sprinkler Systems
Model NAMD-1

2. COMMISSIONING (continued)
2.8. Turn pressure regulator adjustment knob clockwise until pressure gauge indicates 2-3 PSIG above the desired
supervisory pressure determined in step 2.2.
2.9. Gradually open outlet shutoff valve. Nitrogen pressure will reach the sprinkler valve trim.
2.10. Leak check the piping from the Model NAMD-1 device to the sprinkler valve trim. Piping should be as leak-free as
possible. Correct all leaks before proceeding.
2.11 Check that pressure gauge continues to indicate 2-3 PSIG above supervisory pressure. Adjust if necessary.
2.12. Push pressure regulator adjustment knob DOWN.

3. OPERATION

Table 1 – Valve Positions

INLET OUTLET BYPASS
MODE
Shutoff Valve Shutoff Valve Valve

No Gas Supply To
Closed Closed Closed
Sprinkler Valve
Initial-Fill
Closed Closed OPEN
With Air
Supply System
OPEN OPEN Closed
With Nitrogen
DO NOT
OPEN OPEN OPEN
Operate

4. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

4.1 Monthly
4.1.1 Inspect the Model NAMD-1 device valve position. Use Table 1 to verify that valve position is in accordance with
desired MODE.
4.1.2 Inspect the pressure gauge. Verify that indicated pressure is 2-3 PSI above the desired supervisory pressure of the
connected sprinkler valve. Refer to 2. COMMISSIONING if regulator adjustment is required.

4.2 Annual At least annually, inspect and clean the device strainer screen.

DANGER
Ensure that Model NAMD-1 device is completely depressurized before inspecting and cleaning the strainer screen. Failure
to do so can result in death or serious personal injury!

IMPORTANT
When ball valves have been CLOSED, the nitrogen / air supply is not available to pressurize the sprinkler system piping.
Take required precautions to prevent inadvertent sprinkler valve operation. Notify applicable personnel of possible “low air”
signals.

UNITED Fire Systems This document is provided for informational purposes only. UNITED Fire Systems assumes no responsibility
for the product’s suitability for a particular application. The product must be properly applied to perform as
Division of United Fire Protection Corporation intended. The information in this document is believed to be correct at the time of publication. UNITED Fire
1 MARK ROAD Systems reserves the right to add to, delete, or revise any information in this document without notice.
KENILWORTH, NJ 07033 USA
PHONE: 908-688-0300 FAX: 908-688-0218
unitedfiresystems.com Page 3 of 4 UFS-710 P/N 31-100013-002 Rev. 1.04 Aug 2020
 INSTRUCTION SHEET
Nitrogen / Air Maintenance Device for Fire Sprinkler Systems
Model NAMD-1

4. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE (Continued)

4.2 Annual (Continued)

4.2.1 Ensure there is no pressure present in the Model NAMD-1 device.
4.2.2 Hold device so that torque applied to strainer screen retainer does not move the device.
4.2.3 Refer to Figure 1. Apply suitable wrench to HEX on strainer screen retainer. Do NOT remove square plug.
4.2.4 Remove strainer screen retainer. Retain for replacement.
4.2.5 Examine rubber seal on strainer screen retainer. If damaged during removal, leakage may occur.
4.2.6 Remove strainer. Empty any loose material, and then flush with clean water. If necessary, use a wire brush to
remove trapped particles. Dry strainer screen thoroughly before replacement.
4.2.7 If strainer screen is damaged, replace with new strainer screen UFS P/N 30-500003-401.
4.2.8 Insert strainer screen.
4.2.9 Replace strainer screen retainer, tightening wrench-tight.
4.2.10 See 2. COMMISSIONING to return Model NAMD-1 device to service.
4.2.11 Leak check the strainer screen retainer / strainer body connection. Correct leak if necessary.

UNITED Fire Systems This document is provided for informational purposes only. UNITED Fire Systems assumes no responsibility
for the product’s suitability for a particular application. The product must be properly applied to perform as
Division of United Fire Protection Corporation intended. The information in this document is believed to be correct at the time of publication. UNITED Fire
1 MARK ROAD Systems reserves the right to add to, delete, or revise any information in this document without notice.
KENILWORTH, NJ 07033 USA
PHONE: 908-688-0300 FAX: 908-688-0218
unitedfiresystems.com Page 4 of 4 UFS-710 P/N 31-100013-002 Rev. 1.04 Aug 2020
 PREACTION-PAC
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.0 – OCTOBER 2020

SECTION
5.1
Notifier Manual 52741

NFS2-640 Control Panel

Installation Manual
Fire Alarm Control Panel
NFS2-640/E
Installation Manual

Document 52741 Rev: P9

5/13/19 ECN: 18-305
 Fire Alarm & Emergency Communication System Limitations
While a life safety system may lower insurance rates, it is not a substitute for life and property insurance!
An automatic fire alarm system—typically made up of smoke Heat detectors do not sense particles of combustion and alarm
detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warning only when heat on their sensors increases at a predetermined rate
devices, and a fire alarm control panel (FACP) with remote notifica- or reaches a predetermined level. Rate-of-rise heat detectors may
tion capability—can provide early warning of a developing fire. Such be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For this reason, the rate-
a system, however, does not assure protection against property of-rise feature of each detector should be tested at least once per
damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. year by a qualified fire protection specialist. Heat detectors are
An emergency communication system—typically made up of an designed to protect property, not life.
automatic fire alarm system (as described above) and a life safety IMPORTANT! Smoke detectors must be installed in the same
communication system that may include an autonomous control room as the control panel and in rooms used by the system for the
unit (ACU), local operating console (LOC), voice communication, connection of alarm transmission wiring, communications, signal-
and other various interoperable communication methods—can ing, and/or power. If detectors are not so located, a developing fire
broadcast a mass notification message. Such a system, however, may damage the alarm system, compromising its ability to report a
does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life fire.
resulting from a fire or life safety event. Audible warning devices such as bells, horns, strobes, speak-
The Manufacturer recommends that smoke and/or heat detectors ers and displays may not alert people if these devices are located
be located throughout a protected premises following the on the other side of closed or partly open doors or are located on
recommendations of the current edition of the National Fire another floor of a building. Any warning device may fail to alert peo-
Protection Association Standard 72 (NFPA 72), manufacturer's ple with a disability or those who have recently consumed drugs,
recommendations, State and local codes, and the alcohol, or medication. Please note that:
recommendations contained in the Guide for Proper Use of System • An emergency communication system may take priority over a
Smoke Detectors, which is made available at no charge to all fire alarm system in the event of a life safety emergency.
installing dealers. This document can be found at http:// • Voice messaging systems must be designed to meet intelligibility
www.systemsensor.com/appguides/. A study by the Federal requirements as defined by NFPA, local codes, and Authorities
Emergency Management Agency (an agency of the United States Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
government) indicated that smoke detectors may not go off in as
many as 35% of all fires. While fire alarm systems are designed to • Language and instructional requirements must be clearly dis-
provide early warning against fire, they do not guarantee warning or seminated on any local displays.
protection against fire. A fire alarm system may not provide timely or • Strobes can, under certain circumstances, cause seizures in
adequate warning, or simply may not function, for a variety of people with conditions such as epilepsy.
reasons: • Studies have shown that certain people, even when they hear a
Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach fire alarm signal, do not respond to or comprehend the meaning
the detectors such as in chimneys, in or behind walls, on roofs, or of the signal. Audible devices, such as horns and bells, can have
on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not different tonal patterns and frequencies. It is the property
sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second-floor owner's responsibility to conduct fire drills and other training
detector, for example, may not sense a first-floor or basement fire. exercises to make people aware of fire alarm signals and
Particles of combustion or “smoke” from a developing fire may instruct them on the proper reaction to alarm signals.
not reach the sensing chambers of smoke detectors because: • In rare instances, the sounding of a warning device can cause
• Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors, walls, chim- temporary or permanent hearing loss.
neys, even wet or humid areas may inhibit particle or smoke A life safety system will not operate without any electrical power. If
flow. AC power fails, the system will operate from standby batteries only
• Smoke particles may become “cold,” stratify, and not reach the for a specified time and only if the batteries have been properly
ceiling or upper walls where detectors are located. maintained and replaced regularly.
• Smoke particles may be blown away from detectors by air out- Equipment used in the system may not be technically compatible
lets, such as air conditioning vents. with the control panel. It is essential to use only equipment listed for
service with your control panel.
• Smoke particles may be drawn into air returns before reaching
the detector. Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises
to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily
The amount of “smoke” present may be insufficient to alarm smoke disabled. For added protection against telephone line failure,
detectors. Smoke detectors are designed to alarm at various levels backup radio transmission systems are recommended.
of smoke density. If such density levels are not created by a devel-
oping fire at the location of detectors, the detectors will not go into The most common cause of life safety system malfunction is inad-
alarm. equate maintenance. To keep the entire life safety system in excel-
lent working order, ongoing maintenance is required per the
Smoke detectors, even when working properly, have sensing limita- manufacturer's recommendations, and UL and NFPA standards. At
tions. Detectors that have photoelectronic sensing chambers tend a minimum, the requirements of NFPA 72 shall be followed. Envi-
to detect smoldering fires better than flaming fires, which have little ronments with large amounts of dust, dirt, or high air velocity require
visible smoke. Detectors that have ionizing-type sensing chambers more frequent maintenance. A maintenance agreement should be
tend to detect fast-flaming fires better than smoldering fires. arranged through the local manufacturer's representative. Mainte-
Because fires develop in different ways and are often unpredictable nance should be scheduled as required by National and/or local fire
in their growth, neither type of detector is necessarily best and a codes and should be performed by authorized professional life
given type of detector may not provide adequate warning of a fire. safety system installers only. Adequate written records of all inspec-
Smoke detectors cannot be expected to provide adequate warning tions should be kept.
of fires caused by arson, children playing with matches (especially Limit-D2-2016
in bedrooms), smoking in bed, and violent explosions (caused by
escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, etc.).

2 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

 Installation Precautions
Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability:
WARNING - Several different sources of power can be con- Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate
nected to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources of erratically or can be damaged when subjected to lightning induced
power before servicing. Control unit and associated equipment may transients. Although no system is completely immune from lightning
be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules, or inter- transients and interference, proper grounding will reduce suscepti-
connecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to bility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to
install, service, or operate this unit until manuals are read and an increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with
understood. the Technical Services Department if any problems are anticipated
CAUTION - System Re-acceptance Test after Software or encountered.
Changes: To ensure proper system operation, this product must be Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting
tested in accordance with NFPA 72 after any programming opera- circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits.
tion or change in site-specific software. Re-acceptance testing is Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing,
required after any change, addition or deletion of system compo- reaming, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make all
nents, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making modifications,
hardware or wiring. All components, circuits, system operations, or verify that they will not interfere with battery, transformer, or printed
software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% circuit board location.
tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadver-
tently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly Do not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over-tighten-
affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also ing may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact
be tested and proper system operation verified. pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal.

This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49º C/ This system contains static-sensitive components. Always
32-120º F and at a relative humidity 93% ± 2% RH (non-condens- ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any cir-
ing) at 32°C ± 2°C (90°F ± 3°F). However, the useful life of the sys- cuits so that static charges are removed from the body. Use static
tem's standby batteries and the electronic components may be suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed
adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. from the unit.
Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals Units with a touchscreen display should be cleaned with a dry,
be installed in an environment with a normal room temperature of clean, lint free/microfiber cloth. If additional cleaning is required,
15-27º C/60-80º F. apply a small amount of Isopropyl alcohol to the cloth and wipe
Verify that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating clean. Do not use detergents, solvents, or water for cleaning. Do
device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. not spray liquid directly onto the display.
drop from the specified device voltage. Follow the instructions in the installation, operating, and pro-
gramming manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid
damage to the control panel and associated equipment. FACP
operation and reliability depend upon proper installation.
Precau-D2-11-2017

FCC Warning
WARNING: This equipment generates, uses, and can radi- Canadian Requirements
ate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for
accordance with the instruction manual may cause interfer- radiation noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in
ence to radio communications. It has been tested and found the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Depart-
to comply with the limits for Class A computing devices pur- ment of Communications.
suant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which is
designed to provide reasonable protection against such Le present appareil numerique n'emet pas de bruits radio-
interference when devices are operated in a commercial electriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils
environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential numeriques de la classe A prescrites dans le Reglement sur
area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des
will be required to correct the interference at his or her own Communications du Canada.
expense.

HARSH™, NIS™, and NOTI•FIRE•NET™ are all trademarks; and Acclimate® Plus™, eVance®, FlashScan®, FAAST Fire Alarm Aspiration Sensing Technology®,
Honeywell®, Intelligent FAAST®, NOTIFIER®, ONYX®, ONYXWorks®, SWIFT®, VeriFire®, and VIEW® are all registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc.
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. Chrome™ and Google™ are trademarks of Google Inc. Firefox® is a registered
trademark of The Mozilla Foundation.
©2019 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited.

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 3

Software Downloads
In order to supply the latest features and functionality in fire alarm and life safety technology to our customers, we make frequent
upgrades to the embedded software in our products. To ensure that you are installing and programming the latest features, we
strongly recommend that you download the most current version of software for each product prior to commissioning any system.
Contact Technical Support with any questions about software and the appropriate version for a specific application.

Documentation Feedback
Your feedback helps us keep our documentation up-to-date and accurate. If you have any comments or suggestions about our online
Help or printed manuals, you can email us.
Please include the following information:
• Product name and version number (if applicable)
• Printed manual or online Help
• Topic Title (for online Help)
• Page number (for printed manual)
• Brief description of content you think should be improved or corrected
• Your suggestion for how to correct/improve documentation
Send email messages to:
FireSystems.TechPubs@honeywell.com
Please note this email address is for documentation feedback only. If you have any technical issues, please contact Technical
Services.

4 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

 Table of Contents
Section 1: About This Manual ......................................................................................................................................... 7
1.1: Standards and Other Documents .......................................................................................................................................................................7
1.1.1: UL 864 9th and 10th Edition ..................................................................................................................................................................7
1.2: Related Documents ............................................................................................................................................................................................8
1.3: Cautions and Warnings ......................................................................................................................................................................................9
Section 2: System Overview........................................................................................................................................... 10
2.1: System Description ..........................................................................................................................................................................................10
2.1.1: Standard Features..................................................................................................................................................................................10
2.1.2: Options..................................................................................................................................................................................................10
2.1.3: System Limitations ...............................................................................................................................................................................10
2.2: System Components ........................................................................................................................................................................................11
2.2.1: Basic Equipment...................................................................................................................................................................................11
2.2.2: Control Panel Circuit Board ................................................................................................................................................................11
2.2.3: Main Power Supply (CPS-24/E)...........................................................................................................................................................11
2.2.4: Circuit Board Components ...................................................................................................................................................................13
2.3: System Cabinets...............................................................................................................................................................................................15
2.4: Compatible Equipment ...................................................................................................................................................................................15
Section 3: Installation ..................................................................................................................................................... 18
3.1: Preparing for Installation .................................................................................................................................................................................18
3.1.1: Standards and Codes.............................................................................................................................................................................18
3.2: Installation Checklist .......................................................................................................................................................................................19
3.3: Mounting a Cabinet .........................................................................................................................................................................................19
3.4: Laying Out Equipment in Cabinet and Chassis...............................................................................................................................................20
3.5: Installing the Control Panel .............................................................................................................................................................................24
3.5.1: Control Panel Circuit Board & Keypad/Display Unit ..........................................................................................................................24
3.5.2: Using NCA-2 as Primary Display ........................................................................................................................................................25
3.5.3: Using the NCD as Primary Display on the NFS2-640 .........................................................................................................................25
3.6: Mounting Option Boards .................................................................................................................................................................................25
3.6.1: Option Boards in the NFS2-640/E Chassis ..........................................................................................................................................25
3.6.2: Option Boards in CHS-4L ....................................................................................................................................................................26
3.6.3: Option Boards on BMP-1 in Dress Panels ...........................................................................................................................................28
3.6.4: Transmitter Module TM-4....................................................................................................................................................................28
3.6.5: Loop Expander Module ........................................................................................................................................................................28
3.6.6: Network Communications Module.......................................................................................................................................................29
3.6.7: DVC Digital Voice Command..............................................................................................................................................................29
3.7: Connecting the Power Cables ..........................................................................................................................................................................30
3.7.1: Overview...............................................................................................................................................................................................30
3.7.2: Connecting the Control Panel to AC Power .........................................................................................................................................31
3.7.3: Checking AC Power .............................................................................................................................................................................31
3.7.4: Installing and Connecting the Batteries................................................................................................................................................31
3.7.5: External DC Power Output Connections..............................................................................................................................................32
3.7.6: Accessories DC Power Output Connections ........................................................................................................................................32
3.8: NAC Connections and Releasing Circuits.......................................................................................................................................................33
3.8.1: Stat-X Devices .....................................................................................................................................................................................34
3.8.2: FSA-8000 Wiring: ................................................................................................................................................................................34
3.9: Output Relay Connections ...............................................................................................................................................................................35
3.10: Backup-Alarm Switches ................................................................................................................................................................................35
3.11: UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements .......................................................................................................................................................36
3.11.1: Labeling Modules and Circuits...........................................................................................................................................................36
3.12: Installing EIA-485 Devices ...........................................................................................................................................................................37
3.13: Installing Remote Printers and/or CRT..........................................................................................................................................................37
3.13.1: Custom Cable Fabrication ..................................................................................................................................................................37
3.13.2: Installing and Configuring the PRN Series Printer.............................................................................................................................37
3.13.3: Installing and Configuring a Keltron Printer ......................................................................................................................................38
3.13.4: Installing and Configuring a CRT-2 ...................................................................................................................................................39
3.13.5: Connecting Multiple Printers, CRTs, or CRT/PRN Combination .....................................................................................................41
3.14: Wiring a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)..........................................................................................................................................................42
3.15: Connecting a PC for Off-Line Programming ................................................................................................................................................43

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 5

Table of Contents

Section 4: Applications................................................................................................................................................... 44
4.1: Overview..........................................................................................................................................................................................................44
4.2: Devices Requiring External Power Supervision..............................................................................................................................................44
4.3: NFPA 72 Central or Remote Station Fire Alarm System (Protected Premises Unit) ......................................................................................44
4.4: Central Station Fire Alarm System Canadian Requirements...........................................................................................................................46
4.5: NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems .......................................................................................................................................................47
4.6: Fire/Security Applications ..............................................................................................................................................................................47
4.6.1: General Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................47
4.6.2: Installing a Security Tamper Switch.....................................................................................................................................................47
4.6.3: Receiving Unit ......................................................................................................................................................................................48
4.6.4: Programming ........................................................................................................................................................................................48
4.6.5: Wiring for Proprietary Security Alarm Applications ...........................................................................................................................48
4.7: Releasing Applications ....................................................................................................................................................................................49
4.7.1: Overview...............................................................................................................................................................................................49
4.7.2: Programming ........................................................................................................................................................................................49
4.7.3: Connecting a Releasing Device to the Control Panel...........................................................................................................................49
4.7.4: Connecting a Releasing Device to the FCM-1 Module........................................................................................................................51
4.7.5: Connecting Releasing Devices to the FCM-1-REL Control Module...................................................................................................53
4.7.6: Connecting an NBG-12LRA Agent Release-Abort Station .................................................................................................................54
Section 5: Testing the System ...................................................................................................................................... 55
5.1: Acceptance Test ...............................................................................................................................................................................................55
5.2: Periodic Testing and Service............................................................................................................................................................................55
5.3: Operational Checks..........................................................................................................................................................................................55
5.4: Battery Checks and Maintenance ....................................................................................................................................................................55
Appendix A: Power Supply Calculations ...................................................................................................................... 57
A.1: Calculating AC Branch Circuit Current..........................................................................................................................................................57
A.2: Calculating the System Current Draws ..........................................................................................................................................................57
A.2.1: Calculating the Maximum Secondary Power Fire Alarm Current Draw.............................................................................................59
A.3: Calculating the Battery Requirements ............................................................................................................................................................60
A.3.1: Calculating the Battery Capacity .........................................................................................................................................................60
A.3.2: Calculating the Battery Size ................................................................................................................................................................60
Appendix B: Electrical Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 61
B.1: Electrical Specifications..................................................................................................................................................................................61
B.2: Wire Requirements..........................................................................................................................................................................................62
Appendix C: Canadian Applications.............................................................................................................................. 64
C.1: Standalone Application ...................................................................................................................................................................................64
C.1.1: NFS2-640/E with KDM-R2 .................................................................................................................................................................64
C.1.2: NFS2-640/E with NCA-2.....................................................................................................................................................................64
C.2: Network Applications .....................................................................................................................................................................................64
C.3: Automatic Alarm Signal Silence .....................................................................................................................................................................64
C.4: Annunciator Applications................................................................................................................................................................................64
C.5: Releasing Devices ...........................................................................................................................................................................................64
C.6: Ancillary Devices ............................................................................................................................................................................................64
C.7: Isolating NACs with Audio Isolator Modules.................................................................................................................................................64
C.7.1: Description of Modules........................................................................................................................................................................64

6 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

 Section 1: About This Manual
1.1 Standards and Other Documents
 This Fire Alarm Control Panel complies with the following NFPA standards:
• NFPA 12 CO2 Extinguishing Systems
• NFPA 12A Halon 1301 Extinguishing Systems
• NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems
• NFPA 15 Water Spray Systems
• NFPA 16 Foam/Water Deluge and Foam/Water Spray Systems
• NFPA 17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems
• NFPA 17A Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems
• NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
• NFPA 72 Central Station Fire Alarm Systems (Automatic, Manual and Waterflow) Protected Premises Unit (requires Notifier
UDACT/UDACT-2).
• NFPA 72 Local (Automatic, Manual, Waterflow and Sprinkler Supervisory) Fire Alarm Systems.
• NFPA 72 Auxiliary (Automatic, Manual and Waterflow) Fire Alarm Systems (requires TM-4).
• NFPA 72 Remote Station (Automatic, Manual and Waterflow) Fire Alarm Systems
• NFPA 72 Proprietary (Automatic, Manual and Waterflow) Fire Alarm Systems (Protected Premises Unit).
• NFPA 92 Standard for Smoke-Control Systems
• NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
• NFPA 2010 Standard for Fixed Aerosol Fire Extinguishing Systems
 The installer should be familiar with the following documents and standards:
• NFPA 72 Initiating Devices for Fire Alarm Systems
• NFPA 72 Inspection, Testing and Maintenance for Fire Alarm Systems
• NFPA 72 Notification Appliances for Fire Alarm Systems
Underwriters Laboratories
• UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes
• UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station
• UL 228 Door Closers - Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
• UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
• UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications
• UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
• UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances
• UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
• UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems, 10th edition
• UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
• UL 1971 Visual Signaling Appliances
• UL 1076 Proprietary Burglar Alarm Systems
• UL 2017 Standard for General-Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems
• UL 2572 Standard for Mass Notification Systems
• UL 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
• Standard CAN/ULC-S527-M99
• CAN/ULC-S524-M91 Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems
• ULC S524 Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems
• ULC-S527-11 Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems
• ULC S561 Installation and Services for Fire Signal Receiving Centres and Systems
Other
• EIA-485 and EIA-232 Serial Interface Standards
• NEC Article 300 Wiring Methods
• NEC Article 760 Fire Protective Signaling Systems
• Applicable Local and State Building Codes
• Requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction

1.1.1 UL 864 9th and 10th Edition

Per the UL Continuing Certification Program, UL 864 9th edition fire alarm control equipment will retain certification after the rollout of
UL 10th edition (12/2/2018).
Installations of UL 864 10th Edition certified equipment are permitted to use UL864 9th Edition certified equipment when approved by
the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 7

About This Manual Related Documents

For product compliance, refer to the UL/ULC listing cards located on the UL online certification directory. UL Product iQ:
https://iq.ulprospector.com/en/

1.2 Related Documents

Table 1.1 below provides a list of documents referenced in this manual, as well as documents for selected other compatible devices. The
document series chart (DOC-NOT) provides the current document revision. A copy of this document is included in every shipment.
Compatible Conventional Devices (Non-addressable) Document Number

Device Compatibility Document 15378

Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) and Main Power Supply Installation Document Number

NFS2-640/E Installation, Operations, and Programming Manuals 52741, 52742, 52743

DVC Digital Voice Command Manual 52411

DVC-RPU Manual 50107425-001

DVC-RPU UL Listing Document 50107424-001

DAL Devices Reference Document 52410

DS-DB Digital Series Distribution Board and Amplifier Manual 53622

DAA2 and DAX Amplifiers Manual 53265

SLC Wiring Manual 51253

Note: For individual SLC Devices, refer to the SLC Wiring Manual

Off-line Programming Utility Document Number

VeriFire® Tools CD help file VERIFIRE-TCD

Cabinets & Chassis Document Number

CAB-3/CAB-4 Series Cabinet Installation Document 15330

Heat Dissipation for Cabinets with Audio Products* 53645

Battery/Peripherals Enclosure Installation Document 50295

Power Supplies, Auxiliary Power Supplies & Battery Chargers Document Number

ACPS-2406 Installation Manual 51304

ACPS-610 Installation Manual 53018

APS-6R Instruction Manual 50702

APS2-6R Instruction Manual 53232

CHG-120 Battery Charger Manual 50641

FCPS-24 Field Charger/Power Supply Manual 50059

FCPS-24S6/FCPS-24S8 Field Charger/Power Supply Manual 51977

Networking Document Number

High-Speed NCM Installation Document 54014

Noti•Fire•Net Manual, Network Version 5.0 & Higher 51584

NCM-W/F Installation Document 51533

HS-NFN Installation Document 54013

ONYXWorks™ Workstation Hardware & Software Application: Installation and Operation Manual 52342

ONYXWorks™ NFN Gateway (PC Platform) Installation & Operation Manual 52307

ONYXWorks™ NFN Gateway (Embedded Platform) Installation & Operation Manual 52306

NCS ONYX® Network Control Station Manual, Network Version 4.0 & Higher 51658

NCA-2 Network Control Annunciator Manual 52482

NCA Network Control Annunciator Manual 51482

NCD Network Control Display LS10210-051NF-E

System Components Document Number

Annunciator Control System Manual 15842

FDU-80Remote Annunciator Manual 51264

LCD-80 Liquid Crystal Display Remote Annunciator 15037

Table 1.1 Reference Documentation (1 of 2)

8 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Cautions and Warnings About This Manual

LCD2-80 Liquid Crystal Display Remote Annunciator 53242

LDM Series Lamp Driver Annunciator Manual 15885

SCS Smoke Control Manual (Smoke and HVAC Control Station) 15712

DPI-232 Direct Panel Interface Manual 51499

TM-4 Installation Document (Reverse Polarity Transmitter) 51490

UDACT Manual (Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter) 50050

UDACT-2 Manual (Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter) 54089

UDACT-2 Listing Document (Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter) 54089LD

AA-Series Audio Amplifiers Manual 52526

ACT-1 Installation Document 52527

ACT-2 Installation Document 51118

FireVoice-25/50, FireVoice-25/50ZS & FireVoice-25/50ZST Manual 52290

FirstCommand Emergency Communication System LS1001-001NF-E

RM-1 Series Remote Microphone Installation Document 51138

RA100Z Remote LED Annunciator Installation Document I56-0508

XP Transponder Manual 15888

XP10-M Installation Document I56-1803

XP5 Series Manual 50786

XP6-C Installation Document I56-1805

XP6-MA Installation Document I56-1806

XP6-R Installation Document I56-1804

FSA-5000(A) FAAST XS Intelligent Aspiration Sensing Technology Document I56-6008

FSA-8000(A) FAAST XM Intelligent Aspiration Sensing Technology Document I56-3903

FSA-20000(A) FAAST XT PRO Intelligent Aspiration Sensing Technology Document I56-3903

FWSG Wireless Manual LS10036-000NF-E

Manual Releasing Disconnect (MRD-1) Product Installation Document LS10231-000GE-E

Table 1.1 Reference Documentation (2 of 2)

* If you are installing the panel in the same cabinet as digital audio equipment, heat dissipation calculations must be made. Please refer to
document #53645.

1.3 Cautions and Warnings

This manual contains cautions and warnings to alert the reader as follows:

CAUTION:
! Information about procedures that could cause programming errors, runtime errors, or equipment damage.

WARNING:
! Indicates information about procedures that could cause irreversible damage to the control panel, irreversible loss of
programming data or personal injury.

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 9

 Section 2: System Overview
2.1 System Description
The NFS2-640/E control panel is a modular, intelligent fire alarm control panel (FACP) with an extensive list of powerful features. The
control panel uses the CPS-24/E integral power supply with battery charger. This is combined with a mounting chassis and cabinet to
create a complete fire alarm control system. The panel supports FlashScan® protocol and has network capabilities. A single SLC loop is
supported with the basic equipment package; a second SLC loop can be added by attaching an optional loop expander module (LEM-
320).
Modular devices mount to the chassis to provide additional output circuits, including voice and telephone modules to form a complete
voice evacuation system. Five cabinet options are available for enclosing system components; each is available in red or black.
The control panel has the capacity for installing up to 636 addressable points; 159 detectors and 159 monitor/control modules per SLC
(Signaling Line Circuit).

2.1.1 Standard Features

• Uses Notifier’s VIEW® early warning fire detection and the FlashScan or Classic Loop Interface Protocol (CLIP) families of
detectors and modules
• Integral power supply with battery charger
• Four standard Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC), Class A or B
• Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory and Security relays
• Support for 32 annunciator addresses, with 10 special annunciator groups
• Supports Style 4,Class A, Class B, and Class XSLC loops
• Connections to easily mount an expander board to add a second SLC loop
• Releasing service using on-board NACs or FCM-1 modules
• Logic Equations
• Display scroll selection
• Alarm verification supervisory indication (NYC)
• Supervisory duct detectors
• Supports Advanced Warning Addressable Combustion Sensing (AWACS) algorithms
• Network operation
• Battery charger supports 18 to 200 amp hour sealed lead-acid batteries
• EIA-485 connections for wiring ACS annunciators (including LDM custom graphic annunciators), TM-4 transmitter
• EIA-232 connections for printer, CRT, printer/CRT, or network operation
• Autoprogram feature for faster programming of new devices
• The control panel provides 6 amps of usable output power in an alarm condition; it provides 3 amps of usable output power in
normal or continuous operating conditions
• Diagnostic LEDs and switches
• Ground fault detection (0 ohm impedance)
• Battery and battery-charger supervision, voltage-monitoring, and current-monitoring
• Disconnect of deeply-discharged battery (low battery disconnect)
• Programmable for strobe synchronization
• Mass Notification System compatible
2.1.2 Options
Refer to Section 2.4 “Compatible Equipment” for other peripherals listed for use with this panel.
• QWERTY silicone-rubber keypad with a 2x40 LCD display and eight indicator LEDs
• Optional LEM-320 provides a second SLC loop that is electrically identical to the one on the main board
• Optional devices include: UDACT/UDACT-2 Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter, ACM-8R remote relay module
to increase point capacity, and audio and voice components.
• Optional annunciators connected through the EIA-485 interface allow remote system monitoring.
2.1.3 System Limitations
System expansion must take into consideration the following:
1. The physical limitations of the cabinet configuration.
2. The electrical limitations of the system power supply.
3. The capacity of the secondary power source (standby batteries). (Note that batteries larger than 26 AH will require a separate
battery backbox.)

10 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

System Components System Overview

2.2 System Components

2.2.1 Basic Equipment
A basic NFS2-640/E system has the following components:
1. The control panel with integral power supply. CPU2-640 (120V operation) or CPU2-640E (240V operation) is the “control panel”
itself and the heart of the system; it ships with a grounding cable, battery interconnect cables, and document kit. It includes power
supply CPS-24/E, mounted directly on the CPU2-640/E.

NOTE: The CPS-24/E is an integral part of the CPU2-640/E and is not available separately.

2. One or more chassis. The NFS2-640/E chassis (included with the CPU) mounts the CPU2-640/CPU2-640E and peripherals. Mount
additional rows of equipment in a compatible chassis selected from Table 3.3 on page 25.
3. Optional: A primary display. Generally this is a KDM-R2 keypad/display behind a DP-DISP2 or ADP2-640 dress panel. For
information on using NCA-2 as primary display instead of KDM-R2, see Section 3.5.2 “Using XLS-NCA2 as Primary Display”
and the NCA-2 Manual.
4. A backbox and door:
SBB-A4 and DR-A4 (one row of equipment) or
SBB-B4 and DR-B4 (two rows of equipment) or
SBB-C4 and DR-C4 (three rows of equipment) or
SBB-D4 and DR-D4 (four rows of equipment)
(For a solid-metal door add “B” to the part number; for a red door add “R”.)
5. A battery dress panel BP2-4 is required.
6. Batteries (Refer to Appendix A.3 “Calculating the Battery Requirements” for system current-draw calculations; CAB-4 series
backboxes holds batteries up to 26 AH maximum.)
Refer to Section 2.4, “Compatible Equipment” for other peripherals listed for use with this FACP.

2.2.2 Control Panel Circuit Board

The control panel electronics are contained on one printed circuit board that incorporates a signaling line circuit (SLC) and the central
processing unit (CPU). The built-in power supply includes an integral battery charger. A keypad/display unit can be installed over the
power supply; see Figure 2.1. Wiring connections and system components are detailed in Figures 2.2 and 2.3.

Displayed Behind
DP-DISP2

DP-DISP2.wmf

Mounted in NFS2-
640/E Chassis
(with no
peripherals)
CPU2-640-

Figure 2.1 NFS2-640/E Control Panel with Optional Keypad/Display Unit Installed

2.2.3 Main Power Supply (CPS-24/E)

The main power supply is an integral part of the NFS2-640/E and mounts directly over the control panel’s circuit board. It provides a
total of 3 A (6 A in alarm) and contains an integral battery charger. This can be used for many functions including:

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 11

System Overview System Components

• Powering the NFS2-640/E

• Powering a variety of UL-listed 24 VDC notification appliances from four built-in NAC outputs
• Providing up to 1.25 A of resettable power for four-wire smoke detectors
• Providing up to 1.25 A of non-resettable power for external devices such as the TM-4 Transmitter Module.
• Providing auxiliary 24 VDC power @ 0.5A and 5 VDC power @ 0.15A.
• Fuse: 8 amps, 250 V, 5 x 20 mm, Fast-Acting, ceramic, p/n 12117.
When AC Power is lost, the deeply-discharged battery cutoff protection will be invoked at 17 volts. The power supply will be discon-
nected from the batteries. The power supply’s normal operation will be restored when AC power returns.
See Figure 2.2, “CPU2-640/CPU2-640E and Power-Supply: Wiring Connections” and Figure 2.3, “CPU2-640/CPU2-640E and Power-
Supply: Jumpers, LEDs and Switches” for details.

12 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

 TB10 - DC Power
(24 VDC power-limited)
Resettable TB11 - EIA-485 ACS Mode Connection (supervised)
System Components

Non-resettable
(See Figure 3.16 on page 36) TB12 - EIA-232 Printer Connection (Figures 3.25 & 3.26)
TB12 - EIA-232 PC/Terminal Connection (CRT)
(Figure 3.27)
J1 - Network/Service Connection (NUP)
(power-limited, supervised)

J2 - USB A VeriFire Tools Connection

J3 - USB B VeriFire Tools Connection
TB13 - SLC Loop

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

All NAC Circuits: power- #1 (supervised,
2.2.4 Circuit Board Components

limited, supervised power-limited)

(Figure 3.21 on page 39) (Figure 3.29)

TB9 - NAC#1

TB3 - Battery Connection

TB8 - NAC#2
(over-current protected, non-power-limited)

TB7 - NAC#3
TB2 - Secondary Power Auxiliary Outputs
(power-limited)
TB6 - NAC#4
for larger images and more details. (Larger images are referenced on these drawings.)

Hot TB1 - AC Power Connection (non-

power-limited)
Neutral

Earth Ground J4 - LEM-320 Connector

for (SLC Loop #2)

TB5 -
Supervisory Relay
Security Relay

Figure 2.2 CPU2-640/CPU2-640E and Power-Supply: Wiring Connections

TB4 -
CPU2640-KAPS-

Alarm Relay
Trouble Relay
Output Relays - power-limited only if connected to a power-
limited source. (See Section 3.9 for details.) J7 - KDM-R2
Connection J5 - Security Tamper Switch
J6 - Auxiliary Trouble Input
and its power supply. Figure 2.2 shows wiring connections; Figure 2.3 shows jumpers, LEDs and switches. See Section 3 “Installation”
The following two figures illustrate the location of the various connections, switches, jumpers and LEDs on the CPU2-640/CPU2-640E

13
System Overview
14
JP1 - Ground Fault
Jumper (SLC#1)
System Overview

NAC
LEDs

LED5 - +24V Aux LED

LED6 - +5V Aux LED

LED1 - Logic Power LED

LED2 - Trouble LED

LED3 - Earth Fault LED (general board ground fault)
SW1 - Ground Fault Detection Enable/Disable

LED4 - AC Power LED

LED10 – SLC Loop 1
Ground Fault LED
F4 - AC Fuse LED9 – SLC Loop 2
Ground Fault LED
CPU2640-KAPS-2.wmf, CPU2-640-LEDs.wmf

Disable - Enable Switches for System Switches for No-

Backup Alarm (Figure 3.10) Keyboard Operation
SW5 - Acknowledge
SW6 - Silence
SW7 - Reset

LED1 - Power-on LED (AC or battery)

LED2 - Signals Silenced LED

Figure 2.3 CPU2-640/CPU2-640E and Power-Supply: Jumpers, LEDs and Switches

LED3 - Point Disabled LED
LED4 - System Trouble LED
LED5 - Supervisory LED
LED6 - Security LED
LED7 - Pre-Alarm LED
LED8 - Fire Alarm LED

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

System Components
System Cabinets System Overview

2.3 System Cabinets

The control panel and modules are installed in a CAB-4 series backbox . There are four different sizes available, holding from one to
four rows of equipment plus batteries (up to two 26 AH batteries). Backboxes are ordered separately from doors. The doors can be
mounted on the left or the right side of the cabinet; reversible hinges are provided so that this choice can be made in the field. Doors open
a full 180 degrees and have locks. Mounting methods include surface-mounting or semi-flush mounting on a wall between 16 inch
(40.64 cm) on-center studs. A trim ring option is available for semi-flush mounting.
External measurements for each backbox are provided below; door dimensions are larger. Refer to CAB-3/CAB-4 Series Cabinet Instal-
lation Document (shipped with the cabinet) for specific mounting drawings and door dimensions.
A-size backbox (one 24.00 in (60.96 cm) wide Optional trim ring TR-A4
row) 20.00 in (50.8 cm) tall Opening: 24.062 in (61.118 cm) wide;
5.218 in (13.254 cm) deep 20.062 in (50.881 cm) tall.
Uses optional trim ring TR-A4 Molding width: 1.375 in (3.493 cm)
B-size backbox (two 24.00 in (60.96 cm) wide Optional trim ring TR-B4
rows) 28.5 in (72.39 cm) tall Opening: 24.062 in (61.118 cm) wide;
5.218 in (13.254 cm) deep 28.562 in (72.548 cm) tall.
Uses optional trim ring TR-B4 Molding width: 1.375 in (3.493 cm)
C-size backbox 24.00 in (60.96 cm) wide Optional trim ring TR-C4
(three rows) 37.125 in (94.297 cm) tall Opening: 24.062 in (61.118 cm) wide;
5.218 in (13.254 cm) deep 37.187 in (94.455 cm) tall.
Uses optional trim ring TR-C4 Molding width: 1.375 in (3.493 cm)
D-size backbox (four 24.00 in (60.96 cm) wide Optional trim ring TR-D4
rows) 45.75 in (1162.05 cm) tall Opening: 24.062 in (61.118 cm) wide;
5.218 in (13.254 cm) deep 45.812 in (114.775 cm) tall.
Uses optional trim ring TR-D4 Molding width: 1.375 in (3.493 cm)
Trim Rings: When using trim rings, mount backbox with at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) between wall surface and front of backbox, to
allow door to open fully past the trim ring.

For details on mounting options within the cabinet, see Section 3.4, “Laying Out Equipment in Cabinet and Chassis”.

2.4 Compatible Equipment

These are the most common devices at time of publishing; the most complete list of compatible intelligent SLC loop devices is provided
in the SLC Wiring Manual; for conventional non-addressable equipment see the Device Compatibility Document. These devices are UL
and ULC listed unless marked otherwise (in parentheses next to the product). Other control panels and their equipment can also be con-
nected in a network, via Noti•Fire•Net version 5.0 or the High-Speed Noti•Fire•Net; refer to the Noti•Fire•Net Version 5.0 & Higher
Installation Manual or the High-Speed Noti•Fire•Net Installation Manual for details. For products documented separately, see
Section 1.3 “Related Documents”.

WARNING: UL 9TH COMPLIANCE

! THIS PRODUCT HAS BEEN CERTIFIED TO COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS IN THE STANDARD FOR CONTROL
UNITS AND ACCESSORIES FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS, UL 864 9TH EDITION. OPERATION OF THE NFS2-640/E
WITH PRODUCTS NOT TESTED FOR UL 864 9TH EDITION HAS NOT BEEN EVALUATED AND MAY NOT COMPLY
WITH NFPA 72 AND/OR THE LATEST EDITION OF UL 864. THESE APPLICATIONS WILL REQUIRE THE APPROVAL
OF THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION (AHJ).
PERIPHERAL DEVICES IN THE SECOND LIST WERE LISTED UNDER UL 8TH EDITION AND MAY ONLY BE USED IN
RETROFIT APPLICATIONS (SEE SECTION 1.2, “UL 864 COMPLIANCE”, ON PAGE 8).

Notifier® Compatible Equipment

• “A” or “CDN” suffix indicates a ULC Listed model.
• “IV” suffix indicates ivory color and is a FlashScan and CLIP device
• Products marked with a check mark have not received UL 864 9th Edition certification and may only be used in retrofit
applications.
• The wireless option is not suitable for ULC.
Electronic Equipment
AA-100 100-Watt Audio Amplifier AcclimatePlus FAPT-851 Combination Photoelectric/Heat Detector
AA-120 120-Watt Audio Amplifier AEM-24AT Annunciator Expander Module
AA-30 30-Watt Audio Amplifier AEM-48A Annunciator Expander Module
ACM-24AT Annunciator Control Module AKS-1B Annunciator Key Switch
ACM-48A Annunciator Control Module APJ-1B Annunciator Phone Jack-G
ACM-8R Annunciator Control Module APS2-6R Auxiliary Power Supply (for UL applications only)
ACPS-610 Addressable Charger/Power Supply A77-716B End-of-Line Resistor Assembly
ACPS2-6R Auxiliary Power Supply B200S Intelligent Programmable Sounder Base
ACT-1 Audio Coupling Transformer B200S-IV Intelligent Programmable Sounder Base Ivory
ACT-2 Audio Coupling Transformer B200S-WH Intelligent Programmable Sounder Base White
AcclimatePlus FAPT-751 Combination Photoelectric/Heat Detector B200S-LF Low-Frequency Intelligent Programmable Sounder Base

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 15

System Overview Compatible Equipment

B200S-LF-IV Low-Frequency Intelligent Programmable Sounder Base Ivory FCO-851 Fire/CO Detector
B200S-LF-WH Low-Frequency Intelligent Programmable Sounder Base White FCO-951(A) Carbon Monoxide Sensors
B200SA Intelligent Sounder Base FCO-951(A)-IV Carbon Monoxide Sensors Ivory
B200SA-IV Intelligent Sounder Base Ivory FCPS-24S6/S8 Field Charger/Power Supply
B200SA-WH Intelligent Sounder Base White FDM-1 Dual Monitor Module
B200SCOA Intelligent Programmable Sounder Base FDRM-1 Dual Monitor/Dual Relay
B200SCOA-IV Intelligent Programmable Sounder Base Ivory FDX-551 Intelligent Thermal Sensor
B200SCOA-WH Intelligent Programmable Sounder Base White FDX-551R Intelligent Thermal Rate-of-Rise Sensor
B200SR Intelligent Sounder Base FHS Fireman's Handset
B200SR-IV Intelligent Sounder Base Ivory FMM-1 Monitor Module
B200SR-WH Intelligent Sounder Base White FMM-101 Mini Monitor Module
B200SR-LF Low-Frequency Intelligent Sounder Base FMM-4-20 Monitor Module
B200SR-LF-IV Low-Frequency Intelligent Sounder Base Ivory FPC-951(A) Multi Criteria PHOTO/CO Detector
B200SR-LF-WH Low-Frequency Intelligent Sounder Base White FPJ Fireman's Phone Jack
B200SRA Intelligent Sounder Base FPTI-951(A) Multi-Criteria Photoelectric, Thermal and Infrared Sensor
B200SRA-IV Intelligent Sounder Base Ivory FPTI-951(A)-IV Multi-Criteria Photoelectric, Thermal and Infrared Sensor Ivory
B200SRA-WH Intelligent Sounder Base White FRM-1 Relay Module
B210LP Flange Mounted Base FSA-5000/A (FAAST XS) Intelligent Aspiration detector
B210LPA ULC Flange Mounted Base FSA-8000/A (FAAST XM) Intelligent Aspiration detector
B210LPBP Bulk Pack of B300-6. Package of 10 FSA-20000/A (FAAST XT) Intelligent Aspiration detector
B224BI Isolator Bases for Low-profile Detectors FSA-20000P (FAAST XT PRO) Intelligent Aspiration detector
B224BI-IV Isolator Bases for Low-profile detectors Ivory FSA-851A Intelligent Aspiration Detector - 06-NF10 Baffle for the FSA-851A
B224BI-WH Isolator Bases for Low-profile detectors White FSB-200S Single Ended Beam Smoke Detector With Sensitivity Testing
B224BIA Isolator Base for Low-profile detectors FSB-200 Single Ended Beam Smoke Detector
B224BIA-IV Isolator Base for Low-profile detectors Ivory FSC-851 IntelliQuad Multi-Criteria Smoke Detector
B224BIA-WH Isolator Base for Low-profile detectors White FSCO-951(A) Carbon Monoxide Sensor
B224RB Low-profile Relay Base FSD-751P/RP/PL Duct Detectors
B224RB-IV Low-profile Relay base Ivory FSH-751 HARSH™ Photo Detector
B224RB-WH Low-profile Relay base White FSI-751 Ion Detector
B224RBA Low-profile Relay base FSI-851 Ion Detector
B244RBA-IV Low-profile Relay base Ivory FSL-751 FlashScan VIEW® Laser Detector
B244RBA-WH Low-profile Relay base White FSM-101 Pull Station Monitor Module
B300-6 Intelligent Detector Base 6 Inch White FS-OSI-RI(A) Intelligent Single Ended Reflected Type Projected Imaging Beam
B300-6-IV Intelligent Detector Base 6 Inch Ivory Smoke Detector
B300A-6 Intelligent Detector Base 6 Inch White Canada FSP-751 Photo Detector
B300A-6-IV Intelligent Base 6 Inch Ivory Canada FSP-751T Photo/Thermal Detector
BX-501 Intelligent Detectors/Sensors Base FSP-851 Photo Detector, listed for use in ducts
B501 USA Intelligent Detector Base FSP-851T Photo/heat Detector, listed for use in ducts
B501A ULC Intelligent Detector Base FST-751 Thermal Detector
B501BH-2 Sounder Base FST-751R Thermal Rate-of-rise Detector
B501BHT-2 Temporal Sounder Base FST-851 Thermal Detector
B501-White Intelligent Detector Base White FST-851H High-temperature Thermal Detector
B501-BL Intelligent Detector Base Black FST-851R Thermal Rate-of-rise Detector
B501-IV Intelligent Detector Base Ivory FSP-951 Photo Detector
B710HD HARSH Detector Base FSP-951-IV Photo Detector/Dual Protocol Ivory
B710LP European Intelligent Detector Base FSP-951R Photo RAT
BAT-12120 Battery 12-volt, 12 amp-hour FSP-951R-IV Photo RAT/Dual Protocol Ivory
BAT-12180 Battery 12-volt, 18 amp-hour FSP-951P Photo/Thermal
BAT-12250 Battery 12-volt, 25 amp-hour FSP-951T-IV Photo/Thermal/Dual Protocol Ivory
BAT-12260 Battery 12-volt, 26 amp-hour FST-951 Programmable Heat
BAT-12550 Battery 12-volt, 55 amp-hour FST-951-IV Programmable Heat/Dual Protocol Ivory
BAT-12600 Battery 12-volt, 60 amp-hour
BDA-25V/75V Backup Amplifier FST-951R Heat Detector Rate of Rise
CK300 Color Kit White FST-951R-IV Heat Detector Rate of Rise/Dual Protocol Ivory
CK300-IR Color Kit White with IR Opening FST-951H Heat Detector High
CK300-IV Color Kit Ivory FST-951H-IV Heat Detector High/Dual Protocol Ivory
CK300-IR-IV Color Kit Ivory with IR Opening FSV-951(A) Intelligent High Sensitivity Photoelectric Smoke Detector
CK300-BL Color Kit Black FSV-951(A)-IV Intelligent High Sensitivity Photoelectric Smoke Detector Ivory
CK300-IR-BL Color Kit Black with IR Opening FSV-951RA Intelligent High Sensitivity Photoelectric Smoke Detector Retrofit
CMM-1 Communication converter Module FSV-951RA-IV Intelligent High Sensitivity Photoelectric Smoke Detector Retrofit
Ivory
CMX-1 Addressable Control Module
FTM-1 Telephone Module
CMX-2 Addressable Control Module
FW-MM Wireless Monitor Module
CPU2-640/E Control Panel Circuit Board
FW-RM Wireless Relay
CPX-551 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector
FWD-200ACCLIMATE Wireless Acclimate detector
CPX-751 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector
FWD-200P Wireless photo detector
CRT-2 Video Display Monitor With Keyboard
FWH-200FIX135 Wireless, fixed-temperature heat detector
DAA Series Digital Audio Amplifiers
FWH-200ROR135 Wireless, rate-of-rise heat detector
DAA2 Series Digital Audio Amplifier
FWSG Wireless Gateway
DAX Digital Audio Amplifier
FZM-1 Zone Module
DHX-501 Duct Detector
HPX-751 HARSH™ Hostile Environment Smoke Detector
DHX-502 Duct Detector
HS-NCM-MF High-Speed Network Communications Module (Multi-Mode Fiber)
DNR/W/A Intelligent Non-Relay Photoelectric Duct Detector
HS-NCM-MFSF High-Speed Network Communications Module (Multi-Mode
DPI-232 Direct Panel Interface Fiber to Single-Mode Fiber)
DS-AMP Audio Amplifier HS-NCM-SF High-Speed Network Communications Module (Single-Mode Fiber)
DS-BDA Backup Audio Amplifier HS-NCM-W High-Speed Network Communications Module (Wire)
DS-DB Digital Distribution Board HS-NCM-WMF High-Speed Network Communications Module (Wire to Multi-
DS-XF70V Transformer Mode Fiber)
DVC-AO Digital Voice Command Audio Output HS-NCM-WSF High-Speed Network Communications Module (Wire to Single-
DVC-EM Digital Voice Command Mode Fiber)
DVC-RPU DVC Remote Paging Unit HWF2A-COM IP Digital Alarm Communicator
FCM-1 NAC Module HWF2A-COM IP Digital Alarm Communicator
FCM-1-REL Control Module

16 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Compatible Equipment System Overview

ISO-X Loop Fault Isolator Module RA100Z Remote Annunciator with diode
ISO-6/A Six Fault Isolator Module RA400 Remote Annunciator
LCD-80 Liquid Crystal Display Module RPJ-1 Remote Phone Jack
LCD2-80 Liquid Crystal Display Module RPT-485SF EIA-485 Repeater (Fiber)
LDM-E32 Lamp Driver Module Ivory RPT-485W EIA-485 Repeater (Wire)
LDM-R32 Lamp Driver Module RPT-485WF EIA-485 Repeater (Wire/Fiber)
LDM-32 Lamp Driver Module RM-1 Remote Microphone
LEM-320 Loop Expander Module RM-1SA Remote Microphone
LDM-E32 Lamp Driver Module Ivory SCS-8, SCE-8 Smoke Control System
LDM-R32 Lamp Driver Module SDX-551 Intelligent Photoelectric Detector
LDM-32 Lamp Driver Module SDX-551TH Intelligent Photoelectric and Thermal Detector
LEM-320/A Loop Expander Module SDX-751 Intelligent Photoelectric Detector
MMX-1 Addressable Monitor Module SLC-IM Signaling Line Circuit Integration Module (FlashScan)
MMX-2 Addressable Monitor Module STS-1 Security Tamper Switch (Not ULC-listed)
MMX-101 Addressable Mini Monitor Module TM-4 Transmitter Module
MRD-1 Manual Releasing Disconnect Assembly TR300 Trim Ring White
N-ELR Assortment ELR Pack with Mounting Plate TR300-IV Trim Ring Ivory
NBG-12 Series Addressable Manual Pull Station UDACT/UDACT-2 Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter
NBG-12LRA - Agent Release Abort Station UZC-256 Universal Zone Coder
NBG-12LX Addressable Manual Pull Stations VEP-A00-P-NTF Addressable VESDA-E VEP with LEDs
NBG-12LXP Portuguese Labeled Addressable Pull Station VEP-A10-P-NTF Addressable VESDA-E VEP with 3.5"Display
NBG12LXSP Spanish Labeled Addressable Pull Station VEP-A00-1P-NTF Addressable VESDA-E VEP 1 Pipe with LEDs
NCA-2/C Network Communications Annunciator VEU-A00-NTF Addressable VESDA-E VEU with LEDs
NCD Network Control Display VEU-A10-NTF Addressable VESDA-E VEU with 3.5" Display
NCM-F Network Communications Module (Fiber) VEA-040-A00-NTF Addressable VESDA-E VEA-40 point with LEDs
NCM-W Network Communications Module (Wire) VEA-040-A10-NTF Addressable VESDA-E VEA-40 point with 3.5" Display
NCO-200 Carbon Monoxide Sensor XPIQ Quad Intelligent Audio Transponder (Audio Applications)
NCS Network Control Station XP10-M Ten Input Monitor Module
N-MPS MPS Series Pull Station XP6-C Supervised Control Module
NFV Notifier FireVoice 25/50 XP6-MA Six Zone Interface Module
NP-200C PHOTO/CO Detector XP6-R Six Relay Control Module
ONYXWorks® Workstation Network Monitoring Workstation
PRN-6 80-Column Printer System Sensor Devices
PRN-7 80-Column Printer A2143-00 End of Line Resistor Assembly
R-120 120 Ohm End-of-Line Resistor EOLR-1 End of Line Resistor Assembly
R-2.2K 2.2K End-of-Line Resistor
R-27K 27K End-of-Line Resistor
R-470 470 End-of-Line Resistor
R-47K 47K End-of-Line Resistor

Backboxes, Chassis, Dress Panels, etc.

BF-1B/C Annunciator Flush Box ABS-1TB/C Annunciator Surface Box
ABF-1DB/C Annunciator Flush Box with Door ABS-2B Annunciator Surface Box
ABF-2B Annunciator Flush Box ABS-2D/C Annunciator Surface Box
ABF-2DB/C Annunciator Flush Box with Door ABS-4D/C Annunciator Surface Box
ABF-4B Annunciator Flush Box ABS-8RB Annunciator Backbox for ACM-8R
ABM-16AT Annunciator Blank Module ADP2-640 Dress Panel: NFS2-640/E in lower row
ABM-32A Annunciator Module Blank ADP-4B Annunciator Dress Panel
ABS-1TB Annunciator Surface Box BMP-1 Blank Module Plate
ABS-1B/C Annunciator Surface Box BP2-4 Battery Dress Plate

Retrofit Equipment: Compatible NotifierEquipment Listed Under Previous Editions of UL 864

NOTE: The products in this list have not received UL 864 9th Edition certification and may only be used in retrofit applications.

ACM-16AT Annunciator Control Module MMX-1 Addressable Monitor Module

ACM-32A Annunciator Control Module NCA Network Communications Annunciator
ACPS-2406 Auxiliary Charger/Power Supply PRN-4, PRN-5 80-Column Printers
AEM-16AT Annunciator Expander Module RFX Wireless Transmitter (version 2.0 and higher)
AEM-32A Annunciator Expander Module SDRF-751 Wireless Photo/Thermal Smoke Detector (Not ULC-listed)
AFM-16A Annunciator Fixed Module VS4095 Keltron Printer (Dress plate P-40) (Not ULC-listed)
AFM-32A Annunciator Fixed Module XPIQ Quad Intelligent Audio Transponder (NAC Applications)
AMG-1/E Audio Message Generator XP5-C Transponder Control Module
APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply XP5-M Transponder Monitor Module
B501BH/B501BHT Sounder Base XPC-8 Transponder Control Module
BGX-101L Addressable Manual Pull Station XPM-8 Transponder Monitor Module
CHG-120 Battery Charger XPM-8L Transponder Monitor Module
FCPS-24 Field Charger/Power Supply XPP-1 Transponder Processor
IPX-751 Advanced Multi-Sensor Intelligent Detector XPR-8 Transponder Relay Module

Table 2.1 Notifier Compatible Equipment Chart 3 of 3

Refer to document 15378, Device Compatibility Document, and document 51253, SLC Signaling Line Circuit Manual, for a list of other
devices compatible with this FACP.

NOTE: The FWSG Wireless Gateway as part of the wireless network has been tested for compliance with the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) requirements of the United States Government. This product has not been evaluated for use outside the USA. Use of
this system outside the USA is subject to local laws and rules to which this product may not conform. It is the sole responsibility of the user
to determine if this product may be legally used outside the USA.

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 17

 Section 3: Installation
3.1 Preparing for Installation
Choose a location for the fire alarm system that is clean, dry, and vibration-free with moderate temperature. The area should be readily
accessible with sufficient room to easily install and maintain it. There should be sufficient space for cabinet door(s) to open completely.
Carefully unpack the system and inspect for shipping damage. Count the number of conductors needed for all devices and find the appro-
priate knockouts. (Refer to Section 3.11 “UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements” for selection guidelines.)
Before installing the fire alarm system, read the following:
• Review the installation precautions at the front of this manual, including temperature and humidity limits for the system (Page 3).
• All wiring must comply with the National and Local codes for fire alarm systems.
• Do not draw wiring into the bottom 9 inches (22.86 cm) of the cabinet except when using a separate battery cabinet; this space is for
internal battery installation.
• Review installation instructions in Section 3.2 “Installation Checklist”.

CAUTION: Make sure to install system components in the sequence listed below. Failure to do so can damage the control
! panel and other system components.

WARNING: This system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before
! handling any circuits. Use static-suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the unit.

3.1.1 Standards and Codes

In addition, installers should be familiar with the following standards and codes:
• NEC Article 300 Wiring Methods.
• NEC Article 760 Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
• Applicable Local and State Building Codes.
• Requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
• C22.1-98 The Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1.
• CAN/ULC-S5524-01 Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems.

18 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Installation Checklist Installation

3.2 Installation Checklist

Table 3.1 provides an installation checklist for installing, wiring, and testing the NFS2-640/E system. It has references to installation
information included in manuals listed in Section 1.3 “Related Documents”.
Seq Task Refer to
1. Mount the cabinet backbox to the wall. Section 3.3 “Mounting a Cabinet”
2. Install hinges for door CAB-3/CAB-4 Series Cabinet Installation Document
3. Install all required chassis in cabinet. Section 3.5 “Installing the Control Panel”
4. Install control panel onto chassis. Section 3.5.1 “Control Panel Circuit Board &
Keypad/Display Unit”
5. Optional: Install auxiliary power supply and/or external Auxiliary power manuals
battery charger
6. Connect AC wiring, place batteries into backbox without Section 3.7 “Connecting the Power Cables”
connecting them, and run cable to optional power supplies,
DC power outputs, NACs, and relays.
CAUTION: Do not apply AC or DC power at this time.
7. Set switches for backup alarm (SW1-SW4). Section 3.10 “Backup-Alarm Switches”
8. Optional: Install option boards, annunciators, network Section 3.6, “Mounting Option Boards”, the relevant
equipment, and Audio components annunciator/network-card manual, DVC Manual, and DVC-
RPU Manual.
9. Optional: Install output devices such as a printer, or CRT Section 3.13 “Installing Remote Printers and/or CRT”
terminal.
10. Optional: Install NCA-2, NCD, NCS or ONYXWorks. NCA-2 Manual, NCD Manual, NCS Manual or ONYXWorks
Manual
11. Secure any unused mounting holes in control panel Figure 3.8
circuit board.
12. Wire the Signaling Line Circuits. Section 3.14 “Wiring a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)”
13. Terminate wire shielding as instructed. SLC Wiring Manual
14. Apply AC power to the control panel by placing the external circuit breaker to the ON position.
Do NOT connect batteries.
15. Check AC power. Table 3.5 in Section 3.7 “Connecting the Power Cables”
16. Connect the batteries using interconnect cable, P/N 75560 and 75561.
17. Install the CAB-4 series door. CAB-3/CAB-4 Series
Cabinet Installation Document
18. Program the control panel. NFS2-640/E Programming Manual
19. Field test the system. Section 5 “Testing the System”

Table 3.1 Installation Checklist

3.3 Mounting a Cabinet

This section provides instructions for mounting a CAB-4 Series backbox to a wall. Follow these guidelines when mounting the backbox:
• Locate the backbox so that the top edge is 66 inches (1.6764 m) above the surface of the finished floor.
• Access to the cabinet shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 90, article 110.33.
• Allow sufficient clearance around cabinet for door to swing freely. (See Section 2.3 “System Cabinets”.)
• Use the four holes in the back surface of the backbox to provide secure mounting. (See Figure 3.1.)
• Mount the backbox on a surface that is in a clean, dry, vibration-free area.

CAUTION: Unless you are familiar with the placement of components within this backbox, only use the knockout locations
! provided for conduit entry.

Follow the instructions below.

1. Mark and pre-drill holes for the top two keyhole mounting bolts (0.25 inch, 0.635 cm). Use mounting hardware appropriate for the
mounting surfaces and weight of loaded cabinet; see UL 2017 Pull-Test Requirements.
2. Select and punch open the appropriate knock-outs. (For selection guidelines, see Section 3.11 “UL Power-limited Wiring
Requirements”.)
3. Using the keyholes, mount the backbox over the two screws.
4. Mark the location for the two lower holes, remove the backbox and drill the mounting holes.
5. Mount the backbox over the top two screws, then install the remaining fasteners. Tighten all fasteners securely.
6. Feed wires through appropriate knockouts.

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 19

Installation Laying Out Equipment in Cabinet and Chassis

7. Install control panel and other components according to Section 3.5 “Installing the Control Panel” before installing hinges and door
according to CAB-3/CAB-4 Series Cabinet Installation Document.

CAB-4
Series
CAB-4
Backbox,
Series Keyholes

nfs640cabinetmountingholes.wmf
D-size
Backbox, 2 places
(four-row)
A-size (one-
row)
Mounting holes
2 places

Figure 3.1 Mounting Holes of a Backbox

3.4 Laying Out Equipment in Cabinet and Chassis

The NFS2-640/E allows for flexible system design. Backboxes are available to hold up to four rows of equipment (four chassis), plus
batteries. Each chassis has four “slots” -- the basic positions available side by side on a chassis. The number of modules that can be
mounted in each position depends on the chassis model and the module size.
Follow these guidelines when deciding where to locate equipment in the backbox.
The NFS2-640/E control panel and adjacent first-row modules mount in the NFS2-640 chassis, typically installed in the first/top row of
the backbox behind DP-DISP2. (Use ADP2-640 if mounting NFS2-640 chassis in a lower row.) NFS2-640 chassis holds four layers of
equipment, including the control panel. See Figure 3.3. The primary display (KDM-R2, NCD or NCA-2) mounts in front of NFS2-
640/E.
The CPU mounts in the NFS2-640 chassis behind DP-DISP2 (top row) or ADP2-640 (lower row). The control panel fills three positions
in the first-installed layer against the chassis; its power supply occupies two positions on top of the control panel; and the optional dis-
play occupies two positions in the fourth layer (flush with the dress panel).
Mount second, third, or fourth rows of equipment in other compatible chassis, such as chassis CHS-4L, CA-1, or CA-2. (See Table 3.3,
“Chassis Compatibility,” on page 23.) For details on audio equipment see the DVC Manual.
Option boards use standard mounting hole positions to allow them to be mounted in various locations and layers, depending on the
desired system configuration. (See Table 3.2 to determine hardware.) Some equipment such as annunciators may be mounted on a dress
panel directly in front of the control panel. The BMP-1 Blank Module Plate covers unused positions in a dress-panel, also providing an
additional mounting location for some option boards, such as TM-4 (see BMP-1 Product Installation Drawing for details).
Annunciators can be mounted in dress panels such as ADP-4B; one or two annunciators can be installed in the DP-DISP2 or ADP2-640
with the control panel. Installing the BMP-1 blank plate in these dress panels provides an additional mounting location for option boards.
Refer to the equipment’s documentation for details.
Install BP2-4 Battery Plate in front of the battery compartment in NFS2-640/E installations and provides Protected Premises Unit labels.

NOTE: The BP2-4 is required for NFS2-640/E installations due to UL’s revised labeling requirements. If using NFS2-640/E
in retrofits, order BP2-4 to replace previous BP-4 battery dress panels.
If DP-DISP2 is not being used in the top row of the backbox, install VP-2B above the first row to cover the remaining space.

20 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Laying Out Equipment in Cabinet and Chassis Installation

NOTE: When designing the cabinet layout, consider separation of power-limited and non-power-limited wiring as discussed in Section
3.11 “UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements.”

Slot 1 (CPU, CPS-24, and

primary display)

Slot 2 (CPU, CPS-24,

and primary display)

Slot 3 (Mounting location

for LEM-320) or other
Keypad/display option board
unit attaches to
chassis rails Slot 4 Mounting location for
option boards and other
compatible peripherals
(Recommended mounting
location for fiber versions of the
NCM and HS-NCM)

CHS2-M2iso.wmf
Also see Figure 3.3, “Top View of
NFS2-640/E Chassis Mounting

Figure 3.2 Side View of the NFS2-640/E Chassis Mounting Options

Up to two option boards Up to three option boards

(Including LEM-320 if used) (2 only if longer standoffs
Keyhole are used)
Backbox

Chassis Keyhole
CPU
CPS-24/E
DP-DISP2
(or ADP2-640
if in lower row) Left Annunciator Primary Display KDM- Right Annunciator
(mounts to dress panel) R2 or NCA-2 (mounts (mounts to dress panel)
to chassis)
CHS2-

Option boards
Mounted on BMP-1

Figure 3.3 Top View of NFS2-640/E Chassis Mounting Options

When installing the Network Control Display (NCD) into the NFS2-640 chassis, it can only be left mounted because of the position of
the grounding screw.

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 21

Installation Laying Out Equipment in Cabinet and Chassis

Backbox

CPS-24/E

NCDMounting1.w
Dress Panel
NCD
Option boards
Mounted on BMP-1

Figure 3.4 Top View of Mounting an NCD in the NFS2-640 Chassis

NCD Annunciators, which are connected to the Fire Alarm Control Panel

Figure 3.5 Top View of Mounting an NCD with Annunciators

NOTE: See the NCD Manual LS10210-051NF-E for more information.

22 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Laying Out Equipment in Cabinet and Chassis Installation

From… To… Required Stand-off or Hardware

NFS2-640/E chassis Control panel or Attaches directly to chassis.
option board on first layer
NFS2-640/E chassis Keypad/display unit Attaches directly to chassis rails.
NFS2-640/E chassis NCA-2, NCD Attaches directly to chassis rails with mounting hardware NCA/640-2-KIT (ordered
separately)
Control panel Any option board in third slot 4 male-female stand-offs 1 inch (25.4 mm) P/N 42118; installed and shipped with
(third slot) (such as LEM-320) CPU2-640/CPU2-640E.
Option board or NFS2- Option board in next layer (not 4 male-female stand-offs either 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) P/N 42175 or 0.937 inch (23.8
640/E chassis (fourth slot) including LEM-320) mm) P/N 42166, both shipped with option boards. Choose stand-off length that
allows space for your option board’s connectors; using longer stand-offs may
reduce the number of option boards that fit in the chassis position.
Chassis or Dress Panel Annunciator Attaches directly to dress panels or attaches to flanges on chassis CHS-4/4N.
(Screws provided with annunciator.)
Dress panels Option board BMP-1 attaches to dress panel; option module attaches to BMP-1. (Screws
DP-DISP2, ADP2-640, provided with option module). See Figure 3.9.
ADP-4B
Dress panel ADP-4B NCA-2 Use “NCA-2 RETRO kit” hardware if mounting NCA-2 to a dress panel; cannot be
mounted in front of the NFS2-640/E chassis.

Table 3.2 Stand-off Lengths

Product Chassis/Door-mounting options

NFS2-640/E • NFS2-640/E chassis

NCA-2, NCD • CHS-M2, NFS2-640/E chassis, CHS-M3

• CA-2; requires two rows in the backbox

DVC • CA-1
• CA-2

DVC-RPU • CA-1

DAA • Factory-mounted in its own chassis.

Analog audio amplifiers AA-30, AA-100, AA-120 • Mounts directly onto CAB-4 backbox

Option boards • NFS2-640/E chassis, CHS-4, CHS-4L, CHS-4N (shipped as part of kit CHS-4MB), or on BMP-
1 inside dress plate
• Note: Mount LEM-320 in front of CPU2-640 in the NFS2-640/E chassis.
• Note: Mount UDACT/UDACT-2 in second or lower row, or in
slot 4 of the NFS2-640/E chassis with nothing in front of it.
• Note: Mount fiber versions of the NCM and HS-NCM in the top row under knockouts, to avoid
excessive bend on the fiber-optic cable.

ACS series annunciators ACM-24AT, ACM-48A and • Dress Panel DP-DISP2, ADP2-640, or ADP-4B
expanders

Table 3.3 Chassis Compatibility

NOTE: In retrofit applications, the CAB-e series backbox may be used, but order BP2-4 to replace previous BP-4 battery dress panels.

Typical Backbox Location(s)

Chassis/Dress plate
in CAB-4 Backboxes

NFS2-640/E chassis Top row of backbox typical; lower rows also possible.

CA-1 Second or lower row of backbox

CA-2 Requires two rows of backbox

CHS-4, CHS-4L, CHS-4N Second or lower row of backbox

DPA-2 Dress Panel Mounts in front of CA-2 covering two rows of the backbox

DP-DISP2 Dress Panel Mounts in front of the NFS2-640/E chassis in top row of backbox

ADP2-640 Dress Panel Mounts in front of NFS2-640/E chassis in second or lower row of backbox

ADP-4B Dress Panel Mounts in front of any chassis

Table 3.4 Chassis Locations in CAB-4 Backboxes

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 23

Installation Installing the Control Panel

3.5 Installing the Control Panel

3.5.1 Control Panel Circuit Board & Keypad/Display Unit
The control panel comes pre-mounted in the NFS2-640/E chassis, which is usually positioned in the top row of the backbox. The control
panel’s CPU occupies three positions at the back of the chassis; the KDM-R2 occupies three positions flush with the dress panel. The
NCA-2 may be mounted directly in front of the control panel if no KDM-R2 is being used; use NCA/640-2-KIT as described in the
NCA-2 Installation Manual.

Figure 3.6 NFS2-640/E Chassis Mounting

Perform the following steps when installing the NFS2-640/E:

1. Screw chassis to the backbox.†
2. If installing KDM-R2 as primary display:
• Attach ribbon cable from keypad to J7 connector on control panel. (See Figure 2.2.)
• Align the keypad with the mounting holes as shown in Figure 3.8 and screw it down.
3. If installing the NCA-2 as primary display: Secure it to the NFS2-640/E chassis with NCA/640-2-KIT as described in the NCA-2 Man-
ual.
4 If installing option boards, do so as described in Section 3.6, “Mounting Option Boards”. If NFS2-640/E is being installed into an
older backbox, two additional steps must be taken:
5. Battery Plate BP-4 must be replaced with BP2-4, per UL’s revised labeling requirements.
6. The older door and dress panel must be replaced with equipment compatible with KDM-R2.
†If the NFS2-640/E chassis is not assembled as when shipped, attach CPU2-640 to the chassis. Slide control-panel tabs into slots on
chassis and lay the board onto stand-offs so that mounting holes line up with those on the chassis. Secure with six screws and four 1 inch
stand-offs as shown in Figure 3.7, “Mounting KDM-R2”.

CAUTION: It is critical that all mounting holes of the NFS2-640/E are secured with a screw or standoff to insure continuity
! of Earth Ground.

24 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Mounting Option Boards Installation

2-640_assembly_3-2.wmf
Figure 3.7 Mounting KDM-R2

3.5.2 Using NCA-2 as Primary Display

The NFS2-640/E can be set up to use the NCA-2 as the primary display. In this system design, mount NCA-2 to the NFS2-640/E chassis
in front of CPS-24/E, and connect the network/service port on the NFS2-640/E (J1) directly to the network/service port on the NCA-2
(J3). See the NCA-2 Manual for specific instructions.

NOTE: This system design is required in Canadian stand-alone applications.

If the NFS2-640/E and NCA-2 are being used as a stand-alone pair, each device must be programmed using VeriFire Tools. Connect the
VeriFire Tools PC to NFS2-640/E using USB B Port J3 and program as described in VeriFire Tools on-line help.
For older PCs without USB connectors, NFS2-640/E and NCA-2 must be temporarily disconnected and separately programmed,
because VeriFire Tools also uses the network/service port. Follow VeriFire Tools instructions for off-line programming mode.
If the NFS2-640/E with NCA-2 is connected to a network, there are two additional options for programming: either connect the VeriFire
Tools programming PC to the network port on the NCM/HS-NCM board, or program the NFS2-640/E through another network node.

NOTE: This is the only NCA-2 application that does not require an NCM or HS-NCM connection to Noti•Fire•Net.

3.5.3 Using the NCD as Primary Display on the NFS2-640

The NCD can be directly connected to the NUP port of the CPU2-640.
The NFS2-640/E can be set up to use the NCD as the primary display.
When the NCD is used as the primary display, the KDM-R2 needs to be removed.
When using the NCD as an alternate display for the NFS2-640 on a standard Noti•Fire•Net, the panel becomes standalone and is not net-
workable, since there is only one NUP port available on the NCM. If the panel is on a High-Speed Noti•Fire•Net, the panel can be net-
worked using the second NUP available on the HS-NCM.The NCD can only be mounted on the left side of the DP-GDIS1 dress plate,
Refer to the NCD manual LS10210-051NF-E for more information.

3.6 Mounting Option Boards

If installing option boards into a CAB-4 Series backbox, mount and connect those boards at this time. General instructions follow; the
sections about individual option boards contain any module-specific instructions such as mounting LEM-320’s stacker-connector.

3.6.1 Option Boards in the NFS2-640/E Chassis

Mount option boards in slots 3 and 4 of the NFS2-640/E chassis. (See Figure 3.2, Figure 3.8, and Figure 3.9.) For standoff lengths, see
Table 3.2.

NOTE: Another option board can be mounted above a Loop Expander Module or Network Communications Module; for
ease of access, be sure to complete installation of those devices before mounting a second layer.

NOTE: If using the fourth (right-side) position of the NFS2-640/E chassis, the chassis needs to be installed on the backbox
before option boards or modules are installed in that position. These modules will block access to the keyhole opening.

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 25

Installation Mounting Option Boards

Attach LEM-320 or other

option board to 1 inch
standoffs previously installed
on CPU. (See Section 3.6,
Attach KDM-R2 “Mounting Option Boards”).
to chassis rails

2-640_assembly_3-4-2.wmf
Figure 3.8 Attaching Option Boards Behind KDM-R2

Attach option boards to

mounting studs on chassis
backplate (see Section 3.6,
“Mounting Option Boards”)
2-640_assembly_5a-2.wmf

Figure 3.9 Attaching Option Boards to the Right of the CPU

3.6.2 Option Boards in CHS-4L

1. Slide the tabs at the bottom of the option board into slots on the chassis as shown in Figure 3.11.
2. Lay the board back onto the flanges so that the studs line up with mounting holes on the option board.
3. Attach the option board using screws provided with the board, or if installing a second option board, with stand-offs provided with
the second board.

26 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Mounting Option Boards Installation

Install stand-offs on these

CHS-4L.wmf
two studs in any one of the
four positions on the chassis.

Chassis
CHS-4L

Figure 3.10 Standoff Locations on CHS-4L

Slots

nfs640-
Insert tab of option board
into slot of chassis, and lay One option board Two option boards
the option board back in CHS-4L in CHS-4L
against standoffs.

Figure 3.11 Mounting an Option Board in a Chassis (CHS-4L Shown)

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 27

Installation Mounting Option Boards

3.6.3 Option Boards on BMP-1 in Dress Panels

Option boards can be mounted on BMP-1 blank module plate, inside dress panels such as DP-DISP2, ADP2-640, ADP-4B, as shown in
Figure 3.12.

Mount BMP-1 onto compatible

dress panel or backbox trim ring

tm4adp4.cdr
Single-space
blank plate

Mount option board

onto standoffs on the
BMP-1

Fasten option board to the

plate with four screws
(included).

Figure 3.12 Mounting an Option Board onto a Dress Panel with BMP-1 (ADP-4B Shown)

NOTE: See the BMP-1 Product Installation Drawing for details if considering mounting the module behind blank module
plate in a dress plate or annunciator backbox. This dress plate is suitable for modules that do not need to be visible or
accessible when the door is closed.

3.6.4 Transmitter Module TM-4

TM-4 is power-limited. Connections are on TB10 nonresettable output and TB11 EIA-485 ACS Mode. Refer to the Transmitter Module
TM-4 installation document for installation details.

3.6.5 Loop Expander Module

Installing a Loop Expander Module adds a second SLC loop to the
control panel. Refer to Figure 3.14 for stacker-connector illustrations.
1. Plug short end of the stacker-connector into J4 on the CPU2-640.
2. Align the LEM with the four 1 inch standoffs and the stacker-
connector as shown in Figure 3.14; firmly seat the stacker-
connector.
3. Attach LEM to standoffs using screws or another set of standoffs.
4. After LEM is mounted on the control panel, connect the SLC
loops to TB1 on the LEM and TB13 on the CPU2-640. This
system supports either FlashScan or CLIP mode devices. Refer to
the SLC loop manual for wiring requirements and specific
details.
LEM-SLC.wmf

Attach stacker-connector to CPU as

shown in Figure 3.14.

Figure 3.13 SLC Connections for LEM-320

CAUTION: For the SLC to function correctly, the stacker-connector must be installed as shown in Figure 3.14. Do not
! install other option modules on top of the LEM-320.

28 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Mounting Option Boards Installation

1 inch standoffs

LEM-320 CPU2-640
Stacker-connector

J4

J1

The short-pin end plugs

directly into the top of the
CPU2-640 plug.

The long-pin end

plugs into the back
of the LEM board.

Figure 3.14 Mounting LEM-320 with the Stacker-connector

3.6.6 Network Communications Module

If networking two or more control panels or network control annunciators, each unit requires a Network Communications Module
(NCM) or a High-Speed Network Communications Module (HS-NCM); wire and fiber versions of each are available. The wire and/or
fiber versions of the NCM or the HS-NCM can be installed in any standard option-board position (see Section 3.6 “Mounting Option
Boards”); the default position is immediately to the right of the control panel.
Mount the NCM/HS-NCM in the selected position and screw in place firmly.
Connect J1 on the control panel to J3 on the NCM or J6 of the HS-NCM using the network cable provided (P/N 75556) as described in
the NCM Installation Document and the HS-NCM Installation Document. Do not connect two NCM/HS-NCMs via NUP ports (aka NUP
to NUP).
When installing the NCM: Connect Channel A and/or Channel B as described in the NCM Installation Document.
When installing the HS-NCM: Connect Channel A to Channel B as described in the HS-NCM Installation Document

NOTE: See the Noti•Fire•Net Manual or the High-Speed Noti•Fire•Net Manual and NCM Installation Document or HS-NCM
Installation Document for wiring diagrams and system configuration information. See the BMP-1 Product Installation
Drawing if considering mounting the module behind blank module plate in a dress plate or annunciator backbox.

NOTE: Over-bending fiber-optic cable can damage it. Do not exceed a 3 inch (7.62 cm) minimum bend radius.

NOTE: NCM hardware is not compatible with HS-NCM hardware and should not be mixed on the same network.

3.6.7 DVC Digital Voice Command

Each DVC Series model is a multi-featured audio processor with digital audio functionality that operates as an event-driven audio mes-
sage generator and router. It is designed for use with the DAA2, DAX, DAA Series digital audio amplifiers, and the DVC-RPU Remote
Paging Unit, as well as the DS-DB distribution boards, in a single panel or networked environment, and may also be used as an analog
audio source or configured as a remote paging unit. Refer to the DVC Manual and DVC-RPU Manual.
The NFS2-640/E may be directly connected to the DVC for single panel applications. An associated NCA-2 is required when a DAL
(digital audio loop) is part of the configuration; this configuration supports NUP-to-NUP-to-NUP configuration for single panel DAL
applications.

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 29

Installation Connecting the Power Cables

Network configurations require an associated NCA-2, and will support all Network Control-by-Event; each node (DVC, CPU-2 and
NCA-2) requires a network address/NCM port in network applications.

NOTE: The DVC Series consists of all the model versions listed in the bullets below this note. Individual part numbers are
used in this manual only when it is necessary to distinguish features or functions that differ. The term DVC is used in all other
cases.
• DVC-EM - Digital Voice Command, extended memory, wire version (standard)
• DVC-EMF - Digital Voice Command, extended memory, multi-mode fiber version
• DVC-EMSF - Digital Voice Command, extended memory, single-mode fiber version.
For information regarding audio storage for the DVC-EM Series models listed above, refer to the DVC Digital Voice Command Manual.

NOTE: The term DAA is used in this manual to refer to all DAA wire and fiber models. Individual part numbers are used only
when it is necessary to distinguish features or functions that differ.
Figure 3.15 gives simplified overview illustrations of typical applications for the DVC Series and its Digital Audio Loop (DAL).
Wire and fiber, or multi-mode and single-mode, can be mixed.

With DVC and NFS2-640 DVC

DVC-AO for
retrofits. DAL
(Digital Audio

2-640DV1.wmf
Loop) not
compatible
with this
application.
2-640DV2.wmf

With DVC, NFS2-640

NCA-2, DVC
DAL, and DAL DAL DAL
DVC-AO Devic Device
for retrofits.

NCA-2
DVC-AO

Figure 3.15 Block Diagrams of DVC Series Applications

3.7 Connecting the Power Cables

WARNING:
! REMOVE ALL POWER SOURCES TO EQUIPMENT WHILE CONNECTING ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS. LEAVE THE
EXTERNAL, MAIN POWER BREAKER OFF UNTIL INSTALLATION OF THE ENTIRE SYSTEM IS COMPLETE.

WARNING:
! SEVERAL SOURCES OF POWER CAN BE CONNECTED TO THE CONTROL PANEL. BEFORE SERVICING THE
CONTROL PANEL, DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF INPUT POWER INCLUDING THE BATTERY. WHILE ENERGIZED,
THE CONTROL PANEL AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT CAN BE DAMAGED BY REMOVING AND/OR INSERTING
CARDS, MODULES, OR INTERCONNECTING CABLES.

3.7.1 Overview
Complete all mounting procedures and check all wiring before applying power. Electrical connections include the following:
• Primary AC power source – 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 5.0 A (with NFS2-640E use 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.5 A) from line voltage source.
Overcurrent protection for this circuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and/or local codes. Use
12 AWG (3.31 mm2) wire (maximum) with a 600-volt rating.
• Secondary power source – 24 VDC from batteries, installed in the control panel (or in an optional battery cabinet). Secondary
(battery) power is required to support the system during loss of primary power.
• External power sources – 24 VDC power for Smoke Detectors (4 wire), NACs, and Annunciators.
• Auxiliary power source – 24 VDC power @ 0.5 A and 5 VDC power @ 0.15 A from TB2 on the CPS-24/E.
See Appendix B.1 “Electrical Specifications” for details and overall installation guidelines.

30 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Connecting the Power Cables Installation

3.7.2 Connecting the Control Panel to AC Power

Connect primary power as follows (see Figure 3.16):
TB1 - AC Power Connection
1. Turn off the circuit breaker at the main power distribution panel.
2. Open the hinged insulating cover on TB1.
3. Connect the service ground to terminal marked Ground (Earth). Hot
4. Connect the primary neutral line to terminal marked NEUTRAL and the primary Neutral
Hot line to terminal marked HOT. Ground
5. Close the hinged insulating cover over TB1. (Earth)

Figure 3.16 CPS-24/E:

AC Power Connections

3.7.3 Checking AC Power

Table 3.5 contains a checklist for checking the system with AC power applied:

CAUTION:
! While checking AC power, make sure batteries are not connected.
Follow the sequence of steps in Section 3.2 “Installation Checklist”, Table 3.1; this is Step 15.

Component Status

Control panel circuit board The green AC Power indicator on; the system Trouble indicator on because batteries are not connected.

Each option board The yellow Trouble indicator may come on for approximately 10 seconds after applying AC power. (This only applies to an
unconfigured system.)

Each auxiliary power The yellow Trouble indicator comes on because batteries are not connected.
supply

Table 3.5 AC Power Checklist

3.7.4 Installing and Connecting the Batteries

WARNING:
! BATTERY CONTAINS SULFURIC ACID WHICH CAN CAUSE SEVERE BURNS TO THE SKIN AND EYES, AND CAN
DESTROY FABRICS. IF CONTACT IS MADE WITH SULFURIC ACID, IMMEDIATELY FLUSH SKIN OR EYES WITH
WATER FOR 15 MINUTES AND SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

WARNING:
! DO NOT CONNECT THE BATTERY INTERCONNECT CABLES (P/N 75560 AND 75561) AT THIS TIME. MAKE THIS
CONNECTION AFTER INITIAL SYSTEM PRIMARY POWER UP. FOLLOW SEQUENCE OF STEPS IN SECTION 3.2
“INSTALLATION CHECKLIST”, TABLE 3.1; THIS IS STEP 16.
Batteries are installed in the control panel cabinet or in a separate battery cabinet
TB3 - Battery Connection
which can be mounted below the control panel or up to 20 feet (6.096 m) away
from the control panel, in conduit in the same room.
Battery (+) Battery (-)
Connect the battery as follows (see Figure 3.16 above):
1. Install batteries into bottom of cabinet or into separate battery cabinet.
CPS-24-DC.wmf

2. Connect the red cable from TB3(+) on the CPS-24/E power supply to the
positive (+) terminal of one battery.
+24V AUX COM COM +5V AUX

3. Connect the black cable from TB3(–) on the CPS-24/E power supply to the
negative (–) terminal of the other battery.
4. Connect the remaining cable between the negative (-) terminal on the first
battery to the positive (+) terminal on the second battery.

Figure 3.17 CPS-24/E:

DC Power Connections

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 31

Installation Connecting the Power Cables

3.7.5 External DC Power Output Connections

Terminal TB10 provides two (2) power outputs, resettable and non-resettable. Each output is power-limited, Class B wiring. Supervise
with a power supervision relay EOLR-1. Follow sequence of steps in Section 3.2 “Installation Checklist”, Table 3.1; this is part of
Step 6. TB2 (on CPS-24), TB10 and all 4 NACS share a maximum of 3.0 A in standby and 6.0 A in alarm.

Non-resettable Resettable
Power Power

CPU2-640-
Figure 3.18 Power Supply DC Outputs - TB10

24 VDC Resettable Power Circuit (Four-Wire Smoke Detectors). The power supply provides a single 24 VDC filtered,
power-limited, resettable power circuit for devices that require resettable power (such as four-wire smoke detectors). This circuit is
power-limited, but must be supervised. To provide supervision, install a UL-listed end-of-line power supervision relay (such as the Sys-
tem Sensor model EOLR-1) after the last device. Connect the power supervision relay normally open contact in series with an Initiating
Device Circuit (IDC). The four-wire power circuit energizes the power supervision relay. When you reset the system, the control panel
removes power from these terminals for approximately 15 seconds.
Connect external field wires to the power supply terminals TB10 RESET(+) and (–) to provide up to 1.25 A of current for powering
four-wire smoke detectors. 1.5 A max for special applications.The total current drawn from the power supply by TB2, TB6 through TB9
and TB10 cannot exceed 3.0 A in standby or 6.0 A in an alarm condition. The Control Panel provides a total of 4.4 A of power in standby
and 7.4 A of power in alarm to be shared by all internal circuitry and external provisions (24 V
resettable and non-resettable). See Figure 3.18 above. TB2 (on CPS-24), TB10 and all 4 NACS share a maximum of 3.0 A in standby
and 6.0 A in alarm.
24 VDC Non-resettable Power Circuit The power supply provides one 24 VDC filtered, power-limited, non-resettable power output,
capable of up to 1.25 A. Use this circuit to power devices that require low-noise 24 VDC power (such as annunciator model ACM-24AT
or the transmitter module TM-4).
Connect external field wires to power supply terminals TB10 NONRESET(+)and(–) to provide up to 1.25 A of non-resettable current for
powering external devices such as annunciators. See Figure 3.18 above. TB2 (on CPS-24), TB10 and all 4 NACS share a maximum of
3.0 A in standby and 6.0 A in alarm.

CAUTION:
! DURING SYSTEM RESET, POWER REMAINS AT TERMINALS TB10 NONRESET(+)AND(–).

3.7.6 Accessories DC Power Output Connections

Terminal TB2 supplies one (1) non-resettable, power-limited 24 VDC circuit and one non-resettable, power-limited 5 VDC circuit avail-
able to power external devices. Class B wiring is possible. Supervise with a power supervision relay EOLR-1. Applications that require
a 5V connection to the Accessories Output, such as an UZC-256, must be within 10 feet (3.658 meters) of the power supply. The dis-
tance from the power supply to the accessory requiring power must not extend past the length of the supplied cable, P/N 75657 (supplied
with UZC-256), which is 10 feet long. Do not splice or otherwise extend P/N 75657. Refer to section B.2, "Wire Requirements" of this
manual for all applications requiring a 24V connection. Connect wiring with all power sources off.
• 24 VDC (nominal) @ 0.5 A max
• 5 VDC (nominal) @ 0.15 A max

32 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

NAC Connections and Releasing Circuits Installation

24V - Blue Wire

AMPS24_TB2access.wmf
COM - Black Wire

COM - Black Wire

5V - Red Wire

Figure 3.19 Connecting to the Accessories Output TB2 on CPS-24/E

3.8 NAC Connections and Releasing Circuits

The control panel provides four NAC terminals as shown in Figure 3.21. Each can be configured as Class B or Class A as shown in
Figure 3.20. Each circuit can provide 1.5 A of current, but the total current drawn from the main power supply cannot exceed 7.4 A in
alarm condition (refer to Table A.2). Additionally, TB10, TB2, and all 4 NACs share a maximum of 3.0 A in standby and 6.0 A in alarm;
see Appendix A. NAC circuits are supervised and power-limited. Use UL-listed 24 VDC notification appliances only (refer to the
Device Compatibility Document).

UL-listed ELR-2.2K, 1/2 W (supplied)

TB9 - NAC #1

TB8 - NAC #2

Unused Circuits Class B Connection Class A Connection

Figure 3.20 Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) TB7 - NAC #3

Connections

TB6 - NAC #4

Figure 3.21 NAC Terminals and NAC LEDs

NOTE: Any NAC can be programmed as a releasing circuit, and the releasing circuit must be supervised; see Figure 4.8–Figure 4.10. For
more information, refer to Section 4 “Applications” in this manual and the NFS2-640/E Programming Manual. Refer to the Device
Compatibility Document for UL-listed compatible releasing devices. Sample connections for NAC terminals are shown in Figure 3.20. Follow
sequence of steps in Section 3.2 “Installation Checklist”, Table 3.1; this is part of Step 6.

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 33

Installation NAC Connections and Releasing Circuits

3.8.1 Stat-X Devices

Figure 3.22 shows typical wiring for STAT-X devices using the Ematch Protection Device (P/N 3005014). When using Stat-X devices,
note the following:
• Each Stat-X device requires an Ematch Protection Device to protect +
against high-voltage transient signals, such as lightning, that may
cause the device to accidentally release. Releasing Circuit
• Multiple Stat-X devices can be connected in series (as shown). _
• No more than ten (10) Stat-X devices can be connected on a single
releasing circuit. Green
Yello Ematch Protection
• A REL-2.2K can be installed on a single Stat-X device for short
circuit detection. For multiple Stat-X devices installed in series, the Red Device
Blac P/N 3005014
REL-2.2K is installed on the last device on the releasing circuit (as
shown). A REL-2.2K is required for ULC applications.
• Stat-X devices are not to be used with the FCM-1 or FCM-1-REL.
REL-2.2K

StatXMultiEOL.wmf
Stat-X

Stat-X

Stat-X
Figure 3.22 Wiring Diagram for Stat-X Devices

3.8.2 FSA-8000 Wiring:

Figure 4 shows the wiring for the FSA-8000 detector to the
fire alarm control panel. To Next SLC Device -
SLC From FACP or Previous Device -
For installation information for the FSA-8000 detector, Connection From FACPToorNext SLC Device +
Previous Device +
To Next Device +
refer to the FSA-8000 FAAST Installation and 24V External From Power Supply or Previous Device +
Power To Next Device -
Maintenance Instruction document, part number I56-3903. From Power Supply or Previous Device -

FAASTTermBlk.wmf
Installation Considerations:
The following installation factors should be taken into
consideration when installing the FSA-8000 FAAST
detector:

Detectors per up to 75 total

Figure 4 FSA-8000 Connection to the FACP
Loop:

Modules per up to 45 total

Loop:

Power Supply: FACP AUX or use a power supply UL listed

for fire protective signaling use with
regulated outputs.

Programming Options:
The following programming options should be set when programming the NFS-320, NFS-320SYS, NFS2-640 and NFS2-
3030 with the FSA-8000:

Loop Protocol: CLIP for detectors

Type ID: Acclimate

FlashScan Type ID: None

34 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Output Relay Connections Installation

3.9 Output Relay Connections

The panel provides a set of Form-C relays. These are rated for 2.0 A at 30 VDC
(resistive):
• Alarm - TB4
• Trouble - TB4
• Supervisory - TB5
• Security - TB5
These are power-limited only if connected to a power-limited source.
Using VeriFire Tools, the Supervisory and Security contacts can also be config-

CPU2-640-relays.wmf
ured as Alarm contacts. Follow instructions in the VeriFire Tools online help.

Figure 3.1 Form-C Relay Connections

3.10 Backup-Alarm Switches

WARNING: DO NOT ENABLE THE BACKUP OPTION SWITCH FOR ANY OF THE FOUR NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE
! CIRCUITS (NACS) IF THEY ARE USED FOR RELEASING FUNCTIONS!

Backup alarm switches are provided that enable NACs and the alarm relay to activate
during a backup alarm condition. If the main board’s microcontroller fails and an alarm
is reported by any detector or a monitor module that has backup reporting enabled, the
NAC will turn on if the corresponding switch was enabled. The alarm will activate
during microcontroller failure regardless of the settings of switches SW1–SW4.

CPU2-640-
• SW1 - NAC#1
• SW2 - NAC#2
• SW3 - NAC#3
• SW4 - NAC#4
Figure 3.2 Backup Alarm Switches
So, for example, if SW1 and SW4 were enabled at the time of an alarm during micro-
controller failure, NAC#1 and NAC#4 would activate. Follow sequence of steps in Sec-
tion 3.2 “Installation Checklist”, Table 3.1; this is Step 7.

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 35

Installation UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements

3.11 UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements

Power-limited and nonpower-limited circuit wiring must remain separated in the cabinet. All power-limited circuit wiring must remain at
least 0.25 inches (6.35 mm) from any nonpower-limited circuit wiring. All power-limited and nonpower-limited circuit wiring must
enter and exit the cabinet through different knockout and or conduits. To maintain separation, group non-power limited modules
together, i.e., group modules on the same side of the enclosure or in separate rows.
Figure 3.3 shows one configuration that meets these UL requirements. The first two rows of modules are configured with at least a 0.25
inch (6.35 mm) separation between power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring; AC and battery wiring is routed away from power-lim-
ited wiring.
Power-limited Circuits*

Power-
limited
circuits

Maintain vertical
separation where NPL
circuits appear to
“cross”
NPL

Nonpower-

320-2-640-PWRLMTWIR-
limited
circuits

To cabinet-mounted battery
(nonpower-limited)

Figure 3.3 Typical Wiring for UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements

(Shown with relays as connected to power-limited modules)

NOTE: AC and battery wiring are not power-limited. Maintain at least 0.25 inches (6.35mm) between power-limited and non power-limited
circuit wiring. Install tie wraps and adhesive squares to secure the wiring. Use a power-limited source for relay output on terminals TB8-
TB11. Figure 2.2, “CPU2-640/CPU2-640E and Power-Supply: Wiring Connections” on page 13

NOTE: Drawing is not to scale. Proportions and angles are exaggerated to show wire-placement more clearly.

NOTE: If additional knockouts are added to the backbox, proper separation of power-limited and non power-limited wiring should be
maintained.

3.11.1 Labeling Modules and Circuits

At the time of installation, each nonpower-limited circuit connected to ACM-8R, and LDM-R32 modules must be identified in the space
provided on the cabinet door label when connected to a non-power-limited source of power.
The label lists all compatible power-limited modules and circuits; also see Figure 2.2 on page 13. The LDM-R32 is power-limited only
when connected to power-limited sources. When connected to a non-power-limited source, the power-limited marking must be removed.

36 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Installing EIA-485 Devices Installation

3.12 Installing EIA-485 Devices

Figure 3.4 provides a closer view of the EIA-485 connections provided on TB11. Because specific connections can vary by the type of
device being connected, refer to the product installation manual for details.

640tb200.wmf
cpu2-
Figure 3.4 EIA-485 Connections

3.13 Installing Remote Printers and/or CRT

3.13.1 Custom Cable Fabrication
A custom cable needs to be fabricated to connect the PRN Printer, Keltron Printer or the CRT-2 Monitor to the system. Length of the
cable will vary with each installation, but should not exceed a maximum length of 50 feet (15.24 m). Printer must be installed in the
same room as the panel, within 20 feet (6.10 meters) and the cable must be installed in conduit. Construct cable as follows:
1. Using overall foil/braided-shield twisted-pair cable, properly connect one end to the DB-25 or DB-9 Connector using the wiring
specifications shown in the table below.
2. Tighten clamp on connector to secure cable.
DB-9 Connector DB-25 Connector TB12 on Control Panel
Pin 2 Pin 3 TX
Pin 3 Pin 2 RX
Pin 5 Pin 7 REF

3.13.2 Installing and Configuring the PRN Series Printer

When connected to the Control Panel via an EIA-232 interface, the PRN prints a copy of all status changes within the control panel and
time-stamps the printout with the time of day and date the event occurred. It provides 80 columns of data on standard 9" by 11" tractor-
feed paper.

NOTE: You can also use the EIA-232 printer interface with UL-listed information technology equipment, such as personal
computers, to monitor the control panel for supplementary purposes.
This section contains information on connecting a printer to the control panel and for setting the printer options.
Connecting a Remote PRN Series Printer
Remote printers require a 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz primary power source. If required for the fire alarm system configuration (for example, a
Proprietary Fire Alarm System), a remote printer requires a secondary power source (battery backup). Because a secondary power
source is not provided, use a separate Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) that is UL-listed for Fire Protective Signaling. You may use
your building emergency power supply, so long as it meets the power continuity requirements of NFPA 72. Refer to NFPA 72 for further
details.
Connect the remote printer to the Control Panel as follows:
1. Connect the three (3) open leads of the custom cable to the TB12 terminal block on the control panel as shown in Figure 3.5.
2. Plug the DB-25 or DB-9 connector end of the custom cable into the EIA-232 port of the remote printer. Tighten securely.

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 37

Installation Installing Remote Printers and/or CRT

DB-25 connector on PRN series printer (female socket shown) DB-9 Connector on PRN series Printer

DB9printer.
Terminate one end of
shield at backbox
CPU2-640-

Control Panel

NOTE: Outputs are power-limited but are not supervised

Figure 3.5 Remote Printer Connections

Setting Printer Options

Refer to the documentation supplied with the PRN series printer for instructions on using the printer menu controls. Set the printer
options (under the menu area) according to the settings listed in Table 3.6.

Option Setting Option Setting

Font HS Draft CPI 10 CPI
LPI 6 LPI Skip 0.5
ESC Character ESC Emulate Epson FX-850 PRN-6, LQ-2550 PRN-7
Bidirectional Copy ON I/O
CG-TAB Graphic Buffer 40K PRN-6, 64K PRN-7
Country E-US ASCII Serial
Auto CR OFF Baud 9600, 4800, or 2400
Format 7 Bit, Even, 1 Stop
Color Option Not Installed
Protocol XON/XOFF
Formlen Character Set Standard
Lines 6LPI=60
Sl.Zero On
Standard Exec 10.5” PRN-6, 11” PRN-7
Auto LF Off
PAPER
BIN 1 12/72"
BIN 2 12/72"
SINGLE 12/72"
PUSH TRA 12/72"
PULL TRA 12/72"
PAP ROLL 12/72"

Table 3.6 PRN Setup Options

3.13.3 Installing and Configuring a Keltron Printer

Connect the remote printer to the Control Panel as follows:
1. Connect the three (3) open leads of the custom cable to the TB12 terminal block on the control panel as shown in Figure 3.6.
2. Connect DC power from TB10 terminal block on the control panel as shown in Figure 3.6.
3. Plug the DB-25 connector end of the custom cable into the EIA-232 port of the Keltron printer. Tighten securely.

38 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Installing Remote Printers and/or CRT Installation

Keltron printer Keltron printer

24 VDC connections DB-25 connector
(14 AWG, 2.08 mm2) (female socket shown)

Terminate one end of

shield at backbox

Control Control

CPU2-640-
Panel Panel

Figure 3.6 Keltron Printer Connections

Setting up the Keltron Printer

Set up a Keltron printer as follows:
1. The printer communicates using the following protocol:
• Baud Rate: 9600 • Parity: Even • Data bits: 7
2. Set the printer DIP switches SP1 and SP2 according to settings in Table 3.7.

SP1 On Off SP2 On Off

1 X 1 X
2 X 2 X
3 X 3 X
4 X 4 X
5 X 5 X
6 X 6 X
7 X 7 X
8 X 8 X
Table 3.7 Keltron DIP Switch Settings

3.13.4 Installing and Configuring a CRT-2

A CRT-2 can only be used in a non-networked application when used with the NFS2-640/E. For further details on setting up the CRT-2,
refer to the NFS2-640/E Operations Manual.
Connect a CRT-2 to the Control Panel as follows:
1. Connect the three (3) open leads of the custom cable to the TB12 terminal block on the control panel as shown in Figure 3.7.
2. Plug the DB-25 connector end of the custom cable into the EIA-232 port of the CRT-2. Tighten securely.
3. Set parameters as discussed in Table 3.7.

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 39

Installation Installing Remote Printers and/or CRT

DB-25 connector
on CRT-2
(female socket shown)

Terminate one end of

shield at backbox

Control

nfs640-
Panel

Figure 3.7 Connecting a CRT-2

Setting CRT-2 Parameters

The CRT-2 communicates with the control panel through a protocol defined by thirteen groups of parameters. To access a parameter
group, press the corresponding function key (F1-F12) as shown in Table 3.8 below. You can then program parameters in each group.
Enter the CRT-2 setup menu by pressing and holding the <Ctrl> key while pressing the <Scroll Lock> key. Use arrow keys to move
through the selections in each setup group; press the space bar to view the options for each parameter. When finished programming all
setup groups, press the <Pause> key. To save all changes, press <Y>.
Table 3.8 shows the standard settings for using the CRT-2 with the NFS2-640/E; for one instance where these settings may change
slightly see Section 3.13.5 “Connecting Multiple Printers, CRTs, or CRT/PRN Combination”. The basic settings for using the CRT-2
with NFS2-640/E are:
• Baud Rate 9600 • Data format 8 1 N • Protocol xon/off.

NOTE: This section covers installation only; for information on how the CRT-2 functions as part of the fire alarm system, see
the NFS2-640/E Operations Manual.

NOTE: The CRT cannot be connected at the same time as the network

40 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Installing Remote Printers and/or CRT Installation

Function Key CRT-2 Parameters

F1: Quick Emulation=CRT-2 EIA Baud Rate=9600 EIA Data Format=8/1/N
(“Read Status” key) Comm Mode=Full Duplex Aux Baud Rate=9600 Aux Data Format=8/1/N
Enhanced=On Language=U.S. Host/Printer=EIA/Aux
F2:Genrl Emulation=CRT-2 Enhanced=On Auto Wrap=Off
(“Alter Status” key) Auto Font Load=On Auto Page=Off Auto Scroll=On
Monitor Mode=Off Bell Volume=09 Warning Bell=On
Host/Printer=EIA/Aux
F3: Displ Page Length=24 Screen Length=26 Lines Screen Video=Normal
(“Prog” key) Display Cursor=On Cursor=Blink Line Auto Adjust Cursor=On
Columns=80 Width Change Clear=Off Speed=Normal
Scroll=Jump Refresh Rate=60 Hz Overscan Borders=Off
F4: Kybd Language=U.S. Char Set Mode=ASCII Key Mode=ASCII
(“Spl Funct” key) Keyclick=Off Key Repeat=Off Margin Bell=Off
Key Lock=Caps Keyboard Present=Yes
F5: Keys Enter Key=<CR> Return Key=<CR> Backspace=<BS>/<DEL>
(“Prior” key) Alt Key=Meta Disconnect=Pause Desk Acc=Disabled
Pound Key=U.S.
F6: Ports EIA Baud Rate=9600 EIA Data Format=8/1/N EIA Parity Check=On
(“Next” key) Aux Baud Rate=9600 Aux Data Format=8/1/N Aux Parity Check=On
EIA Xmt=Xon-Xoff EIA Recv=Xon-Xoff(XPC) EIA Xmt Pace=Baud
Aux Xmt=Xon-Xoff Aux Recv=Xon-Xoff(XPC) Aux Xmt Pace=Baud
EIA Break=Off EIA Modem Control=Off EIA Disconnect=2 sec
Aux Break=Off Aux Modem Control=Off Aux Disconnect=2 sec
F7: Host Comm Mode=Full Duplex Local=Off Recv <CR>=<CR>
(“Auto Step” key) Recv <DEL>=Ignore Send ACK=On Send Line Term=<CR><LF>
Send Block Term=<CR> Null Suppress=On
F8: Print Prnt Line Term=<CR><LF> Prnt Block Term=<CR> Secondary Recv=Off
(“Activ Signal” key)
F9: Emul Attribute=Page Bright Video=Off Page Edit=Off
WPRT Intensity=Dim WPRT Reverse=Off WPRT Underline=Off
WPRT Blink=Off Display NV Labels=Off Save Labels=On
Status Line=Off Fkey Speed=Normal
F10 Setup Group F10 does not affect communications with the control panel.
F11 Setup Group F11 does not affect communications with the control panel.
F12: Prog Program the function keys as follows: F1 ~A F2 ~B F3 ~C F4 ~D F5 ~E F6 ~F F7 ~G
(“Ack Step” key) F8 ~H F9 ~I F10 ~J F11 ~K F12 ~L F13 ~M F14 ~N F15 ~O F16 ~P Shift F13 ~Q

Table 3.8 Standard CRT-2 Settings for Use with NFS2-640/E

3.13.5 Connecting Multiple Printers, CRTs, or CRT/PRN Combination

Connecting multiple devices requires changing the CRT-2 setup using the F1(Quick) menu:
• Set Host/Printer=EIA/AUX.
• Set EIA Data Format=8/1/N.
• If the AUX device is a printer, set the Printer and AUX Data Format=7/1/E.
• If the AUX device is a second CRT-2, set the AUX Data Format=8/1/N.
Connect multiple devices as shown in Figure 3.8.
To Control Panel
TB12-PC/CRT REF
TB12-PC/CRT TX
TB12- PC/CRT RX

To AUX Port of CRT-2 To EIA-232 port of CRT-2

(female socket shown) (female socket shown)
prncrt-

To EIA-232 port of next

CRT-2 or PRN (female socket shown)

Note: For wire requirements, see Table B.1 in Appendix B.1 “Electrical Specifications”.

Figure 3.8 Connecting Multiple Devices on the EIA-232 Circuit

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 41

Installation Wiring a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)

3.14 Wiring a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)

 Overview
Communication between the control panel and intelligent and addressable initiating, monitor, and control devices takes place through a
Signaling Line Circuit (SLC). You can wire an SLC to meet the requirements of NFPA Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 circuits. This manual
provides requirements and performance details specific to this control panel; for installation information and general information, refer
to the SLC Wiring Manual.
 Wiring
Maximum wiring distance of an SLC using 12 AWG (3.31 mm2) wire is 12,500 feet (3810 meters) total twisted-pair for Style 4, Style 6
and Style 7 circuits.
 Capacity
The NFS2-640/E provides one (1) SLC, with a total capacity of 318 intelligent/addressable devices:
• 01-159 intelligent detectors
• 01-159 monitor and control modules
An optional expander board provides one (1) additional SLC, with the same capacity.
Units employing multiple detector operation shall include a minimum of two detectors in each protected space and reduce the detector
installation spacing to 0.7 times the linear spacing in accordance with National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA. For spacing requirements refer
to the detector’s installation instruction.

NOTE: To meet the ten-second response time required by UL 864, 9th edition, when SLC loops are configured to run in CLIP mode, all
input modules must be set to address 19 or lower on both loop one and 2. There are no limits to detectors or output modules.

 Installation
This control panel supports one or two SLC loops; a second SLC loop is obtained by installing an LEM-320 module. SLC loop #1 con-
nects to TB13 on the control panel; SLC loop #2 connects to TB1 on the LEM-320. For details on designing, installing and configuring
SLC loops, see the SLC Wiring Manual.

SLC Loop #1 Connections SLC Loop #2 Connections

on FACP’s main circuit board on Loop Expander Module

SLC B SLC A

nfs640-slcloops.cdr, NFS2640-SLC-TB.wmf,
SLC B (output loop)

SLC A (loop return)

T-Tapping is not allowed

on a four-wire SLC.
Use either
SLC Loop #1
or SLC Loop #2
Style 4 SLC Loops Style 6 SLC Loops

Figure 3.9 SLC Loop Connections and Wiring

42 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Connecting a PC for Off-Line Programming Installation

3.15 Connecting a PC for Off-Line Programming

A PC can be hooked up to the control panel to allow the VeriFire Tools programming utility to upload and download the operating pro-
gram. Refer to the insert in the VeriFire Tools CD insert and to the program’s on-line help function for instructions. There are two
options for connection:
1. For PCs with USB Ports, connect the PC to USB B via a standard USB B cable.
2. For PCs without USB Ports, connect the PC’s serial port to the Control Panel Network/Service Connection (J1, NUP).

NOTE: Download operations that change the basic program of the control panel must be performed by responsible service personnel in
attendance at the control panel. After downloading a program, test the control panel in accordance with NFPA 72.

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 43

 Section 4: Applications
4.1 Overview
Chapter Covers the following topics
Section 4.3 “NFPA 72 Central or Remote Station How to install UDACT/UDACT-2 with the control panel for use as a NFPA Central or Remote Station
Fire Alarm System (Protected Premises Unit)” Fire Alarm System (Protected Premises Unit)
Section 4.5 “NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm How to set up a Protected Premises Unit to communicate with a listed compatible Protected Premises
Systems” Receiving Unit.
Section 4.6 “Fire/Security Applications” How to use the control panel as a combination Fire/Security system, including the following:
• Installing a Security Tamper Switch into the cabinet
• Circuit Wiring
Section 4.7 “Releasing Applications” How to install the following releasing applications:
• Releasing Device to the Control Panel (NAC integral circuits)
• Releasing Device to the FCM-1 Module
• Releasing Device to the FCM-1-REL Module
• NBG-12LRA Agent Release-Abort Station

Table 4.1
Municipal Box (Auxiliary)
Municipal Box applications require a TM-4 Transmitter module. Refer to the TM-4 Transmitter Module installation document for instal-
lation details.

4.2 Devices Requiring External Power Supervision

With software version 12.0 or higher, certain type codes have external power supervision (FlashScan only) built into the software. An
external power-supervision relay is required (see Figure 4.1) unless one of the following typecodes is selected for the device:
• Control • Rel Ckt Ulc • Gen Trouble
• Strobe • Nonreset Ctl • Gen Pend
• Horn • Alarms Pend • Trouble Pend
• (Blank) • Gen Alarm
• Release Ckt • Gen Supervis

Power Supervision
Relay (EOLR-1)
(Not required for
FlashScan type codes SLC from FACP
that provide built-in
power supervision.) –
+

Non-resettable 24 +
VDC Power from –
a listed source
Device to be 3030-external-power-
Supervised *If the SLC device
does not match the
N.C. Supervision one in this figure,
Relay Contact refer to the SLC
Part of EOLR-1 FCM-1
(Not required for
manual appendix,
FlashScan type codes which contains wir-
that provide built-in ing conversion
power supervision.) charts for type V and

Figure 4.1 Enabling External Power Supervision Using Relays

4.3 NFPA 72 Central or Remote Station Fire Alarm System (Protected Premises Unit)
Figure 4.2 shows typical wiring diagram for a NFPA 72 Central Station Fire Alarm System (Protected Premises Unit) or a Remote Sta-
tion Fire Alarm System (Protected Premises Unit) using the Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter (UDACT or UDACT-
2) and control panel. This provides typical wiring only; connect and program the UDACT or UDACT-2 according to the directions given
in the UDACT Instruction Manual or UDACT-2 Instruction Manual.

NOTE: An NFPA 72 Central Station or Remote Station requires 24 hours of standby power and 5 minutes in alarm.

NOTE: This application can also be done with the TM-4 Transmitter; refer to the TM-4 Transmitter Module installation
document for more details.

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 44

NFPA 72 Central or Remote Station Fire Alarm System (Protected Premises Unit) Applications

NOTE: For additional setup information for the UDACT-2, refer to the UDACT-2 Instruction Manual.

Ferrite cores
FACP Cabinet P/N 29090

To supervised Solid earth

phone lines ground

24 VDC EIA-485
Nonresettable power (ACS Mode)

Supervised and power-limited

EIA-485 and power wiring

CPU2-640-
UDACT in ABS-8RB
(shown with cover removed)

Figure 4.2 Typical Wiring Diagram for a Central Station Fire Alarm System

NOTE: Install a UL-listed 120 ohm End-of-Line resistor (P/N 71244) UDACT TB1 terminals 3 and 4 if this is the last or only device on EIA-
485 line.

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 45

Applications Central Station Fire Alarm System Canadian Requirements

4.4 Central Station Fire Alarm System Canadian Requirements

For Canadian applications requiring a second dial-out option, refer to the following illustration for UDACT/UDACT-2 and TM-4 setup:
NOTES:
• Drawing is not to scale.
EIA-
PRI SEC
• The UDACT/UDACT-2 should be
set for “Receive Only” for this
LINE SEIZE
LED 3 LED 15
LED 4 LED 16
LINE FAIL
LED 5 LED 17
NO TONE TB2 TB1
LED 6 LED 18
KISS OFF ACS + ACS - REF REMOTE REMOTE REMOTE MUNICIPAL

configuration. For additional

LED 7 LED 19 BOX
STATION STATION STATION
COMM FAIL
TB3 SW1 ALARM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY

UDACT-2
+24VDC REF ELR

TM-4 UDACT/UDACT-2 setup

+ 24V
+ 24 { information, refer to the UDACT
EIA-485 COMM LOSS
LED 1
REAL TIME
LED 2

+ 24V
_ {
LED 8

_
POWER

Installation Manual. or UDACT-2

LED 9 TXACS RXACS

24

COMMON
LED 13

+
LED 14
LED2 LED1
LED 20

_
Rela EIA-+_{ Instruction Manual.
EIA- { • This illustration is show with the

INPUT 5
TRANS TEST POWER

INPUT 4
NCM-W. For other NCM or HS-
CLEAR REPORT RESET

LED4 SW6

NON-ISOLATED
ISOLATED
SW2 SW3 SW4

SW4

NCM setup, refer to the NCM

DISABLE
SW2

INPUT 3
Installation or HS-NCM
ENABLE

INPUT 2
SW3
LED3
TONE DETECT
LED21
TROUBLE SW5

1
INPUT 1
Installation documents.

1
SW1 ON
OPTION ON
SELECT

• For additional setup information on

SWITCH
1 2 3 4 OFF

the TM-4, refer to the TM-4

Instruction Manual.
ON
NO
0 C
18/24 NC
115
230

MR-101/C

FMM-1
EIA-485
_ + _
+
SLC
To
Previous
24V + EF B TERM B EF A TERM A

OFF

OFF
SW101

SW103
SW102

SW100
_

ON

ON
NFS2-640/E
LED101 LED100
J3 J2

A HI B HI
LED6 LED7

NUP2

NUP1
RCDA RCDB
LED4 LED2

STATA STATB
LED3 LED5

NCM-W
RECON PULSE1
LED1 LED8

LCM A
RESET POWER

LCM B

LCM TERM
A A

OFF
ON
SW1

SW2

To Next
EF B TERM B EF A TERM A
OFF

OFF
SW101

SW103
SW102

SW100
ON

ON

NCA-2
LED101 LED100
J3 J2

A HI B HI
LED6 LED7
NUP2

NUP1

RCDA RCDB
LED4 LED2

STATA STATB
LED3 LED5

RECON PULSE1
LED1 LED8

NCM-W
LCM A

RESET POWER
LCM B

LCMTERM
A A

OFF
ON
SW1

SW2

Figure 4.3 Central Station Canadian Requirements for Second Dial-Out Connection

46 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems Applications

4.5 NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems

When connected and configured as a protected premises unit with UDACT or UDACT-2, the NFS2-640/E will automatically transmit
General Alarm, General Trouble, and General Supervisory signals to a listed compatible Protected Premises Receiving Unit. See the
UDACT Manual or UDACT-2 Manual for compatible receiving units. A simplified drawing of connections between the receiving unit
and the NFS2-640/E protected premises unit is shown in Figure 4.4.
Connect the receiving unit to the protected premises unit as shown in Section 4.3 “NFPA 72 Central or Remote Station Fire Alarm Sys-
tem (Protected Premises Unit)”.
For information on installing and programming the Receiving unit, refer to the documentation for that control panel.

Telephone line & backup

UDACT or
UDACT-2

Compatible Receiving Unit

(see UDACT Manual or UDACT-2 NFS2-640/E
Manual)
NFS2-640/E Protected Premises Unit

Figure 4.4 Typical Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems Wiring Connections

4.6 Fire/Security Applications

NOTE: NFS2-640/E is not approved for use in security applications in Canada.

4.6.1 General Operation

The control panel can be used as a combination Fire/Security system when installed and operated according to the instructions in this
section.
For security applications, program one or more monitor modules (listed for security applications) with the SECURITY Type Code, and
wire as shown in Figure 4.6. Activating this type of module lights the SECURITY LED, and displays a security alarm condition on the con-
trol panel LCD display. The panel sounder will sound until the Security alarm is acknowledged. You can also program additional sound-
ers or output devices to activate with the security alarm initiating device. The SECURITY Type Code is designed to indicate an alarm as
follows: (a) on an open or short circuit; or (b) on a ±50% change in resistance value from the End-of-Line resistor value.
A tamper switch installed in the cabinet door will indicate a door tamper condition whenever the door is open. If the control panel indi-
cates a Security alarm, you can acknowledge, silence, and reset the condition from the control panel.
When the system resets, a 30-second exit timer starts. During this time the tamper switch and all Security alarms are ignored. There is no
entrance delay timer.
For bypass of security zones, use the DISABLE routine (covered in the Status Change section of the NFS2-640/E Operations Manual)
for Security type devices.

WARNING:
! Damage can result from incorrect wiring connections.

4.6.2 Installing a Security Tamper Switch

To wire the cabinet with a Security Tamper Switch kit model STS-1, refer to Figure 4.5:
1. Install the STS-1 Tamper Switch onto the side of the backbox opposite the door hinge, pushing the switch through the opening until
it snaps into place.
2. Install the magnet on the same side of the cabinet door as the lock. Push the magnet through the opening in the door until it snaps
into place.
3. Connect the STS-1 connector to J5 (Security Tamper) on the Control Panel. (As shown in Figure 4.5, J5 is located on the circuit
board, underneath the edge of KDM-R2.)

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 47

Applications Fire/Security Applications

Connect to
J5 “Security Tamper”

LED7

LED6

LED5

LED4

LED3

LED2
LED1 J6 J5

STS-1 mounting location

(side opposite of door hinges)
CPU2-640-

Figure 4.5 Installing the STS-1 Security Tamper Switch

4.6.3 Receiving Unit

For applications requiring transmission of security alarm information to a central receiving unit, the control panel may be connected via
the UDACT or UDACT-2 to a compatible receiving unit (see the UDACT Manual or UDACT-2 Manual). For information on configuring
the Receiving unit for Combination Fire/Security applications, refer to the documentation for that control panel.

4.6.4 Programming
The control panel can communicate with any number of security devices. To do so, program the points as follows:
1. Select the address of the module(s) to be used for security.
2. Select the Type Code SECURITY.

NOTE: For detailed instruction on programming Type Codes, refer to the NFS2-640/E Programming Manual.

4.6.5 Wiring for Proprietary Security Alarm Applications

Table 4.6 shows typical wiring for proprietary security alarm applications with FMM-1 modules. Note the following:
• The module is programmed with software SECURITY Type Code.
• For use with UL listed systems only; application not for ULC security usage.
• NAC devices used for security cannot be shared with fire NAC devices.
• Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for compatible NAC devices.
• All monitor modules used for security application must be installed in the NFS2-640/E cabinet with STS-1 Security Tamper Switch.
NFS2-640/E Protected Premises Unit

SLC
UL-listed 47K UL-listed, Channel
End-of-Line Resistor normally-open A or B
(provided with module) security switch
*If the SLC device
does not match the
one in this figure,
refer to the SLC
manual appendix,
CPU2-640-

which contains wir-

UL-listed, normally-closed ing conversion
security switch FlashScan Monitor Module charts for type V and

Figure 4.6 Wiring Diagram for Proprietary Security Alarm Applications

48 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Releasing Applications Applications

4.7 Releasing Applications

WARNING:
! WHEN USED FOR CO2 RELEASING APPLICATIONS, OBSERVE PROPER PRECAUTIONS AS
STATED IN NFPA 12. DO NOT ENTER THE PROTECTED SPACE UNLESS PHYSICAL
LOCKOUT AND OTHER SAFETY PROCEDURES ARE FULLY COMPLETED. DO NOT USE
SOFTWARE DISABLE FUNCTIONS IN THE PANEL AS LOCKOUT.

WARNING:
! DO NOT ENABLE THE BACKUP OPTION SWITCH FOR ANY OF THE FOUR NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCE CIRCUITS (NACS) IF THEY ARE USED FOR RELEASING FUNCTIONS!

4.7.1 Overview
This control panel can be used for agent release or preaction/deluge control applications. In a properly configured system with compati-
ble, listed actuating and initiating devices, this control panel complies with the following NFPA standards for installation in accordance
with the acceptable standard:
Standard Covers

NFPA 12 CO2 Extinguishing Systems

NFPA 12A Halon 1301 Extinguishing Systems

NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems

NFPA 15 Water Spray Systems

NFPA 16 Foam-Water Deluge and Foam-water Spray Systems

NFPA 17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems

NFPA 17A Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems

NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems

Table 4.2 NFPA Standards for Releasing Applications

To locate your specific releasing applications, including type codes and wiring diagrams, see the checklist in Table 4.3:
Refer to

Section 4.7.2 “Programming”

Section 4.7.3 “Connecting a Releasing Device to the Control Panel”.

Section 4.7.4 “Connecting a Releasing Device to the FCM-1 Module”.

Section 4.7.6 “Connecting an NBG-12LRA Agent Release-Abort Station”.

Table 4.3 Locating Specific Releasing Application Details in This Manual

4.7.2 Programming
The control panel supports up to ten releasing software zones. You can map these zones to activate Control Panel releasing outputs and
FCM-1 modules. Program the FCM-1 module for the appropriate type code according to the chart below:

Type Code: RELEASE CKT Type Code: REL CKT ULC

• For use in UL applications. • For use in UL or ULC applications.
• Do not use REL device at the solenoid. • Requires REL device at solenoid.
• Cannot use power-limited wiring. • Power-limited wiring.
• Supervised for open circuit only. • Supervised for open circuit and shorts.
• Supervised for power loss with power-supervision relay. • Supervised for power loss with power-supervision relay.

For more information, refer to the NFS2-640/E Programming Manual.

4.7.3 Connecting a Releasing Device to the Control Panel

Use TB6 (NAC#4), TB7 (NAC#3), TB8 (NAC#2), or TB9 (NAC#1) on the control panel for NAC⁄Releasing Circuits. The releasing cir-
cuit must be supervised and use listed, compatible releasing devices; see Figure 4.8–Figure 4.10 (page 50).

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 49

Applications Releasing Applications

B+ NAC/Releasing output (source)

B– NAC/Releasing output (source)
A+ Class A (return for NAC only)
A– Class A (return for NAC only)
Compatible UL-listed
24 VDC releasing device

CPU2-640-RELCONN1.wmf
Control
Panel

REL-2.2K (Use with Type Code

Rel Ckt ULC, or see Circuit
Note: See text below for circuit requirements. Requirement 4.)

Figure 4.7 Typical Class B Connection of a Releasing Device to Control Panel

WARNING:
! DO NOT ENABLE THE BACKUP OPTION SWITCH FOR ANY OF THE FOUR NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCE CIRCUITS (NACS) IF THEY ARE USED FOR RELEASING FUNCTIONS!

Circuit Requirements. When connecting a releasing device, note the following:

1. The control panel provides four NAC/Releasing Circuits (Class A or Class B). Each circuit can provide 1.5 A. Total current drawn
from the power supply cannot exceed 7.4 A in an alarm condition (refer to Table A.2, “System Draw Current Calculations,” on
page 56). Use compatible UL-listed 24 VDC appliances only. For more information on compatible appliances, refer to the Device
Compatibility Document.
2. Refer to the Releasing Applications appendix in the NFS2-640/E Programming Manual for configuration details (such as setting
the Soak Timer).
3. For applications using power-limited circuits:
a) Use an in-line supervisory device (P/N REL-2.2K) with control panel releasing circuits. Connect the End-of-Line device as
shown in Figure 4.7.
b) Program the releasing circuit for Type Code REL CKT ULC.
c) Circuits are supervised against opens and shorts.
4. For applications not requiring power-limited circuits –
a) If the application does not require supervising the releasing device against shorts, in-line supervisory devices (P/N REL-2.2K)
are not required.
b) In non-power-limited applications, program the releasing circuit for Type Code RELEASE CKT.
c) Limited energy cable cannot be used to wire a non-power-limited releasing device circuit
d) Maintain a 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) spacing between the non-power-limited releasing circuit device wiring and any power-limited
circuit wiring.)
5. The releasing circuit must be programmed with a releasing type code listed in the NFS2-640/E Programming Manual.

NOTE: As per UL 864 9th Edition, a supervisory signal must be indicated at the panel whenever a releasing
circuit is physically disconnected. Use a monitor module to monitor dry contacts off the switch. See 4.11.
IQActuatorsa.wmf

Figure 4.8 Releasing Circuits (Option 1)

50 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Releasing Applications Applications

IQActuatorsb.wmf
Figure 4.9 Releasing Circuits (Option 2)

IQActuatorsc2010.w
Figure 4.10 Releasing Circuits (Option 3)
)

GasDisconnectMod.w
Monitor Module

Mechanical Disconnect Switch listed for the application

Note: Disconnect switch must provide separate dry
contacts to indicate supervisory.

Figure 4.11 Release Circuits (Mechanical Disconnect Switch)

4.7.4 Connecting a Releasing Device to the FCM-1 Module

The module can control 1 A of current. Make sure to keep total system current within the limits of the power supply. You can power the
module from the power supply of the Control Panel or any UL/ULC listed 24 VDC regulated power-limited power supply for Fire Pro-
tective Signaling. For more information, refer to the Device Compatibility Document.
SLC from FACP
or LEM-320
+ Non-resettable Power Supervision
Relay (EOLR-1) –
24 VDC Power +
–
+ –

Compatible UL-listed
24 VDC releasing device
–
Brow Red *If the SLC device
+ does not match the
one in this figure,
Relconn-

REL-47K refer to the SLC

(Use with Type manual appendix,
Code N.C. Supervision
Relay Contact FCM-1 which contains wir-
Rel Ckt ULC,
Part of EOLR-1 ing conversion
or see Circuit
charts for type V and
Note: See text for circuit requirements.

Figure 4.12 Typical Connection of a 24 VDC Releasing Device to the FCM-1 Module

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 51

Applications Releasing Applications

Circuit Requirements When connecting a releasing device to the FCM-1 module, note the following:
1. Refer to the Releasing Applications appendix in the NFS2-640/E Programming Manual for configuration details (such as setting
the Soak Timer).
2. For applications using power-limited circuits:
a) Use an in-line supervisory device (P/N REL-47K) with the FCM-1 module. Connect the in-line supervisory device as shown in
Figure 4.12.
b) Program the releasing circuit for Type Code REL CKT ULC.
c) Circuits are supervised against opens and shorts.
3. For applications not requiring power-limited circuits:
a) In-line supervisory devices (P/N REL-47K) are not required; however, the releasing device circuit is not supervised against
shorts.
b) In non-power-limited applications, program the releasing circuit for Type Code RELEASE CKT.
c) Limited energy cable cannot be used to wire a non-power-limited releasing device circuit.
d) Maintain a 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) spacing between the non-power-limited releasing circuit device wiring and any power-limited
circuit wiring.

WARNING:
! THE XP6-C IS NOT LISTED FOR RELEASING APPLICATIONS AND CANNOT BE SUBSTITUTED
FOR FCM-1

NOTE: As per UL 864 9th Edition, a supervisory signal must be indicated at the panel whenever a releasing
circuit is physically disconnected. Use a monitor module to monitor dry contacts off the switch. See 4.11.

52 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Releasing Applications Applications

4.7.5 Connecting Releasing Devices to the FCM-1-REL Control Module

Typical Connections Figure 4.13 and Figure 4.13 show typical connections for wiring a releasing device to the FCM-1-REL. Refer to
the Device Compatibility Document for compatible releasing devices.
Non-resettable
24 VDC power

(-)
(+)
SLC (-)
Module polarities are shown in alarm condition. SLC (+)
All wiring shown is supervised and power-limited.

Compatible UL-listed
24 VDC releasing device.

fcm-1-rel-
One (1) device maximum.

FCM-1-REL

Figure 4.13 NPFA Class B Wiring of the FCM-1-REL

Non-resettable When using the FCM-1-REL for
24 VDC power Class B applications, remove
jumper J1.

Module polarities are shown in alarm condition.

All wiring shown is supervised and power-limited.
(+)
SLC (-)
SLC (+)
(-)

SLC (-)
SLC (+)

Compatible UL-listed

fcm-1-1rel-
24 VDC releasing device.
One (1) device maximum.
FCM-1-REL

Figure 4.13 NPFA Class A Wiring of the FCM-1-REL

NOTE: With firmware version 12.0 or higher ALL new FlashScan Mode SLC releasing applications require the
FCM-1-REL control module. The V-type FCM-1 control module may be used in SLC releasing applications with
firmware version 14.0 or higher. H-type FCM-1 control modules do not support FlashScan Mode releasing
applications with firmware version 14.0 or higher. Use H-type FCM-1 for CLIP mode SLC releasing applications, with
firmware version 12.0 or higher.

Critical Requirements. When connecting a releasing device to the FCM-1-REL module, note the following:
1. See “Power Considerations” on page 52 for information on monitoring 24 VDC power.
2. Do not T-tap or branch a Class A or Class B circuit.
3. Only one (1) 24V solenoid or two (2) 12V solenoids in series can be connected to the
FCM-1-REL.
4. Do not loop wiring under the screw terminals. Break the wire run to provide supervision of connections.
5. All applications using the FCM-1-REL are power-limited:
1. Program the releasing circuit for Type Code REL CKT ULC or RELEASE CKT.
2. Circuits are supervised against opens and shorts.
6. Refer to the NFS2-640/E Programming Manual for instructions on setting the Soak Timer.
The FCM-1-REL module must be programmed with the correct releasing type code listed in the NFS2-640/E Programming Manual.

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 53

Applications Releasing Applications

4.7.6 Connecting an NBG-12LRA Agent Release-Abort Station

SLC loop to
NBG-12LRA
FMM-101 FACP or LEM-320
See Document 51369 Manual Abort Black
Yellow
for installation details.

Violet Red

Manual Release FMM-1

Black

Red

Normal Non-resettable +24 VDC

ELR mode R-47K
Release from main power supply
supervised and
power-limited
FRM-1

C.
NFS640-

N.C. N.O.
System
Common (–)

Power Supervision
Relay (EOLR-1)

24 VDC power FCM-1

from FACP’s *If the SLC device
main power supply does not match the
one in this figure,
24 VDC UL-listed refer to the SLC
releasing device
manual appendix,
Brown Red which contains wir-
REL-47K N.C. Supervision ing conversion
(use with Type Code Relay Contact charts for type V and
Rel Ckt ULC)

Figure 4.14 Typical Connections for an NBG-12LRA Agent Release-Abort Station

NOTE: If using the on-board NACs, see Circuit Requirements for Section 4.7.3 “Connecting a Releasing Device
to the Control Panel” on page 49. If using FCM-1, see Circuit Requirements for Section 4.7.4, “Connecting a
Releasing Device to the FCM-1 Module”, on page 51. If using the FCM-1-REL, see Circuit Requirements for
Section 4.7.5, “Connecting Releasing Devices to the FCM-1-REL Control Module”, on page 53.

54 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

 Section 5: Testing the System
5.1 Acceptance Test
When finished with the original installation and all modifications, conduct a complete operational test on the entire installation to verify
compliance with applicable NFPA standards. Testing should be conducted by a factory-trained fire alarm technician in the presence of a
representative of the Authority Having Jurisdiction and the owner’s representative. Follow procedures outlined in NFPA Standard 72’s
section on Inspection, Testing and Maintenance.

5.2 Periodic Testing and Service

Periodic testing and servicing of the control panel, all initiating and notification devices, and any other associated equipment is essential
to ensure proper and reliable operation. Test and service the control panel as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction and according
to the schedules and procedures outlined in the following documents:
• NFPA Standard 72’s section on Inspection, Testing and Maintenance.
• Service manuals and instructions for the peripheral devices installed in the system. Correct any trouble condition or malfunction
immediately.

5.3 Operational Checks

Before proceeding: a) notify the fire department and the central alarm receiving station if transmitting alarm conditions; b) notify facility
personnel of the test so that alarm sounding devices are disregarded during the test period; and c) when necessary, disable activation of
alarm notification appliances and speakers to prevent their sounding.
• Disconnect all releasing devices to prevent accidental activation in accordance with NFPA 2001 and NFPA 12A releasing agents.

WARNING:
! Do not rely on disable/enable software settings to lockout releasing devices.

• Check that the green POWER LED lights.

• Check that all status LEDs are off.
• Press and hold the LAMP TEST key. Verify that all LEDs and all LCD display segments work.
• Activate an Initiating Device Circuit using an alarm initiating device or an addressable initiating device on the SLC and check that
all programmed active notification appliances function. Reset the alarm initiating device, the control panel, and any other associated
equipment. In voice alarm applications, confirm that the proper tone(s) and/or messages sound during alarm conditions. Select the
paging function and confirm that the message can be heard in the affected fire zones. Repeat the above step with each Initiating
Device Circuit and each addressable device.
• On systems equipped with a fire fighter’s telephone circuit, make a call from a telephone circuit and confirm a ring tone. Answer
the call and confirm communication with the incoming caller. End the call and repeat for each telephone circuit in the system.
• Remove AC power, activate an Initiating Device Circuit through an alarm initiating device or an addressable initiating device on
the SLC, and check that programmed active notification appliances sound, and alarm indicators illuminate. Measure the battery
voltage with notification appliances active. Replace any battery with a terminal voltage less than 21.6 VDC and reapply AC Power.

NOTE: The battery test requires fully charged batteries. If batteries are new or discharged due
to a recent power outage, allow the batteries to charge for 48 hours before testing.

• Return all circuits to their pretest condition.

• Check that all status LEDs are off and the green POWER LED is on.
• Notify fire, central station and/or building personnel when you finish testing the system.

5.4 Battery Checks and Maintenance

Maintenance-free sealed lead-acid batteries used in the system do not require the addition of water or electrolyte. These batteries are
charged and maintained in a fully charged state by the main power supply’s charger during normal system operation. A discharged bat-
tery typically reaches the voltage of 27.6 VDC within 48 hours; the charge rate depends on the battery size (2.0A for 18-26AH; 5.0A-
5.7A for 26AH-200AH).
Batteries should be replaced in accordance with the battery manufacturer’s recommendations. Immediately replace a leaking or damaged
battery.

WARNING:
! Batteries contain Sulfuric Acid which can cause severe burns to the skin and eyes and damage to
fabrics.

• If a battery leaks and contact is made with the Sulfuric Acid, immediately flush skin and/or eyes with water for at least 15 minutes.
Water and household baking soda provides a good neutralizing solution for Sulfuric Acid.
• If Sulfuric Acid gets into eyes, seek immediate medical attention.
• Ensure proper handling of the battery to prevent short circuits.

55 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Testing the System Battery Checks and Maintenance

• Take care to avoid accidental shorting of the leads from uninsulated work benches, tools, bracelets, rings, and coins.

WARNING:
! Shorting the battery leads can damage the battery, equipment, and could cause injury to personnel.

56 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

 Appendix A: Power Supply Calculations
Calculations must be done to determine standby and alarm DC current loads. Ampere-hour requirements must be calculated as well
to determine battery size. The on-board power supply provides filtered 24VDC power that may be used for operating external
devices. Use Table A.2 to determine if external loading is within the capabilities of the power supply.

A.1 Calculating AC Branch Circuit Current

Use Table A.1 below to determine the total amount of current, in AC amperes, that a 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz service must be able to
supply to the fire alarm system. Devices rated for 240 VAC operation will draw approximately one-half the current listed in Table
A.1.

No. of
Device Type Current (amps) Total Current
Devices
CPS-24 Power Supply [ 1 ] X 5.0 = 5.0
CPS-24/E Power Supply [ .. ] X 2.5A =
AA-30 [ ] X 1.00 =
AA-120 [ ] X 1.85 =
FCPS-24S6/S8 [ ] X 3.2 =
ACPS-2406 [ ] X 2.7* =
ACPS-610 [ ] X 5.0* =
ACPS-610/E [ ] X 2.5 =
APS-6R [ ] X 2.5 =
CHG-120 [ ] X 2.0 =
Sum column for AC Branch Current required=amps

Table A.1 120 VAC Fire Alarm Circuit

* Separate calculations are required for any devices powered by the ACPS-2406 and ACPS-
610. It has its own integral battery charger and batteries can be connected directly to it. Refer to
the ACPS-2406 or ACPS-610 Installation Manuals for battery calculations.

AC Branch Circuit Installation: For guidelines on wiring the AC branch circuit current, see “Operating Power: AC Branch Circuit” on
page 72 in Appendix B.1 “Electrical Specifications”.

A.2 Calculating the System Current Draws

The control panel’s main power supply must be able to power all internal system devices (and several types of external devices)
continuously during non-fire alarm conditions. Use column 1 in Table A.2 to calculate the Non-Fire Alarm Load on the power
supply regulator when applying primary power. The main power supply must also provide a finite amount of additional current
during a fire alarm condition. Use column 2 in Table A.2 to calculate the additional current needed during fire alarms. The
requirements for non-fire alarm and fire alarm current loads cannot exceed the capabilities of the power supply as listed below:
• 4.4 A at 24 VDC during Standby; and
• 7.4 A at 24 VDC during Alarm.
The current draw from all NACs plus DC output from TB10 and TB2 is 3.0 A during standby and 6.0 A during alarm.
How to Use the Calculating Tables
As used in this section, “Primary” refers to the control panel’s on-board power supply, its primary source of AC power. “Secondary”
refers to the control panel’s backup batteries (or any other 24 VDC power supply listed for Fire Protective Signaling and connected
in place of the batteries). The term “standby” refers to the output current required when no fire alarm is present. The term “alarm”
refers to the output current required when a fire alarm is present.
The Primary Power Source Non-Alarm Current and Alarm Current columns are DC current calculations. These calculations
confirm that the power supply can provide enough current to support the system during Primary Non-Fire Alarm and Fire Alarm
conditions.
Quantities List the number of devices powered by the FACP and its power supply. Devices powered by the Accessories Output
(TB10 and TB2) draw current directly from the panel. Devices powered by the Panel Output draw current through the fire panel’s
connection to the power supply. Use these quantities to calculate total current draw of each set of devices in calculation columns 1,
2, and 3.

57 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

 Add the contents of calculation column 1 to get the current drawn
Calculation Column 1 (Primary, Non-Fire Alarm Current in amps)
from the power supply during a non-alarm condition, with AC power applied. This current draw cannot exceed 4.4 A without an
auxiliary power supply.
Calculation column 2 lets the system designer determine the current load
Calculation Column 2 (Primary, Fire Alarm Current in amps)
that the power supply must support during a fire alarm. The total current draw during a fire alarm cannot exceed 6 A without an
auxiliary power supply.
Typically, a system should contain capacity to activate all output circuits and relays, and support fire alarms on no less than 10% of
Initiating Device Circuits, subject to the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
The Control Panel provides power for Notification Appliance Circuits. Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for 24 VDC
notification appliances that are UL- and ULC-listed for fire alarm systems.
Calculation Column 3 [Secondary (Battery) Non-Alarm Current] Column 3 lets the system designer calculate the non-fire alarm current
drawn from the secondary source in a non-fire alarm condition during AC power loss.The non-fire alarm current is required to
complete the standby battery calculations. After summing all current draws, insert the total in Table A.3.

Calculation Column 1 Calculation Column 2 Calculation Column 3

Category Primary, Non-Fire Alarm Primary, Fire Alarm Secondary, Non-Fire Alarm
Current (amps) Current (amps) Current (amps)
X [current X [current X [current
Qty Total Qty Total Qty Total
draw]= draw]= draw]=
CPU2-640/E 1 x [0.250] = 1 x [0.250] = 1 x [0.250] =
# NACs in use (0, 1, 2, 3 or 4)* [ ] x [0.035] [ ] x [0.035] [ ] x [0.035]
CPS-24/E n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a x [0.040]
KDM-R2 (Backlight on) [ ] x [0.100]= [ ] x [0.100]= [ ] x [0.100]=
LEM-320 0/ x [0.100]= 0/ x [0.100]= 0/ x [0.100]=
1 1 1
SLC loop†: 1/2 x [.200]= 1/2 x [.200]= 1/2 x [.200]=
NCA, NCA-2 (Back light ON) [ ] x [0.400]= [ ] x [0.400]= [ ] x [0.400]=
NCA, NCA-2 (Back light OFF) [ ] x [0.200]= [ ] x [0.200]= [ ] x [0.200]=
NCM-W, NCM-F [ ] x [0.110]= [ ] x [0.110]= [ ] x [0.110]=
HS-NCM-W/MF/SF/WMF/WSF/ [ ] x [0.400]= [ ] x [0.400]= [ ] x [0.400]=
MFSF [ ] x [0.110]= [ ] x [0.175]= [ ] x [0.110]=
TM-4 [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
DPI-232 (Refer to manual**)
APS-6R [ ] x [0.025]=
APS2-6R [ ] x [0.0013]=
ACPS-2406, ACPS-610
DVC components (Refer to [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
manual**) [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
AA-30 [ ] x [0.045]=
AA-100, AA-120 [ ] x [0.050]=
ACM-24AT [ ] x [0.016]= [ ] x [0.070]= [ ] x [0.016]=
ACM-48A [ ] x [0.016]= [ ] x [0.070]= [ ] x [0.016]=
AEM-24AT [ ] x [0.002]= [ ] x [0.056]= [ ] x [0.002]=
AEM-48A [ ] x [0.002]= [ ] x [0.056]= [ ] x [0.002]=
Maximum number of LEDs [ ] x [0.0054]= [ ] x [0.0054]=
illuminated on these annunciators
during non-fire conditions:
AFM-16AT, AFM-32A [ ] x [0.040]= [ ] x [0.056]= [ ] x [0.040]=
ACM-16AT, ACM-32A [ ] x [0.040]= [ ] x [0.056]= [ ] x [0.040]=
AEM-16AT, AEM-32A [ ] x [0.002]= [ ] x [0.018]= [ ] x [0.002]=
AFM-16A [ ] x [0.025]= [ ] x [0.065]= [ ] x [0.025]=
ACM-8R (refer to manual**) [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
LDM (refer to manual**) [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
FDU-80 LCD-80, LCD2-80 [ ] x [0.0643]= [ ] x [0.0643]= [ ] x [0.0643]=
[ ] x [0.100]= x [0.100]= x [0.050]=
AMG-1, AMG-E [ ] x [0.060]= [ ] x [0.060]= [ ] x [0.060]=
RM-1 [ ] x [0.020]= [ ] x [0.020]= [ ] x [0.020]=
FZM-1, MMX-2 [ ] x [0.0094]= [ ] x [0.090]= [ ] x [0.0094]=

Table A.2 System Draw Current Calculations (1 of 2)

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 58

 Calculation Column 1 Calculation Column 2 Calculation Column 3
Category Primary, Non-Fire Alarm Primary, Fire Alarm Secondary, Non-Fire Alarm
Current (amps) Current (amps) Current (amps)
RPT-W, RPT-WF, RPT-F [ ] x [0.017]= [ ] x [0.017]= [ ] x [0.017]=
RPT-485W, RPT-485WF
UDACT Communicator [ ] x [0.040]= [ ] x [0.100]= [ ] x [0.040]=
UDACT-2 Communicator [ ] x [0.052]= [ ] x [0.087]= [ ] x [0.052]=
NFV-25/50 (see manual**) [ ] x[ ]= x[ ]= x[ ]=
Four-Wire Smoke Detectors‡ [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
[ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
Power Supervision Relay [ ] x [0.020]= [ ] x [0.020]= [ ] x [0.020]=
EOLR-1
FWSG (only if powered by the [ ] x [0.040]= [ ] x [0.040]= [ ] x [0.040]=
FWSG 24V connections TB:A2
and TB:A3)
Notification Appliance powered [ ] x[ ]=
from Main Power Supply** [ ] x[ ]=
DHX-501, FSD-751RP, FSD- [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
751RPL (Duct Detectors with [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
internal relays)
Refer to installation document
CHG-120 Battery Charger [ ] x [0.060]=
Local Energy Municipal Box [ ] x[ ]=
Compatible Devices not listed [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
above†† [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
Sum each column for totals Primary, non-alarm: Primary, alarm: Secondary, non-alarm:

Table A.2 System Draw Current Calculations (2 of 2)

* Maximum current draw for all NACs plus DC output from TB10 and TB2 is 3.0 A during standby.
† Value represents an SLC’s maximum current draw. Refer to device datasheets for individual current draws.
‡ The total regulated load current supplied to four-wire smoke detector and power supervision relays cannot exceed 1.25 A.
** Enter the total notification appliance draw from the Main Power Supply, excluding the current from APS-6R supplies. Refer to Device
Compatibility Document.
†† Refer to manual and/or Device Compatibility Document. See Table 1.1, “Reference Documentation,” on page 8 for specific documentation part
numbers.

A.2.1 Calculating the Maximum Secondary Power Fire Alarm Current Draw
Use Table A.3 below to determine the maximum current requirements of secondary power source during fire alarm conditions. The
result obtained is the amount of current that the batteries must be able to supply to the fire alarm system. Use the result in Table A.4
to determine the size of the batteries needed for the fire alarm system.
Results taken from Table A.3 below assume that, while in a fire alarm condition, batteries must feed the main power supply (and
any additional supplies such as the APS-6R and AA-30) with the maximum rated power each supply can provide.

Current
Device Quantity Total Current/Type
(in amps)
Alarm Current, from Table A.2, col 2 =
*
APS-6R [ ] X 6 =
APS2-6R [ ] 6 =
AA-30† [ ] X 3 =
AA-120 [ ] X 7.3 =
Sum Column for Secondary Fire Alarm Load =

Table A.3 Maximum Secondary Power Fire Alarm Current Draw

* Actual load current may be used in place of maximum rated supply current. To calculate
actual load current, sum the current draws for each appliance connected to APS-6R
supplies.
† Exclude Amplifiers that are employed for backup.
NOTE: The Secondary Fire Alarm Load cannot exceed the following:
12 A with BAT-12260 batteries (12 V, 26 AH).
20 A with BAT-12550 batteries (12 V, 55 AH).

59 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

A.3 Calculating the Battery Requirements
A.3.1 Calculating the Battery Capacity
Use this table to determine the battery capacity needed for the system:
Current (amps) X Time (hours) = AH
Secondary Non-Fire Alarm Current (from Required Secondary Non-Fire Alarm Standby
column 3 in Table A.2) Time (24 or 60 hours)
(see Note 8)
X ________________ = _________AH
________________
APS-6R Required Secondary Non-Fire Alarm Standby
Standby Load Current Time (24 or 60 hours)

________________ X ________________ = _________AH

Secondary Fire Alarm Load Required Fire Alarm Standby Time: (for 5
(from Table A.3) minutes, enter 0.084; for 15 minutes, enter 0.25)

(see Note 8) ________________

X = _________AH
________________
Sum Column for Total Secondary Amp Hours calculated = _________AH
Multiply by the derating factor x 1.2 (see Note 7) = _________AH
Battery Size – Total Secondary Amp Hours Required = _________AH
1. NFPA 72 Local, Proprietary, and Central Station systems require 24 hours of standby power followed by 5 minutes in alarm.
2. NFPA 72 Auxiliary and Remote Station Systems require 24 hours of standby power followed by 5 minutes in alarm.
3. Batteries installed in a system powered by an automatic starting engine generator need to provide at least 4 hours of standby power.
4. Factory Mutual requires 90 hours of standby for deluge-preaction systems.
5. Emergency voice/alarm communications systems require 2 hours of operation in the alarm condition. Due to the sporadic nature of voice
operation, however, NFPA 72 permits 15 minutes of operation at a maximum connected load to equal 2 hours of normal use.
6. If the total exceeds 26 AH, the system requires a separate NFS-LBB, BB-100 or BB-200 battery enclosure for two larger capacity batteries.
7. The following battery derating factors must be used for Canadian installations using NFS2-640/E charger:
• For a 26 AH battery, use derating factor of 1.5
• For a 55 AH battery, use derating factor of 1.8
• For a 100 AH battery, use derating factor of 2.5
• For a 200 AH battery, use derating factor of 2.5
8. For 26 AH batteries: maximum standby current cannot exceed 0.65A; maximum alarm current cannot exceed 6.75A.

Table A.4 Secondary Power Standby and Fire Alarm Load

A.3.2 Calculating the Battery Size

Use this table to choose the battery size, in amp-hours, needed to support the fire alarm system.
The CPS-24/E can charge batteries from 18 to 200 AH. Select batteries that meet or exceed the Total Amp-Hours calculated in Table A.4 and that
are within the acceptable battery charger range. Write the amp-hours requirements on the Protected Premises label.
The maximum battery size that can be mounted inside a CAB-4 series backbox is 26AH.
Battery Voltage Number Our Part
Backbox Part Number†
Size Rating Required Number
18 AH 12 volts two BAT-12180 SBB-A4*, SBB-B4*,
SBB-C4*, SBB-D4*, BB-25
26 AH 12 volts two BAT-12260 SBB-A4, SBB-B4,
SBB-C4, SBB-D4, BB-25
100 AH 12 volts four for 100 BAT- BB-100
AH 121000 BB-200
two for 200
AH
*Manufactured to our specifications.
†Red version available; add “R” to part number listed here

Table A.5 Selecting Battery and Battery Backbox

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 60

 Appendix B: Electrical Specifications
B.1 Electrical Specifications
AC Power
Component Values
Main Power Supply 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 5.0 A; or
240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.5 A
Wire size Maximum 12 AWG (3.31 mm2) with 600 VAC insulation

NOTE: If using an auxiliary power supply such as FCPS-24S6/S8, APS-6R, ACPS-2406, or ACPS-610, or
audio amplifiers, refer to the documentation for that equipment.

Batteries
The control panel uses only sealed lead-acid batteries for secondary standby power. Maximum battery capacity for the CPS-24/E main
power supply is 200 AH. CAB-4 Series backboxes provide space for two 26 AH (or smaller) batteries. Use external battery boxes if the
installation requires larger capacity batteries; see Table A.5, “Selecting Battery and Battery Backbox,” on page 58.
The table below contains battery charger specifications.
Charger Description Specifications

CPS-24/E An internal battery charger for 18 Normal Charge: 27.6 VDC +/- 0.24 VDC
Main Power Supply AH to 200 AH Charging Current: 2.0 A or 5.7 A (Software selectable)

CHG-120 An external battery charger Dual Rate: High Charge: 28.1 VDC
Battery Charger designed to charge lead-acid Normal Charge: 27.6 VDC
batteries between 26 AH and 120 Charging Current: 4.5 A
AH

ACPS-2406 An internal battery charger for Normal Charge: 27.6 VDC

Auxiliary 7AH to 26 AH Charging Current: 1.1 A max (0.750 A typical)
Charger/Power Supply

ACPS-610 An internal battery charger for Normal Charge: 27.6 VDC +/- 0.24 VDC
Addressable 12AH to 200AH Charging Current: 2A, 5A, or OFF (Software Selectable)
Charger/Power Supply

Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)

Item Value
Voltage 24 VDC nominal, 27.6 VDC maximum
Maximum length 12,500 ft. (3810 m) total loop or circuit length (NFPA Class A, B, and X)
Note: Refer to Appendix B.2 “Wire Requirements” for limitations.
Maximum current 400 mA peak, 200 mA average (max short circuit; circuit will shut down until
short is fixed). For battery calculation purposes use 200mA.
Maximum resistance 50 ohms (supervised and power-limited)

Notification Appliance Circuits & Releasing Circuits

Item Value
Max. wiring voltage drop 2 VDC
(Retrofit note: SLCs with old CMX modules are restricted to 1.2 VDC.)
NAC Nominal operating 24 VDC regulated, 1.5 A max.
voltage
Special Applications for 20.16 - 26.42 VDC
Releasing Circuits
Current for all external 6.0 A in alarm (3 A continuous)
devices connected to the TB2, TB10 and all 4 NACs share a maximum of 3.0 A in standby and 6.0 in
control panel’s power supply alarm.
Optional ACPS-2406 Total 6 A in alarm (5 A continuous)
Optional ACPS-610 Total 6 A in alarm (1.5 A single output)
Optional APS-6R Total 6 A in alarm (4 A continuous)
End-of-Line Resistors Control Panel NACs (TB6, TB7, TB8, TB9): 2.2K, 1/2 watt
(ELRs) XP6-C, FCM-1 Modules: 47K, 1/2 watt
NOTE: For a list of compatible Notification Appliance Circuits and Releasing Circuits see Notifier Device
Compatibility Document 15378.

61 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Electrical Specifications Wire Requirements

Output Relays
Output relays for Alarm and Trouble are common on TB4; Supervisory and Security are programmable on TB5. See Figure 3.21, “Form-
C Relay Connections” on page 39).
Contact ratings: 2.0 A @ 30 VDC (resistive)
Four-wire Smoke Detector Power
Control Panel terminals TB10 RESET (+) and (–) supply filtered, low-noise power for four-wire smoke detectors. Specifications are:
• Nominal voltage: 24 VDC special applications.
• Maximum rated current: 1.25 A DC
• Maximum ripple voltage: 176 mVrms
• TB10, TB2, and all 4 NACs share a maximum of 3.0 A in standby and 6.0 A in alarm.
Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for compatible 24 VDC detectors.
Power Output
Control Panel terminals TB10 NONRESET (+) and (–) supply one (1) power-limited circuit available to power external devices, such as
notification appliances and annunciators.
• Nominal voltage: 24 VDC regulated, special applications, 1.5 A max.
• Maximum rated current: 1.25 A DC
• Maximum ripple voltage: 176 mVrms
• TB10, TB2, and all 4 NACs share a maximum of 3.0 A in standby and 6.0 A in alarm.
Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for compatible devices and notification appliances.

NOTE: The Control Panel provides a total of 7.4 A of power in alarm (4.4 A in standby), shared
by all internal circuitry and external provisions (24 V resettable and non-resettable). TB10 and all
4 NACs share a maximum of 3.0 A in standby and 6.0 A in alarm. For power requirements, refer
to the power supply calculation tables in Appendix A.

Operating Power: AC Branch Circuit

The control panel requires connection to a separate dedicated AC branch circuit. Follow these guidelines when connecting the AC
branch circuit:
• Label the branch circuit “Fire Alarm”. This must be a separate dedicated AC fire alarm circuit.
• Connect the branch circuit to the line side of the main power feed of the protected premises.
• Do not power other equipment from the fire alarm branch circuit.
• Run the AC branch circuit wire continuously, without any disconnect devices except for overcurrent protection, from the power
source to the fire alarm control panel.
• Overcurrent protection for the AC branch circuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Electrical Codes, as well as local
codes.
• Use 12 AWG (3.31 mm2) wire with 600 VAC insulation for the AC branch circuit.
Connect the ground terminal (TB1-Earth) to a solid earth ground (a metallic, cold water pipe may be suitable in some installations). This
connection is vital in reducing the panel’s susceptibility to transients generated by lightning and electrostatic discharge.
Operating Power: Secondary Power Source (Batteries)
The battery charger is current-limited and can recharge sealed lead-acid type batteries. The battery charger shuts off when the control
panel is in alarm.

B.2 Wire Requirements

Each type of circuit within the Fire Alarm Control System requires use of a specific wire type to ensure proper circuit operation. The
wire gauge of a particular circuit depends on the length of that circuit and the current traveling through it. Use Table B.1 below to deter-
mine the specific wiring requirements for each circuit.
Compliance with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Department of Communication regulations on electri-
cal energy radiation requires the following: Use twisted-pair shielded wire for any non-SLC-loop wiring entering or exiting the cabinet
that is not enclosed in conduit. Use twisted-pair unshielded wiring for SLC-loop wiring.

NOTE: If running an SLC in conduit with Notification Appliance Circuits, you can reduce
problems by exclusively using electronic sounders (such as the SpectrAlert, SpectrAlert Advanced
or MA/SS-24 Series) instead of more electronically noisy notification appliances (such as
electromechanical bells or horns).

62 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

Wire Requirements Electrical Specifications

Circuit Distance
Circuit Type Wire Requirements Typical Wire Type
Function (feet/meters)
SLC Connects to Twisted-unshielded pair, 12 to 18 AWG 12,500 ft. (3,810 m) 12 AWG (3.31 mm2)
(power limited) intelligent and (3.31 to 0.82 mm2). 50 ohms maximum per 9,500 ft. (2,895.6 m) 14 AWG (2.08 mm2)
addressable length of Class A & X loops. 50 ohms per 6,000 ft. (1,828.8 m) 16 AWG (1.31 mm2)
modules. branch maximum for Class B loop. 3,700 ft. (1,127.76 m) 18 AWG (0.82 mm2)
Twisted, shielded pair 5,000 ft. (1,524 m) 12 to 16 AWG (3.31 to
NOTE: 01.31 mm2)
• Shields must be isolated from ground. 3,700 ft. (1,127.76 m) 18 AWG (0.82 mm2)
• Shields should be broken at each
device.
Untwisted, unshielded wire, in conduit or 5,000 ft. (1,524 m) 12 to 16 AWG (3.31 to
outside of conduit. 01.31 mm2)
3,700 ft. (1,127.76 m) 18 AWG (0.82 mm2)
Note: Maximum total capacitance of all
SLC wiring (both between conductors and
from any conductor to ground) should not
exceed 0.5 mircofarads.
EIA-485 Connects to Twisted-shielded pair with a characteristic 6,000/1829 16 AWG (1.31 mm2)
(power limited) FDU-80, ACS impedance of 120 ohms. 18 AWG (0.82 (max)
modules, LCD- mm2) minimum.
80, or TM-4
Transmitter
EIA-232 Connects to Twisted-shielded pair in conduit. 20 feet (6.1 m) 16 AWG (1.31 mm2)
(power limited) Printers, CRT, 18 AWG (0.82 mm2) minimum. (without modem)
or PC.
IDC FMM-1, 12-18 AWG (3.31 to 0.82 mm2). 12 to 18 AWG (3.31 to
Initiating Device FMM-101, Maximum circuit resistance is 20 ohms. 0.82 mm2)
Circuit FDM-1XP10-M,
XP6-MA
(power limited)
NAC FCM-1*, XP6-C 12-18 AWG (3.31 to 0.82 mm2). .To meet 1.2 V drop, 12 to 18 AWG (3.31 to
Notification (power limited) At alarm current level, no more than a 1.2 or sized to provide 0.82 mm2)
Appliance V drop at the end of the circuit, or sized to the minimum rated
Circuit provide the minimum rated operating operating voltage of
voltage of the appliances used. the appliances used.
Releasing FCM-1-REL 12-18 AWG (3.31 to 0.82 mm2). To meet 5 ohms 12 to 18 AWG (3.31 to
Module 5 ohms maximum per circuit for class A or maximum circuit 0.82 mm2)
B, or sized to provide the minimum rated resistance, or sized
operating voltage of the appliances used. to provide the
minimum rated
operating voltage of
the appliances used
24 VDC Power To TM-4 12-18 AWG (3.31 to 0.82 mm2). To meet 1.2 volt drop 12 to 18 AWG (3.31 to
Runs Transmitter, Size wire so that no more than 1.2 V drop 0.82 mm2)
(power-limited) Annunciator and across wire run from supply source to end
FCM-1 modules of any branch.
CHG-120 External battery 12 AWG (3.31 mm2) in conduit 20/6.1 (max) 12 AWG (3.31 mm2)
charger
Note: * FCM-1 cannot be used for synchronized strobe/sounder applications.

Table B.1 Wire Requirements

NOTE: Lightning arresters required on circuits extending between buildings; 999 meter length maximum to
meet UL 60950.

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 63

 Appendix C: Canadian Applications
C.1 Standalone Application
C.1.1 NFS2-640/E with KDM-R2
If using KDM-R2 as the primary display for NFS2-640/E, an ACS series annunciator must be mounted adjacent to the panel or within
NFS2-640/E enclosure.

C.1.2 NFS2-640/E with NCA-2

Network Control Annunciator (NCA-2) with 640-character, multi-line display complies with ULC requirements when used as the pri-
mary display for NFS2-640/E.

C.2 Network Applications

To meet ULC requirements, the network’s Manual Controls may only be operated from one location at any given time. When panels are
networked (using NCM Network Communications Modules or High-Speed Network Communications Modules), use AKS-1B Key
Switch on each panel’s Primary Annunciator to enable its functions. NCA-2 may be a Primary Annunciator when AKS-1B is installed.
Refer to the NCA-2 Manual for more information.
The NCA-2 or ONYXworks may be employed as a Display and Control Center. In the event that communication fails between the pan-
els and the Control Center, the panels will continue to function in local/standalone mode.

C.3 Automatic Alarm Signal Silence

If selecting this feature for a system requiring annunciators, consult the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
If Auto Silence is enabled, the value must be set to 20 minutes. An ACS point is required to monitor special function zone ZF40.
Activation of Auto Silence will activate the Signal Silence LED on the fire panel display and any ACM LED point programmed for Auto
Silence.

C.4 Annunciator Applications

1. In Canada, the ACM series annunciator modules must be used to annunciate the fire alarm input points/zones only, if no multi-line
sequential display is installed.
2. For Canadian applications, the following LED colors must be employed:
– Red must be used to indicate active alarm inputs.
– Yellow must be used to indicate supervisory, burglary, trouble signals, and Automatic Alarm Signal Cancel.
– Green must be used to indicate the presence of power or an activated output.
3. Two Stage Systems (3/5 minute timer) - ACM-24AT control point is required for Automatic Alarm Signal Cancel. Acknowledge
will not cancel the Two-Stage Timer. For applications using Two Stage with the ACPS-610, see the ACPS-610 manual for
additional programming instructions.
4. The ACM point designated for Automatic Alarm Signal Cancel should be labeled as “Automatic Alarm Signal Cancel” or “Auto
Alm Signal Cancel.”
5. If the DCC option is enabled, an ACS point is required to monitor ZF36 for the panel itself as well as each DCC on the network.

C.5 Releasing Devices

Supervision for shorts is required; use REL devices and type code REL CKT ULC.
(With on-board NACs, use REL-2.2K; with FCM-1 modules use REL-47K. Refer to Section 4.7.5 “Connecting Releasing Devices to the
TC810S1000 Control Module” for details.)

C.6 Ancillary Devices

Panel control functions (Acknowledge, Signal Silence, Reset, and Drill) will not function on ancillary devices such as the ACM-24-AT,
FDU-80, or the LCD2-80. (Local acknowledge will function on the ancillary device to silence the piezo and steady the LEDs).

C.7 Isolating NACs with Audio Isolator Modules

C.7.1 Description of Modules
The audio isolator modules described below may be used to isolate short circuits during alarm signaling. These modules are listed with
ULC for use with the NFS2-640C.
• AIM-1 - This module provides isolation to a separate circuit on an audible notification riser. A short circuit on an AIM-1 NAC circuit
will not disable other NACs circuits on the riser.
• RSM-1 - This module works the same as the AIM-1, with the exception that there is a silence button for in-suite operation. The silence
button will silence the audible signal to the module’s circuit for ten minutes during alarm. Resounding will occur automatically after ten
minutes.

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 64

 Notes

65 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

 Index
Numerics F Non-Power-Limited Circuits
24 VDC, see Power (DC) FCM-1 51 UL Wiring Requirements 36
FCM-1-REL 44, 53 Notification Appliance Circuits, see NACs
A Fire/Security Applications 47–48
A77-716B, see Power Supervision Relay FMM-1 48 O
Replaced by EOLR-1 Form-C Relays 35, 62 Operating Power 62
AC, also see Power 31 Four-wire Smoke Detector Operational Checks 55
Acceptance Test 55 Specifications 62 Option Boards
ACM-8R FSA-8000 Wiring Installation Steps 25
Labeling Requirements 36 34 Output Relays
Agent Release-Abort Station 54 Connections 35, 62
Alarm Relays, see Form-C Relays 35 I Specifications 62
Ancillary Devices 64 Installation
Checklist 19 P
B Preparation 18 Periodic Testing 55
Backup-Alarm Switches 35 Power
Basic Equipment Packages 11 J AC Power Checklist 31
Batteries, also see Power: DC Jumper Locations 13, 14 AC Power Connections 31
Battery Calculations 57, 58, 59, 60 AC Specifications 61
Battery Checks and Maintenance 55 DC Power Connections 31, 32
K Installation Steps 30
Battery Specifications 61 KDM-R2
Connections 31 Power Specifications 30, 62
Installation steps 24 Power Supervision Relay 51
Battery Plate 20 Keltron, also see Printers 38
Battery plate 24 Power Supply Calculations 57, 58, 59, 60
Power-Limited Wiring Requirements 36
L Primary Display 11, 25
C LDM-R32 primary display 24
Cabinets 15 Non-Power-Limited Circuits 36 Printers 41
Mounting 19 LED Locations 14 Installation 37–41
Canadian Applications 25, 64 Lockout 55 Keltron Printer Connections 38
Central Receiving Unit, also see UDACT Manual Loop Expander Module PRN Series Connections 37
48 Installation Steps 28 PRN Settings 38
Chassis 27 PRN/CRT Combination 41
Circuit Board, see CPU Proprietary Security Alarm Applications
Compatible Equipment 15 M
Main Power Supply, see Power Supply Wiring 48
Components 13, 14 Protected Premises Unit 44
Control Panel Circuit Board, see CPU Maintenance 55
CPS-24/E, see Power Supply Microcontroller Failure 35
CPU Mounting R
CPU-640 (120V operation) 11 LEM 29 Related Documentation 8
CPU-640E (240V operation) 11 MRD-1 9 Relays, see Form-C Relays 35
Drawing 11, 13, 14 MRD-1 Manual Releasing Disconnect Assembly Releasing Circuits
Overview 11 17 Connections 33
CRTs 41 Multiple Detector Operation 42 Releasing Applications 49–54
CRT/PRN Combination 41 Releasing Applications, Canada 64
CRT-2 Configuration 39 N Specifications 61
CRT-2 Function Keys and Parameters 41 NACs (Notification Appliance Circuits) Releasing Device
Installation 37–41 Backup Option 35 Connections 49
NAC Connections 33 FCM-1 Connections 51
Releasing Applications 35, 49, 50 FCM-1-REL Connections 44, 53
D
DC, also see Power 31 Specifications 61
DVC 29 NBG-12LRA 54 S
NCA-2, also see Primary Display 11 Security Relays, see Form-C Relays 35
NCD 21 Security Tamper Switch 47, 48
E Network 21 Service 55
Electrical Connections 30 Networking 29 SLC 28
Electrical Specifications 61 NFPA Applications SLC, also see SLC Wiring Manual 42
Ematch Protection Device 34 NFPA 72 Central or Remote Station Fire Specifications 61
EOLR-1 see Power Supervision Relay Alarm System 44 Specifications 61, 62
External Power Supervision 44 NFPA Applications (Overview) 44 Stacker-Connector 29

66 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19

 Index

Stand-Off Lengths 23
Stat-X
Device Wiring 34
STS-1, also see Security Tamper Switch 48
Supervisory and Security Contacts
-Configuring as Alarm Contacts 35
Supervisory Relays, see Form-C Relays 35
Supplemental Documentation 8
Switches
Backup-Alarm 35
Switch Locations 13, 14
System
Description of Features 10
Limitations 10
Options 10
System Current Draws 57, 58, 59, 60

T
Terminal Block Locations 13, 14
Testing 55
TM-4, also see TM-4 Installation Document 28
Trouble Relays, see Form-C Relays 35

U
UL Non-Power-Limited Wiring Requirements 36
UL Requirements 36

V
VeriFire 43

W
Wiring
Proprietary Security Alarm Applications
48
Wire Requirements 62

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 67

 Manufacturer Warranties and Limitation of Liability
Manufacturer Warranties. Subject to the limitations set forth herein, Manufacturer
warrants that the Products manufactured by it in its Northford, Connecticut facility
and sold by it to its authorized Distributors shall be free, under normal use and
service, from defects in material and workmanship for a period of thirty six months
(36) months from the date of manufacture (effective Jan. 1, 2009). The Products
manufactured and sold by Manufacturer are date stamped at the time of production.
Manufacturer does not warrant Products that are not manufactured by it in its
Northford, Connecticut facility but assigns to its Distributor, to the extent possible,
any warranty offered by the manufacturer of such product. This warranty shall be
void if a Product is altered, serviced or repaired by anyone other than Manufacturer
or its authorized Distributors. This warranty shall also be void if there is a failure to
maintain the Products and the systems in which they operate in proper working
conditions.
MANUFACTURER MAKES NO FURTHER WARRANTIES, AND DISCLAIMS ANY
AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS, TRADEMARKS, PROGRAMS AND SERVICES
RENDERED BY MANUFACTURER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,
INFRINGEMENT, TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. MANUFACTURER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH WHICH MAY ARISE IN THE COURSE OF, OR AS
A RESULT OF, PERSONAL, COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL USES OF ITS
PRODUCTS.
This document constitutes the only warranty made by Manufacturer with respect to
its products and replaces all previous warranties and is the only warranty made by
Manufacturer. No increase or alteration, written or verbal, of the obligation of this
warranty is authorized. Manufacturer does not represent that its products will
prevent any loss by fire or otherwise.
Warranty Claims. Manufacturer shall replace or repair, at Manufacturer's discretion,
each part returned by its authorized Distributor and acknowledged by Manufacturer
to be defective, provided that such part shall have been returned to Manufacturer
with all charges prepaid and the authorized Distributor has completed Manufacturer's
Return Material Authorization form. The replacement part shall come from
Manufacturer's stock and may be new or refurbished. THE FOREGOING IS
DISTRIBUTOR'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY IN THE EVENT OF A
WARRANTY CLAIM.

Warn-HL-08-2009.fm

NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19 68

NOTIFIER
12 Clintonville Road
Northford, CT 06472-1610 USA
203-484-7161
www.notifier.com
70 NFS2-640 Installation — P/N 52741:P9 5/13/19
 PREACTION-PAC
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.0 – OCTOBER 2020

SECTION
5.2
Notifier Manual 52742

NFS2-640 Control Panel

Programming Manual
Fire Alarm Control Panel
NFS2-640/E
Programming Manual

Document 52742 Rev: L7

5/20/19 ECN: 18-305
 Fire Alarm & Emergency Communication System Limitations
While a life safety system may lower insurance rates, it is not a substitute for life and property insurance!
An automatic fire alarm system—typically made up of smoke Heat detectors do not sense particles of combustion and alarm
detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warning only when heat on their sensors increases at a predetermined rate
devices, and a fire alarm control panel (FACP) with remote notifica- or reaches a predetermined level. Rate-of-rise heat detectors may
tion capability—can provide early warning of a developing fire. Such be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For this reason, the rate-
a system, however, does not assure protection against property of-rise feature of each detector should be tested at least once per
damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. year by a qualified fire protection specialist. Heat detectors are
An emergency communication system—typically made up of an designed to protect property, not life.
automatic fire alarm system (as described above) and a life safety IMPORTANT! Smoke detectors must be installed in the same
communication system that may include an autonomous control room as the control panel and in rooms used by the system for the
unit (ACU), local operating console (LOC), voice communication, connection of alarm transmission wiring, communications, signal-
and other various interoperable communication methods—can ing, and/or power. If detectors are not so located, a developing fire
broadcast a mass notification message. Such a system, however, may damage the alarm system, compromising its ability to report a
does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life fire.
resulting from a fire or life safety event. Audible warning devices such as bells, horns, strobes, speak-
The Manufacturer recommends that smoke and/or heat detectors ers and displays may not alert people if these devices are located
be located throughout a protected premises following the on the other side of closed or partly open doors or are located on
recommendations of the current edition of the National Fire another floor of a building. Any warning device may fail to alert peo-
Protection Association Standard 72 (NFPA 72), manufacturer's ple with a disability or those who have recently consumed drugs,
recommendations, State and local codes, and the alcohol, or medication. Please note that:
recommendations contained in the Guide for Proper Use of System • An emergency communication system may take priority over a
Smoke Detectors, which is made available at no charge to all fire alarm system in the event of a life safety emergency.
installing dealers. This document can be found at http:// • Voice messaging systems must be designed to meet intelligibility
www.systemsensor.com/appguides/. A study by the Federal requirements as defined by NFPA, local codes, and Authorities
Emergency Management Agency (an agency of the United States Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
government) indicated that smoke detectors may not go off in as
many as 35% of all fires. While fire alarm systems are designed to • Language and instructional requirements must be clearly dis-
provide early warning against fire, they do not guarantee warning or seminated on any local displays.
protection against fire. A fire alarm system may not provide timely or • Strobes can, under certain circumstances, cause seizures in
adequate warning, or simply may not function, for a variety of people with conditions such as epilepsy.
reasons: • Studies have shown that certain people, even when they hear a
Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach fire alarm signal, do not respond to or comprehend the meaning
the detectors such as in chimneys, in or behind walls, on roofs, or of the signal. Audible devices, such as horns and bells, can have
on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not different tonal patterns and frequencies. It is the property
sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second-floor owner's responsibility to conduct fire drills and other training
detector, for example, may not sense a first-floor or basement fire. exercises to make people aware of fire alarm signals and
Particles of combustion or “smoke” from a developing fire may instruct them on the proper reaction to alarm signals.
not reach the sensing chambers of smoke detectors because: • In rare instances, the sounding of a warning device can cause
• Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors, walls, chim- temporary or permanent hearing loss.
neys, even wet or humid areas may inhibit particle or smoke A life safety system will not operate without any electrical power. If
flow. AC power fails, the system will operate from standby batteries only
• Smoke particles may become “cold,” stratify, and not reach the for a specified time and only if the batteries have been properly
ceiling or upper walls where detectors are located. maintained and replaced regularly.
• Smoke particles may be blown away from detectors by air out- Equipment used in the system may not be technically compatible
lets, such as air conditioning vents. with the control panel. It is essential to use only equipment listed for
service with your control panel.
• Smoke particles may be drawn into air returns before reaching
the detector. Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises
to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily
The amount of “smoke” present may be insufficient to alarm smoke disabled. For added protection against telephone line failure,
detectors. Smoke detectors are designed to alarm at various levels backup radio transmission systems are recommended.
of smoke density. If such density levels are not created by a devel-
oping fire at the location of detectors, the detectors will not go into The most common cause of life safety system malfunction is inad-
alarm. equate maintenance. To keep the entire life safety system in excel-
lent working order, ongoing maintenance is required per the
Smoke detectors, even when working properly, have sensing limita- manufacturer's recommendations, and UL and NFPA standards. At
tions. Detectors that have photoelectronic sensing chambers tend a minimum, the requirements of NFPA 72 shall be followed. Envi-
to detect smoldering fires better than flaming fires, which have little ronments with large amounts of dust, dirt, or high air velocity require
visible smoke. Detectors that have ionizing-type sensing chambers more frequent maintenance. A maintenance agreement should be
tend to detect fast-flaming fires better than smoldering fires. arranged through the local manufacturer's representative. Mainte-
Because fires develop in different ways and are often unpredictable nance should be scheduled as required by National and/or local fire
in their growth, neither type of detector is necessarily best and a codes and should be performed by authorized professional life
given type of detector may not provide adequate warning of a fire. safety system installers only. Adequate written records of all inspec-
Smoke detectors cannot be expected to provide adequate warning tions should be kept.
of fires caused by arson, children playing with matches (especially Limit-D2-2016
in bedrooms), smoking in bed, and violent explosions (caused by
escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, etc.).

2 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Installation Precautions
Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability:
WARNING - Several different sources of power can be con- Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate
nected to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources of erratically or can be damaged when subjected to lightning induced
power before servicing. Control unit and associated equipment transients. Although no system is completely immune from light-
may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules, or ning transients and interference, proper grounding will reduce sus-
interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt ceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended,
to install, service, or operate this unit until manuals are read and due to an increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Con-
understood. sult with the Technical Services Department if any problems are
CAUTION - System Re-acceptance Test after Software anticipated or encountered.
Changes: To ensure proper system operation, this product must be Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting
tested in accordance with NFPA 72 after any programming opera- circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits.
tion or change in site-specific software. Re-acceptance testing is Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing,
required after any change, addition or deletion of system compo- reaming, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make all
nents, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making modifications,
hardware or wiring. All components, circuits, system operations, or verify that they will not interfere with battery, transformer, or printed
software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% circuit board location.
tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadver-
tently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly Do not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over-tighten-
affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also ing may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact
be tested and proper system operation verified. pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal.

This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49º C/ This system contains static-sensitive components. Always
32-120º F and at a relative humidity . However, the useful life of ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any cir-
the system's standby batteries and the electronic components may cuits so that static charges are removed from the body. Use static
be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed
Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals from the unit.
be installed in an environment with a normal room temperature of Follow the instructions in the installation, operating, and pro-
15-27º C/60-80º F. gramming manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid
Verify that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating damage to the control panel and associated equipment. FACP
device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. operation and reliability depend upon proper installation.
drop from the specified device voltage. Precau-D1-9-2005

FCC Warning
WARNING: This equipment generates, uses, and can radi- Canadian Requirements
ate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for
accordance with the instruction manual may cause interfer- radiation noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in
ence to radio communications. It has been tested and found the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Depart-
to comply with the limits for class A computing devices pur- ment of Communications.
suant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which is
designed to provide reasonable protection against such Le present appareil numerique n'emet pas de bruits radio-
interference when devices are operated in a commercial electriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils
environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential numeriques de la classe A prescrites dans le Reglement sur
area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des
will be required to correct the interference at his or her own Communications du Canada.
expense.

HARSH™, NIS™, and NOTI•FIRE•NET™ are all trademarks; and Acclimate® Plus™, eVance®, FlashScan®, FAAST Fire Alarm Aspiration Sensing Technology®,
Honeywell®, Intelligent FAAST®, NOTIFIER®, ONYX®, ONYXWorks®, SWIFT®, VeriFire®, and VIEW® are all registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc.
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. Chrome™ and Google™ are trademarks of Google Inc. Firefox® is a registered
trademark of The Mozilla Foundation.
©2019 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 3

Software Downloads
In order to supply the latest features and functionality in fire alarm and life safety technology to our customers, we make frequent
upgrades to the embedded software in our products. To ensure that you are installing and programming the latest features, we
strongly recommend that you download the most current version of software for each product prior to commissioning any system.
Contact Technical Support with any questions about software and the appropriate version for a specific application.

Documentation Feedback
Your feedback helps us keep our documentation up-to-date and accurate. If you have any comments or suggestions about our online
Help or printed manuals, you can email us.
Please include the following information:
• Product name and version number (if applicable)
• Printed manual or online Help
• Topic Title (for online Help)
• Page number (for printed manual)
• Brief description of content you think should be improved or corrected
• Your suggestion for how to correct/improve documentation
Send email messages to:
FireSystems.TechPubs@honeywell.com
Please note this email address is for documentation feedback only. If you have any technical issues, please contact Technical
Services.

4 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

 Table of Contents
Section 1: General Information ........................................................................................................................................ 7
1.1: UL 864 9th and 10th Edition .............................................................................................................................................................................7
1.1.1: Programming Features Subject to AHJ Approval ..................................................................................................................................7
1.2: About This Manual ............................................................................................................................................................................................7
1.2.1: Cautions, Warning, and Notes ................................................................................................................................................................7
1.2.2: Typographic Conventions.......................................................................................................................................................................8
1.2.3: Supplemental Information ......................................................................................................................................................................8
1.2.4: Shortcuts to Operating Functions ...........................................................................................................................................................9
1.3: Introduction to the Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................................................9
1.4: Features............................................................................................................................................................................................................10
1.5: How to Enter a Password.................................................................................................................................................................................10
Section 2: Programming ................................................................................................................................................. 11
2.1: Overview..........................................................................................................................................................................................................11
2.2: How to Enter Programming.............................................................................................................................................................................12
2.3: Basic Program..................................................................................................................................................................................................12
2.3.1: Clear Memory (0=CLR).........................................................................................................................................................................13
2.3.2: Autoprogram the Control Panel (1=AUTO) ...........................................................................................................................................13
2.3.3: Modify or Delete a Point (2=POINT) .....................................................................................................................................................17
2.3.4: Change a Password (3=PASSWD) ..........................................................................................................................................................23
2.3.5: Create a System Message (4=MESSAGE) ..............................................................................................................................................24
2.3.6: Create a Custom Zone Label (5=ZONE) ................................................................................................................................................25
2.3.7: Program Special Zones (6=SPL FUNCT) ................................................................................................................................................25
2.3.8: Change Global System Functions (7=SYSTEM) ....................................................................................................................................29
2.3.9: How to Check the Program for Errors (8=CHECK PRG) ........................................................................................................................45
2.4: The Network Program .....................................................................................................................................................................................45
2.5: The Utility Program .........................................................................................................................................................................................46
2.6: FlashScan Poll .................................................................................................................................................................................................47
2.7: Setting the Baud Rate of Serial Ports ..............................................................................................................................................................48
2.7.1: Printer Serial Port .................................................................................................................................................................................48
2.7.2: CRT Serial Port.....................................................................................................................................................................................49
Section 3: Status Change ............................................................................................................................................... 50
3.1: Overview..........................................................................................................................................................................................................50
3.2: How to Enter Status Change............................................................................................................................................................................50
3.3: Disable or Enable a Point ................................................................................................................................................................................51
3.4: Changing Detector Sensitivity .........................................................................................................................................................................52
3.5: Clearing Alarm Verification Counters .............................................................................................................................................................53
3.6: Clearing the History Buffer .............................................................................................................................................................................53
3.7: Setting the System Time and Date...................................................................................................................................................................53
3.8: Walk Test..........................................................................................................................................................................................................54
3.8.1: Basic Walk Test....................................................................................................................................................................................55
3.8.2: Advanced Walk Test.............................................................................................................................................................................56
3.8.3: Walk Test Activation Indications .........................................................................................................................................................56
3.8.4: Viewing Walk Test Results ..................................................................................................................................................................57
A.1: Overview.........................................................................................................................................................................................................58
A.1.1: Description of Releasing Zones ...........................................................................................................................................................58
A.1.2: NFPA Releasing Applications .............................................................................................................................................................59
A.2: How to Program a Releasing Zone .................................................................................................................................................................59
A.2.1: Programming a Delay Timer ...............................................................................................................................................................59
A.2.2: Abort Switches.....................................................................................................................................................................................60
A.2.3: Using Cross Zones ...............................................................................................................................................................................68
A.2.4: Programming a Soak Timer .................................................................................................................................................................70
A.2.5: Using Type Codes for Releasing Zones ..............................................................................................................................................71
A.3: Initiating Devices ............................................................................................................................................................................................89
A.4: Warning Sounders ...........................................................................................................................................................................................89
A.5: Auxiliary Control Functions ...........................................................................................................................................................................89
A.6: ACS Annunciation ..........................................................................................................................................................................................89
B.1: Presignal and Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) ...............................................................................................................................................90
B.1.1: What is Presignal and PAS?.................................................................................................................................................................90
B.1.2: Selecting Presignal and PAS Outputs ..................................................................................................................................................91
B.2: Time Control Zones ........................................................................................................................................................................................91

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 5

Table of Contents

B.3: Coding Functions for NACS...........................................................................................................................................................................91

C.1: Overview.........................................................................................................................................................................................................94
C.2: Features ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................94
C.2.1: Drift Compensation and Smoothing ....................................................................................................................................................94
C.2.2: Maintenance Warnings – Three Levels ...............................................................................................................................................95
C.2.3: Self-Optimizing Pre-Alarm..................................................................................................................................................................96
C.2.4: Detector Sensitivity..............................................................................................................................................................................96
C.2.5: Cooperative Multi-Detector Sensing ...................................................................................................................................................97
C.3: Pre-Alarm........................................................................................................................................................................................................98
C.3.1: Definition .............................................................................................................................................................................................98
C.3.2: Alert Level ...........................................................................................................................................................................................98
C.3.3: Action Level.........................................................................................................................................................................................99
C.3.4: How to Select a Pre-Alarm Level .......................................................................................................................................................99
C.4: Detector Sensitivity Settings .........................................................................................................................................................................100
C.4.1: How to Select Pre-Alarm and Alarm Sensitivity ...............................................................................................................................100
C.4.2: How to Test Detectors Set Below 0.50% Obscuration per Foot........................................................................................................101
C.5: Detector Maintenance Features.....................................................................................................................................................................102
C.5.1: Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................102
C.5.2: How to Access Detector Maintenance Information ...........................................................................................................................102
C.5.3: View Detector Maintenance for a Detector .......................................................................................................................................102
C.5.4: Print a Detector Maintenance Report.................................................................................................................................................103
C.5.5: Interpreting a Detector Status Display or Maintenance Report .........................................................................................................103
D.1: Description....................................................................................................................................................................................................105
D.2: Input and Outputs..........................................................................................................................................................................................105
D.3: Equations ......................................................................................................................................................................................................105
D.4: Equation Entry ..............................................................................................................................................................................................106
D.4.1: Logic Functions .................................................................................................................................................................................106
D.4.2: Equation Syntax Example..................................................................................................................................................................107
D.4.3: Evaluating an Equation ......................................................................................................................................................................107
D.4.4: Argument Entries...............................................................................................................................................................................107
D.4.5: Time Delay Functions........................................................................................................................................................................108
D.5: CBE Example ...............................................................................................................................................................................................108
E.1: Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................109
E.2: System Testing and Detector Initialization ...................................................................................................................................................109
E.3: How to Replace a Detector............................................................................................................................................................................109
E.4: How to Manually Initialize a Detector ..........................................................................................................................................................110
F.1: What are Type Codes? ................................................................................................................................................................................... 111
F.2: How to Select a Type Code............................................................................................................................................................................ 111
F.3: In this Appendix............................................................................................................................................................................................. 111
F.4: Type Codes for Input Devices........................................................................................................................................................................ 111
F.4.1: Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................................111
F.4.2: Type Codes for Intelligent Detectors .................................................................................................................................................111
F.4.3: Type Codes for Monitor Modules ......................................................................................................................................................113
F.5: Type Codes for Output Devices .....................................................................................................................................................................115
F.5.1: Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................................115
F.5.2: Type Codes for Control Modules .......................................................................................................................................................115
F.5.3: NAC Type Codes ...............................................................................................................................................................................116
G.1: China .............................................................................................................................................................................................................118
G.2: Canada ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................118
G.2.1: Standalone Applications ....................................................................................................................................................................118
G.2.2: Network Applications ........................................................................................................................................................................118
G.2.3: Automatic Alarm Signal Silence .......................................................................................................................................................119
G.2.4: Auto Silence.......................................................................................................................................................................................119
G.2.5: Annunciator Applications ..................................................................................................................................................................119
G.2.6: Ancillary Devices ..............................................................................................................................................................................119
G.2.7: Releasing Devices..............................................................................................................................................................................119
Index ............................................................................................................................................................................... 121

6 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

 Section 1: General Information
1.1 UL 864 9th and 10th Edition
• Per the UL Continuing Certification Program, UL 864 9th edition fire alarm control equipment will retain certification after the
rollout of UL 10th edition (12/2/2018).
• Installations of UL 864 10th Edition certified equipment are permitted to use UL864 9th Edition certified equipment when
approved by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
For product compliance, refer to the UL/ULC listing cards located on the UL online certification directory UL Product iQ:
https://iq.ulprospector.com/en.

1.1.1 Programming Features Subject to AHJ Approval

This product incorporates field-programmable software. In order for the product to comply with the requirements in the Standard for
Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL 864, ULC 527-11, certain programming features or options must be limited
to specific values or not used at all as indicated in Table 1.1 below.
This product incorporates field-programmable software. In order for the product to comply with the requirements in the Standard for Control
Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL 864, certain programming features or options must be limited to specific values or not used at
all as indicated below.

Permitted in
Permitted in UL Settings Permitted Permitted in ULC
Program Feature or Option ULC 527-11? Possible Settings
864? (Y/N) in UL 864 527-11?
(Y/N)
IP downloads over a local area network (LAN) or the No No Yes No No
internet (WAN - Wide Area Network) No
Timed

Releasing: Abort Switch Yes Yes NYC ULI ULI

AHJ IRI IRI
ULI
IRI

For Wireless Applications: Trouble Reannunciation Yes Yes 4 hours, 24 hours 4 hours 4 hours

Alarm Reannunciation Yes Yes 4 Hours, 24 Hours 24 Hours 24 Hours

Supervisory Reannunciation Yes Yes 4 Hours, 24 Hours 24 Hours 24 Hours

CO Reaannunciation Yes Y/N 4 Hours, 24 Hours 24 Hours Y/N

Detector Programming: Supervisory Type Codes Yes Yes SUP L(DUCTI) SUP L(DUCTI) SUP L(DUCTI)
SUP T(DUCTI) SUP T(DUCTI) SUP T(DUCTI)
SUP T(DUCTP) SUP L(DUCTP) SUP L(DUCTP)
SUP L(DUCTP) SUP T(DUCTP) SUP T(DUCTP)
SUP L(ION)
SUP T(ION)
SUP L(PHOTO)
SUP T(PHOTO)
SUP L(LASER)
SUP T(LASER)
PHOTO/CO (P SUP)

ALA.SCROLL (Scroll Display) No No Y N N

N

TBL.REMIND Yes Yes *, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 2 2

REGION No Yes 0 No special setting 0 (No special setting) Canada

1 China
2 Canada

Alarm Verification Time Yes Yes 0 to 240 seconds 0 to 60 seconds 0 to 60 seconds

DCC Enable Yes Yes Yes, No Yes or No Yes

Table 1.1 Programming Features with Settings Requiring AHJ Approval

1.2 About This Manual

1.2.1 Cautions, Warning, and Notes
The following graphics appear in the manual to indicate a caution or a warning:

CAUTION: INFORMATION ABOUT PROCEDURES THAT COULD CAUSE PROGRAMMING ERRORS, RUNTIME
! ERRORS, OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
.

WARNING: INFORMATION ABOUT PROCEDURES THAT COULD CAUSE IRREVERSIBLE DAMAGE TO THE
! CONTROL PANEL, IRREVERSIBLE LOSS OF PROGRAMMING DATA OR PERSONAL INJURY.

NOTE: Information that highlights an important part of the preceding or subsequent text or illustration.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 7

General Information About This Manual

1.2.2 Typographic Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions as listed below:

When you see Specifies Example

text in small caps the text as it appears in the MARCH TIME is a selection that appears in the
LCD display or on the control LCD display; or Press the ENTER key
panel
text in quotes a reference to a section or an “Status Change” specifies the Status Change
LCD menu screen section or menu screen
bold text In body text, a number or Press 1; means to press the number “1” on
character that you enter the keypad
italic text a specific document NFS2-640 Installation Manual
a graphic of the key In a graphic, a key as it Press means to press the Escape key
appears on the control panel
Table 1.2 Typographic Conventions in this Manual

NOTE: The term NFS2-640 is used in this manual to refer to the NFS2-640 and NFS2-640E unless otherwise noted.

1.2.3 Supplemental Information

The table below provides a list of documents referenced in this manual, as well as documents for selected other compatible devices. The
document series chart (DOC-NOT) provides the current document revision. A copy of this document is included in every shipment.
Compatible Conventional Devices (Non-addressable) Document Number
Device Compatibility Document 15378
Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) and Main Power Supply Installation Document Number
NFS2-640/E Installation, Operations, and Programming Manuals 52741, 52742, 52743
SLC Wiring Manual 51253
Note: For individual SLC Devices, refer to the SLC Wiring Manual
Off-line Programming Utility Document Number
VeriFire® Tools CD help file VERIFIRE-TCD
Veri•Fire Medium Systems Help File VERIFIRE-CD
Cabinets & Chassis Document Number
CAB-3/CAB-4 Series Cabinet Installation Document 15330
Battery/Peripherals Enclosure Installation Document 50295
Power Supplies, Auxiliary Power Supplies & Battery Chargers Document Number
ACPS-610 Addressable Power Supply Manual 53018
ACPS-2406 Installation Manual 51304
APS-6R Instruction Manual 50702
APS2-6R Instruction Manual 53232
CHG-120 Battery Charger Manual 50641
FCPS-24 Field Charger/Power Supply Manual 50059
FCPS-24S Field Charger/Power Supply Manual (Sync) 51977
Networking Document Number
Noti•Fire•Net Manual, Network Version 4.0 & Higher 51584
High-Speed Noti•Fire•Net Manual 54013
HS-NCM Installation Document 54014
NCM-W/F Installation Document 51533
NCA-2 Network Control Annunciator Manual 52482
NCD Network Control Display LS10210-051NF-E
NCS Network Control Station Manual, Network Version 4.0 & Higher 51658
ONYXWorks™ Workstation Manuals 52305, 52306, 52307
System Components Document Number
DVC Digital Voice Command Manual 52411
DAL Device Reference Document 52410
DVC-RPU Manual 50107425-001
DVC-RPU UL Listing Document 50107424-001

8 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Introduction to the Control Panel General Information

DS-DB Digital Series Distribution Board and Amplifier Manual 53622

DAA2 and DAX Amplifiers Manual 53265
Annunciator Control System Manual 15842
Annunciator Fixed Module Manual 15048
AFM-16A Annunciator Fixed Module Manual 15207
ACM-8R Annunciator Control Module Manual 15342
LCD-80 Manual 15037
LCD2-80 Manual 53242
FDU-80 Remote Annunciator Manual 51264
LDM Series Lamp Driver Annunciator Manual 15885
SCS Smoke Control Manual (Smoke and HVAC Control Station) 15712
FireVoice-25/50ZS & FireVoice 25/50ZST Manual 52290
FirstCommand Emergency Communication System LS10001-001NF-E
RPT-485W/RPT-485WF EIA-485 Annunciator Loop Repeater Manual 15640
DPI-232 Direct Panel Interface Manual 51499
TM-4 Installation Document (Reverse Polarity Transmitter) 51490
UDACT Manual (Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter) 50050
UDACT-2 (Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter) Listing Document 54089LD
UDACT-2 Manual (Universal Alarm Communicator/Transmitter) 54089
ACT-2 Installation Document 51118
RM-1 Series Remote Microphone Installation Document 51138
RA100Z Remote LED Annunciator Installation Document I56-0508
FSA-5000(A) FAAST XS Intelligent Aspiration Sensing Technology Document I56-6008
FSA-8000(A) FAAST XM Intelligent Aspiration Sensing Technology Document I56-3903
FSA-20000(A) FAAST XT Intelligent Aspiration Sensing Technology Document I56-3903
FWSG Wireless Manual LS10036-000NF-E
Manual Releasing Disconnect (MRD-1) Product Installation Document LS10231-000GE-E

1.2.4 Shortcuts to Operating Functions

To the left of each program function, you’ll find a keypad shortcut, which contains a series of keypad entries required
to access the program function. All shortcuts start with the control panel in normal operation.
For example, the keypad shortcut to the left shows how to enter the Read Status function with the control panel in nor-
mal operation.

1.3 Introduction to the Control Panel

The NFS2-640 is an intelligent, field-programmable Fire Alarm Control Panel. Field-programming the control panel lets you customize
the fire alarm system by selecting and setting program options for intelligent/addressable detectors and modules, and Notification Appli-
ance Circuits (NACs).
This manual provides information for programming using the NFS2-640 keypad connected to the control panel. VeriFire™ Tools must
be used for programming if no keypad is used, or if a network control annunciator is used as the keypad in either a network or standalone
application. Refer to VeriFire™ Tools for information on programming without the NF2S-640 keypad, and the NF2S-640 Installation
Manual and NCA-2 Manual for installation information.
For details on control panel operation, refer to the NFS2-640 Operations Manual.
The NF2S-640 provides two methods for field-programming the control panel:
• Using the built-in “Program Change” interface
• The VeriFire™ Tools Programming Utility
The benefits of each method are listed below:

Programming method Benefits Refer to

Program Change Speed and convenience of Section “Programming” on
putting the control panel on line page 11
quickly (using the Autoprogram
function) and changing
programming information.
Table 1.3

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 9

General Information Features

Programming method Benefits Refer to

VeriFire™ Tools Programming Efficient means of creating and Product documentation &
Utility editing programs that require a Software help file
lot of data entry.
Table 1.3

1.4 Features
Programming features include the following:
• Ease-of-use – Field program the control panel without needing special software skills.
• Autoprogram option – Automatically detects newly installed, addressable devices, allowing quicker installation.
• Local programming – program directly from the control panel keypad to reduce installation time.
• PC programming – input long data entry programming information on a PC; transfer programming data between a PC and the
control panel using VeriFire™ Tools programming utility.
• Security – use passwords to control access to the control panel and protect memory.
• 80-Character (2x40) Liquid Crystal Display – view programming and device information on the control panel.

1.5 How to Enter a Password

The control panel provides two types of selectable passwords:
• Program Change
• Status Change
Listed below are uses and the factory-setting for each password type:

Password type Use to Factory Setting

Program Change Enter Program Change option to program essential 00000
(high level) control panel functions, including basic system
functions and utility options.
Status Change Enter Status Change option to program minor functions. 11111
(low level)
Table 1.4 Programming Passwords
From the “SYSTEM NORMAL” screen: Press ENTER, press 1 (the password screen will display). Enter a password, then press ENTER
ENTER PROG OR STAT PASSWORD, THEN ENTER.
(ESCAPE TO ABORT) _

Enter password here (00000 or 11111)

Figure 1.1 Password Screen

In Program Change or Status Change, the control panel does the following:
• Activates the System Trouble relay
• Shuts off the panel sounder
• Flashes the SYSTEM TROUBLE LED, which continues to flash while programming
For security purposes, passwords can be changed. To do so, follow the instructions in “Change a Password (3=PASSWD)” on page 23.

NOTE: The Read Status selection, which does not require a program password, is covered in the NF2S-640 Operations Manual.

NOTE: The NF2S-640 continues to monitor and report alarms in programming mode, except in autoprogramming.

10 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

 Section 2: Programming

2.1 Overview
Program Change is the programming level that lets you change the essential control panel
functions, such as point programming, changing passwords, changing system functions. Included
are four options: Basic Program, Network, FlashScan Poll, and Utility Program.
The structure of the Program Change option is shown below:

1=BASIC PROGRAM 2=NETWORK

3-UTILITY 4=FLASHSCAN POLL

Choose one of the Program Change selections: 1, 2, 3 or 4

1 Basic Program options

0=CLR 1=AUTO 2=POINT 3=PASSWD 4=MESSAGE
5=ZONES 6=SPL FUNCT 7=SYSTEM 8=CHECK PRG

2 Network Program options

THRESHOLD CH.A:H, THRESHOLD CH.B:H

NODE: .000, CLASSX:Y, <ENTER>

3 Utility Program options

REGION=0 TBL.REMIND=2 ALA.SCROLL=N

LOCAL CONTROL=0 IP-ACCESS=0 DCC-MODE=N

4 FlashScan Poll options

FLASHSCAN L1DET L1MOD L2DET L2MOD

N Y N Y

Figure 2.1 Program Change Selections

This section contains instructions and sample screens for using the Programming selections:
• Basic Program The Basic Program lets you program essential functions, such as clearing
the program, Autoprogramming the system, programming points, and setting system
functions. Refer to “Basic Program” on page 12.
• Network Program The Network Program allows programming of network channel
thresholds, network node number, and wiring style.“The Network Program” on page 45.
• Utility Program The Utility Program screen provides selections for selecting a Trouble
Reminder per NFPA, a Region setting, and enabling or disabling local control of the
ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY, SIGNAL SILENCE, SYSTEM RESET and DRILL keys. Refer to
“The Utility Program” on page 46.
• FlashScan Poll The FlashScan Poll screen provides the option for selecting between CLIP
(Classic Loop Interface Poll) and FlashScan Poll. Refer to “FlashScan Poll” on page 47.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 11

Programming How to Enter Programming

2.2 How to Enter Programming

To enter Program Change, follow these steps:
1. At the “SYSTEM NORMAL” screen, press the ENTER key. The control panel displays the
“Entry” screen, as shown below:
1=PROGRAMMING 2=READ STATUS ENTRY
(ESCAPE TO ABORT)

2. At the “Entry” screen, press the 1 key. The control panel displays the “Enter Password” screen
as shown below:
ENTER PROG OR STAT PASSWORD, THEN ENTER.
(ESCAPE TO ABORT) _

3. Enter your Program Change password (See “How to Enter a Password” on page 10). The
control panel displays the “Program Change Selection” screen, as shown below:
1=BASIC PROGRAM 2=NETWORK
3-UTILITY 4=FLASHSCAN POLL

4. Select a Program Change selection: 1, 2, 3 or 4.

2.3 Basic Program

From the “Program Change Selection” screen, press the 1 key to display the “Basic Program”
screen which provides nine (9) options as shown below:
0=CLR 1=AUTO 2=POINT 3=PASSWD 4=MESSAGE
5=ZONES 6=SPL FUNCT 7=SYSTEM 8=CHECK PRG

Press the number of any one of the nine (9) options as detailed below
Option 0=CLR - Clears all existing user programming. For details, refer to How to Clear Memory
(0=CLR) on page 13. Note: The user is prompted to double-check that this is what is really wanted.
Option 1=AUTO - Add or remove addressable devices to the control panel program. For details,
refer to How to Autoprogram the Control Panel (1=AUTO) on page page 13.
Option 2=POINT - Modify or delete a point. For details, refer to “How to Modify or Delete a
Point (2=POINT)” on page page 17.
Option 3=PASSWD - Change the Program Change or the Alter Status password. For details, refer
to “How to Change a Password (3=PASSWORD)” on page page 23.
Option 4=MESSAGE - Edit the 40-character message that displays on the first line. For details,
refer to “How to Create a System Message (4=MESSAGE)” on page page 24.
Option 5=ZONES - Edit the 20-character custom zone label for zones 01-99. For details, refer to
“How to Create a Custom Zone Label (5=ZONE)” on page page 25.
Option 6=SPL FUNCT - Program Releasing Zones and Special Zones. For details, refer to “How
to Program Special Zones (6=SPL FUNCT)” on page page 25.
Option 7=SYSTEM - Program Global System Functions. For details, refer to “How to Change
Global System Functions (7=SYSTEM)” on page page 29.
Option 8=CHECK PRG - Check the program for errors. For details, refer to “How to Check the
Program for Errors (8=CHECK PRG)” on page 45.

12 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Basic Program Programming

2.3.1 Clear Memory (0=CLR)

The Clear option removes all programming information from control panel
memory. If installing the control panel for the first time, use option 0 to clear
Program Change control panel memory. To do so, follow these steps:
Password

1. From the “Basic Program” screen, press the 0 (zero) key to display the Clear Program screen.
The control panel prompts for verification as shown below:
PRESS ENTER TO CLEAR ENTIRE PROGRAM
OR ESCAPE TO ABORT

2. Press the ENTER key to clear control panel memory or press the ESC key to exit the screen
without clearing.

2.3.2 Autoprogram the Control Panel (1=AUTO)

Purpose
The Autoprogram option identifies all addressable devices connected to the control panel. Devices
include addressable detectors and modules connected to SLC 1 or SLC 2, and NACs. You can use
the Autoprogram option to create a new program and add or remove devices. A summary of the
Autoprogram functions, when to use the functions, and where to find information on using the
functions is found below:

Autoprogram Function Control Panel Configuration Refer to...

Create a new program for A new control panel or a control panel with no “Create a New Program for the
the control panel existing program in memory. Control Panel” on page 13

Add one or more A program exists in memory and you want to “Add a Device to the Program”
SLC-connected detectors add a detector or module to the existing on page 14
and modules to an program—without modifying information for
existing program existing detectors and modules.

Remove one or more A program exists in memory and you want to “Remove a Device from the
SLC-connected detectors remove an installed detector or module from Program” on page 15
and modules from an the existing program—without modifying
existing program information for existing detectors and
modules.

View system defaults A program exists in memory and you want to Page 19 “Change Autoprogram
view system settings assigned during Default Value” to see the system
Autoprogram, such as custom labels, defaults
passwords, and so on.

Create a New Program for the Control Panel

This section covers how to use the Autoprogram option to create a new
program for the control panel. The control panel will identify all addressable
Program Change detectors and modules connected to the SLC.
Password
To create a new program for the control panel, follow these steps:

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 13

Programming Basic Program

1. Use the Clear option to clear program information from memory. For instructions on clearing
memory, refer to “How to Clear Memory (0=CLR)” on page page 13.

NOTE: Once Step 1 is completed, Step 2 will cause the panel to assess whether a loop is
comprised of all FlashScan devices or not. If they are all FlashScan, autoprogramming will
change the loop setting to FlashScan if it was not already at that setting. If the devices are not all
FlashScan, autoprogramming will not make a change to the default setting of CLIP. (See
“FlashScan Poll” on page 47 for FlashScan settings.)

2. From the “Basic Program” screen, press the 1 key to start Autoprogram. While the control
panel scans the system to identify all SLC devices and NACs, it displays the following screen:
AUTOPROGRAM PLEASE WAIT

When the autoprogram is finished identifying SLC devices and NACs, it displays a summary
screen that gives a count of all the devices it has located. Refer to the following screen for an
example of this display.
L1:010Dets, 159Mods L2:159Dets, 159Mods
SB L1:000, L2:159 Bells: 04

SB represents detectors with B200 series sounder bases. Refer to VeriFire Tools for B200 sounder
base programming.
3. Press ENTER. All devices are automatically accepted during initial autoprogramming. The
following screen displays briefly, followed by the SYSTEM NORMAL screen.
ACCEPT ALL DEVICES Please Wait!!!

To edit the autoprogramming default values for a point, refer to “How to Modify or Delete a Point
(2=POINT)” on page page 17.
To edit the autoprogram default values assigned to all modules and detectors during
autoprogramming, refer to “Change Autoprogram Default Values” on page 16.
Add a Device to the Program
You can also use the Autoprogram option to add addressable devices to the control panel program.

NOTE: When using the Autoprogram option with an existing program, the control panel does not
change program information for installed and programmed devices. However, it will assess
whether a loop contains all FlashScan devices and change the loop setting to FlashScan if
necessary.

The following steps describe how to add a new detector at SLC address 1D147 with 10 detectors in
the existing program:
1. Physically install the addressable detector to SLC 1 at address 147 (for instructions, refer to the
NF2S-640 Installation Manual and the installation document that comes with the detector).
2. From the “Basic Program” screen, press the 1 key to start Autoprogram. The Autoprogram
Prompt screen appears in the LCD display as the control panel identifies addressable devices.
When finished identifying addressable devices, the control panel displays information for the
new detector at SLC address 1D147 on the LCD display as shown below:
PROGRM SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 1D147
03 __ __ __ __A8P8** 1D147

14 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Basic Program Programming

3. Press the ENTER key to add detector 147 to the program with the default program information.
If you want to change the default information, use the programming keys to do so, then press
the ENTER key to add detector 147 to the program.
The Autoprogram Summary screen appears. You can verify addition of the detector to the
program by noting the new count of detectors as shown below:
Note that the number of detectors increases (in this example
from 10 to 11) to show the addition of the detector to SLC 1.

L1:011Dets, 159Mods L2:159Dets, 159Mods

SB Bells: 04

4. Press the ENTER key, then press the esc key to save the program in memory and return to the
“Basic Program” screen).
Remove a Device from the Program
You can also use the Autoprogram option to remove addressable detectors and modules from the
control panel program.

NOTE: When using the Autoprogram option with an existing program, the control panel does not
change program information for installed and programmed devices.

The following steps describe how to delete a detector at SLC address 1D133 with 11 detectors
connected to SLC 1 in the existing program:
1. Disconnect and remove the detector from SLC 1 at address 1D133.
2. From the “Basic Program” screen, press the 1 key to start Autoprogram. The Autoprogram
Prompt screen displays while the control panel identifies addressable devices.
3. When finished identifying addressable devices, the control panel displays a screen, indicating a
missing detector at SLC address 1D133 as shown below:
Type Code

PROGRM SMOKE (ION) DETECTOR ADDR 1D133

DEVICE NOT ANSWERING DELETE FR MEM?1D133

SLC loop number

D (detector) or M (module)
Three-digit address (001-159)

4. Press the ENTER key to delete detector 1D133 from the program.
The Autoprogram Summary screen appears. You can verify removal of the detector from the
program by noting the new count of detectors as shown below:
Note that the number of detectors decreases (from 11 to
10) to show the removal of the detector from SLC 1.

L1:010Dets, 159Mods L2:159Dets, 159Mods

SB Bells: 04

5. Press the ENTER key, then press the ESC key to save the program in memory and return to the
“Basic Program” screen.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 15

Programming Basic Program

Change Autoprogram Default Values

To assign system default values from the basic program screen, Press 0 (clear), then press 1
(autoprogram). Refer to the chart below for default values and how to modify them.
Table 2.1 Autoprogram Defaults (1 of 2)
Function Default Values To Alter, refer to
Software Default custom label “Zone xx” where xx is the “How to Create a Custom Zone Label (5=ZONE)” on page 25
Zones number of the zone
01-99 Note: Zone 00 is reserved for a general alarm.
F0 PRG PRESIGNAL FUNCT PRESIGNAL DELAY “F0 (Presignal/PAS) The Presignal screen provides fields for
DELAY=180 PAS=NO F00 changing the delay time or PAS. For details on Presignal
selections, refer to “Presignal and PAS Time” on page 90. From
the Special Function Change screen, press the F key, then
press the 0 key to display the Presignal Function screen.” on
page 27
Releasing PRG RELEASE FUNCT RELEASE CONTROL “R0-R9 (Releasing Functions) The Releasing Function screen
Zones DELAY=00 ABORT=ULI CROSS=N SOK=0000 provides fields for changing releasing functions: Delay Timer,
R0-R9 Abort Switch, Cross Zone, and Soak Timer. For details on
releasing applications, refer to “NFPA Releasing Applications”
on page 59.” on page 27 and “How to Program a Releasing
Zone” on page 59.
NOTE: The FCM-1-REL has an inherent two second
delay, which must be factored into the DELAY TIME
and SOK (soak time) entries.

F5 and F6 PRG TIME FUNCTION TIME CONTROL “F5-F6 (Time Control Functions) The Time Control screen
ON=**:** OFF=**:** DAYS=******** provides fields for changing the start time, stop time, or days of
the week. For details on time selections, refer to “Time Control
Zones” on page 91. From the Special Function Change screen,
select F5 or F6 to display the Time Control screen:” on page 28
F7 PRG HOLIDAY FUNCTION **/** **/** **/** “F7 (Holiday) The Holiday screen provides fields for specifying
**/** **/** **/** **/** **/** **/** up to nine holiday dates. For details on holiday selections, refer
to “Time Control Zones” on page 91. From the Special Function
Change screen, press F7 to display the Holiday screen:” on
page 28
F8 PRG CODING FUNCTION CODE TYPE “F8 (Coding Function) The Coding Function screen provides
MARCH TIME F08 fields for specifying one of the following coding functions: March
Time, Two-stage, California, Temporal, Two-Stage Canada (3
minutes), Two-Stage Canada (5 minutes), Two-Stage Canada
Manual, System Sensor Strobe, Gentex Strobe, and Wheelock
Strobe. For details on selecting coding functions, refer to
“Coding Functions for NACS” on page 91. From the Special
Function Change screen, press F8 to display the Coding
Function screen:” on page 28
F9 PRE-ALARM FUNCT ALERT “F9 (Pre-Alarm) The Pre-Alarm screen provides fields for
F09 programming the Alert or Action Pre-Alarm functions. For
details on Pre-Alarm selections, refer to “Pre-Alarm” on
page 98. From the Special Function Change screen, press F9
to display the Pre-Alarm screen:” on page 29
System SIL INH=0000 AUTO=0077 “How to Change Global System Functions (7=SYSTEM)” on
Parameters 0 VERIFY=30 USA TIME page 29
TERM=N AC_DLY=Y LocT BLINK=01 ST=4 ACS=N
Passwords Default programming passwords are: “How to Change a Password (3=PASSWD)” on page page 23
Program Change=00000
Status Change=11111
SYSTEM (YOUR CUSTOM SYSTEM MESSAGE HERE) Note: The second line, “SYSTEM NORMAL”, is a standard
NORMAL SYSTEM NORMAL 10:23A 041515 Tue system message that you cannot change
message A message, along with the current day, time, and
date, that displays on the second line of the LCD
display during normal operation.

16 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Basic Program Programming

Table 2.1 Autoprogram Defaults (2 of 2)

Function Default Values To Alter, refer to
System (YOUR CUSTOM SYSTEM MESSAGE HERE) “How to Create a System Message (4=MESSAGE)” on page
Message SYSTEM NORMAL 10:23A 041515 Tue page 24
The first line of the LCD display contains 40 blank
characters for a custom message.
IP Default setting is zero (0), IP Access not enabled. “The Utility Program” on page 46
ACCESS
DCC Mode Default setting is N, no DCC participation. “The Utility Program” on page 46

2.3.3 Modify or Delete a Point (2=POINT)

After programming all SLC-connected devices into the system, you can
modify or delete points. From the “Basic Program” screen, press the 2 key to
Program Change display the Point Programming screen:
Password POINT PROG. 1=MODIFY POINT
2=DELETE POINT

To modify a point for a detector, module, or NAC: press the 1 key to display
the “Modify Point” screen.

NOTE: When programming points, take the following into design consideration:
Each general zone must be dedicated to a single event type (i.e. Fire, MN, Security, etc.)
Map inputs only to general zones designed for the input’s event type. For example, map mass
notification devices to general zones designed for mass notification.
Outputs can be mapped to multiple general zones that are dedicated to different event types. For
instance, a single output can be mapped to an MN general zone and a Fire general zone.

To delete a point for a detector, module, or NAC: press the 2 key to display the “Delete Point”
screen.

Press for detector point.

SLC number
Modify Point Screen Three-digit address (001-159)
E - press the
POINT PROG. ENTER:DETECTOR=*,LDAAA,E ENTER key
MODULE=#,LMAAA,E OUTPUT CKT=&,A-A,E

Press for module point E - press the

Press for NAC ENTER key
SLC number

Three-digit address (001-159) Two-digit address for

NAC (01-04)
E - press the ENTER key

Delete Point Screen

DELETE POINT. ENTER:DETECTOR=*,LDAAA,E
MODULE=#,LMAAA,E OUTPUT CKT=&,A-A,E

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 17

Programming Basic Program

The Modify Point and Delete Point screens let you edit or delete points for a detector, a monitor or
control module, or NAC. To select a point, follow these steps:

To select Do the following Refer to

an addressable Press “Modify an Addressable Detector

detector Point” on page 18.
Type the SLC number (1 or 2) and
detector (D) and address (001-159)
Press

an addressable monitor Press “Modify an Addressable Monitor

module Module Point” on page 20.
Type the SLC number (1 or 2) and module
(M) and address (001-159)
Press

an addressable control Press “Modify an Addressable Control

module Module Point” on page 21.
Type the SLC number (1 or 2) and module
(M) and address (001-159)
Press

a NAC Press “Modify NAC Points” on page 22.

Type the NAC address (01-04)
Press

The next four sections describe how to program the points selected.
Modify an Addressable Detector Point
This section contains a sample detector programming screen, detector default selection, and
instructions for modifying a detector point. Autoprogram default values for a detector are shown:

20-character user-editable custom label (in

this example, autoprogramming has used
Blinking Type Code selection
the first 19 and left a space at the end.)

PROGRM SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 1D101

03 __ __ __ __A8P8AV 1D101

SLC address (001-159)

12 spaces for extended custom label D (detector)
CBE list SLC Loop number
(five zones)

Alarm sensitivity level Alarm verification setting

Cooperative multi-detector
Pre-alarm sensitivity level
mode indicator

Table 2.2 Detector Program Values

Field Description Set as Follows

Type Code Detector function Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS Selection keys to scroll through valid detector
specification - Type Code selections. See F.4.2 on page 111 for lists and descriptions.
SMOKE(PHOTO) in example.

Custom 20 character custom label. Change by placing the cursor into the first space of the field using the arrow
Label keys, then typing the descriptor. DETECTOR ADDR 1D101 is the
autoprogram default custom label for the detector at address 101 on SLC 1.

18 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Basic Program Programming

Table 2.2 Detector Program Values

Field Description Set as Follows

Extended 12 character custom label See “Custom Label” above.

Label extension. Note that spaces must be input by the user, including any space necessary
between the custom and extended label fields. An 80-column printout will
run the two fields together.

CBE List Five zones can be listed - one Zones can be changed or added to the CBE list by placing the cursor in the
zone, Z03, is shown in the zone field using arrow keys, then typing.
example. Up to 4 more could Defaults: Zone 01 (Heat detectors)
be added to this detector. Zone 02 (Ion detectors)
Zone 03 (Photo detectors, Beam detectors)
Zone 04 (Laser detectors)
Zone 05 (Multisensor)

Alarm The alarm sensitivity level, Refer to Table C.2 on page 100 for settings. Select by placing the cursor in
Sensitivity with 9 the least sensitive the field using the arrow keys, then either pressing the NEXT or PREVIOUS
alarm level and 1 the most keys to make the selection, or typing the value.
sensitive alarm level. Defaults: A8 (Photo)
A6 (Ion)
A6 (Laser)
A5 (Multisensor)

Pre-alarm Shows the Pre-Alarm level Refer to Table C.2 on page 100 for settings. Select by placing the cursor in
level setting—a number between 0 the field using the arrow keys, then either pressing the NEXT or PREVIOUS
and 9—as follows: keys to make the selection, or typing the value.
0 – no Pre-Alarm Defaults: P8 (Photo)
1 – self optimizing P6 (Ion)
2 – most sensitive Pre-Alarm P6 (Laser)
level P5 (Multisensor)
9 – least sensitive Pre-Alarm
level

Cooperative Indicates the cooperative Select by placing the cursor in the field using the arrow keys, then either
Multi- multi-detector mode (A in the pressing the NEXT or PREVIOUS keys to make the selection, or typing the
detector example). value.
mode * = OFF (Default)
A combines the detector's alarm decision with the next address above
B combines the detector's alarm decision with the next address below
C combines the detector's alarm decision with the next address above and
the next address below

Alarm Indicates the alarm Indicates Alarm Verification (V=on, *=off). Select by placing the cursor in the
verification verification setting (V in the field using the arrow keys, then pressing the NEXT or PREVIOUS keys to make
example). the selection. Refer to “Interpreting a Detector Status Display or
Maintenance Report” on page 103 for more information on the alarm
verification feature.
Note: Do not use this setting when an alarm activation requires activation of
two or more automatic detection devices.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 19

Programming Basic Program

Modify an Addressable Monitor Module Point

When you select a point address, the control panel returns a screen that displays information about
the point. Below is an example of information for a monitor module (2M101) in the LCD display:

Blinking Type Code selection

20-character user-editable custom label.

PROGRAM MONITOR WESTERN ENTRANCE AND

HALLWAY 09 __ __ __ __ 2M101

SLC address (001-159)

12 spaces for extended Default zone M (module)
custom label CBE list
(five zones) SLC number (1 or 2)

Table 2.3 Modifying Monitor Module Programming Selections

Field Description Set as Follows

Type Code Monitor Module function specification Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS Selection keys to scroll through
- MONITOR in example. valid monitor module Type Code selections. Lists and
descriptions are in See Table F.2 on page 115.

Custom Label 20 character custom label. Change by placing the cursor into the first space of the field
using the arrow keys, then typing the descriptor.
Note: Spaces must be input by the user, including any space
necessary between the custom and extended label fields. An
80-column printout will run the two fields together.

Extended Label 12 character custom label extension. See “Custom Label” above.

CBE List Five zones can be listed - one zone, Zones can be changed or added to the CBE list by placing the
Z09, is shown in the example. Up to 4 cursor in the zone field using arrow keys, then typing.
more could be added to this module. See Table 2.4 on page 20 for defaults.

When finished modifying a point, press the ENTER key; then press the NEXT or PREVIOUS key to
select another point.
Monitor Module Default Zone Assignments
Listing of the monitor module address range and the default zone assignment for each range:

Table 2.4 Monitor Module Default Zones

Monitor Module Address Zone Default

01 through 19 Z04

20 through 39 Z05

40 through 59 Z06

60 through 79 Z07

80 through 99 Z08

100 through 119 Z09

120 through 139 Z10

140 through 159 Z11

20 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Basic Program Programming

Modify an Addressable Control Module Point

When you select a point address for modification, the control panel returns a screen that displays
information about the point. For example, the illustration below shows sample information for a
control module (2M101) in the LCD display.
Blinking Type Code selection
20-character user-editable custom label

PROGRAM CONTROL MODULE CONTROL 2M101

00 __ __ __ __ IOW 2M101

SLC address (001-159)

12 spaces for extended
custom label Default zone M (module)
CBE list
SLC number (1 or 2)
(five zones)
Walk Test Selection: *=off
(default); W=selected
Switch Inhibit: I=selected; *=off (default) Silenceable: O =selected; *=off (default)

NOTE: On a control module, the default zone is always set to Zone 00 (general alarm).

To modify a point, follow these steps. A blinking cursor indicates the selected field.
1. From the programming screen, use the arrow keys to move to a field that you want to modify.
See below for descriptions and settings.

Table 2.5 Modifying Control Module Programming Selections (1 of 2)

Field Description Set as follows:

Type Code Specifies the function of the control Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS Selection keys to scroll
module through valid control module Type Code selections (listed
in Table F.3 on page 116)

Custom Label 20 character custom label. Change by placing the cursor into the first space of the
field using the arrow keys, then typing the descriptor.
Note: Spaces must be input by the user, including any
space necessary between the custom and extended label
fields. An 80-column printout will run the two fields
together.

Extended 12 character custom label extension. See “Custom Label” above.

Label

CBE list Up to five software zones can be Type the number of up to five zones, including E0-E9, F0-
entered to define the output responses F9, L0-L9, R0-R9, and zones 00-99. The first zone default
of the control module based on is Z00 (general alarm).
various initiating conditions (events)

Switch Inhibit Specifies if an operator can manually Type one of the following entries.
activate an output I = Switch Inhibit enabled
* = no switch inhibit (default for all but releasing circuits)

Silenceable Specifies if an operator can manually Type one of the following entries.
silence an activated output * = output nonsilenceable
F = silenceable, resound by fire alarm
U = silenceable, resound by supervisory alarm
B = silenceable, resound by security alarm
T = silenceable, resound by trouble
O = silenceable, does not resound
C = silenceable, resound by CO detection
If the “Strobe” Type ID is used with System Sensor,
Gentex or Wheelock Strobe synchronization,“*” will
silence the horn portion only, and resound will occur only
by fire alarm. F, U, B, T, or O will silence the entire circuit,
and resound will occur according to the above definitions.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 21

Programming Basic Program

Table 2.5 Modifying Control Module Programming Selections (2 of 2)

Field Description Set as follows:

Walk Test Specifies if outputs sound during Walk Type one of the following entries.
Test W = devices sound (Basic Walk Test)
* = devices do not sound (Silent Walk Test) (default)

2. When finished modifying a point, press the ENTER key; then press the NEXT or PREVIOUS key to
select another point.
Modify NAC Points
Modifying NACs (four NACs on the NFS2-640) is like modifying control modules—except for the
Type Code and device address.

Type Code 20-character user-editable custom label

PROGRAM CONTROL Notification Dev No1

00 __ __ __ __ *OW B01

12 spaces for extended

Default zone The address of a NAC connected
custom label
through NAC 1 (B01), NAC 2
Five zones for CBE list; the default zone (B02), NAC 3 (B03), or NAC 4
selection is 00 (general alarm) (B04)

Switch Inhibit: I=selected; *=off (default)

Silenceable: O=selected; *=off (default) Walk Test Selection: *=off (default);

W=selected

To modify a point, follow these steps. A blinking cursor indicates the selected field.
1. From the programming screen, use the arrow keys to move to a field that you want to modify
and refer to information below for descriptions and settings.

Table 2.6 Modifying a NAC Programming Selections (1 of 2)

Field Description Set as follows:

Type Code Specifies the function of the NAC. Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS Selection keys to scroll
through the NAC Type Code selections (listed in
Table F.4 on page 116)

Custom Label 20 character custom label. Change by placing the cursor into the first space of the
field using the arrow keys, then typing the descriptor.
Note: Spaces must be input by the user, including any
space necessary between the custom and extended label
fields. An 80-column printout will run the two fields
together.

Extended 12 character custom label extension. See “Custom Label” above.

Label

CBE zones Specifies up to five software zones to Type the numbers of up to five zones, including E0-E9,
define the output responses of the F0-F9, L0-L9, R0-R9, and zones 00-99. The first zone
NAC based on various initiating default is 00 (general alarm)
conditions (events)

Switch Inhibit Specifies if an operator can manually Type in one of the following values.
activate an output I = Switch Inhibit enabled
* = Switch Inhibit disabled (default for all but releasing
circuits)

22 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Basic Program Programming

Table 2.6 Modifying a NAC Programming Selections (2 of 2)

Field Description Set as follows:

Silenceable Specifies if an operator can manually Type in one of the following values.
silence an activated output * = output nonsilenceable
F = silenceable, resound by fire alarm
U = silenceable, resound by supervisory alarm
B = silenceable, resound by security alarm
T = silenceable, resound by trouble
O = silenceable, does not resound
C = silenceable, resound by CO detection
If the “Strobe” Type ID is used with System Sensor,
Gentex or Wheelock Strobe synchronization,“*” will
silence the horn portion only, and resound will occur only
by fire alarm. F, U, B, T, or O will silence the entire circuit,
and resound will occur according to the above definitions.

Walk Test Specifies if outputs sound during Walk Type in one of the following values.
Test W = devices sound (Basic Walk Test) - default
* = devices do not sound (Silent Walk Test)

2. When finished modifying a point, press the ENTER key; then press the NEXT or PREVIOUS key to
select another point.

2.3.4 Change a Password (3=PASSWD)

Password Change lets you select a custom Program Change (high level) or
Status Change (low level) password. From the “Basic Program” screen, press
Program Change the 3 key to display the “Change Password” screen.
Password

CHANGE PASSWORD *,NNNNN,E=PROGRAM

#,NNNNN, E=STATUS

Entry area for new password

To change a password, follow the instructions below:

Table 2.7 Changing a Password

To Press Then

Change the Program Change Enter the new Program Change

password password. Use five digits, no characters.

Change the Status Change Enter the new Status Change password.
password Use five digits, no characters.

Save the password The Verify Password screen appears.

Press ENTER to verify.

Leave the Change Password The Basic Program screen appears.

screen without changing a
password

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 23

Programming Basic Program

A Forgotten Password?
If a password is entered incorrectly, the panel will respond by displaying an INCORRECT PASSWORD
message and a code. The programmer may hit escape and reenter the password correctly. However,
if the password has been forgotten, record the code and contact Notifier. After proper
authentication, the original password can be determined by deciphering the code. An example of an
INCORRECT PASSWORD display is given below:

INCORRECT PASSWORD
PROGRAM: 9066-21F5-7D78-5FA4-6163

Code

2.3.5 Create a System Message (4=MESSAGE)

The Message option lets you create a 40-character custom System Message
that displays on the first line of the “SYSTEM NORMAL’ screen as shown
Program Change below:
Password

YOUR CUSTOM MESSAGE HERE

SYSTEM NORMAL 02:24P 041515 Tue

From the “Basic Program” screen, press the 4 key to display the “System Message Change” screen:

SYSTEM NORMAL

Blinking cursor prompt Message change area

To create the system message, follow these guidelines:

• Enter one character at a time, indicated by the blinking cursor on the second line of the
display.
• Enter up to 40 characters maximum.
Instructions for entering characters in the Message Change screen:

Table 2.8 Creating Messages

To Do this

Change a blinking character Enter a character from the keypad

Move to the next character

Press

Enter lower case characters

Press , then press the character of your choice.

Enter additional characters !

Press , then press a number key as follows:
@ = , % : \ . I?

For example, press , then press the 3 ( ) key to enter

a “=” character.
Save the new message
Press

24 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Basic Program Programming

2.3.6 Create a Custom Zone Label (5=ZONE)

The Zone option lets you change the custom label assigned to zones 1-99.
From the “Basic Program” screen, press the 5 key to display the “Zone
Program Change Change” screen as shown below:
Password

blinking cursor prompt

CHANGE ZONE LABEL SELECT ZONE 01-99:

ENTER UP TO 20 CHAR

Custom zone label (characters 21-40)

The zone number displays in the first line, characters 39 and 40. When changing a zone label,
follow these guidelines.
• For single-digit numbers, enter a leading zero before the digit.
• Enter an alphanumeric zone label into line 2, characters 21–40.
To change a custom label for a zone, follow these instructions:

Table 2.9 Create or Change a Custom Zone Label

To Do this

Change a zone label Enter a new zone label from the keypad.

Save the zone label in memory Press .

The program stores the zone label in memory and
displays the Zone Change screen with all fields blank.

Leave the Zone Change screen Press .

without changing a zone label
The display returns to the Program Change screen.

2.3.7 Program Special Zones (6=SPL FUNCT)

The Special Zone Change option lets you change the program for Special
Zones F0-F9, Releasing Zones R0-R9, FA (Verification), FB (Custom drill
Program Change zone) or FC (CO Alarm). From the “Basic Program” screen, press the 6 key to
Password display the “Special Function Change” screen as shown below:

.
SPECIAL FUNCTION: F0=PRESIG R0-R9=REL
F5-F6=TIME F7=HOL F8=CODE F9=PRE-ALARM

Special Zone Descriptions

Descriptions for each Special Zone that appears in the “Special Function Change” screen are
detailed below:

NOTE: Special Zones F0-F9 appear in the CBE list of a device as ZF0-ZF9. For example, if you
list F0 for a detector, one of the five zones in the CBE list of the detector will display as ZF0.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 25

Programming Basic Program

Table 2.10 Summary of Special Zones

Special Zone Lets you

F0=PRESIG Select a Presignal Delay Timer and select PAS (Positive Alarm
Sequence)

F5-F6=TIME Specify Time Control functions such as the start time, stop time, or
days of the week

F7=HOL Specify up to nine holiday dates. An F7-programmed device

activates on the specified holiday dates

F8=CODE Specify one of the following coding function selections: March Time,
Temporal, California, Two-Stage, Two-Stage Canada (3 minute or 5
minute), Two-Stage Canada Manual, System Sensor Strobes,
Gentex Strobes, or Wheelock Strobes. F8 only takes effect if you
program one or more NACs to F8

F9=PRE-ALARM Select a Pre-Alarm level: Alert or Action

FA (ZF10*) Turn on when detector in verification mode. This is a fixed point and
is not programmable

FB (ZF16*) Turn on if custom drill set to Y and the panel in Drill mode (Alarm
Signal for Canadian mode)

FC (ZF18*) Turn on when a CO alarm occurs

FD (ZF20*) Turns on when a mass notification alarm occurs (Not applicable for
FirstCommand applications)

FE (ZF21*) Turns on when a mass notification supervisory occurs

FF (ZF22*) Turns on when a mass notification trouble occurs

ZF36* If the local control active LED is on, this special zone will activate

ZF37* Automatic Alarm Signal Activation Timer will turn on when the first
alert stage has been entered.

ZF38* Turns on when the panel enters the second (evacuation) stage.

ZF39*+ Automatic Alarm Signal Timer canceled. Can only be canceled if

there is an ACS button mapped to this zone.

ZF40* Auto Silence Activation. ZF40 will activate when the auto silence
timer has expired and silenceable outputs on the fire panel have
been silenced as a result. ZF40 will remain active until a system
reset, resound, or drill (alarm signal for Canadian applications) is
performed.
NOTE: Special Function Zones FA through FF are not field programmable.

R0-R9=REL Program up to ten Releasing Zones, each with a selection for a

Delay Timer, an Abort Switch, a Cross Zone selection, or a Soak
Timer

* VeriFire Tools settings

+Not field programmable. Used for CBE programming only.

Mass Notification
When used for mass notification, special zones ZF20, ZF21, and ZF22 can be used to signal the
MN event.

NOTE: During local or network Walk Test, activating a Mass Notification device will activate
associated special function zones according to CBE programming and simulate a Mass Notification
event. Any network nodes, zones, or devices not participating in Walk Test will not participate in the
simulated Mass Notification event.

26 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Basic Program Programming

Special Zones F1-F4

The control panel also provides four Special Zones, F1-F4, which are outputs that do not appear on
the Special Function Change screen. You can program Special Zones F1 to F4 into the CBE of an
output device. Descriptions of F1, F2, F3, and F4 are detailed below:
To view the status of Special Functions F1-F4, use the Read Status function (refer to the NFS2-640
Operations Manual).

Table 2.11 Special Output Functions F1-F4

Special Function Specifies

F1 (Trouble less AC) An output programmed to turn on/off if a system trouble—other

than an AC power loss—occurs

F2 (AC Trouble) An output programmed to turn on/off if an AC power loss or a

brownout condition occurs

F3 (Security) An output programmed to turn on/off if a Security input activates

F4 (Supervisory) An output programmed to turn on/off if a Supervisory input

activates

Selecting Special Zones

Select Special Zones by entering the Special Zone letter and number (for example, F0, R0, and so
on) from the Special Function Change screen. The following sections show sample screens that
display when you select a Special Zone.
F0 (Presignal/PAS) The Presignal screen provides fields for changing the delay time or PAS. For
details on Presignal selections, refer to “Presignal and PAS Time” on page 90. From the Special
Function Change screen, press the F key, then press the 0 key to display the Presignal Function
screen.
Presignal programming status banner

PRG PRESIGNAL FUNCT PRESIGNAL DELAY

DELAY=180 PAS=NO F00

Presignal delay time: Presignal

60-180 seconds (zone F0)
PAS selection: YES (PAS selected)
or NO (PAS not selected)

R0-R9 (Releasing Functions) The Releasing Function screen provides fields for changing
releasing functions: Delay Timer, Abort Switch, Cross Zone, and Soak Timer. For details on
releasing applications, refer to “NFPA Releasing Applications” on page 59.

NOTE: The FCM-1-REL has an inherent two second delay, which must be factored into the
DELAY TIME and SOK (soak time) entries.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 27

Programming Basic Program

From the Special Function Change screen, select a function (R0-R9) to display the Releasing
Function screen:
Releasing Zone programming status banner

PRG RELEASE FUNCT RELEASE CONTROL

DELAY=00 ABORT=ULI CROSS=N SOK=0000 R00

Delay Timer for Releasing zone

releasing application: (R0 shown)
1-60 seconds or 00
(no delay) Soak Timer option:0000
(not used) or delay time
Abort Switch: a thee-letter Abort switch (0001-9999 seconds)
Type Code (ULI, IRI, NYC, or AHJ)
Cross Zone option: specifies type of
Cross Zone: N (none), Y, Z, or H

F5-F6 (Time Control Functions) The Time Control screen provides fields for changing the start
time, stop time, or days of the week. For details on time selections, refer to “Time Control Zones”
on page 91. From the Special Function Change screen, select F5 or F6 to display the Time Control
screen:

Time Control programming status banner

PRG TIME FUNCTION TIME CONTROL

ON=08:00 OFF=12:00 DAYS=SMTWTFSH F05
Time Control zone
(F5 shown)
ON time: Start Time for Time Control
function (in 24-hour time) that must Eighth day-of-week selection (H) that
precede the OFF time. specifies when time control settings
take effect. Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS
key to toggle each selection.
OFF time: End time for Time Control
function (in 24-hour time) that must
be later than the ON time.

F7 (Holiday) The Holiday screen provides fields for specifying up to nine holiday dates. For
details on holiday selections, refer to “Time Control Zones” on page 91. From the Special Function
Change screen, press F7 to display the Holiday screen:
Holiday programming status banner
PRG HOLIDAY FUNC **/** **/** **/**
**/** **/** **/** **/** **/** **/**

Nine fields for selecting holidays:

USA time (mm/dd)

F8 (Coding Function) The Coding Function screen provides fields for specifying one of the
following coding functions: March Time, Two-stage, California, Temporal, Two-Stage Canada (3
minutes), Two-Stage Canada (5 minutes), Two-Stage Canada Manual, System Sensor Strobe,

28 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Basic Program Programming

Gentex Strobe, and Wheelock Strobe. For details on selecting coding functions, refer to “Coding
Functions for NACS” on page 91. From the Special Function Change screen, press F8 to display
the Coding Function screen:
Coding Function programming status banner

PRG CODING FUNCTION CODE TYPE

MARCH TIME F08

Coding Function selection (refer to Coding Function

“Coding Functions for NACS” on (Zone F8)
page 91)

F9 (Pre-Alarm) The Pre-Alarm screen provides fields for programming the Alert or Action
Pre-Alarm functions. For details on Pre-Alarm selections, refer to “Pre-Alarm” on page 98. From
the Special Function Change screen, press F9 to display the Pre-Alarm screen:
ACTION or ALERT Pre-Alarm level: press the NEXT or PREVIOUS
key to toggle between ALERT and ACTION. For details on selections,
refer to “Pre-Alarm” on page 98)

PreAlarm programming
status banner

PRG PRE-ALARM FUNCT ALERT

F09

Pre-Alarm (Zone F9)

FA (Verification) Turn on when detector in verification mode. This is a fixed point and is not
programmable.
FB (Custom drill zone) Turn on if custom drill set to Y and the panel in Drill mode (Alarm Signal
Mode for Canadian Applications).
FC (CO Alarm) Turn on in the event a CO alarm is present on an FCO-851 detector or monitor
module with a CO monitor type code.
FA, FB and FC can map to output point only. It can be mapped to the output device as a CBE using
either panel key pad or VeriFire tools. But the custom drill option (Yes or No) is only programmed
by VeriFire tools.
FD (MN Alarm) Turn on when an MN Alarm occurs on the fire panel. (Not applicable for
FirstCommand applications).
FE (MN Supervisory) Turn on when an MN Supervisory occurs on the fire panel.
FF (MN Trouble) Turn on when an MN Trouble occurs on the fire panel.

2.3.8 Change Global System Functions (7=SYSTEM)

The System option lets you select settings for global system functions that
apply to all programmed devices and zones. For instance, selecting an Alarm
Program Change Verification Timer for 30 seconds means that all initiating devices selected
Password for Alarm Verification use a 30-second timer. From the “Basic Program”
screen, press the 7 key to display the “System Function” screen as shown
below:

SIL INH=000 AUTO=000 VERIFY=30 USA TIME

TERM=N AC_DLY=Y LocT BLINK=01 ST=4 ACS=N

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 29

Programming Basic Program

Global System Functions

Settings for global system functions:

Table 2.12 Settings for Global Systems Functions

System Function Setting Default
SIL INH (Silence Inhibit Timer) 0 to 300 seconds 000
AUTO (Auto Silence Timer) - After the time delay 000 (none); 600 to 1200 seconds 000
expires, functions like pressing the SIGNAL Note: When Auto Silence activates, special function zone
SILENCE key, silencing active outputs programmed ZF40 will activate and will remain active until a system reset
as silenceable. alarm resound or drill (alarm signal for Canadian applications)
is initiated.
Note: In Canadian applications, if auto silence is enabled, the
value must be set to 20 minutes. An ACS point is required to
monitor special function zone ZF40.
Note: Activation of Auto Silence will activate the Signal
Silence LED on the fire panel display and any ACM LED point
programmed for Auto Silence.
VERIFY (Alarm Verification Timer) 0 to 240 seconds* 60
USA TIME USA time (mm/dd/yy) or USA
EUR time (dd/mm/yy)
Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS key to change. Note that
(European) time changes to 24-hour time format and date
format.
TERM - Allows supervision for devices connected N = no supervision N
to TB11, i.e., FDU-80. Y = supervision enabled
AC_DLY** AC delay – delays loss of AC reporting for 3 hours. Y
Y=AC delay; N=no AC delay
LocX - One of three operating modes of PC or LocT -(terminal connected to control panel and located in LocT
terminal connected to the control panel through same room).
TB12 on the CPU2-640. LocM -(same as LocT but requires password).
RemT -(terminal connected through a modem for Read Status
Note: For a complete list of functions, refer to the only).
NFS2-640 Operations Manual.
BLINK - Addressable SLC device LED blink. Select from 00 to 16. 01
(00 = no blink, 01 = blink every poll, 02 = blink every 2nd poll,
03 = blink every 3rd poll up to 16 = blink every 16th poll).
Note that this setting affects FlashScan modules only.
ST - The NFPA wiring style used for the SLC. 6=tClass B SLC wiring 4
4=Class A SLC wiring
ACS - Use ACS Selection Groups (Refer to N or Y N
“Annunciator Options” on page 31).
*This value can not exceed 30 seconds for ULC installations. Can not exceed 60 seconds for UL 864.
**The onboard trouble relay will activate (TB4 on the NFS2-640 CPU) and TM-4s will report according to this setting. UDACTs
and UDACT-2s are notified immediately of AC failure by the panel, regardless of the panel’s delay setting. Once the UDACT
or UDACT-2 receives notification, it operates according to its own programmed AC Fail Delay reporting schedule.

Example: AC Failure occurs at 1:00 p.m. on a panel with an AC_DLY setting of Y (3 hours). The UDACT/UDACT-2 is set for
notification after 1 hour.
1:00 p.m. - AC Failure. Panel notifies UDACT/UDACT-2. Panel and UDACT/UDACT-2 timers begin countdown to report
time.
2:00 p.m. - UDACT/UDACT-2 reports.
4:00 p.m. - TM-4 reports, TB4 trouble relay activates.
The ACPS-610 and ACPS-2406 power supplies must be set to an AC Delay value of 0 (zero) when used with this panel.

30 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Basic Program Programming

Annunciator Options

NOTE: An ACM-24AT or AEM-24AT LED point must be programmed as a dedicated visual

indicator for a mass notification or CO event. This is not required for displayless systems.

Use Annunciator Selection screens to select information that will display on the ACS annunciators.
(Table 2.13 on page 32 contains the ACS display selections.) Setting ACS=Y from the “System
Function” screen displays the Annunciator Selection 1 screen, address A1-A11. Press enter to
display Annunciator Selection 2 screen, address A12 - A19:
ACS Address ACS Selection Group (A-M; 0-9)
A1-A11 or *=not selected

ANNUN SELECTION1 A1=* A2=* A3=* A4=*

A5=* A6=* A7=* A8=* A9=* A10=* A11=*

ACS Address
A12-A19
ANNUN SELECTION2 A12=* A13=* A14=*
A15=* A16=* A17=* A18=* A19=* UDACT=0
If UDACT=2: The UDACT is installed with Detector Maintenance Reporting. A24-A31 are
pre-programmed to send control panel status to the UDACT. Only the first 100 detectors on
Loop 1 and Loop 2 participate in Detector Maintenance Reporting. For pre-programmed
point addressing, refer to associated table for Groups P through W on the following pages.
UDACT-2 does not support this option.
If UDACT=1: The UDACT or UDACT-2 is installed. Addresses A20-A32 are available to
send control panel status to the UDACT (software release #UDACT02.1 or higher) or the
UDACT-2
If UDACT=0: No UDACT or UDACT-2 is installed. The control panel displays the
Annunciator Selection 3 & 4 screen for addresses A20-A32.

Enter “N” (ACS Selection Group N) for a TM-4 module used for remote station communication.
Enter “O” (ACS Selection Group O) for a TM-4 used as a municipal box trip. This will provide a
“Master Box” trouble message at the panel.
Refer to page page 39 for further information on Group N and Group O.
ACS Selection Group Example
An example of a screen listing ACS Selection Groups (H, I and M):
ACS Address (A1) ACS Selection Group (H)
ANNUN SELECTION1 A1=H A2=I A3=* A4=*
A5=8 A6=* A7=* A8=* A9=* A10=* A11=*

Annunciator selections for addresses A1, A2 and A3 (addresses A4-A11 not selected).
• Annunciators set to Address 1 display the status of detectors 1-64 (Group H) on SLC 1
• Annunciators set to Address 2 display the status of detectors 1-64 (Group I) on SLC 2

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 31

Programming Basic Program

Annunciation Points
The control panel’s annunciation points are divided into 23 ACS selection groups of 64 points each.
The table below contains a list of these groups, what an annunciator displays when a group is
selected, and where to locate a definition of the 64 points within the group.

Table 2.13 ACS Selection Groups (1 of 2)

ACS Selection
Annunciator Display Refer to
Group
A 8 System points & Zones 1 - 56 Table 2.14 on page 33
B Zones 57 - 99, 9 F Zones, 8 R Zones, 4 NACs Table 2.15 on page 34
C Loop 1, Modules 1 - 64 Table 2.16 on page 34
D Loop 2, Modules 1 - 64 Table 2.17 on page 35
E Loop 1, Modules 65 - 128 Table 2.18 on page 35
F Loop 2, Modules 65 - 128 Table 2.19 on page 35
G Loop 1, Modules 129 - 159 (1 unused point) Table 2.20 on page 35
Loop 2, Modules 129 - 159 (1 unused point)
H Loop 1, Detectors 1 - 64 Table 2.21 on page 36
I Loop 2, Detectors 1 - 64 Table 2.22 on page 37
J Loop 1, Detectors 65 - 128 Table 2.23 on page 37
K Loop 2, Detectors 65 - 128 Table 2.24 on page 37
L Loop 1, Detectors 129 - 159 (1 unused point) Table 2.25 on page 38
Loop 2, Detectors 129 - 159 (1 unused point)
M Programmable for use with FireVoice NFV-25/50ZS Table 2.26 on page 39
or FirstCommand
N 8 System Points & Zones 1-56 “ACS Selection Group N” on
page 39
O 8 System Points & Zones 1-56 “ACS Selection Group O” on
page 39
P* Loop 1, Modules 65-100 Table 2.27 on page 40
Loop 1, Detectors 1-14 (Each detector occupies 2
points)
Q* Loop 2, modules 65-100 Table 2.28 on page 41
Loop 2, Detectors 1-14 (Each detector occupies 2
points)
R* Loop 1, detectors 15-46 (Each detector occupies 2 Table 2.29 on page 42
points)
S* Loop 2, Detectors 15-46 (Each detector occupies 2 Table 2.30 on page 42
points)
T* Loop 1 Detectors 47-78 (Each detector occupies 2 Table 2.31 on page 43
points)
U* Loop 2, Detectors 47-78 (Each detector occupies 2 Table 2.32 on page 43
points)
V* Loop 1, Detectors 79-100 (Each detector occupies 2 Table 2.33 on page 44
points)
W* Loop 2, Detectors 79-100 (Each detector occupies 2 Table 2.34 on page 44
points)
*Group only available with UDACT programmed as option 2.

1 Programmable Annunciator #1 See Note

2 Programmable Annunciator #2 See Note
3 Programmable Annunciator #3 See Note

32 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Basic Program Programming

Table 2.13 ACS Selection Groups (2 of 2)

ACS Selection
Annunciator Display Refer to
Group
4 Programmable Annunciator #4 See Note
5 Programmable Annunciator #5 See Note
6 Programmable Annunciator #6 See Note
7 Programmable Annunciator #7 See Note
8 Programmable Annunciator #8 See Note
9 Programmable Annunciator #9 See Note
0 Programmable Annunciator #10 See Note

NOTE: Refer to the VeriFire™ Tools programming utility for programming these annunciators.

ACS Selection Group A:

Table 2.14 ACS Group A

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function*
1 Input System Alarm System Trouble Acknowledge
2 Output Not Used Signal Silenced Alarm Silence
3 Output Not Used Program Mode System Reset
4 Output Not Used Supervisory Drill
5 Output NAC #1 Active NAC Trouble Control NAC #1
6 Input Security P/A Maint. Alert Not Used
7 Input Not Used Low Battery Not Used
8 Input Not Used AC Fail Not Used

9 Input Zone 1 Active Zone 1 Trouble Not Used

10 Input Zone 2 Active Zone 2 Trouble Not Used
11 Input Zone 3 Active Zone 3 Trouble Not Used
to to (see note) to (see note)
64 Input Zone 56 Active Zone 56 Trouble Not Used
* Pressing the switch button when the Switch Function is “Not Used” will cause the associated LED to
stop blinking. This is a local acknowledgement at the annunciator only: no message is sent to the panel.

NOTE: Point number to Zone number relationship is sequential. To determine Point to Zone
relationship subtract 8 from Point number to arrive at Zone number.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 33

Programming Basic Program

ACS Selection Group B:

Table 2.15 ACS Group B

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function*
1 Input Zone 57 Active Zone 57 Trouble Not Used
2 Input Zone 58 Active Zone 58 Trouble Not Used
3 Input Zone 59 Active Zone 59 Trouble Not Used
to to (see note 1) to (see note 1)
43 Input Zone 99 Active Zone 99 Trouble Not Used

44 Output Zone F1 Active Zone F1 Trouble Not Used

45 Output Zone F2 Active Zone F2 Trouble Not Used
to to (see note 2) to (see note 2)
52 Output Zone F9 Active Zone F9 Trouble Not Used

53 Release Ckt #0 Zone R0 Active Zone R0 Trouble Not Used

54 Release Ckt #1 Zone R1 Active Zone R1 Trouble Not Used
to to to (see note 2) to (see note 2)
60 Release Ckt #7 Zone R7 Active Zone R7 Trouble Not Used

61 NAC Output NAC B01 Active NAC B01 Trouble Controls NAC B01
62 NAC Output NAC B02 Active NAC B02 Trouble Controls NAC B02
63 NAC Output NAC B03 Active NAC B03 Trouble Controls NAC B03
64 NAC Output NAC B04 Active NAC B04 Trouble Controls NAC B04
* Pressing the switch button when the Switch Function is “Not Used” will cause the associated LED to stop
blinking. This is a local acknowledgement at the annunciator only: no message is sent to the panel.

NOTE:
1. Point number to Zone number relationship is sequential. To determine Point to Zone relationship,
add 56 to Point number to arrive at Zone number.
2. Point number to Zone number relationship is sequential; therefore, point 48 is zone F5 and point 57
is zone R4.

ACS Selection Group C (SLC #1, Modules 1-64):

Table 2.16 ACS Group C

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function
1 Input or Output Module 001 Active Module 001 Trouble Controls Output Module
2 Input or Output Module 002 Active Module 002 Trouble Controls Output Module
3 Input or Output Module 003 Active Module 003 Trouble Controls Output Module
to to (see note) to (see note)
64 Input or Output Module 064 Active Module 064 Trouble Controls Output Module

NOTE: Point number to Module number relationship is sequential; therefore, point 48 is

Module 048.

34 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Basic Program Programming

ACS Selection Group D (SLC #2, Modules 1-64):

Table 2.17 ACS Group D

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function
1 Input or Output Module 001 Active Module 001 Trouble Controls Output Module
2 Input or Output Module 002 Active Module 002 Trouble Controls Output Module
3 Input or Output Module 003 Active Module 003 Trouble Controls Output Module
to to (see note) to (see note)
64 Input or Output Module 064 Active Module 064 Trouble Controls Output Module

NOTE: Point number to Module number relationship is sequential; therefore, point 48 is

Module 048.

ACS Selection Group E (SLC #1, Modules 65-128):

Table 2.18 ACS Group E

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function
1 Input or Output Module 065 Active Module 065 Trouble Controls Output Module
2 Input or Output Module 066 Active Module 066 Trouble Controls Output Module
3 Input or Output Module 067 Active Module 067 Trouble Controls Output Module
to to (see note) to (see note)
64 Input or Output Module 128 Active Module 128 Trouble Controls Output Module

NOTE: Point number to Module number relationship is sequential. To determine Point to Module
relationship add 64 to Point number to arrive at Module number.

ACS Selection Group F (SLC #2, Modules 65-128):

Table 2.19 ACS Group F

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function
1 Input or Output Module 065 Active Module 065 Trouble Controls Output Module
2 Input or Output Module 066 Active Module 066 Trouble Controls Output Module
3 Input or Output Module 067 Active Module 067 Trouble Controls Output Module
to to (see note) to (see note)
64 Input or Output Module 128 Active Module 128 Trouble Controls Output Module

NOTE: Point number to Module number relationship is sequential. To determine Point to Module
relationship add 64 to Point number to arrive at Module number.

ACS Selection Group G (SLC #1 and #2, Modules 129-159):

Table 2.20 ACS Group G (1 of 2)

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function
1 Output SLC 1, Module 129 Active SLC 1, Module 129 Trouble Controls SLC 1, Module 129
2 Output SLC 1, Module 130 Active SLC 1, Module 130 Trouble Controls SLC 1, Module 130

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 35

Programming Basic Program

Table 2.20 ACS Group G (2 of 2)

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function
3 Output SLC 1, Module 131 Active SLC 1, Module 131 Trouble Controls SLC 1, Module 131
to to (see note 1) to (see note 1)
31 Output SLC 1, Module 159 Active SLC 1, Module 159 Trouble Controls SLC 1, Module 159
32 Not Used
33 Output SLC 2, Module 129 Active SLC 2, Module 129 Trouble Controls SLC 2, Module 129
34 Output SLC 2, Module 130 Active SLC 2, Module 130 Trouble Controls SLC 2, Module 130
35 Output SLC 2, Module 131 Active SLC 2, Module 131 Trouble Controls SLC 2, Module 131
to (see note 2) to (see note 2)
63 Output SLC 2, Module 159 Active SLC 2, Module 159 Trouble Controls SLC 2, Module 159
64 Not Used

NOTE:
1. Point number to Module number relationship is sequential. To determine Point to Module
relationship add 128 to Point number to arrive at Module number.
2. Point number to Module number relationship is sequential. To determine Point to Module
relationship add 96 to Point number to arrive at Module number.

ACS Selection Group H (SLC #1, Detectors 1-64):

Table 2.21 ACS Group H

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function*
1 Input Detector 001 Alarm Detector 001 Trouble Not Used
2 Input Detector 002 Alarm Detector 002 Trouble Not Used
3 Input Detector 003 Alarm Detector 003 Trouble Not Used
to to (see note) to (see note)
64 Input Detector 064 Alarm Detector 064 Trouble Not Used
* Pressing the switch button when the Switch Function is “Not Used” will cause the associated LED to
stop blinking. This is a local acknowledgement at the annunciator only: no message is sent to the panel.

NOTE: Point number to Detector number relationship is sequential; therefore, point 48 is

Detector 048.

36 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Basic Program Programming

ACS Selection Group I (SLC #2, Detectors 1-64):

Table 2.22 ACS Group I

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function*
1 Input Detector 001 Alarm Detector 001 Trouble Not Used

2 Input Detector 002 Alarm Detector 002 Trouble Not Used

3 Input Detector 003 Alarm Detector 003 Trouble Not Used

to to (see note) to (see note)

64 Input Detector 064 Alarm Detector 064 Trouble Not Used

* Pressing the switch button when the Switch Function is “Not Used” will cause the associated LED to
stop blinking. This is a local acknowledgement at the annunciator only: no message is sent to the panel.

NOTE: Point number to Detector number relationship is sequential; therefore, point 48 is

Detector 048.

ACS Selection Group J (SLC #1, Detectors 65-128):

Table 2.23 ACS Group J

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function*
1 Input Detector 065 Alarm Detector 065 Trouble Not Used
2 Input Detector 066 Alarm Detector 066 Trouble Not Used
3 Input Detector 067 Alarm Detector 067 Trouble Not Used
to to (see note) to (see note)
64 Input Detector 128 Alarm Detector 128 Trouble Not Used
* Pressing the switch button when the Switch Function is “Not Used” will cause the associated LED to
stop blinking. This is a local acknowledgement at the annunciator only: no message is sent to the panel.

NOTE: Point number to Detector number relationship is sequential. To determine Point to

Detector relationship add 64 to Point number to arrive at Detector number.

ACS Selection Group K (SLC #2, Detectors 65-128):

Table 2.24 ACS Group K

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function*
1 Input Detector 065 Alarm Detector 065 Trouble Not Used
2 Input Detector 066 Alarm Detector 066 Trouble Not Used
3 Input Detector 067 Alarm Detector 067 Trouble Not Used
to to (see note) to (see note)
64 Input Detector 128 Alarm Detector 128 Trouble Not Used
* Pressing the switch button when the Switch Function is “Not Used” will cause the associated LED to
stop blinking. This is a local acknowledgement at the annunciator only: no message is sent to the panel.

NOTE: Point number to Detector number relationship is sequential. To determine Point to

Detector relationship add 64 to Point number to arrive at Detector number

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 37

Programming Basic Program

ACS Selection Group L (SLC #1, Detectors 129-159, and SLC #2, Detectors
129-159):

Table 2.25 ACS Group L

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function*
1 Input SLC 1, Detector 129 Alarm SLC 1, Detector 129 Not Used
Trouble
2 Input SLC 1, Detector 130 Alarm SLC 1, Detector 130 Not Used
Trouble
3 Input SLC 1, Detector 131 Alarm SLC 1, Detector 131 Not Used
Trouble
to to (see note 1) to (see note 1)
31 Input SLC 1, Detector 159 Alarm SLC 1, Detector 159 Not Used
Trouble
32 Not Used
33 Input SLC 2, Detector 129 Alarm SLC 2, Detector 129 Not Used
Trouble
34 Input SLC 2, Detector 130 Alarm SLC 2, Detector 130 Not Used
Trouble
35 Input SLC 2, Detector 131 Alarm SLC 2, Detector 131 Not Used
Trouble
to (see note 2) to (see note 2)
63 Input SLC 2, Detector 159 Alarm SLC 2, Detector 159 Not Used
Trouble
64 Not Used
* Pressing the switch button when the Switch Function is “Not Used” will cause the associated LED to stop
blinking. This is a local acknowledgement at the annunciator only: no message is sent to the panel.

NOTE:
1. Point number to Detector number relationship is sequential. To determine Point to Detector
relationship add 128 to Point number to arrive at Detector number.
2. Point number to Detector number relationship is sequential. To determine Point to Detector
relationship add 96 to Point number to arrive at Detector number.

ACS Selection Group M

FirstCommand NFC-50/100 and FireVoice (NFV-25/50ZS) are single channel and can play one
message. Message priority is determined by the message number: lower-numbered messages have
the higher priorities (that is, Message 2 has a higher priority than Message 3). Message 0 (OFF) has
the lowest priority.
To use ACS for controlling the FirstCommand and FireVoice, install by programming Annunciator
A1 as Group M through panel or VeriFire Tools programming. Refer to the First Command or
FireVoice manual to properly configure the FACP.

 VeriFire Tools Programming

Annunciator programming must be performed as follows:
• Program Annunciator Address 1 as Group M. (Refer to Table 2.26 for point definitions.)
• Assign ACS points in user Map 1.

38 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Basic Program Programming

• Map the panel zones to the desired annunciator point. Refer to the FirstCommand or
FireVoice NFV-25/50ZS manual for more information, including dipswitch settings.

Table 2.26 Point Definitions for Group M

Annunciator Point Type
1-9 Unused
10 Message 0 (No Message/Message Off)
11 Message 1
12 Message 2
13 Message 3
14 Message 4
15 Message 5
16 - 39 FFT Circuits
40 All-Call
41 - 64 Speaker Circuits 1 - 24

 Panel Programming
If VeriFire Tools is not used and Group M is programmed at the panel, Zone 00 (general alarm) will
be mapped to A1p11 and A1p40. A general alarm will play message 1 and activate an all-call on
the FirstCommand or FireVoice. VeriFire Tools must be used for speaker circuit and message
control.
ACS Selection Group N
This group is the same as Group A (See Table 2.14 on page 33), with the following exceptions:
• It should be selected only for TM-4s used for remote station communication.
• Selection Group N follows the alarm relay for annunciation (Selection Group A annunciates
immediately).
• The yellow LED of annunciator point 2 is for Alarm Silence only (in Selection Group A it is
for Signal Silenced).
ACS Selection Group O
This group is the same as Group A (See Table 2.14 on page 33), with the following exceptions:
• It should be selected for only for TM-4s used as Fire Municipal Box Trip outputs.
• Selection Group O provides a “Master Box” trouble displayed at the panel.
• Selection Group O follows the alarm relay for annunciation (Selection Group A annunciates
immediately).
The yellow LED of annunciator point 2 is for Alarm Silence only (in Selection Group A it is for
Signal Silenced).

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 39

Programming Basic Program

ACS Selection Group P (SLC #1, Modules 65-100 and Detectors 1-14):

Table 2.27 ACS Group P (see note 3)

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function*
1 Input SLC 1, Module 65 Alarm SLC 1, Module 65 Trouble Not Used
2 Input SLC 1, Module 66 Alarm SLC 1, Module 66 Trouble Not Used
3 Input SLC 1, Module 67 Alarm SLC 1, Module 67 Trouble Not Used
to to (see note 1) to (see note 1)
36 Input SLC 1, Module 100 Alarm SLC 1, Module 100 Not Used
Trouble
37 Input SLC 1, Detector 1 Alarm SLC 1, Detector 1 Trouble Not Used
38 Input SLC 1, Detector 1 Trouble SLC 1, Detector 1 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
39 Input SLC 1, Detector 2 Alarm SLC 1, Detector 2 Trouble Not Used
40 Input SLC 1, Detector 2 Trouble SLC 1, Detector 2 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
to (see note 2) to (see note 2)
63 Input SLC 1, Detector 14 Alarm SLC 1, Detector 14 Not Used
Trouble
64 Input SLC 1, Detector 14 SLC 1, Detector 14 Not Used
Trouble Maintenance Trouble Maintenance Alert
Urgent
* Pressing the switch button when the Switch Function is “Not Used” will cause the associated LED to stop
blinking. This is a local acknowledgement at the annunciator only: no message is sent to the panel.

NOTE:
1. Point number to Module number relationship is sequential. To determine Point to Module
relationship add 64 to Point number to arrive at Module number.
2. Point number to Detector number relationship is sequential in groups of 2. Since each detector
occupies 2 points, to determine the Point to Detector relationship, count by 2 starting from point
37.
3. This group is only available when UDACT setting is programmed as option 2 and will
automatically be assigned to ACS address 24.

40 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Basic Program Programming

ACS Selection Group Q (SLC #2, Modules 65-100 and Detectors 1-14):

Table 2.28 ACS Group Q (see note 3)

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function*
1 Input SLC 2, Module 65 Alarm SLC 2, Module 65 Trouble Not Used
2 Input SLC 2, Module 66 Alarm SLC 2, Module 66 Trouble Not Used
3 Input SLC 2, Module 67 Alarm SLC 2, Module 67 Trouble Not Used
to to (see note 1) to (see note 1)
36 Input SLC 2, Module 100 Alarm SLC 2, Module 100 Not Used
Trouble
37 Input SLC 2, Detector 1 Alarm SLC 2, Detector 1 Trouble Not Used
38 Input SLC 2, Detector 1 Trouble SLC 2, Detector 1 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
39 Input SLC 2, Detector 2 Alarm SLC 2, Detector 2 Trouble Not Used
40 Input SLC 2, Detector 2 Trouble SLC 2, Detector 2 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
to (see note 2) to (see note 2)
63 Input SLC 2, Detector 14 Alarm SLC 2, Detector 14 Not Used
Trouble
64 Input SLC 2, Detector 14 SLC 2, Detector 14 Not Used
Trouble Maintenance Trouble Maintenance Alert
Urgent
* Pressing the switch button when the Switch Function is “Not Used” will cause the associated LED to stop
blinking. This is a local acknowledgement at the annunciator only: no message is sent to the panel.

NOTE:
1. Point number to Module number relationship is sequential. To determine Point to Module
relationship add 64 to Point number to arrive at Module number.
2. Point number to Detector number relationship is sequential in groups of 2. Since each detector
occupies 2 points, to determine the Point to Detector relationship, count by 2 starting from point
37.
3. This group is only available when UDACT setting is programmed as option 2 and will
automatically be assigned to ACS address 25.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 41

Programming Basic Program

ACS Selection Group R (SLC #1, Detectors 15-46):

Table 2.29 ACS Group R

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function*
1 Input Detector 015 Alarm Detector 015 Trouble Not Used
2 Input Detector 015 Trouble Detector 015 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
3 Input Detector 016 Alarm Detector 016 Trouble Not Used
4 Input Detector 016 Trouble Detector 016 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
to to (see note 1) to (see note 1)
63 Input Detector 046 Alarm Detector 046 Trouble Not Used
64 Input Detector 046 trouble Detector 046 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
* Pressing the switch button when the Switch Function is “Not Used” will cause the associated LED to
stop blinking. This is a local acknowledgement at the annunciator only: no message is sent to the panel.

NOTE:
1.Point number to Detector number relationship is sequential in groups of 2. Since each detector
occupies 2 points, to determine the Point to Detector relationship, start with detector 15 and count
by 2 starting from point 1.
2. This group is only available when UDACT setting is programmed as option 2 and will
automatically be assigned to ACS address 26.

ACS Selection Group S (SLC #2, Detectors 15-46):

Table 2.30 ACS Group S

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function*
1 Input Detector 015 Alarm Detector 015 Trouble Not Used
2 Input Detector 015 Trouble Detector 015 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
3 Input Detector 016 Alarm Detector 016 Trouble Not Used
4 Input Detector 016 Trouble Detector 016 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
to to (see note 1) to (see note 1)
63 Input Detector 046 Alarm Detector 046 Trouble Not Used
64 Input Detector 046 Trouble Detector 046 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
* Pressing the switch button when the Switch Function is “Not Used” will cause the associated LED to
stop blinking. This is a local acknowledgement at the annunciator only: no message is sent to the panel.

NOTE:
1. Point number to Detector number relationship is sequential in groups of 2. Since each detector
occupies 2 points, to determine the Point to Detector relationship, start with detector 15 and count
by 2 starting from point 1.
2. This group is only available when UDACT setting is programmed as option 2 and will
automatically be assigned to ACS address 27.

42 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Basic Program Programming

ACS Selection Group T (SLC #1, Detectors 47-78):

Table 2.31 ACS Group T

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function*
1 Input Detector 047 Alarm Detector 047 Trouble Not Used
2 Input Detector 047 trouble Detector 047 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
3 Input Detector 048 Alarm Detector 048 Trouble Not Used
4 Input Detector 048 Trouble Detector 048 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
to to (see note 1) to (see note 1)
63 Input Detector 078 Alarm Detector 078 Trouble Not Used
64 Input Detector 078 Trouble Detector 078 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
* Pressing the switch button when the Switch Function is “Not Used” will cause the associated LED to
stop blinking. This is a local acknowledgement at the annunciator only: no message is sent to the panel.

NOTE:
1. Point number to Detector number relationship is sequential in groups of 2. Since each detector
occupies 2 points, to determine the Point to Detector relationship, start with detector 47 and count
by 2 starting from point 1.
2. This group is only available when UDACT setting is programmed as option 2 and will
automatically be assigned to ACS address 28.

ACS Selection Group U (SLC #2, Detectors 47-78):

Table 2.32 ACS Group U

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function*
1 Input Detector 047 Alarm Detector 047 Trouble Not Used
2 Input Detector 047 Trouble Detector 047 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
3 Input Detector 048 Alarm Detector 048 Trouble Not Used
4 Input Detector 048 Trouble Detector 048 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
to to (see note 1) to (see note 1)
63 Input Detector 078 Alarm Detector 078 Trouble Not Used
64 Input Detector 078 Trouble Detector 078 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
* Pressing the switch button when the Switch Function is “Not Used” will cause the associated LED to
stop blinking. This is a local acknowledgement at the annunciator only: no message is sent to the panel.

NOTE:
1. Point number to Detector number relationship is sequential in groups of 2. Since each detector
occupies 2 points, to determine the Point to Detector relationship, start with detector 47 and count
by 2 starting from point 1.
2. This group is only available when UDACT setting is programmed as option 2 and will
automatically be assigned to ACS address 29.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 43

Programming Basic Program

ACS Selection Group V (SLC #1, Detectors 79-100):

Table 2.33 ACS Group V

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function*
1 Input Detector 079 Alarm Detector 079 Trouble Not Used
2 Input Detector 079 Trouble Detector 079 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
3 Input Detector 080 Alarm Detector 080 Trouble Not Used
4 Input Detector 080 Trouble Detector 080 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
to to (see note 1) to (see note 1)
63 Input Detector 100 Alarm Detector 100 Trouble Not Used
64 Input Detector 100 Trouble Detector 100 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
* Pressing the switch button when the Switch Function is “Not Used” will cause the associated LED to
stop blinking. This is a local acknowledgement at the annunciator only: no message is sent to the panel.

NOTE:
1. Point number to Detector number relationship is sequential in groups of 2. Since each detector
occupies 2 points, to determine the Point to Detector relationship, start with detector 79 and count
by 2 starting from point 1.
2. This group is only available when UDACT setting is programmed as option 2 and will
automatically be assigned to ACS address 30.

ACS Selection Group W (SLC #2, Detectors 79-100):

Table 2.34 ACS Group W

Point Type Red LED Yellow LED Switch Function*
1 Input Detector 079 Alarm Detector 079 Trouble Not Used
2 Input Detector 079 Trouble Detector 079 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
3 Input Detector 080 Alarm Detector 080 Trouble Not Used
4 Input Detector 080 Trouble Detector 080 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
to to (see note 1) to (see note 1)
63 Input Detector 100 Alarm Detector 100 Trouble Not Used
64 Input Detector 100 Trouble Detector 100 Trouble Not Used
Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert
* Pressing the switch button when the Switch Function is “Not Used” will cause the associated LED to
stop blinking. This is a local acknowledgement at the annunciator only: no message is sent to the panel.

NOTE:
1. Point number to Detector number relationship is sequential in groups of 2. Since each detector
occupies 2 points, to determine the Point to Detector relationship, start with detector 79 and count
by 2 starting from point 1.
2. This group is only available when UDACT setting is programmed as option 2 and will
automatically be assigned to ACS address 31.

44 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

The Network Program Programming

2.3.9 How to Check the Program for Errors (8=CHECK PRG)

When finished programming, you can use the Check option to search the
program entries for possible errors. From the “Basic Program” screen, press
Program Change the 8 key. The Check option searches the program for the following
Password conditions that can cause errors:

• Output points mapped to a zone without a mapped input

• A zone with mapped input points without mapped output points (including Z00 outputs)
• Releasing zone inputs (R0-R9) with no RELEASE CKT outputs mapped to them; or RELEASE
CKT outputs with no R0-R9 inputs mapped to them
• RO-R9 inputs not mapped to MAN. RELEASE.
For more information on Releasing Zones, refer to “Releasing Applications” on page 58.
If the Check option detects multiple devices that fail the check, press the PREVIOUS or NEXT key to
step through the devices. If the Check option displays errors, return to Point Programming
(“Modify or Delete a Point (2=POINT)” on page 17) and correct the errors. The figure below shows
a sample display of program screen that appears after a successful program check:

PROGRAM CHECK OK.

RE-TEST PANEL NOW 08:34A 041515 Tue

2.4 The Network Program

From the “Program Change Selection” screen, press the 2 key to display the
“Network” screen, which displays as follows:
Program Change
THRESHOLD CH.A:H, THRESHOLD CH.B:H,
Password NODE: .000, CLASSX:N, <ENTER>

THRESHOLD CH.A: - Enter H or L, for high or low threshold setting for channel A on the NCM
module.
THRESHOLD CH.B: - Enter H or L, for high or low threshold setting for channel B on the NCM
module.
NODE: - Enter the panel’s network node number. The valid network node number range is 1-103.
The number will be entered after the decimal point; the spaces before the decimal point are for
future use.
CLASSX: - Enter N for network style determination (either Class B or Class X) through
autoprogramming. Enter Y to force a Class X designation for network wiring.

NOTE: If network Class X wiring is determined by autoprogramming, a change in the wiring (for
example, a break in the network wiring) would cause the system to reassess the network wiring
class as B. If network Class X wiring is forced, a break in the wiring will create a trouble message.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 45

Programming The Utility Program

To select network options, follow these steps:

1. Using the arrow keys, move the blinking cursor to a selection.
2. Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS key to select H or L (Threshold Ch. A, Threshold Ch. B). a three-
digit number (Node), or Y or N (Class X).
When finished making selections, press the ESC key three times to return the control panel to
normal operation.
When programming is complete, the panel must be reset to register the programming.

2.5 The Utility Program

There are five options available in the Utility Program. Enter the program and select an option as
described below.
From the “Program Change Selection” screen, press the 3 key to display the
“Utility Program” screen as shown below:
Program Change
Password REGION=0 TBL.REMIND=2 ALA.SCROLL=N
LOCAL CONTROL=0 IP-ACCESS=0 DCC-mode:Y

Descriptions of the five options on the Utility Program screen:

Table 2.35 Utility Program Options (1 of 2)

Utility Option Description

REGION 0 = No special region setting (default)

1 = China
2 = Canada

TBL.REMIND This option provides trouble resound selections to meet the requirements of NFPA 72-2002,
TBL Reminder* which you can select as follows:
• Select * if you don’t want a trouble reminder
*Use of a setting other • Select 1 to sound a short trouble reminder tone every minute
than “2” requires AHJ • Select 2 to resound a trouble tone every 24 hours at 11:00 AM, and to send a reminder every
approval. sixty seconds for acknowledged events.
• Select 3 to display a detector while in the alarm verification mode and no trouble reminder
• Select 4 for once a minute trouble reminder with alarm verification display
• Select 5 for trouble reminder resound every 24 hours at 11:00 AM with alarm verification
display, and to send a reminder every sixty seconds for acknowledged troubles

ALA.SCROLL This option allows the programmer to select how alarms are displayed.
Alarm Scroll* • Select Y if you want each alarm displayed for approximately two seconds, and to
acknowledge all alarms with a single acknowledgement. (default)
*Setting this field to “Y” • Select N if you want only the first alarm and the alarm count displayed, and to acknowledge
requires AHJ approval. each alarm singly, point by point.

LOCAL This option allows the programmer to disable local control of the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY
CONTROL key, SIGNAL SILENCE key, DRILL key and SYSTEM RESET key. Select local control as follows:
• Select 0 to disable local control
• Select 1 to enable local control (default)
• Select 2 to enable partial local control. This setting allows control of the ACKNOWLEDGE and
SYSTEM RESET keys only (required in Chicago.)
Note that if the panel is to be controlled exclusively by a Display and Control Center (DCC),
Local Control should be disabled.

46 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

FlashScan Poll Programming

Table 2.35 Utility Program Options (2 of 2)

Utility Option Description

IP ACCESS Note: Use of this option is subject to local AHJ approval.

This option allows the programmer to choose one of three options for Wide Area Network
(WAN) communication. Acceptance of commands, downloads and programming from over the
WAN can be enabled, disabled or timed.
Select IP ACCESS as follows:
• Select 0 to disable IP access
• Select 1 to enable IP access
• Select 2 to enable IP access for two hours.
Note that enabling IP ACCESS allows downloads over a local area network (LAN) or the
internet (Wide Area Network - WAN) using VeriFire Tools through a Noti•Fire•Net(NFN) Web
Server (NWS), or a wide-area enabled NCS through a PC version of NFN Gateway. Always
verify system operation after programming changes are made in this manner.

DCC Mode This option allows the programmer to select whether this panel will participate in DCC (Display
and Control Center) functions. Select Y for participation, N for no participation.
NOTE: For Mass Notification applications, DCC participation should be disabled.

To select utility options, follow these steps:

1. Using the arrow keys, move the blinking cursor to a selection.
2. Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS key to select
- Local Control
- *, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (TBL Reminder)
- 0, 1, or 2 (IP ACCESS)
- DCC Mode
3. When finished making selections, press the ESC key three times to return the control panel to
normal operation.

2.6 FlashScan Poll

From the “Program Change Selection” screen, press the 4 key to access the
“FlashScan Poll” selection screen as shown below:
Program Change
Password FLASHSCAN L1DET L1MOD L2DET L2MOD
N N N N

This menu allows the selection of CLIP (Classic Loop Interface Protocol) or FlashScan detectors
and modules for each loop. Once this screen is accessed, the cursor will be positioned underneath
the Loop #1 Detector selection, blinking the currently selected protocol type. The default selections
are shown in the above figure. This indicates that both Loop #1 and Loop #2 detectors and modules
are selected to use CLIP devices. If FlashScan devices are to be employed, change the blinking
cursor by pressing the Y key or toggle it by using the PREVIOUS or NEXT key. After the selections
have been made to the detectors and modules of both loops, press the ENTER key, at which time the
panel will reset.
Most FlashScan devices can be programmed to run in either CLIP or FlashScan mode. Observe one
of the following three options when using FlashScan devices:
Option 1 Program all modules and detectors on an SLC as FlashScan.
(In the “FlashScan Poll” screen, enter Y for DET and Y for MOD. It is possible to
have up to 159 FlashScan modules and 159 FlashScan detectors on this SLC.)

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 47

Programming Setting the Baud Rate of Serial Ports

Option 2 Program all modules and detectors on an SLC as CLIP.

(In the “FlashScan Poll” screen, enter N for DET and N for MOD. It is possible to
have up to 99 CLIP modules and 99 CLIP detectors on this SLC.)

CAUTION:
! Do not program more than 99 CLIP addresses, as this will compromise the response time of the
panel to display off-normal events.

Option 3 Program all detectors as CLIP and all modules as FlashScan on an SLC.
(In the “FlashScan Poll” screen, enter N for DET and Y for MOD. It is possible to
have up to 99 CLIP detectors and 159 FlashScan modules on this SLC.)

CAUTION:
! Do not program modules as CLIP and detectors as FlashScan on the same SLC. This combination
is not an option: Y for DET, N for MOD in the “FlashScan Poll” screen.

NOTE: Autoprogramming following a Clear Program command will cause the panel to determine
the FlashScan capability of each loop based on whether all devices on a loop are FlashScan or
not. It will set the loop settings to FlashScan if necessary.

Refer to the SLC manual for available devices.

2.7 Setting the Baud Rate of Serial Ports

2.7.1 Printer Serial Port
The default baud rate of the EIA-232 Printer connection (serial printer port) is 9600. To change
baud rate to 2400 or 4800, follow these steps:
1. From the “SYSTEM NORMAL” screen, press the ENTER key to display the Program Entry
screen, as shown below:
1=PROGRAMMING 2=READ STATUS ENTRY
(ESCAPE TO ABORT)

2. Press the 1 key. The control panel displays the Enter Password screen, as shown below:
ENTER PROG OR STAT PASSWORD, THEN ENTER.
_ (ESCAPE TO ABORT)

3. Enter 2400B and press . The five asterisks that appear when you type in the baud rate

will disappear when you press .

4. Press twice to return to the “SYSTEM NORMAL” screen.

5. To switch from 2400 baud to 4800 or 9600 baud repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 entering 9600B or
4800B.

48 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Setting the Baud Rate of Serial Ports Programming

2.7.2 CRT Serial Port

The default setting for the serial EIA-232 CRT port is “disabled”. To enable the EIA-232 CRT port
at 9600 baud, follow the steps below.

NOTE: The serial EIA-232 CRT port can only be enabled in standalone (non-networked)
applications. The only baud rate supported is 9600.

1. From the SYSTEM NORMAL screen, press the ENTER key to display the Program Entry
screen, as shown below:

1=PROGRAMMING 2=READ STATUS ENTRY

(ESCAPE TO ABORT)

2. Press the 1 key. The control panel displays the Enter Password screen, as shown below:
ENTER PROG OR STAT PASSWORD, THEN ENTER.
_ (ESCAPE TO ABORT)

3. Enter CRT96 and press . The five asterisks that appear when you type in the code

will disappear when you press .

4. Press twice to return to the “SYSTEM NORMAL” screen.

5. To switch back to the default network mode (no CRT) repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 entering
NOCRT.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 49

 Section 3: Status Change

3.1 Overview
Status Change provides a second programming level - accessed by an assigned password - for
changing operating parameters. (These operating parameters do not affect control program
settings.) For example, the Status Change password lets you change settings such as detector
sensitivity and system time and date.

NOTE: Assign the Status Change password to persons who do not have access to Level 1
programming options.

Status Change Options are described below.

Option 1=DISABL - The Disable/Enable option lets you disable programmed points for detectors,
modules, zones and NACs. For details, refer to “Disable or Enable a Point” on page 51.
Option 2=SENSITIV - The Detector Sensitivity option lets you change the Alarm and Pre-alarm
(sensitivity) level for an installed detector. For details, refer to “Changing Detector Sensitivity” on
page 52.
Option 3=CLR VER - The Clear Verification screen lets you clear all counters for detectors
selected for Alarm Verification. For details, refer to “Clearing Alarm Verification Counters” on
page 53.
Option 4=CLR HIST - The Clear History screen lets you clear the entire History buffer from
memory. For details, refer to “Clearing the History Buffer” on page 53.
Option 5=TIME - The Time/Date option lets you set the time and date for the system clock. For
details, refer to “Setting the System Time and Date” on page 53.
Option 6=WALK TEST - The Walk Test option lets you test the entire fire alarm system while
away from the control panel. For details, refer to “Walk Test” on page 54”.

3.2 How to Enter Status Change

To enter Status Change, follow these steps:
1. From the SYSTEM NORMAL” screen, press the ENTER key. The control panel displays the
“Entry” screen, as shown below:
1=PROGRAMMING 2=READ STATUS ENTRY

2. From the “Entry” screen, press the 1 key. The control panel displays the “Enter Password”
screen as shown below:
ENTER PROG OR STAT PASSWORD, THEN ENTER.

3. Enter your Status Change password (See “How to Enter a Password”, page page 10). The
control panel displays the “Status Change Selection” screen, as shown below:
STATUS CHANGE PRESS: 1=DISABL 2=SENSITIV
3=CLR VER 4=CLR HIST 5=TIME 6=WALK TEST

4. Select a Status Change selection: 1,2,3,4,5, or 6.

50 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Disable or Enable a Point Status Change

3.3 Disable or Enable a Point

WARNING:
! Do not rely on disable/enable software settings to lock out releasing devices. Releasing devices
must be physically disconnected.

NOTE: When an input or output point associated with releasing functions is disabled, a single
supervisory trouble will be generated.

The Disable/Enable option lets you disable programmed points for detectors,
modules, zones, and NACs. The program allows you to disable an initiating
Status Change device in alarm: however, the disable will not take effect until after the panel
Password has been reset.

1. From the “Status Change Selection” screen, press the 1 key to display the “Disable/Enable”
screen.
2. Select the point type:

for detectors
for modules
for NACs
for zones

The cursor will blink the first SLC address digit in the detector, zone, module, or NAC field.
D

WARNING:
! Disabling a zone disables all input and output devices that use the zone as the first entry in the
CBE list.

3. Enter the address of the point, then press the ENTER key. A sample display follows:
Blinking status banner (ENABLE or DISABL)
ENABLE CONTROL CONTROL ADDRESS 2M101
00 __ __ __ __ ISW 2M101

When you disable a point and press the ESC key to return to the Disable/Enable screen, the control
panel: a) turns on the POINT DISABLED LED; b) sounds the panel sounder; and c) changes the status
banner to TROUBL for the point.
You can disable or enable a point by changing the status banner as follows:
Table 3.1 Changing the Status Banner (1 of 2)

To Press

Change the status Maneuver the cursor with the arrow keys until it is in the status field. Press

(Next Selection) or (Previous Selection)

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 51

Status Change Changing Detector Sensitivity

Table 3.1 Changing the Status Banner (2 of 2)

To Press

Save the status

Go to the next or previous

point address
(Next Selection) or (Previous Selection)

3.4 Changing Detector Sensitivity

The Detector Sensitivity option lets you change the Alarm and Pre-Alarm
(sensitivity) level for an installed detector. From the “Status Change Selection”
Status screen, press the 2 key to display the “Detector Selection” screen as shown
Passwo below:

DET. SENS. & COMP. ENTER POINTS:LDAAA,E

To select a detector, enter the SLC address (2D101) of an installed detector in the “LDAAA” field
(shown above). The control panel displays the following screen:

PROGRM SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 2D101

03 __ __ __ __A8P8AV 2D101

Alarm Level Pre-Alarm Level

Use the instructions below to set/change detector sensitivity, display additional detectors, and set
Pre-alarm values.

NOTE: If not using Pre-Alarm, set PA=0. PA=1 is the self-optimizing mode. For details, refer to
“Pre-Alarm” on page 98.

To Enter or Press

Display detector information on

the screen.
The detector address, then press .

Set alarm sensitivity level. A value (1-9) or increase or decrease values by pressing

the NEXT or PREVIOUS keys: or .

Set Pre-alarm level A value (0-9) or increase or decrease values by pressing

the NEXT or PREVIOUS keys: or .

Save the sensitivity values.

Display the next existing

detector address. (Next Selection)

Display the previous existing

detector address. (Previous Selection)

52 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Clearing Alarm Verification Counters Status Change

3.5 Clearing Alarm Verification Counters

The Clear Verification screen lets you clear all counters for detectors selected
for Alarm Verification. From the “Status Change Selection” screen, press the 3
Status Change key to display the “Clear Verification” screen as shown below:
Password
PRESS ENTER TO CLEAR VERIFICATION COUNTS
OR ESCAPE TO ABORT

From the Clear Verification screen, you can do the following:

• Press the ENTER key to clear all verification counters and return to the “Status Change
Selection” screen; or
• Press the ESC key to return to the “Status Change Selection” screen without clearing.

3.6 Clearing the History Buffer

The Clear History screen lets you clear the entire History buffer from memory.
Press the 4 key from the “Status Change Selection” screen to display the “Clear
Status Change History” screen as shown below:
Password
PRESS ENTER TO CLEAR HISTORY FILE
OR ESCAPE TO ABORT

From the Clear History screen, you can do the following:

• Press the ENTER key to clear the contents of the History buffer and return to the “Status
Change Selection” screen; or
• Press the ESC key to return to the “Status Change Selection” screen without clearing.

3.7 Setting the System Time and Date

The Time/Date option lets you set the time and date for the system clock. Press
the 5 key from the “Status Change Selection” screen to display the “Time/Date”
screen as shown below:
Status Change
Password
CHANGE TIME/DATE
11:40A Tue 04/15/2015

The first digit flashes until you change the value or press the ENTER key. To set the system time and
date, follow the instructions below:

To Do this

Change the time and date values Enter values from the numeric keys on the keypad.

Change A (AM) or P (PM)

Press (Next Selection) or (Previous Selection)

Change the day

Press (Next Selection) or (Previous Selection)

Move to another digit

Press

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 53

Status Change Walk Test

To Do this

Save the time and date and return

Press

3.8 Walk Test

Walk Test allows the user to test the entire fire alarm system. There are two kinds of Walk Test -
Basic and Advanced, described later in this section.
Before entering Walk Test, note the following:
• For each individual activation, the control panel sends “TEST Axx” (for alarm testing) or
TEST Txx (for trouble testing) to the History buffer, installed printers and CRT-2s so results
can be reviewed.
• Basic Walk Test, Silent – In order to keep the test silent, do not program any of the output
modules with “W” in the Walk Test field.
• Advanced Walk Test - This test overrides a setting of “*” (silent) in the Walk Test field. All
activated outputs will sound until panel reset.
• The control panel provides a 1-hour timer for Walk Test mode. When the hour expires with
no activity, the control panel automatically returns to normal operation.
• Walk Test may be exited at any time by pressing the ESC key.

WARNING:
! Walk Test mode deactivates fire protection. Always observe the following:

1. Prior to Walk Test, secure all protected buildings, and notify the building owner/operator,
fire department, and other pertinent personnel that testing is in progress.
2. Immediately after Walk Test is completed, notify the same people that testing is complete
and is restored to normal operation.

WARNING:
! Physically disconnect all releasing devices before starting Walk Test. It is not sufficient to
disable in any other manner.

NOTE: Walk Test will not start if any devices are active (i.e., fire alarms, security, supervisories
or pre-alarms.) To perform a walk test while a device is active, disable the device and press the
System Reset button.

For information on programming Walk Test field selections, refer to “Modify an Addressable
Monitor Module Point” on page 20 or “Modify NAC Points” on page 22.

54 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Walk Test Status Change

3.8.1 Basic Walk Test

When the tester activates an input during Basic Walk Test, all silenceable outputs mapped by CBE
to that input will activate. The activations are tracking; once the activation stimulus is removed, the
input will deactivate. Basic Walk Test may be audible or silent, depending on the Walk Test setting
of participating outputs. Program the Walk Test field for control modules and NACs as follows:

Program Silenceable
For Silenceable Outputs will
Outputs with

an audible Basic Walk Test W sound for approximately 4 seconds

during Walk Test

a silent Basic Walk Test * not sound during Walk Test

a trouble Basic Walk Test W sound for approximately 8 seconds

when put into trouble

Enter Basic Walk Test in the following manner:

From the “Status Change Selection” screen, press the 6 key. The control panel
displays the “Walk Test” screen as shown below:
Status Change
Password WALK TEST PRESS ENTER TO START
ESCAPE TO ABORT

Operate the control panel in Walk Test as follows

To Press

Put the control panel into Walk Test mode

Stop a Walk Test and return to the “Status Change Selection” screen

Basic Walk Test directs the control panel to do the following:

• Activate silenceable outputs associated by programming with each new alarm. (The panel
does not activate non-silenceable outputs.)
• Save and store each test in the History buffer
• Send a TEST Axx status banner for each alarm, and a TEST TXX banner for each trouble,
to the printer (xx equals the number of tests for a detector or input device with this address)
• Turn on the System Trouble LED
• Turn on the System Trouble relay
• Disable activation of the System Alarm relay

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 55

Status Change Walk Test

3.8.2 Advanced Walk Test

During Advanced Walk Test, when the tester activates an input, all CBE mapped to that input will
activate with the exception of releasing functions. Each input activation is latching; that is, it will
not deactivate until the system is reset. Advanced Walk Test will sound all activated outputs,
overriding a setting of “*” (silent) in the Walk Test field.

NOTE: Some detectors, laser detectors for example, can be difficult to place in alarm using a magnet.
Advanced Walk Test facilitates magnet testing of these detectors.

Enter Advanced Walk Test as follows:

Enter LTEST at the password screen. Asterisks will display where LTEST has
been typed. Pressing ENTER displays the following screen.
LTEST
TROUBL IN SYSTEM ADV WALK TEST
PROCESSING DISABLED 10:07a 041515 MON

NOTE: The control panel can not be put into Walk Test from an alarm condition.

To Press

Stop an Advanced Walk Test and return to

the “Status Change Selection” screen

Advanced Walk Test directs the control panel to do the same as it does for Basic Walk Test (see
“3.8.1, "Basic Walk Test"” above) with the following exceptions:
• alarm and trouble messages are sent to the printer, not test messages. (These Walk Test
messages can be distinguished from others at the printer because they begin with the trouble
message generated when Walk Test is entered, and end with the cleared trouble when Walk
Test is exited.)
• all CBE mapped to the test input is activated except releasing functions.

3.8.3 Walk Test Activation Indications

Walk Test Activation Indications
FlashScan poll mode - Once the test is started:
• each intelligent addressable input device will blink its address in red, and each intelligent
addressable output device will blink its address in green. Pattern examples are given below.

Address Blink Pattern

8 8 blinks, long stop, 8 blinks, long stop,....

37 3 blinks, stop, 7 blinks, long stop, 3 blinks, stop, 7 blinks, long stop,....

70 7 blinks, stop, 10 blinks, long stop, 7 blinks, stop,.....

107 10 blinks, stop, 7 blinks, long stop, 10 blinks, stop,.....

152 15 blinks, stop, 2 blinks, long stop, 15 blinks, stop, 2 blinks, long
stop....

56 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Walk Test Status Change

• an input device activated in Basic Walk Test latches on steady green for the duration of the
test.
• an output device activated in Basic Walk Test will remain active and the LED will glow
steady green for:
- approximately 4 seconds for alarms
- approximately 8 seconds for troubles.
• an output device activated in Advanced Walk Test will remain active and the LED will
glow steady green until the reset key is pressed.
CLIP mode - Once the test is started:
• intelligent addressable input and output devices continue to blink red as usual until
activated.
• an input device activated in Basic Walk Test latches on steady red during activation. If the
device is put in trouble (for instance, the detector head is removed, then replaced), the LED
will be latched on for the duration of the test.
• an output device activated during Basic Walk Test will remain active and the LED will
glow steady green (if a FlashScan module) or steady red (if a CLIP module) for:
- approximately 4 seconds for alarms
- approximately 8 seconds for troubles.
• an output device activated in Advanced Walk Test will remain active and the LED will
glow steady green (if a FlashScan module) or steady red (if a CLIP module) until the reset
key is pressed.

3.8.4 Viewing Walk Test Results

When finished with a Walk Test, view the History buffer, installed printers and CRT-2s to check the
results of the Walk Test. View the History buffer by using the Read Status function. From the
SYSTEM NORMAL screen, press the ENTER key, press the 2 key two times, then press the ENTER
key to view the History buffer. For further instructions on using the Read Status function, refer to
the NF2S-640 Operations Manual.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 57

 Appendix A: Releasing Applications
WARNING:
! When used for CO2 releasing applications, observe proper precautions as stated in NFPA 12. Do not
enter the protected space unless physical lockout and other safety procedures are fully completed.

Do not use software disable functions in the panel as lockout.

Do not enable the BACKUP option switch for any of the four Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs) if
they are used for releasing functions.

A.1 Overview
A.1.1 Description of Releasing Zones
The control panel includes ten Releasing Zones (R0-R9) that can be used to control up to ten
releasing operations. Each zone operates independently, and is fully programmable..

NOTE: Releasing Zones R0-R9 appear in the CBE list of devices as ZR0-ZR9. For example, if
you list R5 for a detector, one of the five zones in the CBE list of the detector will display as ZR05.

From the “Special Function Change” screen (refer to “Program Special Zones (6=SPL FUNCT)” on
page 25), select a Releasing Zone (R0-R9) to display the “Releasing Function” screen:
PRG RELEASE FUNCTION RELEASE CONTROL
DELAY=30 ABORT=ULI CROSS=N SOK=0000 R05

Each Releasing Zone includes four releasing functions, outlined below:

Table A.1 Releasing Zone Functions

Function Lets You

Delay Program a 01 to 60-second Delay Timer (or 00, no delay). The Delay Timer equals the
time that must elapse between activating an initiating device and activating the releasing
zones mapped to the active initiating device. Refer to “Programming a Delay Timer” on
page 59.

Abort Select a 3-letter Abort switch Type Code (ULI, IRI, NYC, or AHJ) that adds a delay time to
a Releasing Zone, or prevents a release of a Releasing Zone. Refer to “Abort Switches” on
page 60.

Cross Select one of three Cross Zone types or “N” (not used). A Cross Zone requires tripping two
or more devices to activate the outputs mapped to one of the Releasing Zones. Refer to
“Using Cross Zones” on page 68.

Soak Select a Soak Timer (0001-9999 seconds) or “0000” (not used). Refer to “Programming a
Soak Timer” on page 70.

58 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

How to Program a Releasing Zone Releasing Applications

A.1.2 NFPA Releasing Applications

This control panel can be used for agent release or preaction/deluge control applications. In a
properly configured system with compatible, listed actuating and initiating devices, this control
panel complies with the following NFPA standards for installation in accordance with the
acceptable standard:

Table A.2 NFPA Standards for Releasing Applications

Standard Covers

NFPA 12 CO2 Extinguishing Systems

NFPA 12A Halon 1301 Extinguishing Systems

NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems, Installation of

NFPA 15 Water Spray Fixed Systems

NFPA 16 Foam-water Deluge and Foam-water Spray Systems

NFPA 17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems

NFPA 17A Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems

NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems

A.2 How to Program a Releasing Zone

This section provides details for programming the releasing functions: Delay Timer, Abort Switch,
Cross Zone, and Soak Timer.

A.2.1 Programming a Delay Timer

Use a Delay Timer to specify the elapsed time between alarm activation of an initiating device and
activation of all output devices programmed as release circuits and mapped to that initiating device.
You can set the Delay Timer from 01 to 60 seconds, or to 00 for no delay. The figure below shows
graphical representation of a 15-second timer:
Delay = 15
(15 seconds)
Initiating device(s) in 0 0
All outputs Releasing
Releasing Zone R1 45 15 45 15

Zone R1 activate.
activates.
30 30

Figure A.1 Example of 15-Second Delay Timer

To Program Do this

Delay Timer Enter a value (00-60) from the numeric keys on the keyboard.

Press at this point to save the Delay Timer value if no other fields on the screen are
changing. To change another field on the screen, move the cursor into position by pressing the
arrow keys.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 59

Releasing Applications How to Program a Releasing Zone

A.2.2 Abort Switches

Definition of Abort Switches
The control panel provides for four (4) types of Abort Switches (ULI, IRI, NYC, and AHJ) that you
can use, that will affect the operation of a Delay Timer mapped to the same Releasing Zone. For
example, an Abort Switch selected for Releasing Zone R05 only affects the Delay Timer selected
for R05. Other requirements for using an Abort Switch include the following:
• Connecting a monitor module to a UL-listed abort station, such as the NBG-12LRA shown
below.
• Program the monitor module with the Type Code ABORT SWITCH. (Refer to “Modify an
Addressable Monitor Module Point” on page 20.)
• Abort switch shall not be used with a preaction system or a CO2 system.

SYSTEM SYSTEM
Abort Switch NORMAL ACTIVATED

Manual Agent
Release lever

NBG12LRAface.wmf
NBG-12LRA station with Abort Switch

Figure A.2 UL-listed Abort Station

This section contains information for programming each type of Abort Switch for a Releasing
Zone.
How an Abort Switch Works
The figure below contains an example for configuring an Abort Switch and shows the requirements
for using an Abort Switch for Releasing Zone R05, which are:
• A monitor module is wired to an abort station
• The monitor module is programmed with the Type Code, ABORT SWITCH
• All initiating devices and outputs are mapped to a common Releasing Zone (R05 shown)
• Releasing Zone R05 is programmed with the releasing functions: Delay, Abort, Cross, and
Soak

NOTE: The abort switch can only be associated with one releasing zone.

60 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

How to Program a Releasing Zone Releasing Applications

When an initiating device activates, you must press and hold the Abort Switch or the control panel
will send the command to dump releasing agents when the Delay time (15 seconds shown) expires.
The Abort selection (ULI, IRI, NYC, or AHJ) determines the function of the Abort Switch.

PRG RELEASE FUNCT RELEASE CONTROL

DELAY=15 ABORT=ULI CROSS=N SOK=0000 R05
Releasing Zone R05 sample programming selections

SYSTEM SYSTEM
NORMAL ACTIVATED

Monitor
Module with
Detector Detector
ABORT SWITCH
Type Code
Abort station with Abort Switch
and Manual Release lever

R05

B01 B02 B03 B04

Type Code Type Code Type Code Type Code

RELEASE CKT REL CKT ULC REL AUDIBLE REL END BELL

Example: If you program B01-B03 as shown, Example: If you

these outputs activate at release. program B04 as
shown, this output
activates when the
release is finished.

Figure A.3 Example of a Basic Configuration for an Abort Switch

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 61

Releasing Applications How to Program a Releasing Zone

Programming a ULI Abort Switch

The following contains information needed to program a ULI Abort Switch.

 Description
Requires a standard UL-type delay timer that complies with UL Standard 864.

 How to Program
1. Program the monitor module connected to the abort station with the Type Code ABORT
SWITCH as detailed in “Modify an Addressable Monitor Module Point” on page 20.
2. Select a time for the Releasing Zone Delay Timer (refer to“Programming a Delay Timer”
on page 59).

To Program Do this

ULI Abort Switch Type ULI in the ABORT= field, or press the NEXT or PREVIOUS

keys: or until ULI appears in the field.

3. Press at this point to save the Abort Switch value if no other fields on the screen
are changing. To change another field on the screen, move the cursor into position by
pressing the arrow keys on the keypad.

 How It Works
When an alarm initiates in the programmed Releasing Zone, you can press and hold the Abort
Switch while the Delay Timer continues to count down. (If the delay timer has expired, the abort
switch has no effect.) When you release the Abort Switch, a 10-second ULI timer counts down. At
the end of the 10-second ULI timer, the control panel activates the Releasing Zone outputs.

 Example
A ULI Abort Switch and a Delay Timer programmed to Releasing Zone R05:

PRG RELEASE FUNCT RELEASE CONTROL

DELAY=15 ABORT=ULI CROSS=N SOK=0000 R05
Program selections for Releasing Zone R05

Total time from alarm initiation to release:

Delay =15 sec.
5 + 15 + 10 = 30 seconds

0 sec. 5 sec. 15 sec. 20 sec. 30 sec.

5 sec.
15 sec.

Alarm
10 sec.
Press and hold the
Abort Switch for 15
seconds Release the Abort
Switch; the 10-second
ULI timer begins

When the 10-seconds

ULI timer expires, the
control panel activates
Releasing Zone outputs

Figure A.4 ULI Abort Switch Example

62 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

How to Program a Releasing Zone Releasing Applications

Programming an IRI Abort Switch

The following contains information needed to program an IRI Abort Switch.
 Description
A standard UL-type delay timer (complies with UL Standard 864) that operates like ULI, but with
additional functions for Cross Zones.
 How to Program
1. Program the monitor module connected to the abort station with Type Code ABORT SWITCH as
detailed in “Modify an Addressable Monitor Module Point” on page 20.
2. Select a time for the Releasing Zone Delay Timer (refer to“Programming a Delay Timer”
on page 59.)
To Program Do this

IRI Abort Switch Type IRI in the ABORT= field, or press the next or previous keys,

or , until IRI appears in the field.

3. Press at this point to save the Abort Switch value if no other fields on the screen
are changing. To change another field on the screen, move the cursor into position by
pressing the arrow keys on the keypad.
 How it Works
When the first alarm occurs in a releasing zone programmed with a cross-zone code, pressing the
abort switch will prevent activation of the releasing zone should a second alarm occur while the
switch is held. When the abort switch is released, if a second alarm has occurred while the switch
was held, the ten-second IRI timer activates immediately, and the control panel activates the
releasing zone outputs at the end of the IRI timer countdown. When the abort switch is released and
a second alarm has not occurred while the switch was held, the panel waits for the cross-zone
conditions to be met before activating the releasing zone.

WARNING:
! The IRI abort switch will only work if it is pushed before the second alarm occurs. If it is pushed after the
second alarm, the releasing zone will already have been activated, and the switch will have no effect.

 Example
An IRI Abort Switch and a Delay Timer programmed to Releasing Zone R05:
PRG RELEASE FUNCT RELEASE CONTROL
DELAY=15 ABORT=IRI CROSS=Z SOK=0000 R05
Program selections for Releasing Zone R05

Abort Switch held 15 sec.

0 sec. 5 sec. 10 sec. 20 sec. 30 sec.

5 sec.

5 sec.
Alarm 1
10 sec.

Press and hold

the Abort
Switch for 15
Total time from when Abort seconds 10 sec.
Switch is pressed to output
activation: 15 + 10 = 25
Alarm 2 Release the abort
Total time from when Abort (Cross-zone switch; a 10-second
Switch is released to output conditions met) IRI timer begins
activation: 10 seconds At the end of the 10 seconds,
the control panel activates
releasing zone outputs

Figure A.5 IRI Abort Switch Example

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 63

Releasing Applications How to Program a Releasing Zone

Programming a NYC Abort Switch

The following contains information needed to program an NYC Abort Switch.

 Description
A standard NYC delay timer that adds 90 seconds to the programmed Delay Timer.

NOTE: NYC timers do not comply with UL Standard 864.

 How to Program
1. Program the monitor module connected to the abort station with the Type Code ABORT
SWITCH as detailed in “Modify an Addressable Monitor Module Point” on page 20.
2. Select a time for the Releasing Zone Delay Timer (refer to“Programming a Delay Timer”
on page 59).)

To Program Do this

NYC Abort Switch Type NYC in the ABORT= field, or press the next or previous keys,

or , until NYC appears in the field.

3. Press at this point to save the Abort Switch value if no other fields on the screen
are changing. To change another field on the screen, move the cursor into position by
pressing the arrow keys on the keypad.

 How It Works
When an alarm initiates in the programmed Releasing Zone, pressing and holding the Abort switch
stops the Delay Timer countdown. The Delay Timer restarts at the beginning of its countdown
when the Abort switch is released. When the Delay Timer expires, the 90-second NYC timer starts
counting down. When both timers expire, the control panel activates Releasing Zone outputs.

NOTE: 120 seconds is the maximum delay after the Abort switch is released. If the Delay Timer
time plus the NYC delay time of 90 seconds exceeds 120 seconds, Releasing Zone outputs will
still be activated at 120 seconds after the Abort switch is released.

 Example 1 - Delay Time Does Not Exceed 120 Seconds

Select a Delay Timer value for R05 of 15 seconds. The Releasing Zone activates and the 15-second
Delay Timer starts. Ten seconds into the Delay Timer countdown, press and hold the Abort Switch
for 30 seconds, then release the Abort Switch. The control panel restarts the Delay Timer at 15
seconds and adds the NYC delay of 90 seconds. The delay timers will both expire at 105 seconds,

64 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

How to Program a Releasing Zone Releasing Applications

and Releasing Zone outputs will begin releasing at that time. Following is an example of a NYC
Abort Switch and a Delay Timer programmed to Releasing Zone R05:
PRG RELEASE FUNCTION RELEASE CONTROL
DELAY=15 ABORT=NYC CROSS=N SOK=0000 R05
Program selections for Releasing Zone R05
Total time from alarm initiation to release:
10 + 30 + 105 = 145 seconds
Delay=15 sec.
Delay=15 sec. NYC Delay=90 sec.

0 sec.

105 sec. (15 + 90). Does not exceed 120 seconds.

10 sec.

30 sec.
Alarm

Press and hold

the Abort Switch

Release Abort Switch---

At this point, the delay time When all timers are expired (in this example,
becomes the programmed delay 145 seconds after alarm initiation, 105
(15 sec.) plus 90 seconds (105 seconds after the Abort switch has been
sec.) OR 120 seconds, released) the control panel activates
whichever is smaller Releasing Zone outputs

Figure A.6 NYC Abort Switch Example 1

 Example 2 - Delay Time Exceeds 120 Seconds

Select a Delay Timer value for R05 of 60 seconds. The Releasing Zone activates and the 60-second
Delay Timer starts. Ten seconds into the Delay Timer countdown, press and hold the Abort Switch
for 30 seconds, then release the Abort Switch. The control panel restarts the Delay Timer at 60
seconds and adds the NYC delay of 90 seconds. The delay timers will both expire at 150 seconds:
however, this time exceeds the maximum of 120 seconds, so the Releasing Zone outputs will begin
releasing at 120 seconds, not at 150. Following is an example of a NYC Abort Switch and a Delay
Timer programmed to Releasing Zone R05:

PRG RELEASE FUNCTION RELEASE CONTROL

DELAY=60 ABORT=NYC CROSS=N SOK=0000 R05
Program selections for Releasing Zone R05

Delay=60 sec.
Pressing and releasing Abort switch Total time from alarm initiation to release:
restarts Delay=60 countdown after 10 + 30 + 60 + 60 = 160 seconds
40 seconds have elapsed.
Delay=60 sec. NYC Delay=90 sec.

0 sec. 150 sec. (60 + 90). Exceeds 120 seconds.

10 sec.
30 sec.
Alarm
Press and hold
the Abort Switch
120 sec. to release

The control panel activates

Release Abort Switch--- Releasing Zone outputs after
At this point, the delay becomes 120 seconds have elapsed.
the balance of the programmed The NYC timer has not
delay (60 sec.) plus 90 seconds expired, but it is overridden by
(150 sec.) OR 120 seconds, the control panel.
whichever is smaller

Figure A.7 NYC Abort Switch Example 2

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 65

Releasing Applications How to Program a Releasing Zone

Programming an AHJ Abort Switch

The following contains information needed to program an AHJ Abort Switch:

 Description
An AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction) delay timer that restores the programmed Delay Timer.

NOTE: An AHJ timer does not comply with UL Standard 864.

 How to Program
1. Program the monitor module connected to the abort station with the Type Code ABORT
SWITCH as detailed in “Modify an Addressable Monitor Module Point” on page 20.
2. Select a time for the Releasing Zone Delay Timer (refer to“Programming a Delay Timer”
on page 59.
To Program Do this

AHJ Abort Switch Type AHJ in the ABORT= field, or press the NEXT or PREVIOUS keys,

or , until AHJ appears in the field.

3. Press at this point to save the Abort Switch value if no other fields on the screen
are changing. To change another field on the screen, move the cursor into position by
pressing the arrow keys on the keypad.

 How It Works
When an alarm initiates, the programmed Delay Timer starts. Press and hold the Abort switch and
the control panel suspends the Delay Timer. When you release the Abort Switch, the control panel
restores the value of the programmed Delay Timer and the Delay Timer counts down. When the
Delay Timer expires, the control panel activates Releasing Zone outputs.

66 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

How to Program a Releasing Zone Releasing Applications

 Example

An AHJ Abort Switch and a Delay Timer programmed to Releasing Zone R05:
PRG RELEASE FUNCTION RELEASE CONTROL
DELAY=60 ABORT=AHJ CROSS=N SOK=0000 R05
Program selections for Releasing Zone R05

Delay=60 sec.
Total time from alarm initiation to release:
45 + 30 + 60 = 135 seconds

0 sec. 45 sec. 60 sec. 75 sec. 135 sec.

45 sec.

30 sec.
Alarm
60 sec.

Press and hold

the Abort Switch

Release the Abort Switch and control

panel restores the programmed value the
Delay Timer (60 sec.) and counts down

When the Delay Timer

expires, the control panel
activates Releasing
Zone outputs

Figure A.8 AHJ Abort Switch Example

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 67

Releasing Applications How to Program a Releasing Zone

A.2.3 Using Cross Zones

Purpose of Cross Zones
Using Cross Zones lets you program the control panel to activate a Releasing Zone and any output
mapped to the Releasing Zone only after a predetermined sequence of events occurs. (If not using
Cross Zones, set CROSS= N.)

NOTE: Only the first Software Zone (Z01-Z99) listed in the zone map is used to determine
Cross=Z.

A summary of the types of Cross Zones and the conditions for activating a Releasing Zone:

Type Activates when

Y Two or more detectors or modules are alarmed that are mapped to one of the ten Releasing Zones
(R0-R9).
Z Two or more detectors or modules are alarmed that are mapped to two different software zones
and mapped to one of the ten Releasing Zones (R0-R9).
H At least one smoke detector or module mapped to one of the ten Releasing Zones (R0-R9) is
alarmed and at least one heat detector mapped to the same Releasing Zone (R0-R9) is alarmed.

NOTE: When in alarm, Special Zones R0-R9 appear in the CBE list as ZR00-ZR09. For
example, R5 appears in the CBE list as ZR05.

How Cross Zones Work

Below is an illustrated example of how Cross Zones work, using five Cross Zone selections (four
detectors and a NAC mapped to Releasing Zone R1):

PROGRM SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 2D101

01 R1 __ __ __A8P8** 2D101
CBE list = 01 R1

PROGRM SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 2D102

01 R1 __ __ __A8P8** 2D102
CBE list = 01 R1

PROGRM SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 2D103

02 R1 __ __ __A8P8** 2D103
CBE list = 02 R1

PROGRM HEAT(ANALOG) DETECTOR ADDR 2D104

02 R1 __ __ __ ** 2D104
CBE list = 02 R1

PROGRM RELEASE CKT FRONT HALLWAY NO. 3

R1 __ __ __ __ I** B03
CBE list = R1

68 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

How to Program a Releasing Zone Releasing Applications

Software
Zone Z01

CBE list = Z02 ZR1

Smoke Heat Smoke Smoke

Software
Detector Detector Detector Detector
Zone Z02
2D102 2D104 2D103 2D101

CBE list = Z01 ZR1 CBE list = Z01 ZR1

Releasing
Zone ZR1

REL
B03 CBE list = ZR1

Figure A.9 Illustrated Example of Cross Zone Programming

A listing of each Cross Zone option and the conditions required to activate the Releasing Zone,
according to the example shown above.

Cross Zone
Condition(s) Required to Activate the Releasing zone
Selection (Cross=)

Cross=N An alarm from any detector or module activates the releasing circuit.

Cross=Y An alarm from any two detectors or modules activates the releasing
circuit.

Cross=Z An alarm from two detectors or modules mapped to different Software

Zones, but mapped to the same Releasing Zone.
• An alarm from 2D101 and 2D103
• An alarm from 2D102 and 2D104
• An alarm from 2D101 and 2D104
• An alarm from 2D102 and 2D103
The two detectors listed in each set above are each mapped to different
zones, but both list ZR1 in their CBE.

Cross=H Activation of heat detector 2D104 and one smoke detector (2D101,
21D102, or 2D103) or a module mapped to the same releasing zone.

Select a time for the Releasing Zone Delay Timer (refer to“Programming a Delay Timer” on page
59.)

To Program Do this

Cross Zones Type N, Y, Z, or H in the CROSS= field, or press the NEXT or PREVIOUS keys,

or , until N, Y, Z or H appears in the that field.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 69

Releasing Applications How to Program a Releasing Zone

Press at this point to save the Cross Zone value if no other fields on the screen are
changing. To change another field on the screen, move the cursor into position by pressing the
arrow keys on the keypad.

A.2.4 Programming a Soak Timer

The Soak Timer specifies the length of time (0001 to 9999 seconds, or 0000 for not used) to dump
releasing agents when a Releasing Zone activates. When the Soak Timer expires, the control panel
automatically shuts off the releasing solenoids for the active Releasing Zone. To program a Soak
Timer for a Releasing Zone, follow these instructions:

To Program Do this

Soak Timer Type a seconds value of 0000 (no soak timer) to 9999 from the
numeric keys on the keypad in the SOK= field.

Press at this point to save the Soak Timer value if no other fields on the screen are
changing. To change another field on the screen, move the cursor into position by pressing the
arrow keys on the keypad.
A Soak Timer value of 600 seconds is shown below:

PRG RELEASE FUNCTION RELEASE CONTROL

DELAY=00 ABORT=ULI CROSS=N SOK=0600 R00

70 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

How to Program a Releasing Zone Releasing Applications

A.2.5 Using Type Codes for Releasing Zones

The control panel provides a set of Type Codes designed for releasing applications for inputs and
outputs. This section details how to program each of these Type Codes.
Type Codes designed for Releasing Zone inputs (monitor modules).

Type Code What the Type Code does Refer to

ABORT SWITCH Provides an abort function through a monitor “ABORT SWITCH Type Code” on page
(tracking) module (connected to a UL-listed abort 72
station) for a Releasing Zone.

MAN. RELEASE Provides a manual release through a monitor “MAN. RELEASE Type Code” on page
(latching) module (connected to a UL-listed pull station) 73
for a Releasing Zone.

MAN REL DELAY Provides a manual release with a 30-second “MANREL DELAY Type Code” on page
(latching) delay (dependent on the FACP Delay setting) 74
through a monitor module (connected to a
UL-listed pull station) for a Releasing Zone.

SECOND SHOT Provides a second manual release through a “SECOND SHOT Type Code” on page
(latching) monitor module (connected to a UL-listed 76
pull station) for a Releasing Zone.

Type Codes designed for Releasing Zone outputs (control modules and panel NACs).

Type Code What the Type Code does Refer to

REL END BELL Activates a NAC audio or visual device “RELEASE END BELL” on page 77
when releasing circuits shut off.

REL CKT ULC Directs outputs to perform a release function “REL CKT ULC Type Code” on page 79
as required by ULC.

RELEASE CKT Directs outputs to perform a releasing “RELEASE CKT Type Code” on page 81
function.

RELEA. FORM C Directs relay outputs to perform a releasing “Relea. Form-C Type Code” on page
function. 83

REL AUDIBLE Activates audio or visual devices steady “REL AUDIBLE Type Code” on page 85
when releasing starts.

INSTANT RELE Activates non-releasing output (panel NAC “INSTANT RELE Type Code” on page
or control modules) with no delay time. 87

REL CODE BELL Activates audio or visual devices to pulse at “REL CODE BELL Type Code” on
20 ppm (initial zone of a Cross Zone) or 120 page 88
ppm (Cross Zone satisfied).Steady on
release.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 71

Releasing Applications How to Program a Releasing Zone

ABORT SWITCH Type Code

The following contains information needed to program an Abort Switch for a monitor module

 Description
A monitor module, connected to a UL-listed abort station (such as the Notifier NBG-12LRA), that
you use as an abort switch for a Releasing Zone. You can program multiple monitor modules with
the ABORT SWITCH Type Code that work like multiple conventional abort switches on a
conventional zone.

 Programming
1. Select a monitor module to use as an Abort Switch (refer to “Modify or Delete a Point
(2=POINT)” on page 17).
2. Select the ABORT SWITCH Type Code.
Type Code selection: ABORT SWITCH

PROGRM ABORT_SWITCH MODULE ADDR 2M101

R1 __ __ __ __ 2M101

Releasing Zone selection (R1 shown)

3. Select the Releasing Zone (R0-R9) for your releasing application.

4. Press the enter key to save, then press the esc key until you return to the Program Change
screen.
5. Select the type of Abort Switch for your releasing application (refer to “Abort Switches” on
page 60).

 Example
A programming example of a monitor module programmed as an Abort Switch for Releasing Zone
R5.
SYSTEM SYSTEM
NORMAL ACTIVATED

Monitor
Detector
Module

Type Code
ABORT SWITCH
NBG-12LRA
station with
Abort Switch
R05
NBG12LRAface.wmf

Control
B01 Module

Figure A.10 Monitor Module Configured as an Abort Switch

72 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

How to Program a Releasing Zone Releasing Applications

MAN. RELEASE Type Code

The following contains information needed to program a Manual Release switch for a monitor
module.

 Description
A monitor module—connected to a UL-listed manual station (such as the Notifier NBG-12LRA)—
used to manually release agents. A Manual Release switch overrides all timers, such as a Delay
Timer or a Soak Timer. You can install multiple monitor modules with a MAN. RELEASE Type Code
that work like multiple conventional manual release switches on a conventional zone.

 Programming
1. Select a monitor module (refer to “Modify or Delete a Point (2=POINT)” on page 17) to use for
the manual release function.
2. Select the MAN. RELEASE Type Code.
Type Code selection: MAN RELEASE

PROGRM MAN_RELEASE MODULE ADDR 2M101

R5 __ __ __ __ 2M101

Releasing Zone selection (R5 shown)

3. Select the Releasing Zone (R0-R9) for your releasing application.

4. Press the ENTER key to save, then press the ESC key until you return to the Program Change
screen.

 Example
A programming example of a monitor module programmed as an manual release switch for
Releasing Zone R5.
SYSTEM SYSTEM
NORMAL ACTIVATED

NBG-12LRA station with Manual Release Lever

Monitor
Detector
Module

Type Code
MAN. RELEASE

R05
NBGLRAface.wmf

Control
B01 Module

Figure A.11 Monitor Module Configured as a Manual Release Switch

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 73

Releasing Applications How to Program a Releasing Zone

MANREL DELAY Type Code

The following contains information needed to program a Manual Release Delay switch for a
monitor module using the MANREL DELAY Type Code.

 Description
A monitor module—connected to a UL-listed manual station (such as the Notifier NBG-12LRA)—
used to initiate a manual release with 30-second delay time.
A Manual Release Delay switch overrides the FACP programmed Delay Timer in certain
circumstances, but not the soak timer.
Override Circumstances:
When the Manual Release Delay Switch activates, the control panel replaces the Delay Time
with 30 seconds if the Delay Timer
• is set to more than 30 seconds
• is running, and
• has not counted down below 30 seconds.

NOTE: When the Delay Timer is set to less than 30 seconds, activation of the Manual Release
Delay Switch will invoke the FACP programmed Delay Time if the Delay Timer is not running, or
the FACP programmed Delay Timer countdown time if it is running. Refer to the examples 1
through 5 later in this section.

Multiple monitor modules can be programmed with a MANREL DELAY Type Code. They work like
multiple conventional manual release switches on a conventional zone.

 How to program
1. Select a monitor module (refer to “Modify or Delete a Point (2=POINT)” on page 17) to use
for the manual release function.
2. Select the MANREL DELAY Type Code.

Type Code selection: MANREL_DELAY

PROGRM MANREL_DELAY MODULE ADDR 2M101
R5 __ __ __ __ 2M101

Releasing Zone selection (R5 shown)

3. Select the Releasing Zone (R0-R9) for your releasing application.

4. Press the ENTER key to save, then press the ESC key until you return to the Program
Change screen.

74 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

How to Program a Releasing Zone Releasing Applications

 Examples

A programming example of a monitor module programmed for MANREL DELAY switch for
Releasing Zone R5.

SYSTEM SYSTEM
NORMAL ACTIVATED

Monitor Detector
Module

NBG-12LRA Type Code

station with MANREL DELAY

Manual Release R05

Lever

NBGLRAface.wmr
B01 Control
Module

Figure A.12 Monitor Module Configured as a Manual Release Delay Switch

For examples 1, 2, and 3, program Releasing Zone R5 with a Manual Release Delay switch and the
following releasing selections:
PRG RELEASE FUNCTION RELEASE CONTROL
DELAY=60 ABORT=ULI CROSS=N SOK=0030 R05

Example 1 - The FACP programmed Delay Timer begins its 60 second countdown. The Manual
Release Delay switch is pulled when the FACP Delay Timer has counted down to 48 seconds
(elapsed time of 12 seconds). The 48 seconds remaining in the countdown are overridden by the 30-
second delay initiated by the Manual Release Delay switch. In this example, the total time elapsing
from FACP countdown initiation to agent release is 42 seconds (12 + 30), less than the original 60
second FACP Delay Timer countdown.
Example 2 - The FACP programmed Delay Time begins its 60 second countdown. The Manual
Release Delay switch is pulled when the FACP Delay Timer has counted down to 8 seconds. The 8
seconds remaining in the countdown is not changed when the switch is pulled. In this example, the
total time elapsing from FACP countdown initiation to agent release is 60 seconds.
Example 3 - The FACP programmed Delay Time is not running (as would happen if the releasing
station were pulled before an alarm registered). The Manual Release Delay Switch is activated by
the pull station. Agent release will occur in 30 seconds.
For examples 4 and 5, the delay is changed to DELAY=10.
Example 4 - The FACP programmed Delay Timer begins its 10 second countdown. The Manual
Release Delay switch is pulled when the FACP Delay timer has counted down to 8 seconds. The 8
seconds remaining in the countdown is not changed. In this example, the total time elapsing from
FACP countdown initiation to agent release is 10 seconds.
Example 5 - The FACP programmed Delay Timer is not running (as would happen if the releasing
station were pulled before an alarm registered). The Manual Release Delay switch is activated by
the pull station. Agent release will occur in 10 seconds.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 75

Releasing Applications How to Program a Releasing Zone

SECOND SHOT Type Code

NOTE: The Second Shot switch can only be used with the MANREL DELAy Type Code.

The following contains information needed to program a Second Shot switch for a monitor module

 Description
A monitor module—connected to a UL-listed manual station (such as the NBG-12LRA)—used as
for a second release of agents. A Second Shot switch overrides a Delay Timer, programmed to the
same Releasing Zone.

 Programming
1. Select a monitor module (refer to “Modify or Delete a Point (2=POINT)” on page 17) to use for
the manual release function.
2. Select the SECOND SHOT Type Code.
Type Code selection: SECOND_SHOT
PROGRM SECOND_SHOT MODULE ADDR 2M101
R5 __ __ __ __ 2M101

Releasing Zone selection (R5 shown)

3. Select the Releasing Zone (R0-R9) for your releasing application.

4. Press the ENTER key to save, then press the ESC key until you return to the Program Change
screen.

 Examples
A programming example of a monitor module programmed as a Manual Release Delay switch
(Type Code MANREL DELAY) for the first shot and a Second Shot switch (Type Code SECOND SHOT)
for the second shot.
SYSTEM SYSTEM NBG-12LRA station with
Second
NORMAL ACTIVATED

Manual Release lever

Shot
Switch
Monitor Monitor
Module Detector Module
2M101 2M102

Type Code R05 Type Code

MANREL DELAY SECOND SHOT

B01 Control
Module

Figure A.13 Monitor Module Configured as a Second Shot Switch

With two monitor modules configured as shown above, program Releasing Zone R5 with the
following releasing selections.
PRG RELEASE FUNCTION RELEASE CONTROL
DELAY=15 ABORT=ULI CROSS=Y SOK=0030 RO5

R05 can be activated in one of two ways, as described in the examples given below.

76 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

How to Program a Releasing Zone Releasing Applications

Example 1: If the detector initiates the alarm, R05 activates. Releasing begins after the delay timer
has expired (15 seconds). Releasing will continue for the soak timer duration (30 seconds). Once
the Soak Timer expires, the Second Shot Switch can then be activated to initiate an additional soak
cycle.
Example 2: If the NBG-12LRA (Type Code MANREL DELAY) lever is pulled, the delay timer
begins its 15 second countdown. Releasing will begin after the delay timer has expired, and will
continue for the soak timer duration (30 seconds). Once the Soak Timer expires, the Second Shot
Switch can then be activated to initiate an additional soak cycle.
RELEASE END BELL

NOTE: A releasing circuit with this Type Code requires the following selections: A Releasing
Zone selection (R0-R9); An output circuit mapped to the same Releasing Zone; Switch Inhibit
selected; Non-Silenceable; No Walk Test.

The following contains information needed to program a Release End Bell circuit for a control
module or a NAC.

 Description
A control module or NAC to activate an audible or visual device when releasing devices shut off.
You can also program multiple outputs with the REL END BELL Type Code to the same Releasing
Zone. When all the Releasing Zone functions are complete, all outputs with the REL END BELL Type
Code activate at the same time. A REL END BELL circuit remains on until you reset the system

 Programming
1. Select a control module or NAC (refer to “Modify or Delete a Point (2=POINT)” on page 17) to
use as a Release End Bell circuit.
2. Select the REL END BELL Type Code, as shown in the following example (control module
shown).
Type Code selection: REL END BELL

PROGRM REL END BELL MODULE ADDR 2M108

R5 __ __ __ __ I** 2M108
Releasing Zone Walk Test
selection (R5 shown) Selection: * = off

Switch Inhibit: I = selected Silenceable: * = off

3. Select the Releasing Zone (R0-R9) for your releasing application.

4. Press the enter key to save, then press the esc key two times to return to the Program Change
screen.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 77

Releasing Applications How to Program a Releasing Zone

 Example

A programming example of a control module programmed as a Release End Bell for Releasing
Zone R5.

Monitor
Module Detector Detector Detector

R05

Control Control
B01 B02
Module Module

Type Code Type Code Type Code Type Code

REL END BELL REL CIRCUIT REL CIRCUIT REL AUDIBLE

For example, a control module programmed with the REL END

BELL Type Code activates when all releasing functions, such
as the releasing functions programmed for R05 shut off.

Figure A.14 Control Module Configured as a Release End Bell Circuit

78 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

How to Program a Releasing Zone Releasing Applications

REL CKT ULC Type Code

NOTE: A ULC Release Circuit with this Type Code requires the following selections: A
Releasing Zone selection (R0-R9); An output circuit mapped to the same Releasing Zone; Switch
Inhibit selected; Non-Silenceable; No Walk Test.

The following contains information needed to program a ULC Release Circuit for a control module
or a NAC.

 Description
A control module or a NAC used to activate a releasing solenoid or other releasing device. You can
also program multiple outputs with the REL CKT ULC Type Code to the same Releasing Zone. When
the Releasing Zone activates, all outputs with the REL CKT ULC Type Code also activate at the same
time. A ULC Release Circuit activates when:
• An initiating device programmed to the same Releasing Zone activates (two devices if using
the Cross Zone option)
• The Delay Timer for R0-R9 (if used) expires
• No Abort Switch for R0-R9 (if used) is active
A ULC Release Circuit—and all wiring to the release device—is fully supervised and usable with
power-limited energy cable.

 Programming
1. Select a control module or a NAC (refer to “Modify or Delete a Point (2=POINT)” on page 17)
to use as a ULC Release Circuit.
2. Select the REL CKT ULC Type Code, as shown in the following example (control module
shown).
Type Code selection: REL CKT ULC

PROGRM REL CKT ULC MODULE ADDR 2M108

R5 __ __ __ __ I** 2M108

Releasing Zone Walk Test

selection (R5 shown) Selection: * = off
Silenceable: * = off
Switch Inhibit: I = selected

3. Select the Releasing Zone (R0-R9) for your releasing application.

4. Press the ENTER key to save, then press the ESC key two times to return to the Program Change
screen.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 79

Releasing Applications How to Program a Releasing Zone

 Example

A programming example of a control module programmed as a ULC Release Circuit for Releasing
Zone R5.

Monitor
Module Detector Detec Detector

R05

Type Code Type Code

REL CKT ULC REL CKT ULC

Control Control
B01 B02
Module Module

For example, all control modules programmed with the REL

CKT ULC Type Code activate simultaneously with other
outputs programmed for R5 (B01, B02).

Figure A.15 Control Module Configured as a ULC Release Circuit

80 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

How to Program a Releasing Zone Releasing Applications

RELEASE CKT Type Code

NOTE: A Release Circuit with this Type Code requires the following selections: A Releasing
Zone selection (R0-R9); An output circuit mapped to the same Releasing Zone; Switch Inhibit
selected; Non-Silenceable; No Walk Test.

NOTE: Do not use a Release Circuit for the following: An application requiring ULC Listing; An
application requiring power-limited energy cable.

The following contains information needed to program a Release Circuit for an output circuit
(control module or NAC).

 Description
A control module or a NAC used to activate a releasing solenoid or other releasing device. You can
also program multiple outputs with the RELEASE CKT Type Code to the same Releasing Zone. When
the Releasing Zone activates, all outputs associated with the releasing zone and with the RELEASE
CKT Type Code also activate at the same time. A Release Circuit activates when:

• An initiating device programmed to the same Releasing Zone activates (two devices if using
the Cross Zone option)
• The Delay Timer for R0-R9 (if used) expires
• The Abort Switch for R0-R9 (if used) is not active

 Programming
1. Select a control module or a NAC (refer to “Modify or Delete a Point (2=POINT)” on page 17)
to use as a Release Circuit.
2. Select the RELEASE CKT Type Code, as shown in the following example (control module
shown).
Type Code selection: RELEASE CKT
PROGRM RELEASE CKT MODULE ADDR 2M108
R5 __ __ __ __ I** 2M108

Releasing Zone Walk Test

selection (R5 shown) Selection: * = off
Switch Inhibit: I = selected Silenceable: * = off

3. Select the Releasing Zone (R0-R9) for your releasing application.

4. Press the ENTER key to save, then press the ESC key two times to return to the Program Change
screen.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 81

Releasing Applications How to Program a Releasing Zone

 Example

A programming example of a control module programmed as a Release Circuit for Releasing Zone
R5.

Monitor
Module Detector Detector Detector

R05

Type Code Type Code

RELEASE CKT RELEASE CKT

Control Control
B01 B02
Module Module

For example, all control modules programmed with the RELEASE

CKT Type Code activate simultaneously with other outputs
programmed for R5 (B01, B02).

Figure A.16 Control Module Configured as a Release Circuit

82 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

How to Program a Releasing Zone Releasing Applications

Relea. Form-C Type Code

NOTE: An output with a relea.form c Type Code requires the following selections: A Releasing
Zone selection (R0-R9); An output circuit mapped to the same Releasing Zone; Switch Inhibit
selected; Non-Silenceable; No Walk Test.

The following contains information needed to program a Release Form-C circuit for an output
circuit.

 Description
An output circuit, configured as a relay, programmed to activate an output by opening or closing a
switch. Typical applications include closing doors and air handlers.

 Programming
1. Select a control module (refer to “Modify or Delete a Point (2=POINT)” on page 17) to use as a
Releasing Form-C Circuit.
2. Select the RELEA.FORM C Type Code, as shown in the following example (control module
shown).
Type Code selection: RELEA.FORM C

PROGRM RELEA.FORM C MODULE ADDR 2M108

R5 __ __ __ __ I** 2M108
Releasing Zone Walk Test
selection (R5 shown) Selection: * = off
Silenceable: * = off
Switch Inhibit: I = selected

3. Select the Releasing Zone (R0-R9) for your releasing application.

4. Press the ENTER key to save, then press the ESC key two times to return to the Program Change
screen.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 83

Releasing Applications How to Program a Releasing Zone

 Example

A programming example of a control module programmed as a Release Form-C circuit for

Releasing Zone R5.

Monitor
Module Detector Detector Detector

R05

Control Control
B01 B02
Module Module

Type Code Type Code Type Code Type Code

REL FORM C REL CIRCUIT REL CIRCUIT REL AUDIBLE

For example, a control module, configured as a Form-C relay,

activates simultaneously with other outputs programmed for R5 (B01,
B02) and the control module with the REL AUDIBLE Type Code.

Figure A.17 Control Module Configured as a Release Form-C Circuit

84 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

How to Program a Releasing Zone Releasing Applications

REL AUDIBLE Type Code

NOTE: An output with a REL AUDIBLE Type Code requires the following selections: A Releasing
Zone selection (R0-R9); An output circuit mapped to the same Releasing Zone; Switch Inhibit
selected.

The following contains information needed to program a Release Audible circuit for an output
circuit (control module or NAC).

 Description
An output circuit programmed to activate an audio or visual device when all releasing outputs,
programmed to the same Releasing Zone, turn on. You can also program multiple outputs with the
REL AUDIBLE Type Code to the same Releasing Zone. When the Releasing Zone activates, all
outputs with the REL AUDIBLE Type Code activate at the same time.

 Programming
1. Select a control module or NAC (refer to “Modify or Delete a Point (2=POINT)” on page 17) to
use as a Releasing Circuit.
2. Select the REL AUDIBLE Type Code, as shown in the following example (control module
shown).
Type Code selection: REL AUDIBLE
PROGRM REL AUDIBLE MODULE ADDR 2M108
R5 __ __ __ __ I** 2M108

Releasing Zone Walk Test

selection (R5 shown) Selection: * = off
Silenceable: * = off
Switch Inhibit: I = selected
3. Select the Releasing Zone (R0-R9) for your releasing application.
4. Press the ENTER key to save, then press the ESC key two times to return to the Program Change
screen.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 85

Releasing Applications How to Program a Releasing Zone

 Example

A programming example of a control module programmed as a Release Audible circuit for

Releasing Zone R5.

Monitor
Module Detector Detector Detector

R05

Control Control
B01 B02
Module Module

Type Code Type Code Type Code Type Code

REL AUDIBLE REL CIRCUIT REL CIRCUIT REL AUDIBLE

For example, a control module programmed with the REL

AUDIBLE Type Code activates simultaneously with other
outputs programmed for R05 (B01 and B02).

Figure A.18 Control Module Configured as a Release Audible Circuit

86 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

How to Program a Releasing Zone Releasing Applications

INSTANT RELE Type Code

NOTE: An output with an INSTANT RELE Type Code requires the following selections: a zone
selection (a releasing zone may be used, but is not required); an output circuit mapped to the
same zone; Switch Inhibit selected; Non-Silenceable; No Walk Test.

The following contains information needed to program an Instant Release circuit for an output
circuit (control module or NAC).

 Description
An output circuit programmed to activate non-releasing devices, such as door openers or warning
sounders, without counting down delay timers. A device programmed with the INSTANT RELE Type
Code device is supervised for open circuits and ground faults.

 Programming
1. Select a control module or a NAC (refer to“Modify or Delete a Point (2=POINT)” on page 17)
to use as a Releasing Circuit.
2. Select the INSTANT RELE Type Code, as shown in the following example (control module
shown).
Type Code selection: INSTANT REL
PROGRM INSTANT RELE MODULE ADDR 2M101
R5 __ __ __ __ I** 2M101

Releasing Zone Walk Test

selection (R5 shown) Selection: * = off

Switch Inhibit: I = selected Silenceable: * = off

3. Select the Releasing Zone (R0-R9) for your releasing application.

4. Press the ENTER key to save, then press the ESC key two times to return to the Program Change screen.

 Example
A programming example of a control module programmed as an Instant Release circuit for
Releasing Zone R5.

Monitor
Module Detector Detector Detector

R05

Type Code Type Code

INSTANT RELE INSTANT RELE

Control Control
B01 B02
Module Module

For example, a control module programmed with the

INSTANT RELE Type Code activates simultaneously with
other outputs programmed for R05 (B01 and B02).

Figure A.19 Control Module Configured as an Instant Release Circuit

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 87

Releasing Applications How to Program a Releasing Zone

REL CODE BELL Type Code

NOTE: An output with a REL CODE BELL Type Code requires the following selections: A
Releasing Zone selection (R0-R9); An input circuit mapped to the same Releasing Zone.

NOTE: For instructions on programming Switch Inhibit, Silenceable, and Walk Test, refer to
“Modify NAC Points” on page 22.

The following contains information needed to program a Release Code Bell circuit for a NAC.

 Description
A NAC programmed to pulse an audio or visual device as follows:
• 20 ppm when a the initial zone of a cross-zone activates.
• 120 ppm when a Cross Zone is satisfied.
• Steady when a release occurs.

 Programming
1. Select a NAC (refer to “Modify NAC Points” on page 22) to use as a Release Code Bell
Circuit.
2. Select the REL CODE BELL Type Code, as shown in the following example (NAC shown).
Type Code selection: REL CODE BELL
PROGRM REL CODE BELL FRONT HALLWAY NO. 3
R5 __ __ __ __ I** B03

Releasing Zone Walk Test

selection (R5 shown) Selection: * = off
Silenceable: * = off
Switch Inhibit: I = selected

3. Select the Releasing Zone (R0-R9) for your releasing application.

4. Press the ENTER key to save, then press the ESC key two times to return to the Program Change
screen.

 Example
A programming example of a NAC programmed as a Release Code Bell circuit for Releasing Zone R5.

Monitor
Module Detector Detector Detector

R05

Type Code
REL CODE BELL

B03 B01 B02 Control

Module

A NAC programmed with the REL CODE BELL Type Code activates
simultaneously with other outputs programmed for R05 (B01 and B02).

Figure A.20 NAC Configured as a Release Code Bell Circuit

88 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Initiating Devices Releasing Applications

A.3 Initiating Devices

Releasing zone initiating devices include the following:
• FST-851 intelligent heat detectors
• FSI-851, FSP-851, FAPT-851, FSL-751 intelligent smoke detectors
• Conventional detection UL-listed devices connected to monitor modules
Refer to the SLC manual for the most up-to-date information about initiating devices.
You can use multiple initiating devices for the same releasing hazard. Do so by mapping initiating
devices to the same Releasing Zone. Factory Mutual and certain Local Authorities Having
Jurisdiction require using redundant wiring (NFPA 72 Style 6 or Style D) for initiating devices in
releasing applications.

A.4 Warning Sounders

Warning sounders connect to any of the four panel NACs, or to control module circuits (refer to the
NF2S-640 Installation Manual). Note the following:
• If selecting Cross Zones, a warning sounder only activates when two zones alarm.
• Warning sounders—unlike release solenoids—do not wait for a Delay Timer.
• If Coding Functions are required for warning sounders, use one of the NACs—not a control
module.
• The same releasing hazard can activate multiple NACs.
Instructions for activating warning sounders:

To activate a sounder Do this

When the Delay Timer starts, when the Map the control module or NAC to a releasing hazard zone
releasing device activates, or both (R0-R9).

Immediately when one of the initiating Map the control module or NAC to a separate zone (not R0-R9)
devices activate that is also mapped to all initiating devices of the hazard.

A.5 Auxiliary Control Functions

Instructions for using control functions:
Function Do this

A releasing application Use control modules set for dry contact operation. Program the
requires control relays control relays for different functions by following the instructions
in “To activate a sounder” above.

Providing control functions Use an ACM-8R remote relay module mapped to the software
zones of the control panel.

A.6 ACS Annunciation

Instructions for annunciating ACS points and detectors:
To Annunciate Do this

Points of releasing functions Select ACS Selection Group B to annunciate any of the software
zones described previously, including zones R0-R9. For
instructions, refer to “Annunciator Options” on page 31.

Individual detectors Select ACS Selection Group H, I, J, K or L. For instructions, refer

to “Annunciator Options” on page 31.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 89

 Appendix B: Special Zone Outputs

B.1 Presignal and Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS)

B.1.1 What is Presignal and PAS?
Purpose
Presignal is a feature that initially causes alarm signals to only sound in specific areas, monitored
by qualified persons. This allows delay of the alarm up to 180 seconds after the start of alarm
processing. The control panel Presignal feature provides two selections:
• A Presignal Delay Timer (60-180 seconds) that delays activation of all outputs with a CBE
that includes Special Zone F0.
• A PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) selection, in addition to the Presignal Delay Timer, that
allows a 15-second time period for acknowledging an alarm signal from a fire
detection/initiating device. If the alarm is not acknowledged within 15 seconds, all local and
remote outputs activate immediately and automatically.
An illustration of Presignal and PAS timing.
Presignal Delay Timer (60-180 s)

PAS (15 s)

If PAS=Y, alarm activates

outputs if not acknowledged
Initial alarm Alarm activates outputs, if the
annunciation control panel is not reset

Figure B.1 Presignal and PAS Time

The control panel delays activation of outputs containing F0 in their Control-By-Event (CBE) list
for all alarm initiating devices that contain F0 in their CBE list. A subsequent alarm will abort the
Presignal Delay Timer and execute CBE lists.
Notes on using F0
• NFPA 72 requires installation of a PAS Inhibit switch, that can be used to turn off the PAS
delay timer when the control panel is unattended. Do so by programming a monitor module
with the Type Code, PAS INHIBIT. For details, refer to “Modify or Delete a Point (2=POINT)”
on page 17.
• The Presignal Delay timer countdown can be stopped by pressing the SYSTEM RESET key
before the Presignal Delay Timer expires.
• Program zone F0 to participating inputs and outputs that have appropriate CBE zone map
entries.
• Outputs must be programmed for resound by fire.
Restrictions on using F0
• Do not include F0 in the CBE list for a releasing device.
• Do not include F0 in the CBE list for any monitor module that connects to a device other
than an automatic fire detector.

90 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Time Control Zones Special Zone Outputs

B.1.2 Selecting Presignal and PAS Outputs

Presignal
You can set Presignal Delay Timer between 60 and 180 seconds. A Presignal Delay Timer does not
apply to the following:
• The System Alarm relay
• TM-4 polarity reversal alarm output
• TM-4 municipal box output
• UDACT/UDACT-2
Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS)
Outputs selected for PAS delay for 15 seconds. Pressing the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key
within the 15-second delay will set the Presignal Delay Timer to the full programmed value
(60-180 seconds, including the PAS delay of 15 seconds). When an alarm comes from an initiating
device with a CBE list that includes F0, the control panel delays the following outputs:
• System Alarm relay
• TM-4 Polarity Reversal Alarm output
• TM-4 Municipal Box output
• UDACT/UDACT-2

B.2 Time Control Zones

NOTE: All active Time Control outputs will turn off temporarily while resetting or programming
the control panel

All outputs with a CBE list containing F5 or F6 activate within the times specified for the days of
the week listed in F5 or F6. All smoke detectors with a CBE list containing F5 or F6 switch to their
occupied level (lowest sensitivity, AL:9) within the times specified for the days of the week listed
in ZF5 or ZF6. Refer to “Intelligent Sensing Applications” on page 94 for details on setting
detector sensitivity.
Time Control is active for all days of the week listed in F5 or F6. Holidays listed in F7 are excluded
unless you list Holidays (H) in the day-of-week selection of F5 and F6. Enter the time in a 24-hour
format with the OFF time later than the ON time. After changing programming using Time Control,
always reset the control panel.

B.3 Coding Functions for NACS

Coding Functions are pulsed signals that can be selected, using Special Zone F8, to energize NACs
when a fire alarm activates. NACs must be programmed with a CBE list that includes F8.

NOTE: Do not include F8 in the CBE list of NACs used for releasing or zone coding applications.

Select Coding Functions on a global basis, through Special Zone F8. That is, all NACs selected for
Coding Functions will sound the same code when activated. Table B.1 contains descriptions of
each Coding Function selection.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 91

Special Zone Outputs Coding Functions for NACS

Table B.1 Coding Function Selections

Coding Function Selection Signal

March Time (default) 120 PPM (pulses per minute)

Temporal 0.5s on, 0.5s off, 0.5s on, 0.5s off, 0.5s on, 1.5s off, repeats

California 10 sec. on, 5 sec. off, repeats

Two-stage Alert signal - 20 PPM; General Alarm Signal - Temporal

Two-Stage Canada 3 Alert Signal - 20 PPM;

Drill Switch activated, 3 minute timer has expired, or device’s CBE Zone activation (Z00 plus Zones
1-99 or Logic Zones 1-20) - Temporal (3 min. timeout)
Note: In Canadian applications ACM-24AT control point is required for Automatic Alarm Signal
Cancel. Acknowledge will not cancel the Two-Stage Timer.

Two-Stage Canada 5 Alert Signal - 20 PPM;

Drill Switch activated, 5 minute timer has expired, or device’s CBE Zone activation (Z00 plus Zones
1-99 or Logic Zones 1-20) - Temporal (5 min. timeout)
Note: In Canadian applications ACM-24AT control point is required for Automatic Alarm Signal
Cancel. Acknowledge will not cancel the Two-Stage Timer.

Two-Stage Canada Manual Alert Signal - 20 PPM;

Drill Switch activated or device’s CBE Zone activation (Z00 plus Zones 1-99 or Logic Zones 1-20) -
Temporal

System Sensor Strobe Synchronizes System Sensor Horn/Strobes (Applies to NAC on CPU2-640 only)
Note: If the “Strobe” Type ID is used with System Sensor Strobe synchronization,“*” will silence the
horn portion only, and resound will occur only by fire alarm. F, U, B, T, O, or C will silence the entire
circuit. Refer to “Modify an Addressable Control Module Point” on page 21 and “Modify NAC Points”
on page 22

Gentex Strobe Synchronizes Gentex Horn/Strobes (Applies to NAC on CPU2-640 only)

Note: If the “Strobe” Type ID is used with Gentex Strobe synchronization,“*” will silence the horn
portion only, and resound will occur only by fire alarm. F, U, B, T,, O or C will silence the entire
circuit. Refer to “Modify an Addressable Control Module Point” on page 21 and “Modify NAC Points”
on page 22

Wheelock Strobe Synchronizes Wheelock Horn/Strobes (Applies to NAC on CPU2-640 only)

Note: If the “Strobe” Type ID is used with Wheelock Strobe synchronization,“*” will silence the horn
portion only, and resound will occur only by fire alarm. F, U, B, T, O, or C will silence the entire
circuit. Refer to “Modify an Addressable Control Module Point” on page 21 and “Modify NAC Points”
on page 22

Before selecting an output for Two-stage coding, note the following:

The control panel automatically sends an Alert Signal to any of the four NACs mapped to Z00 and
F8, but not mapped to the alarm signal. After five minutes without an acknowledge or silence, the
Alert Signal changes to Temporal pattern.
Two-stage Canada 3 and 5: Function the same as Two-stage except the second stage is achieved
when
• The three or five minute timer expires without an acknowledge or silence.
OR
• The Drill Switch (or an input programmed with the type code DRILL SWITCH or
EVACUATE SW) is activated.

OR
• A CBE event has occurred on the device containing both General Alarm Z00 and a general
zone (Zones 1-Z99) or logic zone (Logic Zones 1-20).
If Acknowledge or Silence is pressed within the three or five minute timeout period, the NAC will
remain at first stage. Subsequent alarm(s) will restart the timer.

92 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Coding Functions for NACS Special Zone Outputs

Two-stage Canada Manual: Functions the same as Two-stage except the first stage will continue to
sound until a CBE event for that device or a Drill is activated. Subsequent alarms will not activate
the second stage. If a panel Reset or Silence occurs before a Drill or CBE event occurs, the second
stage will not sound.
For Canadian applications using Two-stage with the ACPS-610, see the ACPS-610 manual for
additional programming instructions.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 93

 Appendix C: Intelligent Sensing Applications

C.1 Overview
“Intelligent Sensing” is a set of software algorithms that provide the NF2S-640 with industry-
leading smoke detection capability. You can program Intelligent Sensing functions on a global or
on a per-detector basis.
Intelligent Sensing topics covered in this appendix:

Topic Page
Intelligent Sensing Applications features – Descriptions of features, page 94
such as Drift Compensation, Sensitivity Adjust, programmable on a per-
detector basis.
Pre-Alarm – Alert and Action settings, programming (global settings). page 99
Detector Sensitivity Settings – Pre-Alarm and Alarm sensitivity settings page 100
for photo, ion, laser, and multisensor detectors programmable on a per-
detector basis.
Detector Maintenance Features – Instructions for viewing and printing page 102
detector maintenance information.

C.2 Features
Intelligent Sensing Applications features include the following:
• Drift Compensation and Smoothing
• Maintenance Warnings - Three Levels
• Self-optimizing Pre-Alarm
• Detector Sensitivity
• Cooperative Multi-Detector Sensing

C.2.1 Drift Compensation and Smoothing

Drift compensation uses algorithms (U.S. patent 5,764,142) that identify and compensate for long-
term changes in the analog readings from each smoke detector. (Typically, dirt and dust
accumulation inside the smoke chamber causes long-term changes in detector readings.) Drift
compensation does the following:
• Allows a detector to retain its original ability to detect actual smoke, and resist false alarms,
even as dirt and dust accumulates.
• Reduces maintenance requirements by allowing the control panel to automatically perform
the periodic sensitivity measurements required by NFPA Standard.
The software also provides smoothing filters to remove transient noise signals, usually caused by
electrical interference. Different smoothing algorithms are used, depending on the sensitivity
selection of each detector. Refer to “Detector Sensitivity Settings” on page 100 for more
information on detector sensitivity levels.

94 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Features Intelligent Sensing Applications

A graphic representation of a detector analog reading using drift compensation and smoothing:

Alarm Level

without compensation

Analog with compensation and

Awacs1a.wmf
Reading smoothing

Time

Figure C.1 Graphic Representation of Drift Compensation

C.2.2 Maintenance Warnings – Three Levels

The software determines when the drift compensation for a detector reaches an unacceptable level
that can compromise detector performance. When a detector reaches an unacceptable level, the
control panel indicates a maintenance warning. The table below summarizes the three levels of
maintenance warnings:

Table C.1 Definitions of Maintenance Levels

Maintenance Level Indicates

Low Chamber value A hardware problem in the detector.

Maintenance Alert Dust accumulation that is near but below the allowed limit. The
Maintenance Alert level indicates the need for maintenance before
the performance of the detector is compromised.

Maintenance Urgent Dust accumulation above the allowed limit.

A graphic representation of the maintenance levels:

DIRTY
Maintenance
Urgent

Maintenance
Alert

Acceptable
Range

Low Chamber
Reading

Low
Value

Figure C.2 Diagram of Maintenance Levels

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 95

Intelligent Sensing Applications Features

C.2.3 Self-Optimizing Pre-Alarm

You can set each detector, except Heat, for Self-Optimizing Pre-Alarm (PA=1). In this Self-
Optimizing mode, the software measures the normal peak analog readings and sets the Pre-Alarm
level just above these normal peaks. This allows extremely sensitive Pre-Alarm capability with
reasonable protection against non-fire signals. The figure below shows a graphical representation
of the Self-Optimizing Pre-Alarm level:

Prealarm Threshold

Analog
Reading

Awacs4a.wmf
Time (days)

Figure C.3 Self-optimizing Pre-Alarm Level

For more information on setting Pre-Alarm levels, refer to “Changing Detector Sensitivity” on
page 52

C.2.4 Detector Sensitivity

The control panel provides nine Sensitivity Levels for alarm detection and pre-alarm as follows:

NOTE: For a list of all detector sensitivity levels, see Table C.2 on page 100.

• Alarm Sensitivity Levels - Select the sensitivity of a detector from 1-9 (1=highest
sensitivity; 9=lowest sensitivity).
• Pre-Alarm Sensitivity Levels - Select one of nine levels from 1 to 9 (0=no Pre-Alarm,
1=self-optimizing, 2=highest sensitivity, 9=lowest sensitivity). You can set Pre-Alarm
operation to Action (latching) or Alert (non-latching) and to activate Special Zones. For
instructions on programming, refer to “How to Select a Pre-Alarm Level” on page 99.
Set the sensitivity levels as fixed or programmed for day and night operation. For details, refer to
“Time Control Zones” on page 91.

96 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Features Intelligent Sensing Applications

A sample sensitivity window for a laser detector:

2.1%

OBSCURATION (% PER FOOT)

2.0% 2.0% Alarm Selection 9
1.5% 1.5% Alarm Selection 8 1.5% Pre-Alarm 9
1.0% 1.0% Alarm Selection 7 1.00% Pre-Alarm 8
0.7% 0.7% Pre-Alarm 7
0.5% 0.5% Alarm Selection 6 0.5% Pre-Alarm 6
0.2% 0.2% Alarm Selection 5 0.2% Pre-Alarm 5
0.1% 0.1% Alarm Selection 4 0.1% Pre-Alarm 4
0.05% 0.05% Alarm Selection 3 0.05% Pre-Alarm 3
0.03% Alarm Selection 2
SAMPLE 0.02% Alarm Selection 1 0.02% Pre-Alarm 2
SENSITIVITY
Self Adjust 1
WINDOW, laser detector

Figure C.4 Sensitivity Levels for a FlashScan View® Laser Detector

C.2.5 Cooperative Multi-Detector Sensing

Cooperative Multi-Detector Sensing is the ability of a smoke detector to consider readings from
nearby detectors in making alarm or pre-alarm decisions. Each detector can include up to two other
detectors in its decision. Without statistical sacrifice in the ability to resist false alarms, Cooperative
Multi-Detector Sensing allows a detector to increase its sensitivity to actual smoke by a factor of
almost 2 to 1. Cooperative Multi-Detector Sensing also allows the combination of ionization with
photoelectric technology in reaching an alarm decision. The figure below shows a graph
representing Cooperative Multi-Detector Sensing:

Combined
SMOKE OBSCURATION

Alarm

3 Sensors

Awacs5a.wmf

Time (minutes)

Figure C.5 Cooperative Multi-Detector Sensing

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 97

Intelligent Sensing Applications Pre-Alarm

C.3 Pre-Alarm
C.3.1 Definition
The Pre-Alarm function is a programmable option which determines the system’s response to real-
time detector sensing values above the programmed setting. Use the Pre-Alarm function if you
want to get an early warning of incipient or potential fire conditions. There are two levels of
Pre-Alarm:
• Alert (Refer to “Alert Level” below)
• Action (Refer to “Action Level” on page 99)
Alert and Action Pre-Alarm settings are global. For instance, if you program Pre-Alarm for Alert,
all intelligent detectors programmed for Pre-Alarm are set to Alert (refer to “How to Select a Pre-
Alarm Level” on page 99). You can, however, set unique Pre-Alarm sensitivity levels (PA) for
individual detectors (refer to “Detector Sensitivity Settings” on page 100).

C.3.2 Alert Level

Alert Functions
The control panel software, in addition to checking for alarm levels, checks for Pre-Alarm
thresholds for each addressable, intelligent smoke detector programmed for Pre-Alarm. If a
detector’s real-time sensing level exceeds the programmed Alert threshold, the control panel
indicates an Pre-Alarm condition for the detector. The control panel does the following functions
when a detector reaches pre-alarm level:
• The Pre-Alarm message is sent to the History buffer and to any installed FDU-80s and
printers. The message is sent (and time stamped) at the time that it first occurred. This
historical data could provide valuable information about the progress of a fire.
• The PRE-ALARM LED flashes and the panel sounder pulses until acknowledged.
• Zone F9 activates—but Zone 00 (general alarm) or any other zone, System Trouble relay
and System Alarm relay do not activate.
• The Pre-Alarm indication for this detector will restore automatically to normal if its
sensitivity, programmable to one of nine settings, drops below pre-alarm level. Zone F09
clears automatically when no Pre-Alarm conditions exist.
• A subsequent alarm for this detector also clears the Pre-Alarm indication.
Example of an Alert Level
When an ion detector is programmed for AL:7 and PA:5 (covered in “Changing Detector
Sensitivity” on page 52), an Alert Pre-Alarm occurs at measured smoke detector levels that exceed
1.00% per foot obscuration. When this happens the panel sounder and the PRE-ALARM LED pulse,
and a display appears on the LCD, similar to the sample screen shown below:
Pre-Alarm status banner

PREALM SMOKE (ION) DETECTOR ADDR 1D102

084%/7 02:55P 041515 1D102

84%/7 indicates that 84% of

Pre-Alarm level 7 is reached.

Figure C.6 Sample Display of a Pre-Alarm Alert Condition

98 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Pre-Alarm Intelligent Sensing Applications

C.3.3 Action Level

Action Functions
If you program a detector for Action Pre-Alarm and the detector reaches a level that exceeds the
programmed Pre-Alarm level, the control panel indicates an Action condition. Indication at the
panel is the same as in Figure C.6 above. The control panel does the following functions when a
detector reaches the programmed pre-alarm level:
• The Action message is sent to the History buffer and to any installed FDU-80s and printers.
The message is sent (and time stamped) only at the time that it first occurred. This historical
data could provide valuable information about the progress of a fire.
• The PRE-ALARM LED and panel sounder pulse until acknowledged.
• Zone F09 is activated—but Zone Z00 (general alarm or any other zone) and the System
Trouble and System Alarm relays do not activate.
• The fifth zone programmed (not the first four) for this detector activates. The fifth zone is
the right-most entry on line two of the detector CBE list in the Point Programming screen.
(For more information, refer to “Modify an Addressable Detector Point” on page 18). You
can use the fifth zone to control functions of a detector or group of detectors once the pre-
alarm level is reached. Fifth zone activations also allow ACS annunciation by a detector or
group of detectors in Action Pre-Alarm condition.
• The Pre-Alarm condition and the zone programmed will latch until system reset, even if the
sensitivity drops below the pre-alarm level.
• A subsequent alarm condition for this detector clears the Action indication from the LCD
display alarm list.

C.3.4 How to Select a Pre-Alarm Level

Instructions and sample displays to program Pre-Alarm for Alert or Action
1. At the “Enter Password” screen, enter your Program Change Password to display the “Program
Change Selection” screen. Press 1 to enter the “Basic Program” screen:

0=CLR 1=AUTO 2=POINT 3=PASSWD 4=MESSAGE

5=ZONES 6=SPL FUNCT 7=SYSTEM 8=CHECK PRG

6=SPL FUNCT

2. From the “Basic Program” screen, press the 6 key to display the “Special Function Zone
Change” screen.

SPECIAL FUNCTION: F0=PRESIG RO-R9=REL

F5-F6=TIME F7=HOL F8=CODE F9=PRE-ALARM

F9=PRE-ALARM

3. From the ‘Special Function Zone Change” screen, press F9 to display the “Pre-Alarm
Function” screen, with Alert blinking.
ALERT blinking

PRG PRELARM FUNCT ALERT

F09

4. To select Action, press the (Next Selection) or (Previous Selection) key.

ACTION blinking

PRG PRELARM FUNCT ACTION

F09

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 99

Intelligent Sensing Applications Detector Sensitivity Settings

C.4 Detector Sensitivity Settings

C.4.1 How to Select Pre-Alarm and Alarm Sensitivity
Each detector provides a host of selectable intelligent options. The control panel provides nine
levels of Pre-Alarm (PA:1–PA:9) and Alarm (AL:1–AL:9) in percent per foot obscuration:
• PA:0 no Pre-Alarm selection.
• PA:1 usually the self-optimizing setting where the control panel selects a suitable
Pre-Alarm level for a detector.
• PA:2–PA:9 the detector Pre-Alarm sensitivity level - with PA:2 the most sensitive and PA:9
the least sensitive.
• AL:1–AL:9 the detector Alarm sensitivity level - with AL:1 the most sensitive and AL:9
the least sensitive.

NOTE: (d) Signifies the factory default setting in Table C.2.

Table C.2 Detector Sensitivity (in percent obscuration per foot) (1 of 2)

Detector Type Alarm (FlashScan) Alarm (CLIP) Pre-Alarm

Photo Electric AL:1=0.50 % AL:1=0.50 % PA:1=Auto

SMOKE (PHOTO) AL:2=0.73 % AL:2=0.73 % PA:2=0.30 %
AL:3=0.96 % AL:3=0.96 % PA:3=0.47 %
(See notes * and †) AL:4=1.19 % AL:4=1.19 % PA:4=0.64 %
AL:5=1.43 % AL:5=1.43 % PA:5=0.81 %
AL:6=1.66 % AL:6=1.66 % PA:6=0.99 %
AL:7=1.89 % AL:7=1.89 % PA:7=1.16 %
AL:8=2.12 % (d) AL:8=2.12 % (d) PA:8=1.33 % (d)
AL:9=2.35 % AL:9=2.35 % PA:9=1.50 %

Ion AL:1=0.50 % AL:1=0.50 % PA:1=Auto

SMOKE (ION) AL:2=0.75 % AL:2=0.75 % PA:2=0.40 %
(See notes * and ‡) AL:3=1.00 % AL:3=1.00 % PA:3=0.50 %
AL:4=1.25 % AL:4=1.25 % PA:4=0.75 %
AL:5=1.50 % AL:5=1.50 % PA:5=1.00 %
AL:6=1.75 % (d) AL:6=1.75 % (d) PA:6=1.25 % (d)
AL:7=2.00 % AL:7=2.00 % PA:7=1.50 %
AL:8=2.25 % AL:8=2.25 % PA:8=1.75 %
AL:9=2.50 % AL:9=2.50 % PA:9=2.00 %

FlashScan View® Laser AL:1=0.02 % AL:1=0.02% PA:1=Auto

AL:2=0.03 % AL:2=0.03 % PA:2=0.02 %
(See Note **) AL:3=0.05 % AL:3=0.05 % PA:3=0.05 %
AL:4=0.10 % AL:4=0.10 % PA:4=0.10 %
AL:5=0.20 % AL:5=0.20 % PA:5=0.20 %
AL:6=0.50 % (d) AL:6=0.50 % (d) PA:6=0.50 % (d)
AL:7=1.00 % AL:7=1.00 % PA:7=0.70 %
AL:8=1.50 % AL:8=1.50 %†† PA:8=1.00 %
AL:9=2.00 % AL:9=2.00 % PA:9=1.50 %

Acclimate Plus™ Alarm (CLIP)

(See Note ‡‡ and ***) AL:1=0.50 % AL:1=1.00 % PA:1=0.50%
AL:2=1.00 % AL:2=1.00 % PA:2=1.00 %
AL:3=1.00 to 2.00 % AL:3=1.00 to PA:3=1.00 %
AL:4=2.00 % 2.00 % PA:4=1.00 to 2.00%
AL:5=2.00 to 3.00% (d) AL:4=2.00 % PA:5=1.00 to 2.00 % (d)
AL:6=3.00 % AL:5=2.00 to PA:6=2.00 %
AL:7=3.00 to 4.00 % 4.00% (d) PA:7=2.00 %
AL:8=4.00 % AL:6=2.00 to PA:8=2.00 to 3.00 %
AL:9=thermal 135oF 4.00% PA:9=2.00 to 3.00 %
AL:7=2.00 to
4.00%
AL:8=4.00 %
AL:9=4.00%

Beam Detector AL:1=25% AL:1=25% N/A

AL:2=30% AL:2=30%
†††
(See Note ) AL:3=40% AL:3=40%
AL:4=50% AL:4=50%
AL:5=30 - 50% AL:5=30 - 50%
AL:6=40 - 50% AL:6=40 - 50%

100 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Detector Sensitivity Settings Intelligent Sensing Applications

Table C.2 Detector Sensitivity (in percent obscuration per foot) (2 of 2)

Detector Type Alarm (FlashScan) Alarm (CLIP) Pre-Alarm
‡‡‡
FSC-851 IntelliQuad Detector AL:1=1% PA:1=1%
AL:2=2% PA:2=1%
AL:3=3% PA:3=2%
AL:4=3% w/ 10 minute confirmation**** PA:4=3%
AL:5=4% w/ 10 minute confirmation PA:5=3% w/ 10 minute confirmation
AL:6=Thermal 135oF PA:6=4% w/ 10 minute confirmation
AL:7=Thermal 135oF PA:7=4% w/ 10 minute confirmation
AL:8=Thermal 135oF PA:8=4% w/ 10 minute confirmation
AL:9=Thermal 135oF PA:9=4% w/ 10 minute confirmation

FCO-851 IntelliQuad PLUS AL:1=1% PA:1=1%

Multi-Criteria Fire/CO AL:2=2% PA:2=1%
Detector†††† AL:3=3% PA:3=2%
AL:4=3% w/ 10 minute confirmation**** PA:4=3%w/ 10 minute confirmation
AL:5=4% w/ 10 minute confirmation PA:5=3%w/ 10 minute confirmation
AL:6=Thermal 135oF PA:6=4% Thermal 135oF

* Detectors are suitable for open area protection within the listed air velocity range. Typically, this range is 0 - 4,000 ft/min for photoelectric
detectors and 0 - 1,200 ft/min for ionization detectors. Be sure to confirm this range before installing the detector by referring to the
manufacturer’s installation instructions.
† FSP-951, FSP-951-IV, FSP-951R, FSP-951R-IV, FSP-951T, FSP-951T-IV detectors must be programmed with sensitivity level 8 or 9 for
Open Area Protection, and Levels 1 through 7 for Special Applications to be compliant with UL 268 7th Edition requirements (Default = 8).
‡ Use only alarm sensitivity setting of AL=1, AL=2 or AL=3 for ION detectors installed in Canada.
** The use of alarm sensitivities below 0.50% obscuration per foot requires a 90 day test to ensure that the environment for the detectors is
suitable for the higher sensitivity setting.
†† 1% maximum on CLIP. Higher figures may display.
‡‡ For Acclimate detectors installed in Canada: Use only the alarm settings of AL:1 or AL:2.
*** The FPTI-951, FPTI-951-IV must be programmed with sensitivity level 8 for Open Area Protection, and Level 2, 4, or 6 (Default=3) for
Special Applications to be compliant with UL 268 7th Edition requirements.
†††Refer to the beam detector manual to determine the alarm settings: they are a function of the distance between the detector and its reflector.
‡‡‡ In CLIP mode, any AL: settings over AL:5 will be set to AL:5 by the panel. Any PA: settings over PA:5 will be set to PA:5 by the
panel.
****Within the 10 minute fire signature confirmation delay period if there is a detection of another fire signature (Carbon Monoxide,
Infrared or Thermal) it overrides the 10 minute confirmation time.
†††† FCO-951, FCO-951-IV detectors must be programmed with sensitivity level 3, 4, or 5 for Open Area Protection, and Level 1 or 2 (Default
= 4) for Special Applications to be compliant with UL 268 7th Edition requirements.

C.4.2 How to Test Detectors Set Below 0.50% Obscuration per Foot
Using alarm sensitivities below 0.50% obscuration per foot requires a 90-day test to ensure that the
detector environment is suitable for the higher sensitivity setting. To meet Notifier and
Underwriters Laboratory requirements, test each detector planned to operate below 0.50%/ft
obscuration as follows:
1. Set the detector as follows:

Step Action
1 Initially set to the 0.50% obscuration per foot Alarm level.
2 Set the Pre-Alarm level to the desired final Alarm sensitivity.
3 Set the Pre-Alarm to Alert mode (non-latching).

2. Operate detectors continuously for 90 days with all environmental factors (such as,
temperature, humidity, air flow, occupancy, and so on) similar to the intended application for
the detectors. Record all events for each tested detector with an electronic History buffer or a
printout.
3. At the end of the 90-day test: An authorized Notifier representative, or an end user trained by
an authorized Notifier representative must inspect the results of the test. If the test results show
no alarms or pre-alarms for the tested detectors, reprogram the fire alarm system to set the
Alarm sensitivity to the more sensitive Pre-Alarm level of the test.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 101

Intelligent Sensing Applications Detector Maintenance Features

C.5 Detector Maintenance Features

C.5.1 Overview
The NF2S-640 provides features to check the maintenance performance level of addressable,
intelligent detectors. Detector maintenance features include the following:
• View detector maintenance information for an individual detector
• Print a detector maintenance report for all detectors

C.5.2 How to Access Detector Maintenance Information

1. Access detector maintenance functions by pressing the ENTER key. The control panel displays
the Program Entry screen:
1=PROGRAMMING 2=READ STATUS ENTRY
(ESCAPE TO ABORT)

2. At the Program Entry screen, press the M key. The control panel displays the Detector
Maintenance Selection screen:
SLC loop Three digit address

Select Detector Address (LDAAA) <ENTER>

or Press P, <ENTER> for print all.

3. Press 1 or 2 to specify the SLC loop, then the detector’s three digit address, then press the enter
key; or to print a Detector Maintenance Report (Figure C.8 on page 103): Press P; then, press
the enter key.

C.5.3 View Detector Maintenance for a Detector

When you enter the detector SLC address the control panel displays the Detector Maintenance
Status screen as shown below:

20-character custom label

Device Status Type Code

NORMAL SMOKE (ION) DETECTOR ADDR 1D147

Comp:031% Pk:0001% 000%A6 6 ** 1D147

Percentage of drift Device address

compensation (01-159)

Peak value – the highest alarm D (indicates a detector)

level reached in the past week SLC number
Current Alarm reading (percentage of alarm) Alarm Verification selection
Multi-Detector selection
Alarm sensitivity setting (1-9)
Pre-Alarm sensitivity setting
(0=none; 1-9)

Figure C.7 Detector Maintenance Status Screen

Once you display information for a detector, you can use the (Next Selection) and
(Previous Selection) keys to view information for the next or previous detector on the SLC.
Refer to “Interpreting a Detector Status Display or Maintenance Report” on page 103 for
descriptions of each item.

102 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Detector Maintenance Features Intelligent Sensing Applications

C.5.4 Print a Detector Maintenance Report

A Detector Maintenance Report lists detector maintenance status for each installed addressable
detector [except FDX-551(an analog heat detector)].
When you press and enter the P key the control panel sends a Detector Maintenance Report (Figure
C.8) to the printer connected to the control panel.

Detector Maintenance Report

1
*** PRINT SMOKE DETECTOR MAINTENANCE ***
NORMAL SMOKE (PHOTO) INTENSIVE CARE UNIT Comp:032% Pk:0002% 000% A8 8 ** 1D043
NORMAL SMOKE (PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 1D044 Comp:027% Pk:0001% 000% A8 8 ** 1D044
NORMAL SMOKE (PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 1D045 Comp:028% Pk:0001% 000% A8 8 ** 1D045
NORMAL SMOKE (PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 1D046 Comp:030% Pk:0001% 000% A8 8 ** 1D046
NORMAL SMOKE (PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 1D047 Comp:024% Pk:0002% 000% A8 8 ** 1D047
NORMAL SMOKE (PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 1D048 Comp:031% Pk:0002% 000% A8 8 ** 1D048
NORMAL SMOKE (PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 1D049 Comp:033% Pk:0002% 000% A8 8 ** 1D049
NORMAL SMOKE (PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 1D050 Comp:008% Pk:0003% 000% A8 8 ** 1D050
**************************** PRINT END
***************************************

Figure C.8 Sample Detector Maintenance Report

C.5.5 Interpreting a Detector Status Display or Maintenance Report

Detector Maintenance Status Screens and Detector Maintenance Reports provide the same
information (such as Device Status, Compensation, Peak Value) about a detector. This section
contains descriptions of each item that appears in a Detector Maintenance Status Screen or a
Detector Maintenance Report.

NORMAL SMOKE (PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 1D044 Comp:027% Pk:0001% 000% A8 8 C * 1D044

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1. Device Status (NORMAL) The status of the detector: NORMAL, ALARM, DISABL OR
TEST.
2. Type Code (SMOKE (PHOTO)) The software Type Code that identifies the type of detector.
Refer to “Type Codes for Intelligent Detectors” on page 111.
3. Custom Label (DETECTOR ADDR 1D044) The 19-character user-defined custom label.
4. Drift Compensation (COMP:027%) The relative cleanliness of a detector determined by
sampling the amount of contaminants in the detector, ambient air conditions, and the age of the
detector. The Comp value also indicates if a detector requires maintenance. Refer to
“Maintenance Warnings – Three Levels” on page 95 for definitions of maintenance levels. The
table below contains a list of the maintenance level values for each type of detector:

Table C.3 Maintenance Levels by Detector Type

Low Chamber
Type of Detector Normal Maint. Alert Maint. Urgent
Reading

Ion 006-068 less than 006 92-99 100

Photo 006-069 less than 006 93-99 100

Laser 003-063 less than 003 83-99 100

Acclimate Plus™ n/a LO-VAL Dirty1 Dirty2

5. Peak Value (PK:0001%) The highest analog value reached by the detector during the past
week. The peak value slowly returns to zero.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 103

Intelligent Sensing Applications Detector Maintenance Features

6. Alarm Reading (000%) The current alarm reading of the detector, as a percentage of the
Alarm Sensitivity setting.
7. Alarm Sensitivity Setting (A8) The Alarm Sensitivity (x=1-9) entered in the Detector
Sensitivity Screen.
8. Pre-Alarm Sensitivity Setting (8) The Pre-Alarm Sensitivity (1-9; 0 = Pre-Alarm not used)
entered in the Detector Settings Screen. Refer to “Detector Sensitivity Settings” on page 100
for more information on the Pre-Alarm sensitivity settings.
9. Multi-Detector Selection (*) A smoke detector programmed so that it evaluates readings from
nearby detectors in making Alarm or Pre-Alarm decisions. Cooperative Multi-Detector
sensing also allows the combination of ionization with photoelectric technology in reaching an
alarm decision. See “Modify an Addressable Detector Point” on page 18 for instructions on
setting Cooperative Multi-Detector Settings.
* – Multi-not used.
A – combines the detector’s alarm decision with the next address above.
B – combines the detector’s alarm decision with the next address below.
C – combines the detector’s alarm decision with the next address above and the next address
below.
10. Alarm Verification (*)
* – Alarm Verification not programmed for this detector.
V– Alarm Verification enabled.
xx – Alarm Verification programmed for the detector; xx equals the Verification Counter (00-
99). See “Modify an Addressable Detector Point” on page 18 for instructions on setting Alarm
Verification.
11. Device SLC Address (1D044) The SLC address of the detector.

104 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

 Appendix D: CBE (Control-By-Event)

D.1 Description
CBE (Control-By-Event) is a software function that provides a means to program a variety of
output responses based on various initiating events. The control panel operates Control-By-Event
(CBE) through 99 Software Zones with the following features:
• Each input point (detector, monitor module) can list up to five Software Zones
• Each output point (control module or NAC) can list up to five Software Zones
• Output points can list zone Z00 (general alarm). Non-Alarm or Supervisory points do not
activate Software Zone Z00 (general alarm)

D.2 Input and Outputs

Input and output devices with CBE-listed Software Zones work as follows:

These devices Operate with CBE as follows

Inputs (detectors, monitor modules) When an input device activates, so do all Software
Zones listed to the input device.
Outputs (control modules and NACs) When a Software Zone activates, the output device(s)
in that zone turns on.

D.3 Equations
Space for up to twenty logic or time delay equations is included in the control panel. Each equation
can be a logic equation or a time delay function. A time delay function can have a logic equation as
an internal equation, but not vice versa. The rules of the equations are:
1. Equations can be entered, edited and viewed in the VeriFire™ Tools program, but can only be
viewed on the control panel.
2. The twenty equations are designated in the panel as ZE0-ZE9 and ZL0-ZL9, and are evaluated
in that order.

NOTE: In the VeriFire™ Tools program, ZL1 - ZL10 corresponds to ZE0-ZE9, and ZL11 - ZL20
corresponds to ZL0-ZL9.

3. Equations will always begin with a logic or a time delay function.

4. Equations will be a maximum of 73 characters long, including parentheses and commas.
5. Equations can have a maximum of 10 logic functions. The function set is listed below in
“Equation Entry” on page 106.
6. These equations are to be evaluated after all other devices have been evaluated.
7. One logic equation can be used as a variable in another equation only if the equation used has
previously been evaluated. For example, the results of the ZE0 equation can be used in the ZL5
equation but the opposite is not true.
8. Time delay equations can use any other functions as an internal equation, but the other function
can not use time delay equation as an internal equation.
9. A logic instruction can have a maximum of 20 arguments (inclusive start and stop address).
10. Maximum for the delay timer is 18 hours 12 minutes.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 105

CBE (Control-By-Event) Equation Entry

D.4 Equation Entry

The equations must be entered using the VeriFire™ Tools Program Utility. All are subject to the
maximum number of arguments possible in a logic instruction as discussed above (Item Number 9
on page 105).

D.4.1 Logic Functions

The “AND” Operator
Requires that each argument be in alarm.
Example: AND(Z02,Z05,Z09)
All three arguments in the equation must be in alarm for the output point to be activated.
The “OR” Operator
Requires that any argument be in alarm
Example: OR(Z02,Z05,Z09)
If any one of the three arguments in the equation is in alarm the output point will be activated.
The “NOT” Operator
Inverts the state of the argument (activated to deactivated OR deactivated to activated).
Example: NOT(Z02)
The output point will remain activated until the argument goes into alarm.
If the argument goes into alarm the output point will deactivate.
The “ONLY1” Operator
Requires that only one argument be in alarm.
Example: ONLY1(Z02,Z05,Z09)
If only one of the arguments is in alarm the output point will be activated.
The “ANY2” Operator
Requires that two or more arguments be in alarm.
Example: ANY2(Z02,Z05,Z09)
If any two or more of the arguments are in alarm the output point will be activated.
The “ANY3” Operator
Requires that three or more arguments be in alarm.
Example: ANY3(Z02,Z05,Z07,Z09)
If any three or more of the arguments are in alarm the output point will be activated.
The “XZONE” Operator
Requires that any combination of two or more input devices programmed to a zone be in alarm.
Example: XZONE(Z02)
If any combination of two or more initiating devices that have been programmed (CBE) to this
software zone comes into alarm, then this output point will be activated.
The “RANGE” Operator
Each argument within the range must conform to the requirements of the governing operator. The
range limit is 20 consecutive arguments.

106 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Equation Entry CBE (Control-By-Event)

Example: AND(RANGE(Z1,Z20))
Zone 1 through Zone 20 must all be in alarm for the output point to be activated.

D.4.2 Equation Syntax Example

OR(AND(L1D1,L1D4),AND(L2D6,L2M3,NOT(L2M4)),ANY2(L1M13,L1M14,L1M15))
Equation begins with a logic or time delay function - OR
67 Characters (maximum of 73) - includes parentheses and commas.
5 Logic Functions (maximum of 10) - OR, AND, AND, NOT and ANY2.
8 Arguments (maximum of 20 per logic function) - L1D1,L1D4,L2D6,L2M3,L2M4....
The equation contains no spaces.

D.4.3 Evaluating an Equation

When you evaluate an equation, you start from the innermost part of the equation and work
outwards. For this equation to evaluate TRUE and thus turn on any output mapped to it, the
following conditions must be met:
OR(AND(L1D1,L1D4),AND(L2D6,L2M3,NOT(L2M4)),ANY2(L1M13,L1M14,L1M15))

These must These have Any TWO of these

be ON to be ON.........and this OFF must be ON

for this part to be TRUE for this part to be TRUE for this part to be TRUE

When this is TRUE OR When this is TRUE OR When this is TRUE

Then all outputs programmed with this equation will be turned ON.

D.4.4 Argument Entries

The argument entries of the logic functions can be another logic function or any of the devices
listed below:
1D1 – 1D159 detectors loop 1 (159)
1M1 – 1M159 modules loop 1 (159)
2D1 – 2D159 detectors loop 2 (159)
2M1 – 2M159 modules loop 2 (159)
B1 – B4 panel bells (4)
Z0 – Z99 zones (100)
F0 – F9 special function zones (10)
R0 – R9 releasing zones (10)
ZE0 – ZE9** equations 0-9 (10)
ZL0 – ZL9*** equations 10-19 (10)
*Node numbers can be entered in VeriFire™ Tools for network
programming.
**Corresponds in VeriFire™ Tools to ZL1-ZL10
***Corresponds in VeriFire™ Tools to ZL11-ZL20

Equations must be evaluated before use in another equation.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 107

CBE (Control-By-Event) CBE Example

D.4.5 Time Delay Functions

The “DEL” Operator
Used for delayed operation
Example: DEL(HH:MM:SS,HH:MM:SS,ZE5)
• The first HH:MM:SS is the delay time, the second HH:MM:SS is the duration time.
• If delay of zero is entered (00.00.00), the equation will evaluate true as soon as the internal
equation (ZE5) evaluates true and will remain that way for the specified duration, unless the
internal equation becomes false.
• If no duration is specified, then the device will not be deactivated until a reset occurs or the
internal equation evaluates false.
The “SDEL” Operator
A latched version of the DEL operator. Once the equation evaluates true, it remains activated until
a reset, even if the internal equation (ZE5) becomes false.
Example: SDEL(HH:MM:SS,HH:MM:SS,ZE5)
• The first HH:MM:SS is the delay time, the second HH:MM:SS is the duration time.
• If delay of zero is entered (00.00.00), the equation will evaluate true as soon as the internal
equation (ZE5) evaluates true and will remain that way for the specified duration.
• If no duration is specified, then the device will not deactivate until reset.
The installer can enter the equations in any combination wanted as long as the format of the logic
function or time delay is followed from the lists above. Error checking will be performed after the
user has entered the complete equation. Possible errors are too many or too few parentheses, too
many or too few arguments inside the parentheses, unknown function and unknown device type.

D.5 CBE Example

An example of CBE, where monitor module 1M101 lists zone Z04 and Z05, and control module
1M108 lists zone Z05 and zone Z07:

PROGRAM MONITOR MODULE ADDR 1M101

04 05 __ __ __ 1M101

PROGRAM CONTROL MODULE ADDR 1M108

05 07 __ __ __ 1M108

Both devices contain zone Z05 in its CBE list

Monitor Software Control

Module Zone Z05 Module
1M101 1M108

CBE=Z04 Z05 CBE=Z05 Z07

Figure D.1 CBE Example

When monitor module 1M101 activates, the following CBE takes place:
1. Software Zones Z04 and Z05 activate.
2. Since control module 1M108 has Z05 in its CBE list, all of its outputs would activate. All
output devices with Z04 or Z05 would activate.

108 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

 Appendix E: Detector Initialization

E.1 Overview
The control panel automatically performs a detector initialization routine when you add or change a
detector, unless the control panel is in Walk Test or Advanced Walk Test. If you change a detector
with the control panel in Walk Test or Advanced Walk Test, you must manually initialize the
detector as detailed in “How to Manually Initialize a Detector” on page 110. The detector
initialization routine takes approximately 2.5 minutes, during which time the FACP remains in
service. While initializing a detector, follow these guidelines:
• Make sure the detector is free of residual smoke during detector initialization.
• Do not test a detector during detector initialization.

NOTE: The control panel only performs detector initialization if it senses that a detector was
removed for at least 15 seconds. This is what actually “turns on” the detector. It is an automatic
procedure but is specified here because of the delay between detector connection and full
function. The rest of the system remains in full service during this time.

A sample screen that appears on the LCD display during detector initialization.
Detector Initializing _ Please Wait
02:48P 041515 Sat

WARNING:
! If you replace any detector with a different type of detector (for example, replace a laser detector with
a photoelectric detector), you must immediately program the control panel with the new detector
Type Code. Failure to do so can cause incorrect control panel operation, including false alarms. For
instructions on replacing a detector, refer to “How to Replace a Detector” on page 109.

E.2 System Testing and Detector Initialization

To facilitate system testing, the control panel does not initialize detectors during Walk Test and
Advanced Walk Test. You can remove a detector to confirm supervision, then replace the detector
for immediate testing. If you replace a removed detector with a different detector of the same type,
you must manually initialize the detector according to the instructions in “How to Manually
Initialize a Detector” on page 110. If, however, you want to replace a removed detector with a
different type of detector, refer to “How to Replace a Detector” on page 109.

E.3 How to Replace a Detector

If you replace a detector with a different type of detector, you must immediately program the
control panel for the new detector type. To replace a detector, follow these steps:

NOTE: Parentheses show an example of replacing an existing photoelectric detector at address

1D101 with a laser detector.

Step Action
1 Disable the point of the detector. (point 1D101)
2 Remove the photoelectric detector and replace with laser detector set to the same address.
3 Autoprogram the panel to recognize the new detector type.
4 Enable new detector.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 109

Detector Initialization How to Manually Initialize a Detector

E.4 How to Manually Initialize a Detector

You only need to manually initialize a detector when you change a detector during Walk Test or
Advanced Walk Test. If, however, you replace a detector with a different type of detector, you must
immediately program the new detector according to the instructions in “How to Replace a
Detector” on page 109.
To manually initialize a detector, follow these steps:
1. Press the ENTER key. The control panel displays the Program Entry screen:
1=PROGRAMMING 2=READ STATUS ENTRY
(ESCAPE TO ABORT)

2. Press the 1 key. The control panel displays the Enter Password screen:
ENTER PROG OR STAT PASSWORD, THEN ENTER.
(ESCAPE TO ABORT)

3. Enter the password RESET, which starts detector initialization. The control panel displays the
following three screens, in the sequence shown, while initializing a detector:

CHECKING MEMORY NFS2-640 Release 1.0

Software #XXXXXXX

Detector Initializing _ Please Wait

02:48P 041508 Tue

When the control panel completes the detector initialization, it displays system status as shown
below:

SYSTEM NORMAL 02:50P 041515 Tue

110 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

 Appendix F: Type Codes
F.1 What are Type Codes?
Type Codes are software selections for initiating devices (detectors and monitor modules) and
output devices (control modules and NACs). Some Type Codes are self-explanatory; that is, the
Type Code matches the function of the device, such as a “Monitor” for a monitor module, “Photo”
for a photoelectric detector, and so on. Type codes also provide special functions, such as activating
switches, solenoids, and control panel functions.

F.2 How to Select a Type Code

You select a Type Code through the Point Programming screen. For instructions, refer to “Modify
an Addressable Detector Point” on page 18.

F.3 In this Appendix

This appendix contains detailed descriptions of Type Codes for input and output devices, as listed
below:
Type of Device Refer to page

F.4.2, "Type Codes for Intelligent Detectors" page 111

F.4.3, "Type Codes for Monitor Modules" page 113

F.5.2, "Type Codes for Control Modules" page 115

Table F.3, "Control Module Type Codes" page 116

F.4 Type Codes for Input Devices

F.4.1 Overview
This section provides Type Codes for intelligent detectors and monitor modules. For instructions on
programming Type Codes, refer to “Modify or Delete a Point (2=POINT)” on page 17.

F.4.2 Type Codes for Intelligent Detectors

A list of intelligent detector Type Codes, which specify the type of detector installed at an SLC
address.

Point Characteristics
Type Code Latching Device Function
Point Type Point Function
(Y/N)
SMOKE (ION) fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Ionization smoke detector

SMOKE(DUCTI) fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Duct Ionization smoke detector

SUP.T(DUCTI)3 supervisory N lights supervisory LED Ionization smoke detector used as a duct detector to
report supervisory condition rather than alarm. Tracking.

SUP.L(DUCTI) supervisory Y lights supervisory LED Ionization smoke detector used as a duct detector to
report supervisory condition rather than alarm. Latching.

SUP.T(ION)2,3 supervisory N lights supervisory LED Ionization smoke detector used to report supervisory
condition rather than alarm. Tracking.

SUP.L(ION)2 supervisory Y lights supervisory LED Ionization smoke detector used to report supervisory
condition rather than alarm. Latching.

SMOKE(PHOTO) fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Photoelectric smoke detector

SMOKE(DUCTP) fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Duct Photoelectric smoke detector

SUP.T(DUCTP)3 supervisory N lights supervisory LED Photoelectric smoke detector used as a duct detector to
report supervisory condition rather than alarm. Tracking.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 111

Type Codes Type Codes for Input Devices

SUP.L(DUCTP) supervisory Y lights supervisory LED Photoelectric smoke detector used as a duct detector to
report supervisory condition rather than alarm. Latching.

SUP.T(PHOTO)2,3 supervisory N lights supervisory LED Photoelectric smoke detector used to report supervisory
condition rather than alarm. Tracking.

SUP.L(PHOTO)2 supervisory Y lights supervisory LED Photoelectric smoke detector used to report supervisory
condition rather than alarm. Latching.

SMOKE(HARSH)1 fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE HARSH smoke detector

FIRE/CO4 fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED for photo and heat, Photoelectric, Carbon Monoxide, and Heat detector
no LED will light for a CO alarm, photo
and heat will activate CBE, CO alarm
activates special function zone FC and
sixth CBE zone only (sixth CBE zone
programmable via VeriFire Tools)

FIRE/CO (P SUP)2,4,5 fire alarm/ Y lights fire alarm LED for heat, no LED Photoelectric, Carbon Monoxide, and Heat detector
supervisory will light for a CO alarm, supervisory
LED will light for photo alarm, heat and
photo will activate CBE, CO alarm
activates special function zone FC and
sixth CBE zone only (sixth CBE zone
programmable via VeriFire Tools)

FIRE/CO (C SUP)4 fire alarm/ Y lights fire alarm LED for heat and photo Photoelectric, Carbon Monoxide, and Heat detector
supervisory alarms, will light supervisory LED for CO
alarm, photo and heat alarms will
activate CBE, CO alarm will activate
sixth CBE zone only (sixth CBE zone
programmable via VeriFire Tools)

NOTE: For FIRE/CO detectors:

Detectors programmed as FIRE/CO (P SUP), the heat and CO elements will latch and require a system reset to clear. The Photo element will latch or track,
depending on the FIRE/CO (P SUP) setting. Detectors programmed as FIRE/CO (C SUP), the heat and Photo elements will latch and require a system
reset to clear. The CO element will latch or track depending on the FIRE/CO (C SUP) setting.
CO ALARM CO alarm Y CBE Position #5 Activates for CO Carbon Monoxide detector
Prealarm, all other CBEs activate for a
CO Alarm
CO SUP CO Y (see CBE Position #5 Activates for CO Carbon Monoxide detector
supervisory note) Prealarm, all other CBEs activate for a
CO Supervisory

PHOTO/CO4 fire Y CBE Position #4 activates for CO, CBE Photoelectric and Carbon Monoxide detector
Position #5 Activates for CO Prealarm,
all other CBEs activate when the Photo
element activates (i.e. fire alarm)

P/CO (P SUP)2,4,5 photo - Y (see CBE Position #4 activates for CO, CBE Photoelectric and Carbon Monoxide detector
supervisory note) Position #5 Activates for CO Prealarm,
CO - Alarm all other CBEs activate when the Photo
element activates (i.e. Supervisory)

P/CO (C SUP)4 Photo - Fire Y CBE Position #4 activates for CO, CBE Photoelectric and Carbon Monoxide Detector
CO - Position #5 Activates for CO Prealarm,
supervisory all other CBEs activate when the Photo
element activates (i.e. fire alarm)

NOTE: For PHOTO/CO detectors:

Detectors programmed as PHOTO/CO (P SUP), the heat and CO elements will latch and require a system reset to clear. The Photo element will latch or
track, depending on the PHOTO/CO (P SUP) setting. Detectors programmed as PHOTO/CO (C SUP), the heat and Photo elements will latch and require a
system reset to clear. The CO element will latch or track depending on the PHOTO/CO (C SUP) setting. For Photo/CO and CO Detectors programmed
as Photo/CO (P SUP) or CO (CO SUP) will either latch and track, depending on the setting.

SMOKE(BEAM) fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Beam smoke detector

SMOKE(LASER) fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Laser smoke detector

SUP.L(LASER)2 supervisory Y lights supervisory LED Laser smoke detector used to report supervisory
condition rather than alarm. Latching.

SUP.T(LASER)2,3 supervisory N lights supervisory LED Laser smoke detector used to report supervisory
condition rather than alarm. Tracking.

SMOKE(DUCTL) fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Duct Laser smoke detector

SUP T(DUCTL) supervisory N lights supervisory LED Laser smoke detector used as a duct detector to report
supervisory condition rather than alarm. Tracking.

SUP L(DUCTL) supervisory Y lights supervisory LED Laser smoke detector used as a duct detector to report
supervisory condition rather than alarm. Latching.

112 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Type Codes for Input Devices Type Codes

AIR REF fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Assign to one or more FSL-751 detectors used to
monitor the quality of air entering the protected area. The
air quality measurement allows the VIEW® system to
compensate for vehicle fumes, fog, or other particles
brought into the protected area through the ventilation
system. Poor air quality will lower the sensitivity of all
FSL-751 detectors on the SLC. The detector sensitivity,
however, remains within approved limits (always less
than 1% obscuration per foot).
NOTE: A reference detector still functions as a smoke detector, but you should set the detector sensitivity level to the least sensitive level—AL:9
and PA:9 Change Alarm and Pre-Alarm sensitivity. Refer to “Detector Sensitivity (in percent obscuration per foot)” on page 100 for a complete list
of detector sensitivity settings.

HEAT fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE 190oF intelligent thermal sensor

HEAT+ fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE 190oF intelligent thermal sensor with low temperature
warning.

HEAT(FIXED) fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE 135oF intelligent thermal sensor

HEAT (ROR) fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE 15oF per minute rate-of-rise detector

SMOKE ACCLIM fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Combination Photoelectric/heat detector without freeze
warning (Acclimate Plus™)

SMOKE(ACCLI+) fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Combination Photoelectric/heat detector with freeze
warning (Acclimate Plus™, or IntelliQuad FSC-851
Photoelectric Multi-Criteria Smoke Sensor)

SMOKE(MULTI)1 fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Multisensor smoke detector

ASPIRATION fire alarm Y lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Aspiration smoke detector

ASPIR (SUP) supervisory Y lights supervisory LED and activates Aspiration detector supervision
CBE

ASPIR. (PRE) prealarm N lights prealarm LED and actives CBE Aspiration detector prealarm

ASPIR. (NON) non-fire N activates CBE Aspiration detector non-alarm

ASPIR. (REF) non-fire N activates CBE Used as a reference for other aspiration detectors on the
loop.
NOTE: Aspiration detector (FAAST) programming requires 5 SLC addresses. When a device associated with a FAAST device
is disabled locally, all devices associated with that FAAST will be automatically disabled as well.
ACCLIMATE

ACCL (P SUP) fire Y (see activates CBE Combination Photoelectric/Heat detector. Photo element
note) activation generates a supervisory condition

ACCL+ (P SUP) fire Y (see activates CBE Combination Photoelectric/Heat detector with low
note) temperature warning. Photo element activation
generates a supervisory condition.

NOTE: For ACCL/ACCL+ detectors:

Detectors programmed as ACCL (P SUP) or ACCL+ (P SUP), the heat element will latch and require a system reset to clear.
The Photo element will latch or track, depending on the ACCL (P SUP) latching setting.
1 CLIP Mode only
2
Requires approval of AHJ.
3
Not suitable for Canadian applications.
4 LED representation of a CO alarm may be performed using an ACS annunciator.
5
Photo element can be programmed as latching or tracking for all Photo/CO devices programmed as this type ID via VeriFire Tools.

Table F.1 Intelligent Detector Type Codes

F.4.3 Type Codes for Monitor Modules

A list of monitor module Type Codes, which you can use to change the function of a monitor
module point.

Point Characteristics
Type Code Latching Device Function
Point Type Point Function
(Y/N)
MONITOR fire alarm Y Lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Alarm-monitoring device

PULL STATION fire alarm Y Lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Manual fire-alarm-activating device, such as a pull
station

SMOKE CONVEN fire alarm Y Lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Indicates activation of a conventional smoke detector
attached to an FZM-1

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 113

Type Codes Type Codes for Input Devices

SMOKE DETECT fire alarm Y Lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Indicates activation of a conventional smoke detector
attached to an FZM-1

WATERFLOW fire alarm Y Lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Monitor for waterflow alarm switch

WATERFLOW S supervisory Y Lights supervisory LED and activates CBE Indicates supervisory condition for activated waterflow
switch

ACCESS MONTR non-alarm N Activates CBE Used for monitoring building access

AREA MONITOR security Y Lights security LED and activates CBE Monitors building access

AUDIO SYSTEM trouble N Lights trouble LED Used for monitoring audio equipment

EQUIP MONITR security N Activates CBE Used for recording access to monitored equipment

SECURITY security Y Lights security LED Indicates activation of security alarm

LATCH SUPERV supervisory Y Lights supervisory LED Indicates latching supervisory condition

TRACK SUPERV supervisory N Lights supervisory LED Monitors for waterflow tamper switches for alarm points

SYS MONITOR security Y Lights security LED and activates CBE Monitors equipment security

TAMPER supervisory Y Lights supervisory LED, activates CBE Indicates activation of tamper switch

ACK SWITCH non-alarm N Performs Acknowledge function, no CBE Silences panel sounder, gives an Acknowledge
message on the panel LCD

ALLCALL PAGE non-alarm N Activates all speaker circuits, no CBE Performs AMG-1 All-call

DRILL SWITCH3 non-alarm N Performs Drill function Activates silenceable outputs

EVACUATE SWITCH4 non-alarm N Performs Drill function Activates all silenceable outputs

FIRE CONTROL non-alarm Y Activates CBE Used for non-fire activation of outputs

NON FIRE non-alarm N Activates CBE Used for building energy management

PAS INHIBIT non-alarm N Inhibits Positive Alarm Sequence Inhibits Positive Alarm Sequence

POWER MONITR trouble N Indicates trouble Monitors auxiliary power supplies

RESET SWITCH non-alarm N Performs Reset function Resets control panel

SIL SWITCH non alarm N Performs Signal Silence function Turns off all activated silenceable outputs

TELE PAGE non-alarm N Performs function of Page Button on FFT-7 Allows remote paging to a fire area

DISABLE MON disable N When a point with this type code activates, it Module can not be disabled via ACS, Alter Status, or
will create a disable on the panel for that over the network.
point. No CBE generated.

TROUBLE MON trouble N Indicates Trouble Monitors trouble inputs

ABORT SWITCH non alarm N Indicates Active at the panel Aborts activation of a releasing zone
Note: An abort switch can only be associated with one
(1) Releasing Zone.

MAN RELEASE fire alarm Y Lights Fire Alarm LED and activates CBE Indicates activation of a monitor module programmed to
releasing zone to perform a releasing function

MANREL DELAY fire alarm Y Lights Fire Alarm LED and activates CBE Indicates activation of a monitor module programmed
for a release output

SECOND SHOT fire alarm Y Indicates Active at the panel and activates Provides second activation of releasing zone after soak
CBE timer has expired.

Blank fire alarm Y Lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Monitors for a device with no description

HEAT DETECT fire alarm Y Lights fire alarm LED and activates CBE Monitors for conventional heat detector

CO MON1 CO alarm Y Activates CBE, no LED will light for CO Monitors conventional CO detector
alarm.

ECS/MN SUPT supervisory N Lights supervisory LED and activates CBE. Monitors mass notification devices.

ECS/MN SUPL supervisory Y Lights supervisory LED and activates CBE. Monitors mass notification devices

ESC/MN TROUBLE trouble N Indicates Trouble on a Mass Notification Monitors mass notification devices. Will generate a
MON device trouble condition for both open and short conditions.

ECS/MN MONITOR MNS alarm Y Does not light any LEDs, overrides existing Monitors mass notification devices
fire event2, shuts off silenceable outputs and
all fire activated strobes and activates CBE.

RF GATEWAY non-alarm N Activates CBE Provides communication between wireless devices and
the fire panel.

114 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Type Codes for Output Devices Type Codes

1
LED representation of a CO alarm may be performed using an ACS annunciator.
2 IF ECS/MN Override is not selected in VeriFire Tools, fire events will take precedence over ECS/MN audio events.
3
The Drill Switch typecode should not be used for Canada.
4 For Canada, point type is alarm.

Table F.2 Monitor Modules Type Codes

F.5 Type Codes for Output Devices

F.5.1 Overview
This section provides Type Codes for control modules and NACs. For instructions on programming
Type Codes, refer to “Modify or Delete a Point (2=POINT)” on page 17.

F.5.2 Type Codes for Control Modules

A comprehensive list of control module Type Codes, which you can select to change the function of
an control module point.

Type Code Silenceable (Y/N) Configuration Device Function

CONTROL Y NAC Supervised NAC for notification appliance

RELAY Y Form-C relay Relay output

BELL CIRCUIT Y NAC Supervised NAC for notification appliance

STROBE CKT Y NAC Supervised NAC for notification appliance

HORN CIRCUIT Y NAC Supervised NAC for notification appliance

AUDIBLE CKT Y NAC Supervised NAC for notification appliance

SPEAKER Y NAC Supervised NAC for notification appliance

ISOLATED NAC Y NAC Supervised NAC for notification appliance, used with audio isolators. Activates
even if there is a short on its NAC circuit. For ULC installations only.

ISOLATED SPK Y NAC Supervised NAC for speaker circuits, used with audio isolators. Activates even if
there is a short on its audio circuit. For ULC installations only.

REL END BELL N NAC Supervised NAC for notification appliance

blank Y NAC Supervised NAC (for use when no other Type Code applies)

REL CKT ULC* N NAC Releasing Circuit, power-limited (Class 2), supervised for opens, shorts and
ground faults (always non-silenceable)

RELEASE CKT* N NAC Releasing circuit, nonpower-limited, supervised for opens and ground faults

RELEA.FORM C* N Form-C Relay Relay output, contacts operate upon release

REL AUDIBLE Y NAC NAC, activated upon release

NONRESET CTL N Form-C Relay and NAC Relay output, unaffected by “System Reset” command

TELEPHONE N NAC Standard Telephone circuit

INSTANT RELE* N NAC NAC, short = normal; supervised for open circuits and ground faults. Always non-
silenceable and switch-inhibited.

ALARMS PEND. N NAC Output that will activate upon receipt of an alarm condition, and remain in the
alarm state until all alarms have been acknowledged. It is programmed as “switch
inhibit”.

CONTROL NAC Y NAC Supervised NAC

GEN ALARM N NAC Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) configured as a
Municipal Box Transmitter for NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems applications.
This Type ID can also be used for general alarm activation. It is programmed as
“switch inhibit”.

GEN SUPERVIS N NAC Control Module, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C (in relay mode) activated under any
Supervisory condition (includes sprinkler type). It is programmed as “switch inhibit”.

GEN TROUBLE N NAC Control Module, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C (in relay mode) activated under any
System Trouble condition. It is programmed as “switch inhibit”.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 115

Type Codes Type Codes for Output Devices

GENERAL PEND N NAC Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) that will activate
upon receipt of an alarm and/or trouble condition, and remain in the ON state until
all events have been ACKNOWLEDGED.

TROUBLE PEND N NAC Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) that will activate
upon receipt of a trouble condition, and remain in the ON state until all troubles
have been ACKNOWLEDGED. It is programmed as “switch inhibit”.

MNS GENERAL N NAC Mass notification supervised output.

MNS CONTROL N NAC Mass notification supervised NAC.

MNS STROBE N NAC Mass notification supervised NAC.

MNS SPEAKER N NAC Mass notification supervised NAC for speaker circuits.

MNS RELAY N Relay Mass notification relay output.

* The FCM-1-REL checks for shorts with all releasing type codes.

Table F.3 Control Module Type Codes

F.5.3 NAC Type Codes

A comprehensive list of Type Codes for panel NACs. For instructions on programming Type
Codes, refer to “Modify or Delete a Point (2=POINT)” on page 17.

Table F.4 NAC Type Codes

Silenceable
Type Code Device Function
(Y/N)
CONTROL Y Supervised NAC
BELL CIRCUIT Y Supervised NAC for notification appliance
STROBE CKT Y Supervised NAC for notification appliance
HORN CIRCUIT Y Supervised NAC for notification appliance
AUDIBLE CKT Y Supervised NAC for notification appliance
SPEAKER N Supervised NAC for speaker circuits
REL END BELL N Supervised NAC
blank label Y Supervised NAC for undefined device
REL CKT ULC N Releasing Circuit, power-limited, supervised for opens, shorts and
ground faults (always non-silenceable)
RELEASE CKT N Releasing circuit, nonpowerlimited, supervised for opens and
ground faults
REL AUDIBLE Y NAC, activated upon release
REL CODE N Supervised NAC (NFS2-640 NAC only)
BELL
INSTANT RELE N NAC, short = normal; supervised for open circuits and ground
faults. Always non-silenceable and switch-inhibited.
ALARMS PEND N Output that will activate upon receipt of an alarm condition, and
remain in the alarm state until all alarms have been acknowledged.
It is programmed as “switch inhibit”.
CONTROL NAC Y Supervised NAC
GEN ALARM N Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode)
configured as a Municipal Box Transmitter for NFPA 72-2002
Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems applications (MBT-1 required). This
Type ID can also be used for general alarm activation. It is
programmed as “switch inhibit”.
GEN SUPERVIS N Control Module, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C (in relay mode)
activated under any Supervisory condition (includes sprinkler type).
It is programmed as “switch inhibit”.
GEN TROUBLE N Control Module, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C (in relay mode)
activated under any System Trouble condition. It is programmed as
“switch inhibit”.
GENERAL N Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) that
PEND will activate upon receipt of an alarm and/or trouble condition, and
remain in the ON state until all events have been
ACKNOWLEDGED.

116 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Type Codes for Output Devices Type Codes

Table F.4 NAC Type Codes

TROUBLE N Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) that
PEND will activate upon receipt of a trouble condition, and remain in the
ON state until all troubles have been ACKNOWLEDGED. It is
programmed as “switch inhibit”.

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 117

 Appendix G: Region Settings

G.1 China
The REGION panel programming selection provides a setting for China. (Refer to “The Utility
Program” on page 46.) This selection activates the following features:
• POM-8A support
• Active output events displayed. A counter is displayed for active outputs.
• Municipal communication panel settings
• New special function zone for alarm verification
• Prealarm automatically cleared after five minutes
• Co-op detectors alarm functions
• Dual alarm window
• Points in trouble will not activate
• Ten minute limit for DEL and SDEL delay functions
• Disable events do not light LED or trip the trouble relay
• No system trouble generated upon entering program mode
• Low AC operation of FACP
• Power supply troubles

G.2 Canada
The REGION panel programming selection for Canada must meet the following requirements:

G.2.1 Standalone Applications

KDM-R2 as primary display: An ACS Series annunciator must be mounted adjacent to the fire
panel or within the fire panel enclosure.
NCA-2 as primary display: The 640 character, multi-line display complies with ULC requirements
when used as a primary display for the fire panel.
Two Stage Systems (3/5 minute timer) - ACM-24AT control point is required for Automatic Alarm
Signal Cancel. Acknowledge will not cancel the Two-Stage Timer. For applications using Two
Stage with the ACPS-610, see the ACPS-610 manual for additional programming instructions.

G.2.2 Network Applications

• The network’s manual controls may only be operated from one location at any given time.
When panels are networked (using NCM Network Communications Modules or High-Speed
Network Communication Modules), use AKS-1B Key Switch on each panel’s Primary
Annunciator to enable it’s functions. NCA-2 may be a Primary Annunciator when AKS-1B is
installed.
• The NCA-2 or ONYXWorks may be employed as a Display and Control Center (DCC). In the
even that communications fails between the panels and the Control Center, the panels will
continue to function in local/standalone mode.
• If the DCC option is enabled on the NFS2-640:
– An ACS control point mapped to the local Special Function zone ZF36 is required.
– An ACS monitor point mapped to ZF36 for each DCC and node that has DCC enabled on
the network is required.

118 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Canada Region Settings

– If the DCC option is disabled (subject to AHJ approval), Acknowledge, Signal Silence, and
System Reset will function as stated.

G.2.3 Automatic Alarm Signal Silence

For a system requiring annunciators, consult the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

G.2.4 Auto Silence

For a system requiring annunciators, consult the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Auto Silence:
– If auto silence is enabled
– The value must be set to 20 minutes
– An ACS point is required to monitor special function zone ZF40
– Activation of Auto Silence will activate the Signal Silence LED on the fire panel display
and any ACM LED point programmed for Auto Silence.

G.2.5 Annunciator Applications

ACM series annunciator modules must be used to annunciate the fire alarm input points/zones only,
if no multi-line sequential display is installed.
The following LED colors must be employed:
– Red must be used to indicate active alarm inputs.
– Yellow must be used to indicate supervisory, burglary, trouble signals, and Automatic Alarm
Signal Cancel.
– Green must be used to indicate the presence of power or an activated output.
The ACM point designed for Automatic Alarm Signal Cancel should be labeled as “Automatic
Alarm Signal Cancel: or “Auto Alm Signal Cancel.”

G.2.6 Ancillary Devices

Panel control functions (Acknowledge, Signal Silence, and System Reset will not function on
ancillary devices such as the ACM-24AT, FDU-80 or the LCD2-80. (Local acknowledge will
function on the ancillary device to silence the piezo and steady the LEDs).

G.2.7 Releasing Devices

Supervision for shorts is required. Use REL devices and type code Rel Ckt ULC. (With FCM-1
modules use REL-47iK).

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 119

 Appendix H: Intelligent Sounder Base Programming
and Operation
The NFS2-640 is compatible with the B200 Intelligent Sounder Base. This sounder base allows for
multiple tone generation that is user programmable via VeriFire Tools.
Programming the Intelligent Sounder Base into the Control Panel:
Once the sounder base has been installed and a detector has been plugged into the sounder base,
you can do one of the following to program the sounder base into the control panel:
• Autoprogram—Perform an autoprogram at the control panel. The sounder base will have the
same SLC device address as the detector installed on the sounder base. Once the Autoprogram
is performed, the display will show the number of sounder bases installed on the control panel.
Refer to Section 2.3.2, “Autoprogram the Control Panel (1=AUTO)”, ON PAGE 13.
• VeriFire Tools —Using VeriFire™ Tools, program the detector that is to be installed in the
sounder base and select the Intelligent Sounder Base option. Refer to the VeriFire Tools Help
File for additional information.
Intelligent Sounder Base Options:
The sounder base has user programmable options that can be modified via VeriFire Tools. These
features and their defaults are as follows:

Table H.1 Intelligent Sounder Base Options

Feature: Description and Options: Default:

Zone Mapping The sounder base allows for up to three (3) No zones mapped.
zones to be programmed for specific tone (When set as default, a fire alarm
generation. The tones available are: will generate a Temp-3 tone and a
• Continuous CO alarm will generate a Temp-4
• Temp-3 tone.)
• Temp-4
• March Time
The first of the three zones has the highest
priority, the second zone has second priority,
and the third has third priority.

Silence and The intelligent sounder base may be Silenceable and Resound by Fire
Resound programmed for silenceable operation as well
as signal resound. The silence and resound
options available are:
• No silence
• Silence and resound by Fire Alarm
• Silence and resound by Supervisory
• Silence and resound by CO alarm
• Silence and no resound

120 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

 Index
A Do not program more than 99 CLIP... 48
CBE (Control-By-Event) 105–108
Abort Switch 26, 27, 58
example 108
basic configuration example 61
CBE list 18, 90, 91
configuration example with monitor mod-
ule 72 Check option (program errors) 45
Class A SLC wiring, global setting 30
Definition 60
Class B network setting 45
how it works 60
Class B SLC wiring, global setting 30
to program 60, 72
Class X network setting 45
Type Code (ULI,IRI,NYC, or AHJ) 58
Clear memory 13
AC delay enable 30
CLIP (Classic Loop Interface Protocol) 11, 47
ACS Annunciation, releasing applications 89
Coding Function Selections 92
ACS annunciators
ACS Selection Groups A through W 33– Coding, Special Zone F8 16, 26, 28, 91
Control Module
39
to program 21
annunciation points 32
Cooperative Multi-Detector Sensing 97
annunciator display 32
Cross Zone 26, 27, 58
Selection Groups, global setting 30
programming example 69
selection of display information 31
to activate a Releasing Zone 68
AHJ Abort Switch
example 67 Types 68, 69
Custom label 18
programming 66
Alarm
Alarm Verification Timer 30 D
Scroll 46 DCC Mode 47
to select sensitivity 100 Default values, autoprogram 16
Alarm Verification Counters. See Detector head- Delay Timer 26, 27, 58
ings. 53 to program 59
Alarm Verification Timer 30 Detector
annunciation points 32 Alarm Sensitivity Levels 96
Argument 107 Initialization and System Testing 109
Auto Silence Timer 30 Pre-Alarm Sensitivity Level 96
Autoprogram 12, 13–16 Print a Detector Maintenance Report 103
default values 16 Program Values 18
to add/remove device 14 to Access Detector Maintenance Informa-
to create a new program 13 tion 102
Auxiliary Control Functions, releasing applica- to change sensitivity level 50, 52
tions 89 to clear alarm verification counters 50, 53
to disable programmed points 50
B to manually initialize 110
to program point 18
BACKUP option switch for NACs 58
to replace 109
Basic Program 11, 12–45
to Test Detectors Set Below 0.50% Obscu-
Baud rate
ration per Foot 101
CRT Serial Port 49
Detector Initialization 109–110
Printer Serial Port 48
Device
Blink rate for SLC device LED 30
to add 14
to remove 15
C Drift Compensation 94
California Code 26, 92 graphic representation 95
Canadian Two-Stage 92
Caution E
Do not program detectors as CLIP... 48
Equations

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 121

F–P Index

Argument Entries 107 M

Evaluating 107
Maintenance Levels by Detector Type 103
logic and time delay 105
Maintenance Warnings 95
Logic Functions 106
Manual Release Delay Switch
rules 105 monitor module configuration example 75
Time Delay Functions 108
to program 74
Manual Release Switch
F monitor module configuration example 73
FCM-1-REL, 2 second delay 16, 27 to program 73
FireVoice 38 Manually Initialization, detector 110
FlashScan March Time 26, 92
Devices, SLC options 47 Mass Notification 26
Poll 11, 47 Master Box trouble message 31
Monitor
default zones 20
G to disable programmed points 50
Gentex Strobes 26 to program monitor 20
Gentex Strobes, special zone 92 MRD-1 9
Global System Functions 12
defaults 30
to change 29 N
NAC
to disable programmed points 50
H NBG-12LRA 60, 72, 73, 74, 76
History Network node 45
Clear History 50, 53 As argument entry 107
Holiday 16, 28 Network Program 11, 45
Holiday, special zone 26 network node number range 45
NFPA Standards for Releasing Applications 59
I NFS2-640 keypad 9
Initiating Devices, releasing zone 89 NYC Abort Switch
Instant Release Circuit examples 65
control module configuration example 87 programming 64
to program 87
Intelligent Sensing Applications 94–104 O
Drift Compensation 94 Operating parameters, to change. See Status
Maintenance Warnings, 3 levels 95 Change
Smoothing 94
Intelligent Sounder Base Programming 120
IP ACCESS 17, 47 P
IRI Abort Switch PAS Inhibit switch 90
example 63 Password
to program 63 Program Change (high level) 10
Status Change (low level) 10, 50
to change 23
K to enter 10
keypad 9 Point, to disable/enable 51
Poll, see FlashScan™ Poll, CLIP Poll
L Pre-Alarm 98
Labels 19 Action Functions 99
note about spaces 19 Alert Level 98
Local Control 46 to select a level 99
LocM operating mode 30 to select sensitivity 100
LocT operating mode 30 Pre-Alarm, special zone 16, 26, 29
Logic Functions 106 Presignal Delay Timer/PAS 16, 26, 27, 90
Program Change 11–49
Program Errors, check for 45

122 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

Index R–W

R USA or European 30
Time control, special zones 16, 26, 28, 91
REGION Setting 46
Time Delay Functions 108
Regional Settings 118
TM-4 31, 91
Release Audible Circuit
control module configuration example 86 Trouble reminder 46
Two-Stage 26, 92
to program 85
Two-Stage Canada 26, 92
Release Circuit
control module configuration example 82 Two-Stage Canada Manual 26, 92
Type Code
to program 81
for releasing zone inputs/outputs 71
Release Code Bell Circuit
NAC configuration example 88 Type Codes 111–116
explanation 111
to program 88
for NACs 116
Release End Bell Circuit
control module configuration example 78 to select 111
Release End Bell Circuit, to program 77
Release Form-C Circuit U
control module configuration example 84 UDACT 31
to program 83 UDACT-2 31
Releasing Zones (R0-R9) 12, 16, 25, 28, 58 ULC Release Circuit
type codes for inputs/outputs 71 control module configuration example 80
RemT operating mode 30 to program 79
Resound 21, 23, 46 ULI Abort Switch
example 62
S to program 62
Utility Program 11, 46
Second Shot Switch 76
monitor module configuration example
Self-Optimizing Pre-Alarm 96 V
Sensitivity level for detector 50, 52 VeriFire™ Tools 9, 105, 106, 120
Silence Inhibit Timer 30
Smoothing 94
Soak Timer 26, 27, 58
W
to program (NFPA 16 applications only) Walk Test 50
70 Activation Indications 56
Special Function, See Special Zones Advanced 56
Special Zone Outputs 90–92 Basic
Special Zones audible 55
F0-F9 12, 25 silent 55
FA, FB, FC 12, 25 trouble 55
Special Zone F0, notes and restrictions 90 WARNING
Special Zones F1-F4 27 Disabling a zone disables all input and out-
Status Change 50–57 put devices.... 51
Options 50 Do not rely on disable/enable.....to lock out
Strobes, See System Sensor,Gentex,Wheelock releasing devices. 51
Strobes, special zone If you replace any detector with a different
System clock 50 type... 109
System Message, custom 12, 17, 24 Physically disconnect all releasing devices
SYSTEM NORMAL message 16 ...... 54
System Sensor Strobes, special zone 26, 92 The IRI abort switch will only work if.....
63
Walk Test mode can deactivate fire protec-
T tion... 54
Temporal Code 26, 92 When used for CO2 releasing applica-
Terminal mode supervision enable 30 tions... 58
Threshold Ch.A/B 45 Warning Sounders, releasing applications 89
Time Wheelock Strobes 26
to set time/date for system clock 50, 53 Wheelock Strobes, special zone 92

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 123

Z–Z Index

Z
Zones
Custom label 12, 25
Software Zones 01-99 16
to disable programmed points 50
Z00 general alarm 16, 21, 45, 92, 99, 105

124 NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19

 Manufacturer Warranties and Limitation of Liability
Manufacturer Warranties. Subject to the limitations set forth herein,
Manufacturer warrants that the Products manufactured by it in its
Northford, Connecticut facility and sold by it to its authorized
Distributors shall be free, under normal use and service, from defects
in material and workmanship for a period of thirty six months (36)
months from the date of manufacture (effective Jan. 1, 2009). The
Products manufactured and sold by Manufacturer are date stamped at
the time of production. Manufacturer does not warrant Products that
are not manufactured by it in its Northford, Connecticut facility but
assigns to its Distributor, to the extent possible, any warranty offered
by the manufacturer of such product. This warranty shall be void if a
Product is altered, serviced or repaired by anyone other than
Manufacturer or its authorized Distributors. This warranty shall also
be void if there is a failure to maintain the Products and the systems in
which they operate in proper working conditions.
MANUFACTURER MAKES NO FURTHER WARRANTIES, AND
DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS,
TRADEMARKS, PROGRAMS AND SERVICES RENDERED BY
MANUFACTURER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,
INFRINGEMENT, TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR
ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. MANUFACTURER SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH WHICH MAY
ARISE IN THE COURSE OF, OR AS A RESULT OF, PERSONAL,
COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL USES OF ITS PRODUCTS.
This document constitutes the only warranty made by Manufacturer
with respect to its products and replaces all previous warranties and is
the only warranty made by Manufacturer. No increase or alteration,
written or verbal, of the obligation of this warranty is authorized.
Manufacturer does not represent that its products will prevent any loss
by fire or otherwise.
Warranty Claims. Manufacturer shall replace or repair, at
Manufacturer's discretion, each part returned by its authorized
Distributor and acknowledged by Manufacturer to be defective,
provided that such part shall have been returned to Manufacturer with
all charges prepaid and the authorized Distributor has completed
Manufacturer's Return Material Authorization form. The replacement
part shall come from Manufacturer's stock and may be new or
refurbished. THE FOREGOING IS DISTRIBUTOR'S SOLE AND
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY IN THE EVENT OF A WARRANTY CLAIM.

Warn-HL-08-2009.fm

NFS2-640/E Programming Manual — P/N 52742:L7 5/20/19 125

 World Headquarters
12 Clintonville Road
Northford, CT 06472-1610 USA
203-484-7161
fax 203-484-7118

www.notifier.com
 PREACTION-PAC
with NOTIFIER NFS2-640 RELEASING CONTROL PANEL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/N 10-500003-00B
VERSION 1.0 – OCTOBER 2020

SECTION
5.3
Notifier Manual 52743

NFS2-640 Control Panel

Operations Manual
Fire Alarm Control Panel
NFS2-640
Operations Manual

Document 52743 Rev: L4

06/10/19 ECN: 18-305
 Fire Alarm & Emergency Communication System Limitations
While a life safety system may lower insurance rates, it is not a substitute for life and property insurance!
An automatic fire alarm system—typically made up of smoke Heat detectors do not sense particles of combustion and alarm
detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warning only when heat on their sensors increases at a predetermined rate
devices, and a fire alarm control panel (FACP) with remote notifica- or reaches a predetermined level. Rate-of-rise heat detectors may
tion capability—can provide early warning of a developing fire. Such be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For this reason, the rate-
a system, however, does not assure protection against property of-rise feature of each detector should be tested at least once per
damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. year by a qualified fire protection specialist. Heat detectors are
An emergency communication system—typically made up of an designed to protect property, not life.
automatic fire alarm system (as described above) and a life safety IMPORTANT! Smoke detectors must be installed in the same
communication system that may include an autonomous control room as the control panel and in rooms used by the system for the
unit (ACU), local operating console (LOC), voice communication, connection of alarm transmission wiring, communications, signal-
and other various interoperable communication methods—can ing, and/or power. If detectors are not so located, a developing fire
broadcast a mass notification message. Such a system, however, may damage the alarm system, compromising its ability to report a
does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life fire.
resulting from a fire or life safety event. Audible warning devices such as bells, horns, strobes, speak-
The Manufacturer recommends that smoke and/or heat detectors ers and displays may not alert people if these devices are located
be located throughout a protected premises following the on the other side of closed or partly open doors or are located on
recommendations of the current edition of the National Fire another floor of a building. Any warning device may fail to alert peo-
Protection Association Standard 72 (NFPA 72), manufacturer's ple with a disability or those who have recently consumed drugs,
recommendations, State and local codes, and the alcohol, or medication. Please note that:
recommendations contained in the Guide for Proper Use of System • An emergency communication system may take priority over a
Smoke Detectors, which is made available at no charge to all fire alarm system in the event of a life safety emergency.
installing dealers. This document can be found at http:// • Voice messaging systems must be designed to meet intelligibility
www.systemsensor.com/appguides/. A study by the Federal requirements as defined by NFPA, local codes, and Authorities
Emergency Management Agency (an agency of the United States Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
government) indicated that smoke detectors may not go off in as
many as 35% of all fires. While fire alarm systems are designed to • Language and instructional requirements must be clearly dis-
provide early warning against fire, they do not guarantee warning or seminated on any local displays.
protection against fire. A fire alarm system may not provide timely or • Strobes can, under certain circumstances, cause seizures in
adequate warning, or simply may not function, for a variety of people with conditions such as epilepsy.
reasons: • Studies have shown that certain people, even when they hear a
Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach fire alarm signal, do not respond to or comprehend the meaning
the detectors such as in chimneys, in or behind walls, on roofs, or of the signal. Audible devices, such as horns and bells, can have
on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not different tonal patterns and frequencies. It is the property
sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second-floor owner's responsibility to conduct fire drills and other training
detector, for example, may not sense a first-floor or basement fire. exercises to make people aware of fire alarm signals and
Particles of combustion or “smoke” from a developing fire may instruct them on the proper reaction to alarm signals.
not reach the sensing chambers of smoke detectors because: • In rare instances, the sounding of a warning device can cause
• Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors, walls, chim- temporary or permanent hearing loss.
neys, even wet or humid areas may inhibit particle or smoke A life safety system will not operate without any electrical power. If
flow. AC power fails, the system will operate from standby batteries only
• Smoke particles may become “cold,” stratify, and not reach the for a specified time and only if the batteries have been properly
ceiling or upper walls where detectors are located. maintained and replaced regularly.
• Smoke particles may be blown away from detectors by air out- Equipment used in the system may not be technically compatible
lets, such as air conditioning vents. with the control panel. It is essential to use only equipment listed for
service with your control panel.
• Smoke particles may be drawn into air returns before reaching
the detector. Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises
to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily
The amount of “smoke” present may be insufficient to alarm smoke disabled. For added protection against telephone line failure,
detectors. Smoke detectors are designed to alarm at various levels backup radio transmission systems are recommended.
of smoke density. If such density levels are not created by a devel-
oping fire at the location of detectors, the detectors will not go into The most common cause of life safety system malfunction is inad-
alarm. equate maintenance. To keep the entire life safety system in excel-
lent working order, ongoing maintenance is required per the
Smoke detectors, even when working properly, have sensing limita- manufacturer's recommendations, and UL and NFPA standards. At
tions. Detectors that have photoelectronic sensing chambers tend a minimum, the requirements of NFPA 72 shall be followed. Envi-
to detect smoldering fires better than flaming fires, which have little ronments with large amounts of dust, dirt, or high air velocity require
visible smoke. Detectors that have ionizing-type sensing chambers more frequent maintenance. A maintenance agreement should be
tend to detect fast-flaming fires better than smoldering fires. arranged through the local manufacturer's representative. Mainte-
Because fires develop in different ways and are often unpredictable nance should be scheduled as required by National and/or local fire
in their growth, neither type of detector is necessarily best and a codes and should be performed by authorized professional life
given type of detector may not provide adequate warning of a fire. safety system installers only. Adequate written records of all inspec-
Smoke detectors cannot be expected to provide adequate warning tions should be kept.
of fires caused by arson, children playing with matches (especially Limit-D2-2016
in bedrooms), smoking in bed, and violent explosions (caused by
escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, etc.).

2 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Installation Precautions
Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability:
WARNING - Several different sources of power can be con- Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate
nected to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources of erratically or can be damaged when subjected to lightning induced
power before servicing. Control unit and associated equipment may transients. Although no system is completely immune from lightning
be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules, or inter- transients and interference, proper grounding will reduce suscepti-
connecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to bility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to
install, service, or operate this unit until manuals are read and an increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with
understood. the Technical Services Department if any problems are anticipated
CAUTION - System Re-acceptance Test after Software or encountered.
Changes: To ensure proper system operation, this product must be Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting
tested in accordance with NFPA 72 after any programming opera- circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits.
tion or change in site-specific software. Re-acceptance testing is Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing,
required after any change, addition or deletion of system compo- reaming, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make all
nents, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making modifications,
hardware or wiring. All components, circuits, system operations, or verify that they will not interfere with battery, transformer, or printed
software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% circuit board location.
tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadver-
tently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly Do not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over-tighten-
affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also ing may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact
be tested and proper system operation verified. pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal.

This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49º C/ This system contains static-sensitive components. Always
32-120º F and at a relative humidity 93% ± 2% RH (non-condens- ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any cir-
ing) at 32°C ± 2°C (90°F ± 3°F). However, the useful life of the sys- cuits so that static charges are removed from the body. Use static
tem's standby batteries and the electronic components may be suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed
adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. from the unit.
Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals Units with a touchscreen display should be cleaned with a dry,
be installed in an environment with a normal room temperature of clean, lint free/microfiber cloth. If additional cleaning is required,
15-27º C/60-80º F. apply a small amount of Isopropyl alcohol to the cloth and wipe
Verify that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating clean. Do not use detergents, solvents, or water for cleaning. Do
device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. not spray liquid directly onto the display.
drop from the specified device voltage. Follow the instructions in the installation, operating, and pro-
gramming manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid
damage to the control panel and associated equipment. FACP
operation and reliability depend upon proper installation.
Precau-D2-11-2017

FCC Warning
WARNING: This equipment generates, uses, and can radi- Canadian Requirements
ate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for
accordance with the instruction manual may cause interfer- radiation noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in
ence to radio communications. It has been tested and found the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Depart-
to comply with the limits for Class A computing devices pur- ment of Communications.
suant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which is
designed to provide reasonable protection against such Le present appareil numerique n'emet pas de bruits radio-
interference when devices are operated in a commercial electriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils
environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential numeriques de la classe A prescrites dans le Reglement sur
area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des
will be required to correct the interference at his or her own Communications du Canada.
expense.

HARSH™, NIS™, and NOTI•FIRE•NET™ are all trademarks; and Acclimate® Plus™, eVance®, FlashScan®, FAAST Fire Alarm Aspiration Sensing Technology®,
Honeywell®, Intelligent FAAST®, NOTIFIER®, ONYX®, ONYXWorks®, SWIFT®, VeriFire®, and VIEW® are all registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc.
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. Chrome™ and Google™ are trademarks of Google Inc. Firefox® is a registered
trademark of The Mozilla Foundation.
©2019 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited.

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 3

Software Downloads
In order to supply the latest features and functionality in fire alarm and life safety technology to our customers, we make frequent
upgrades to the embedded software in our products. To ensure that you are installing and programming the latest features, we
strongly recommend that you download the most current version of software for each product prior to commissioning any system.
Contact Technical Support with any questions about software and the appropriate version for a specific application.

Documentation Feedback
Your feedback helps us keep our documentation up-to-date and accurate. If you have any comments or suggestions about our online
Help or printed manuals, you can email us.
Please include the following information:
• Product name and version number (if applicable)
• Printed manual or online Help
• Topic Title (for online Help)
• Page number (for printed manual)
• Brief description of content you think should be improved or corrected
• Your suggestion for how to correct/improve documentation
Send email messages to:
FireSystems.TechPubs@honeywell.com
Please note this email address is for documentation feedback only. If you have any technical issues, please contact Technical
Services.

4 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

 Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Section 1: General Information................................................................................................ 8
1.1: UL 864 Compliance.......................................................................................................................................8
1.1.1: Cautions and Warnings........................................................................................................................8
1.1.2: Typographic Conventions....................................................................................................................8
1.1.3: Supplemental Information ...................................................................................................................9
1.1.4: Shortcuts to Operating Functions ......................................................................................................11
1.2: Introduction to the Control Panel ................................................................................................................11
Section 2: Use of the Controls............................................................................................... 12
2.1: Introduction..................................................................................................................................................12
2.2: System Status Indicator LEDs .....................................................................................................................12
2.3: Control Keys ................................................................................................................................................13
2.3.1: Acknowledge/Scroll Display.............................................................................................................13
2.3.2: Signal Silence ....................................................................................................................................14
2.3.3: System Reset .....................................................................................................................................14
2.3.4: Drill....................................................................................................................................................14
2.3.5: Lamp Test ..........................................................................................................................................15
2.4: Programming Keypad ..................................................................................................................................15
Section 3: Operation of the Control Panel............................................................................ 17
3.1: Overview......................................................................................................................................................17
3.2: Normal Mode of Operation .........................................................................................................................18
3.3: Fire Alarm Mode of Operation ....................................................................................................................18
3.3.1: How the Control Panel Indicates a Fire Alarm..................................................................................18
3.3.2: How to Respond to a Fire Alarm.......................................................................................................19
3.3.3: Interpreting Fire Alarm Type Codes .................................................................................................19
3.4: Mass Notification Mode of Operation .........................................................................................................21
3.4.1: How the Control Panel Indicates a Mass Notification Alarm ...........................................................21
3.4.2: How to Respond to an MN Alarm.....................................................................................................22
3.4.3: How the Control Panel Indicates a Mass Notification Supervisory ..................................................22
3.4.4: How to Respond to an MN Supervisory............................................................................................23
3.4.5: How the Control Panel Indicates a Mass Notification Trouble.........................................................23
3.4.6: How to Respond to an MN Trouble ..................................................................................................24
3.4.7: Interpreting MN Type Codes.............................................................................................................25
3.5: System Trouble Mode of Operation ............................................................................................................25
3.5.1: How the Control Panel Indicates a System Trouble..........................................................................25
3.5.2: How to Respond to a System Trouble ...............................................................................................26
3.6: Security Alarm Mode of Operation .............................................................................................................27
3.6.1: How the Control Panel Indicates a Security Alarm...........................................................................27
3.6.2: How to Respond to a Security Alarm................................................................................................27
3.6.3: Interpreting Security Type Codes......................................................................................................28
3.7: Active Supervisory Signal Mode of Operation............................................................................................28
3.7.1: How the Control Panel Indicates an Active Supervisory ..................................................................28
3.7.2: How to Respond to an Active Supervisory .......................................................................................29
3.7.3: How to Interpret Supervisory Type Codes ........................................................................................29
3.8: Pre-Alarm Warning Mode of Operation ......................................................................................................31
3.8.1: How the Control Panel Indicates a Pre-Alarm Warning ...................................................................31
3.8.2: How to Respond to a Pre-Alarm Warning.........................................................................................31
3.9: Disabled Points Mode of Operation ............................................................................................................32
3.10: Non-Alarm Mode of Operation .................................................................................................................32
3.10.1: Purpose of Non-Alarm Points..........................................................................................................32
3.10.2: How the Control Panel Indicates an Active Fire Control................................................................33
3.10.3: How the Control Panel Indicates an Active Non-Fire Point ...........................................................33
3.11: CO Alarm Mode of Operation ...................................................................................................................33
3.11.1: How the Control Panel Indicates a CO Alarm ................................................................................33

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 5

Table of Contents

3.11.2: How to Respond to a CO Alarm......................................................................................................34

3.11.3: Interpreting CO Alarm/Supervisory Type Codes ............................................................................35
3.12: Active Trouble Monitor Mode of Operation ..............................................................................................35
3.12.1: How the Control Panel Indicates an Active Trouble Monitor .........................................................35
3.12.2: How to Respond to an Active Trouble Monitor ..............................................................................36
3.13: Output Circuit Trouble Mode of Operation ...............................................................................................36
3.13.1: Overview..........................................................................................................................................36
3.13.2: How the Control Panel Indicates a NAC Trouble ...........................................................................37
3.13.3: How the Control Panel Indicates a Control/Relay Trouble .............................................................38
3.13.4: How to Respond to a NAC or Control/Relay Trouble ....................................................................38
3.14: Operation of Special System Timers..........................................................................................................38
3.14.1: What are System Timers? ................................................................................................................38
3.14.2: How to View System Timer Selections...........................................................................................38
3.14.3: How System Timers Work ..............................................................................................................39
3.15: Waterflow Circuit Operation......................................................................................................................40
3.16: Class A and Class X Operation ..................................................................................................................40
Section 4: Read Status Operation......................................................................................... 41
4.1: Introduction..................................................................................................................................................41
4.2: What is Read Status?....................................................................................................................................41
4.2.1: Quick Reference Key Sequences.......................................................................................................41
4.3: Entering Read Status....................................................................................................................................41
4.4: Viewing and Printing a Read Status.............................................................................................................42
4.4.1: How to View Read Status of Devices, Zones, & System Settings ....................................................42
4.4.2: How to View Read Status for Event and Alarm History...................................................................52
4.4.3: How to Print Points, Event and Alarm History .................................................................................53
4.4.4: How to View and Print Hidden Event and Alarm History ................................................................55
Appendix A: Special Zone Operation ................................................................................... 56
A.1: Overview .....................................................................................................................................................56
A.2: Releasing Zones (R0-R9)............................................................................................................................56
A.2.1: Purpose of Releasing Zones..............................................................................................................56
A.2.2: How to View Releasing Zone Selections .........................................................................................57
A.2.3: How Releasing Zones Operate .........................................................................................................57
A.3: Time, Date, and Holiday Functions ............................................................................................................59
A.3.1: Overview...........................................................................................................................................59
A.3.2: How to View Time Control Selections.............................................................................................59
A.3.3: How to View Holiday Function Selections ......................................................................................60
A.3.4: How Time Control and Holiday Functions Work ............................................................................60
A.4: NAC Coding ...............................................................................................................................................61
A.4.1: Overview of Coding..........................................................................................................................61
A.4.2: How to View Coding (F8) Selections...............................................................................................62
A.4.3: How to Respond to an Alarm with Coding.......................................................................................62
A.5: Presignal and Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) Operation ..........................................................................62
A.5.1: Overview...........................................................................................................................................62
A.5.2: What is Presignal and PAS? .............................................................................................................62
A.5.3: How to View Presignal and PAS Selections ....................................................................................64
A.5.4: How to Respond to an Alarm with Presignal Delay Timer (no PAS) ..............................................64
A.5.5: How to Respond to an Alarm with Presignal Delay Timer (PAS selected) .....................................65
Appendix B: Intelligent Detector Functions ........................................................................ 66
Appendix C: Remote Terminal Access................................................................................. 67
C.1: General Description.....................................................................................................................................67
C.2: Operating Modes .........................................................................................................................................67
C.2.1: Local Terminal Mode (LocT) ...........................................................................................................67
C.2.2: Local Monitor Mode (LocM)............................................................................................................68
C.2.3: Remote Terminal Mode (RemT).......................................................................................................68

6 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

 Table of Contents

C.3: Using the CRT-2 for Read Status................................................................................................................69

C.3.1: Overview...........................................................................................................................................69
C.3.2: Accessing Read Status Options ........................................................................................................69
C.3.3: Read Point.........................................................................................................................................70
C.3.4: Display Devices in Alarm or Trouble...............................................................................................70
C.3.5: Display All Programmed Points .......................................................................................................71
C.3.6: Step-through History.........................................................................................................................71
C.3.7: View All History...............................................................................................................................71
C.3.8: Step-through Alarm History .............................................................................................................71
C.3.9: View All Alarm History....................................................................................................................71
C.4: Using the CRT-2 for Alter Status ................................................................................................................72
C.4.1: Overview...........................................................................................................................................72
C.4.2: Accessing Alter Status Options ........................................................................................................72
C.4.3: Enable or Disable Detectors, Modules or Zones ..............................................................................73
C.4.4: Change Alarm and Pre-Alarm Levels...............................................................................................73
C.4.5: Clear Verification Counter................................................................................................................74
C.4.6: Clear the Entire History Buffer.........................................................................................................74
C.4.7: Set the Pre-Alarm for Alert or Action...............................................................................................74
Appendix D: Point and System Troubles Lists .................................................................... 75
D.1: Point (Device) Troubles ..............................................................................................................................75
D.2: System Troubles..........................................................................................................................................76
Index......................................................................................................................................... 80

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 7

 Section 1: General Information

1.1 UL 864 Compliance

• Per the UL Continuing Certification Program, UL 864 9th edition fire alarm control equipment will retain
certification after the rollout of UL 10th edition (12/2/2018).
• Installations of UL 864 10th Edition certified equipment are permitted to use UL864 9th Edition certified
equipment when approved by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
For product compliance, refer to the UL/ULC listing cards located on the UL online certification directory UL
Product iQ:
https://iq.ulprospector.com/en.
About This Manual

1.1.1 Cautions and Warnings

This manual contains cautions and warnings to alert the reader as follows:

CAUTION:
! INFORMATION ABOUT PROCEDURES THAT COULD CAUSE PROGRAMMING ERRORS,
RUNTIME ERRORS, OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.

WARNING:
! INDICATES INFORMATION ABOUT PROCEDURES THAT COULD CAUSE IRREVERSIBLE
DAMAGE TO THE CONTROL PANEL, IRREVERSIBLE LOSS OF PROGRAMMING DATA OR
PERSONAL INJURY.

1.1.2 Typographic Conventions

This manual uses the following typographic conventions as listed in below:

When you see Specifies Example

text in small caps the text as it appears in the MARCH TIME is a selection that appears in the
LCD display or on the control LCD display; or Press the ENTER key
panel

text in quotes a reference to a section or a “Read Status”; specifies the Read Status section
LCD menu screen or menu screen

bold text In body text, a number or Press 1; means to press the number “1” on the
character that you enter keypad

italic text a specific document NFS2-640 Installation Manual

a graphic of the key In a graphic, a key as it

appears on the control panel Press means to press the Escape key

Table 1.1 Typographic Conventions in this Manual

NOTE: In this manual, the term NFS2-640 is used to refer to the NFS2-640 and NFS2-640E
unless otherwise noted.

8 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

UL 864 Compliance General Information

1.1.3 Supplemental Information

The table below provides a list of documents referenced in this manual, as well as documents for
selected other compatible devices. The document series chart (DOC-NOT) provides the current
document revision. A copy of this document is included in every shipment.

Compatible Conventional Devices (Non-addressable) Document Number

Device Compatibility Document 15378

Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) and Main Power Supply Installation Document Number

NFS2-640/E Installation, Operations, and Programming Manuals 52741, 52742, 52743

DVC Digital Voice Command Manual 52411

DVC-RPU Manual 50107425-001

DVC-RPU UL Listing Document 50107424-001

DAL Devices Reference Document 52410

DS-DB Digital Series Distribution Board and Amplifier Manual 53622

DAA2 and DAX Amplifiers Manual 53265

SLC Wiring Manual 51253

Note: For individual SLC Devices, refer to the SLC Wiring Manual

Off-line Programming Utility Document Number

VeriFire® Tools CD help file VERIFIRE-TCD

Cabinets & Chassis Document Number

CAB-3/CAB-4 Series Cabinet Installation Document 15330

Heat Dissipation for Cabinets with Audio Products 53645

Battery/Peripherals Enclosure Installation Document 50295

Power Supplies, Auxiliary Power Supplies & Battery Chargers Document Number

ACPS-2406 Installation Manual 51304

ACPS-610 Installation Manual 53018

APS-6R Instruction Manual 50702

APS2-6R Instruction Manual 53232

CHG-120 Battery Charger Manual 50641

FCPS-24 Field Charger/Power Supply Manual 50059

FCPS-24S6/FCPS-24S8 Field Charger/Power Supply Manual 51977

Networking Document Number

High-Speed NCM Installation Document 54014

Noti•Fire•Net Manual, Network Version 5.0 & Higher 51584

NCM-W/F Installation Document 51533

HS-NFN Installation Document 54013

ONYXWorks™ Workstation Hardware & Software Application: Installation and Operation Manual 52342

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 9

General Information UL 864 Compliance

ONYXWorks™ NFN Gateway (PC Platform) Installation & Operation Manual 52307

ONYXWorks™ NFN Gateway (Embedded Platform) Installation & Operation Manual 52306

NCS ONYX® Network Control Station Manual, Network Version 4.0 & Higher 51658

NCA-2 Network Control Annunciator Manual 52482

NCA Network Control Annunciator Manual 51482

NCD Network Control Display LS10210-051NF-E

System Components Document Number

Annunciator Control System Manual 15842

FDU-80Remote Annunciator Manual 51264

LCD-80 Liquid Crystal Display Remote Annunciator 15037

LCD2-80 Liquid Crystal Display Remote Annunciator 53242

LDM Series Lamp Driver Annunciator Manual 15885

SCS Smoke Control Manual (Smoke and HVAC Control Station) 15712

DPI-232 Direct Panel Interface Manual 51499

TM-4 Installation Document (Reverse Polarity Transmitter) 51490

UDACT Manual (Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter) 50050

UDACT-2 Manual (Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter) 54089

UDACT-2 Listing Document (Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter) 54089LD

AA-Series Audio Amplifiers Manual 52526

ACT-1 Installation Document 52527

ACT-2 Installation Document 51118

FireVoice-25/50, FireVoice-25/50ZS & FireVoice-25/50ZST Manual 52290

FirstCommand Emergency Communication System LS1001-001NF-E

RM-1 Series Remote Microphone Installation Document 51138

RA100Z Remote LED Annunciator Installation Document I56-0508

XP Transponder Manual 15888

XP10-M Installation Document I56-1803

XP5 Series Manual 50786

XP6-C Installation Document I56-1805

XP6-MA Installation Document I56-1806

XP6-R Installation Document I56-1804

FSA-5000(A) FAAST XS Intelligent Aspiration Sensing Technology Document I56-6008

FSA-8000(A) FAAST XM Intelligent Aspiration Sensing Technology Document I56-3903

FSA-20000(A) FAAST XT Intelligent Aspiration Sensing Technology Document I56-3903

FWSG Wireless Manual LS10036-000NF-E

Manual Releasing Disconnect (MRD-1) Product Installation Document LS10231-000GE-E

10 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Introduction to the Control Panel General Information

1.1.4 Shortcuts to Operating Functions

To the left of each program function, you’ll find a keypad shortcut, which contains a
series of keypad entries required to access the program function. All shortcuts start
with the control panel in normal operation.
For example, the keypad shortcut to the left, shows how to enter the Read Status
function with the control panel in normal operation, as well as how to exit the func-
tion.

1.2 Introduction to the Control Panel

The NFS2-640 is a modular, intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) with features suitable for
most applications. Following is a list of operating features available.
• Alarm Verification selection, to reduce unwanted alarms, for intelligent detector points
• Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) and Presignal per NFPA 72
• Silence Inhibit timer and Auto Silence timer for Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs)
• March time/temporal code for Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs)
• Programmable Signal Silence, System Reset, and Alarm Activate functions through monitor
modules
• Automatic time-of-day and day-of-week control functions, with holiday option
• Intelligent Sensing with nine field-adjustable Pre-Alarm levels with programmable
Control-By-Event (CBE)
• Operate automatic smoke or heat detector sounder base on action Pre-Alarm level, with
general evacuation on alarm level
• Security alarm point option with separate audible signal code
• Centralized voice paging and audible alarm signaling options
• Programmable Control-By-Event control of outputs from individual alarm or supervisory
addressable devices
• Networks with other FACPs and equipment for large applications.

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 11

 Section 2: Use of the Controls

2.1 Introduction
Listing of the controls and indicators and where to find information on their use:

Operating Components Covered in

Twelve System Status Indicator LEDs “System Status Indicator LEDs” on page 12

Five Control Keys “Control Keys” on page 13

Programming Keypad “Programming Keypad” on page 15

Status Indicator
LEDs (Refer to
Section 2.2 below)

80-character (2 x 40) Liquid Crystal

Display.(LCD)

Control Keys
(Refer to
page 13).

Function keys
(Refer to page 15

Programming Keypad Cursor movement (arrow) keys, NFS2_640-keypad.wmf

(Refer to page 15 ESC key, and ENTER key. (Refer to page 15

Figure 2.1 NFS2-640 Control Panel Keys and Indicators

2.2 System Status Indicator LEDs

The control panel contains 12 labeled LEDs described in Table 2.1.

Indicator Color When Active To Turn Off

CONTROLS Green LIghts when the panel assumes control of local Turns off automatically when another panel
ACTIVE operation as primary display. assumes control of local operation.

POWER Green Lights when the proper primary AC power is Always lit with AC power applied.
applied. Remains lit while power is applied.

PRE-DISCHARGE Red Lights when any of the releasing zones have been Turns off automatically when no releasing
activated, but have not yet discharged a releasing zones are in the pre-discharge state.
agent.

Table 2.1 Descriptions of System Status Indicator LEDs (1 of 2)

12 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Control Keys Use of the Controls

Indicator Color When Active To Turn Off

DISCHARGE Red Lights when any of the releasing zones are active Turns off automatically when no releasing
and in the process of discharging a releasing agent. zones are discharging a releasing agent.

ABORT ACTIVE Yellow Lights when an abort switch has been activated.* Turns off automatically when an abort switch
has been pressed and its timer is still counting
down.

FIRE ALARM Red Flashes when a non-acknowledged fire alarm Clear the alarm condition and reset the
exists. Lights steadily after you acknowledge the system.
fire alarm.

PRE-ALARM Red Flashes when a non-acknowledged fire Pre-Alarm Clear the pre-alarm condition. (An Action
exists. Lights steadily after you acknowledge the Pre-Alarm requires a system reset.)
Pre-Alarm.

SECURITY Blue Flashes when a non-acknowledged Security alarm Clear the Security alarm condition and reset
exists. Lights steadily after you acknowledge the the system.
alarm.

SUPERVISORY Yellow Flashes when a non-acknowledged Supervisory Clear the condition (Supervisory inputs
condition exists. Lights steadily after you require a system reset if they are latching.
acknowledge the event. Refer to Table 3.4 page 30 for latching
information.).

SYSTEM Yellow Flashes when a non-acknowledged system trouble Clear the trouble condition.
TROUBLE exists. Lights steadily after you acknowledge the
trouble.

SIGNALS Yellow Lights steadily after a fire alarm condition occurs Press SYSTEM RESET. DRILL will also turn off
SILENCED and after you press SIGNAL SILENCE to silence all the LED.
outputs. Flashes to indicate that some silenceable
outputs are on and some are off.

POINT Yellow Lights when one or more system devices are Enable the device or remove the disabled
DISABLED disabled. device from the system program.

Table 2.1 Descriptions of System Status Indicator LEDs (2 of 2)

* Activation of a Manual Release Switch will override Predischarge Delay and override an active Abort
Release Switch, resulting in an immediate agent release.

2.3 Control Keys

The control panel provides five Control Keys as described below:

2.3.1 Acknowledge/Scroll Display

Use the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key to respond to new alarm or trouble signals. When
pressed, the control panel does the following:
• Silences the panel sounder
• Changes all active LED indicators from flashing to steady
• Sends an Acknowledge message to the History buffer and installed printers, CRT-2 terminals,
and FDU-80 annunciators
• Sends a signal to silence the sounders on the FDU-80 and ACS annunciators
You can also press this key to display multiple alarms or troubles. If more than one alarm or trouble
exists, the control panel displays the next alarm or trouble for 3 seconds (or until you press the
ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key), then displays the next alarm or trouble.

NOTE: If Local Control is set to “0” (No Control), the FACP will not respond to ACKNOWLEDGE,
and the piezo will not sound.

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 13

Use of the Controls Control Keys

2.3.2 Signal Silence

Use the SIGNAL SILENCE key to silence the panel sounder and turn off all audio and visual devices
connected to Notification Appliance Circuits. When pressed, the control panel does the following:
• Turns off the panel sounder
• Turns off all silenceable output circuits
• Lights the SIGNALS SILENCED LED
• Sends a SIGNALS SILENCED message to the History buffer and installed printers, CRT-2
terminals, and annunciators
Partial Signal Silence
When some active outputs are silenced and others remain constant, the SIGNALS SILENCED LED
will flash.

NOTE: If Local Control is set to “0” (No Control) or “2” (Partial Control), the FACP will not
respond to SIGNAL SILENCE.

2.3.3 System Reset

Use the SYSTEM RESET key to reset the control panel. When pressed, the control panel does the fol-
lowing:
• Clears ALL active inputs
• Interrupts resettable power
• Sends a “System Reset” message to the History buffer, and installed printers, CRT-2 terminals,
and FDU-80 annunciators
• Decouples from Noti•Fire•Net, if connected, for 60 seconds to allow Cooperative Control By
Event (CCBE) to clear.
If any alarm or trouble exists after you press the SYSTEM RESET key, all NACs, control outputs, and
panel audio and visual indicators will reactivate.

NOTE: Trouble conditions will not clear and re-report upon reset.

NOTE: If Local Control is set to “0” (No Control), the FACP will not respond to SYSTEM RESET.

2.3.4 Drill
Use the DRILL key to manually activate all silenceable outputs and Notification Appliance Circuits.
To prevent accidental activation, you must press the DRILL key for 2 seconds. When pressed, the
control panel does the following:
• Turns on all silenceable NACs
• Turns off the SIGNALS SILENCED LED
• Sends a Manual Evacuate message to the History buffer and installed printers, CRT-2
terminals, and FDU-80 annunciators

NOTE: If Local Control is set to “0” (No Control) or “2” (Partial Control), the FACP will not
respond to DRILL.

14 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Programming Keypad Use of the Controls

2.3.5 Lamp Test

Use the LAMP TEST key to test the control panel LEDs and the panel sounder. When pressed and
held, the control panel does the following:
• Lights all control panel LEDs
• Turns on the panel sounder
• Lights all segments of the LCD display. When the LAMP TEST key is held for longer than five
seconds, the LCD will display the Software Revisions.

2.4 Programming Keypad

The programming keypad includes:
• Function keys: DETECTOR, MODULE, OUTPUT, BATTERY LEVELS, NEXT SELECTION, PREVIOUS
SELECTION, RECALL LAST ENTRY, and INCREMENT NUMBER
• ENTER key
• Cursor movement keys: ESC/LEFT ARROW key, UP key, RIGHT key, DOWN key
• Alphabetic and numeric keys, with LOWER CASE selection key

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 15

Use of the Controls Programming Keypad

Shown below is the Programming Keypad, with descriptions for the keys.

NEXT SELECTION key – press to display the next item in a list

or display the device at the next highest address

PREVIOUS SELECTION key – press to display the previous item

in a list or display the device at the next lowest address

DETECTOR key – press

to select a detector

MODULE key – press to select a

control/relay or monitor module

OUTPUT key – press to select a

Notification Appliance Circuit

Numeric keys – press to enter

numeric characters. Press with
Lower Case key for symbols.

NFS640-keypad3.cdr
Alphabetic keys – press to enter
alphabetic characters BATTERY LEVELS key – press
to check the voltage and
charging status of the
LOWER CASE key – press batteries.
with an alphabetic key to ENTER key – press to complete
enter lower case characters or save an entry. Also press to
enter Programming
SPACE – press to enter a space
Arrow keys – press to move the cursor
one place in the direction of the arrow

ESCkey – press to exit a selection or

move the cursor one place to the left

Figure 2.2 Programming Keypad

16 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

 Section 3: Operation of the Control Panel

3.1 Overview
This section contains instructions for operating the control panel. Listed below are the topics
detailed in this section:

Section Refer to Page

3.2, "Normal Mode of Operation" page 18

3.3, "Fire Alarm Mode of Operation" page 18

3.4, "Mass Notification Mode of Operation" page 21

3.5, "System Trouble Mode of Operation" page 25

3.6, "Security Alarm Mode of Operation" page 27

3.7, "Active Supervisory Signal Mode of Operation" page 28

3.8, "Pre-Alarm Warning Mode of Operation" page 31

3.9, "Disabled Points Mode of Operation" page 32

3.10, "Non-Alarm Mode of Operation" page 32

3.11, "CO Alarm Mode of Operation" page 33

3.12, "Active Trouble Monitor Mode of Operation" page 35

3.12, "Active Trouble Monitor Mode of Operation" page 35

3.13, "Output Circuit Trouble Mode of Operation" page 36

3.14, "Operation of Special System Timers" page 38

3.15, "Waterflow Circuit Operation" page 40

3.16, "Class A and Class X Operation" page 40

This manual also contains information on operating the control panel in the appendixes, listed as
follows:
• Appendix A, “Special Zone Operation”, on page 56
• Appendix B, “Intelligent Detector Functions”, on page 66
• Appendix C, “Remote Terminal Access”, on page 67
• Appendix D, “Point and System Troubles Lists”, on page 75

WARNING:
! WHEN USED FOR CO2 RELEASING APPLICATIONS, OBSERVE PROPER PRECAUTIONS AS
STATED IN NFPA 12. DO NOT ENTER THE PROTECTED SPACE UNLESS PHYSICAL
LOCKOUT AND OTHER SAFETY PROCEDURES ARE FULLY COMPLETED. DO NOT USE
SOFTWARE DISABLE FUNCTIONS IN THE PANEL AS LOCKOUT.

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 17

Operation of the Control Panel Normal Mode of Operation

3.2 Normal Mode of Operation

The system operates in Normal mode when no alarms or troubles exist. In Normal mode, the con-
trol panel displays a System Normal message as follows

SYSTEM NORMAL 01:56P 041515 Sat

Figure 3.1 Sample System Normal Message

In Normal mode, the control panel does the following functions at regular intervals:
• Polls all SLC devices and the four NACs to check for valid replies, alarms, troubles, circuit
integrity, supervisory signals, etc.
• Checks power supply troubles and batteries at 10-second intervals
• Sends a supervisory query on the optional FDU-80 and verifies proper response
• Refreshes the LCD display and the optional FDU-80 display and updates time
• Scans for any keypad or Control Key entries
• Performs a detector automatic test operation
• Tests system memory
• Monitors for microcontroller failure

3.3 Fire Alarm Mode of Operation

3.3.1 How the Control Panel Indicates a Fire Alarm
When an initiating device (detector or monitor module) activates, the control panel does the follow-
ing:
• Produces a steady audible tone
• Activates the System Alarm relay (TB4)
• Flashes the FIRE ALARM LED
• Displays a Type Code that indicates the type of device that activated the fire alarm
• Displays ALARM in the status banner on the LCD display, along with information specific to
the device, as shown below:
Type Code of initiating device Custom descriptor for
Status banner this device location

ALARM: PULL STATION INTENSIVE CARE UNIT

EASTERN WING Z004 03:10P 071415 2M147
Extended 12 character
custom label Time and date of trouble Device address
Zone

Figure 3.2 Sample Fire Alarm Display

• Sends an Alarm message to the LCD display, remote annunciators, History buffer, installed
printers, and CRT-2s.
• Latches the control panel in alarm. (You can not return the control panel to normal operation
until you correct the alarm condition and reset the control panel)
• Initiates any Control-By-Event actions
• Starts timers (such as Silence Inhibit, Auto Silence)
• Activates the general alarm zone (Z00)

18 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

 Fire Alarm Mode of Operation Operation of the Control Panel

3.3.2 How to Respond to a Fire Alarm

If the control panel indicates a fire alarm, you can do the following:
• To silence only the panel sounder:
Press the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key. The local sounder will silence and the FIRE
ALARM LED will change from flashing to steady.
The control panel will send an acknowledge message to the LCD display, remote annunciators,
history buffer, installed printers, and CRT-2s.
• To silence the panel sounder and any activated outputs that are programmed as silenceable:
Press the SIGNAL SILENCE key. The FIRE ALARM LED and SIGNALS SILENCED LED light steady.
The control panel sends an Signal Silenced message to the remote annunciators, history buffer,
installed printers, and CRT-2s. The figure below shows a sample Alarm Silenced message.
Time and date of the
Status banner Alarm Silenced
SIGNALS SILENCED
03:12P 041515 Tue

Figure 3.3 Sample Alarm Silenced Message

1. Check the Alarm message for the location and type of trouble.
2. Correct the condition causing the alarm.
3. When you finish correcting the alarm condition, press the SYSTEM RESET key to return the
control panel to normal operation (indicated by the “System Normal” message). The control
panel sends a “System Normal” message to the LCD display, History buffer and installed
printers, FDU-80 annunciators, and CRT-2s.

3.3.3 Interpreting Fire Alarm Type Codes

The Type Code that displays in the Alarm message indicates the function of the point that initiates
the fire alarm. For example, a monitor module with a PULL STATION Type Code means that the
monitor module connects to a manual pull station. The table below lists the Type Codes that can
appear in an alarm message:

Latching
Type Code Purpose What it does
(Y/N)

Monitor Modules
Blank Y Indicates activation of a device with no description Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
HEAT DETECT Y Indicates activation of a conventional heat detector Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
MONITOR Y Indicates activation of an alarm-monitoring device Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
PULL STATION Y Indicates activation of a manual fire-alarm-activating Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
device, such as a pull station.
RF MON MODUL Y Indicates activation of a wireless alarm-monitoring device Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
RF PULL STA Y Indicates activation of a wireless manual fire-alarm- Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
activating device, such as a pull station
SMOKE CONVEN Y Indicates activation of a conventional smoke detector Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
attached to an FZM-1
SMOKE DETECT Y Indicates activation of a conventional smoke detector Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
attached to an FZM-1
WATERFLOW Y Indicates activation a waterflow alarm switch Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
EVACUATE SW N Performs Drill function. Activates all silenceable outputs

Table 3.1 Fire Alarm Type Codes (1 of 3)

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 19

 Operation of the Control Panel Fire Alarm Mode of Operation

Latching
Type Code Purpose What it does
(Y/N)
MAN. RELEASE Y Indicates activation of a monitor module programmed to a Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
releasing zone to perform a releasing function.
MANREL DELAY Y Indicates activation of a monitor module programmed for Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
a release output
SECOND SHOT N Provides second activation of releasing zone after soak Indicates ACTIVE and activates CBE
timer has expired.
CO MONITOR* Y Indicates activation of a CO conventional detector Activates CBE, does not light an indicator
at the control panel.

Detectors
SMOKE(ION) Y Indicates activation of an ion smoke detector Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
SMOKE(DUCT I)3 Y Indicates activation of a duct ion smoke detector Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
SMOKE(PHOTO) Y Indicates activation of a photo smoke detector Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
RF_PHOTO Y Indicates activation of a wireless photoelectric smoke Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
detector
SMOKE(DUCTP) Y Indicates activation of a duct photo smoke detector Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
1
SMOKE(HARSH) * Y Indicates activation of a HARSH smoke detector Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
SMOKE(LASER) Y Indicates activation of a laser smoke detector Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
SMOKE(DUCTL) Y Indicates activation of a duct laser smoke detector Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
SMOKE(BEAM) Y Indicates activation of a beam smoke detector Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
SMOKE(DUCTL) Y Indicates activation of a duct laser smoke detector Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
AIR REF Y Indicates activation of a laser air reference detector. Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
oF
HEAT Y Indicates activation of a 190 intelligent thermal detector Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
HEAT+ Y Indicates activation of a 190oF adjustable threshold Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
intelligent thermal detector
HEAT(ANALOG) Y 135oF intelligent thermal sensor Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
o
HEAT (ROR) Y 15 F per minute rate-of-rise detector Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
FIRE/CO4 Y Indicates activation of photoelectric, carbon monoxidem Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
and heat detector
FIRE/CO (P SUP)2,4,5 Y Indicates activation of photoelectric, carbon monoxidem Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
and heat detector
FIRE/CO (C SUP)4 Y Indicates activation of photoelectric, carbon monoxidem Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
and heat detector
NOTE: For FIRE/CO detectors:
Detectors programmed as FIRE/CO (P SUP), the heat and CO elements will latch and require a system reset to clear. The Photo element will latch or track,
depending on the FIRE/CO (P SUP) setting. Detectors programmed as FIRE/CO (C SUP), the heat and Photo elements will latch and require a system
reset to clear. The CO element will latch or track depending on the FIRE/CO (C SUP) setting.
Acclimate
SMOKE ACCLIM Y Indicates activation of detector (Acclimate Plus™, FSC- Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
851 IntelliQuad), without freeze warning
SMOKE (ACCL+) Y Indicates activation of detector (Acclimate Plus™, FSC- Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
851 IntelliQuad), with freeze warning
SMOKE MULTI* Y Multisensor smoke detector Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
ACCL (P SUP) ,m b. Y (see Combination Photoelectric/Heat detector. Photo element Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
note activation generates a supervisory condition. FlashScan only. No Pre-Alarm.
below)

ACCL+ (P SUP) Y (see Combination Photoelectric/Heat detector with low Lights FIRE ALARM LED and activates CBE
note temperature warning. Photo element activation generates FlashScan only. No Pre-Alarm.
below) a supervisory condition.

Table 3.1 Fire Alarm Type Codes (2 of 3)

20 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

 Mass Notification Mode of Operation Operation of the Control Panel

Latching
Type Code Purpose What it does
(Y/N)
NOTE: For ACCL/ACCL+ detectors:
Detectors programmed as ACCL (P SUP) or ACCL+ (P SUP), the heat element will latch and require a system reset to clear. The Photo
element will latch or track, depending on the ACCL (P SUP) latching setting.

PHOTO/CO4* Y Indicates activation of the Photo, Heat, or CO element of a Lights FIRE ALARM LED for photo and heat,
detector. no LED will light for a CO alarm. Photo and
heat will activate CBE, CO alarm activates
special function zone FC and sixth CBE
zone only (sixth CBE zone programmable
via VeriFire Tools)
PHOTO/CO Y Indicates activation of the Photo, Heat or CO element of a Lights FIRE ALARM LED for heat, no LED will
(P SUP)*,2,4,5 detector. light for a CO alarm, supervisory LED will
light for photo alarm, heat and photo will
activate CBE, CO alarm activates special
function zone FC and sixth CBE zone only
(sixth CBE zone programmable via VeriFire
Tools). FlashScan only. No Pre-Alarm
PHOTO/CO (C SUP)*,4 Y Indicates activation of the Photo, Heat or CO element of a Lights FIRE ALARM LED for heat and photo
detector. alarms, will light supervisory LED for CO
alarm, photo and heat alarms will activate
CBE, CO alarm will activate sixth CBE
zone only (sixth CBE zone programmable
via VeriFire Tools). FlashScan only. No Pre-
Alarm.
NOTE: For Photo/CO detectors:
Detectors programmed as P/CO (P SUP), the heat and CO elements will latch and require a system reset to clear. The Photo element will latch or track, depending on the
Photo/CO (Photo SUP) setting. Detectors programmed as P/CO (C SUP), the heat and Photo elements will latch and require a system reset to clear. The CO element will
latch or track depending on the Photo/CO (CO SUP) setting. For Photo/CO and CO Detectors programmed as Photo/CO (P SUP) or CO (CO SUP) will either latch
and track, depending on the setting.

* FlashScan only
1 CLIP Mode only
2 Requires approval of AHJ.
3 Not suitable for Canadian applications.
4 LED representation of a CO alarm may be performed using an ACS annunciator.
5 Photo element can be programmed as latching or tracking for all Photo/CO devices programmed as this type ID via VeriFire Tools.

Table 3.1 Fire Alarm Type Codes (3 of 3)

3.4 Mass Notification Mode of Operation

3.4.1 How the Control Panel Indicates a Mass Notification Alarm
When an initiating device activates, the control panel does the following:
• Produces a steady audible tone
• Does not activate any alarm relays or devices programmed as Alarm Pending or General
Pending
• Does not flash any panel LEDs
• Displays a Type Code that indicates the type of device that activated the MN alarm
• Displays MN ALARM in the status banner on the LCD display, along with information specific
to the device, as shown below:
Type Code of initiating device Custom descriptor for
Status banner this device location

MN ALM: ECS/MN MON SECURITY STATION

MAIN BLG Z004 03:17P 041515 2M147
Extended 12 character
custom label Time and date of trouble Device address
Zone

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 21

Operation of the Control Panel Mass Notification Mode of Operation

Figure 3.4 Sample MN Alarm Display

• Sends an Alarm message to the LCD display, remote annunciators, History buffer, installed
printers, and CRT-2s.
• Latches the control panel in MN alarm. (You can not return the control panel to normal
operation until you correct the alarm condition and reset the control panel)
• Initiates any Control-By-Event actions
• Activates special zone ZFD (Not applicable for First Command applications)
• Sends an Alarm message to the proprietary receiver via the network, if applicable

3.4.2 How to Respond to an MN Alarm

If the control panel indicates an MN alarm, you can do the following:
• To silence only the panel sounder:
Press the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key. The local sounder will silence. The control
panel will send an acknowledge message to the LCD display, remote annunciators, history
buffer, installed printers, and CRT-2s. If multiple MN alarms are present on the fire panel, the
ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key must be pressed for each alarm.
• To silence the panel sounder and any activated outputs that are programmed as silenceable:
Press the SIGNAL SILENCE key. The FIRE ALARM LED and SIGNALS SILENCED LED light steady.
The control panel sends an Signal Silenced message to the remote annunciators, history buffer,
installed printers, and CRT-2s. The figure below shows a sample Alarm Silenced message.
Time and date of the
Status banner Alarm Silenced
SIGNALS SILENCED
03:12P 041515 Tue

Figure 3.5 Sample MN Alarm Silenced Message

1. Correct the condition causing the MN alarm.

2. When you finish correcting the MN alarm condition, press the SYSTEM RESET key to return the
control panel to normal operation (indicated by the “System Normal” message). The control
panel sends a “System Normal” message to the LCD display, History buffer and installed
printers, FDU-80 annunciators, and CRT-2s.

3.4.3 How the Control Panel Indicates a Mass Notification

Supervisory
When an initiating device activates, the control panel does the following:
• Produces a warbling audible tone
• Activates any supervisory relays and devices programmed as Supervisory Pending, General
Supervisory or General Pending
• Flashes the panel’s Supervisory LED
• Displays a Type Code that indicates the type of device that activated the MN supervisory

22 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Mass Notification Mode of Operation Operation of the Control Panel

• Displays MN SUP in the status banner on the LCD display, along with information specific to
the device, as shown below:
Type Code of initiating device Custom descriptor for
Status banner this device location

MN SUP: ECS/MN SUPL SECURITY STATION

MAIN BLG Z004 03:17P 041515 2M147
Extended 12 character
custom label Time and date of trouble Device address
Zone

Figure 3.6 Sample MN Supervisory Display

• Sends an MN Supervisory message to the LCD display, remote annunciators, History buffer,
installed printers, and CRT-2s.
• Initiates any Control-By-Event actions
• Activates special zone ZFE
• Sends an MN Supervisory message to the proprietary receiver via the network, if applicable

3.4.4 How to Respond to an MN Supervisory

If the control panel indicates an MN supervisory, you can do the following:
1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key to silence the panel sounder and switch the
SUPERVISORY LED from flashing to steady. An Acknowledge message is sent to the remote
annunciators, history buffer, installed printers, and CRTs. Pressing the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL
DISPLAY will acknowledge all MN supervisory events on the fire panel.
2. Correct the condition that activated the MN supervisory point.
3. For a Latching event, press the system reset key to return the control panel to normal operation.
For a Non-latching event, the panel will return to normal operation once the supervisory
condition is corrected.
The control panel sends a “System Normal” message to the LCD display, History buffer and
installed printers, remote annunciators, and CRT-2s.

3.4.5 How the Control Panel Indicates a Mass Notification Trouble

When an initiating device activates, the control panel does the following:
• Produces a pulsed audible tone
• Activates any trouble relays and devices programmed as Trouble Pending, General Trouble or
General Pending
• Flashes the panel’s Trouble LED
• Displays a Type Code that indicates the type of device that with a trouble
• Displays MN TBL in the status banner on the LCD display, along with information specific to
the device, as shown below:
Type Code of initiating device Custom descriptor for
Status banner this device location

MN TBL: ECS/MN TROUBLE MON SECURITY POST

MAIN BLG SHORT 03:17P 041515 2M147
Extended 12 character
custom label Time and date of trouble Device address
Zone

Figure 3.7 Sample MN Trouble Display

• Sends an MN trouble message to the LCD display, remote annunciators, History buffer,
installed printers, and CRT-2s.

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 23

Operation of the Control Panel Mass Notification Mode of Operation

• Initiates any Control-By-Event actions

• Activates special zone ZFF
• Sends an MN Trouble message to the proprietary receiver via the network, if applicable

3.4.6 How to Respond to an MN Trouble

If the control panel indicates an MN trouble, you can do the following:
1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key to silence the panel sounder and switch the
TROUBLE LED from flashing to steady. An Acknowledge message is sent to the remote
annunciators, history buffer, installed printers, and CRTs. Pressing the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL
DISPLAY will acknowledge all MN trouble events on the fire panel.
2. Check the trouble message for location and type of trouble.
3. Correct the condition causing the trouble condition. If the trouble clears, the panel sends a
Clear Trouble message to the History Buffer and installed printers, annunciators and CRT-2s.
(troubles will clear from the fire panel even if they are not acknowledged.)
4. If no other events are present on the fire panel, a “System Normal” message is sent to the LCD
display, remote annunciators, history buffer, installed printers, and CRT-2s and the fire panel
returns to normal operation.

24 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

 System Trouble Mode of Operation Operation of the Control Panel

3.4.7 Interpreting MN Type Codes

The Type Code that displays in the fire panel message indicates the function of the point that initi-
ates the activation. The table below lists the Type Codes that can appear in an mass notification
message:

Latching
Type Code Purpose What it does
(Y/N)

Monitor Modules
ECS/MN MONITOR1 Y Indicates activation of a mass notification device Activates CBE, does not light any LEDs,
overrides existing fire event2, shuts off
silenceable outputs and all fire activated
strobes
ECS/MN SUPL1 Y Indicates activation of a mass notification device Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates
CBE
ECS/MN SUPT1 N Indicates activation of a mass notification device Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates
CBE
ECS/MN TROUBLE N Indicates trouble on a mass notification device Monitors mass notification devices. Will
MON1 generate a trouble condition for both open
and short conditions.
1This
Type Code is not compatible with First Command applications.
Table 3.2 Mass Notification Type Codes

3.5 System Trouble Mode of Operation

3.5.1 How the Control Panel Indicates a System Trouble
The system goes into system trouble when the control panel detects an electrical fault. If no fire
alarms exist, the control panel does the following:
• Produces a pulsed audible tone
• Activates the Trouble relay (TB4)
• Flashes the SYSTEM TROUBLE LED
• Displays a Type Code that indicates the type of device with a trouble.
• Displays TROUBL in the status banner on the LCD display as well as the type of trouble and
information specific to the device, as shown in Figure 3.8 below.
• Sends a Trouble message to the LCD display, remote annunciators, history buffer, installed
printers, and CRT-2s.

NOTE: If a fire alarm exists when a trouble exists, the SYSTEM TROUBLE LED lights, but the Alarm
message appears in the LCD display.

Typical Trouble message that appears on the LCD display:

Type of event Type of device Custom descriptor for

this device location

TROUBL PULL STATION INTENSIVE CARE UNIT

EASTERN WING INVREP 03:14P 041415 2M147

Extended 12 character Device address

Type of trouble Time and date of trouble
custom label

Figure 3.8 Sample Trouble Message

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 25

Operation of the Control Panel System Trouble Mode of Operation

3.5.2 How to Respond to a System Trouble

If the control panel indicates a trouble, you can do the following:
1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key to silence the panel sounder and switch the
SYSTEM TROUBLE LED from flashing to steady—regardless of the number of troubles, alarms,
security and supervisory signals.

NOTE: Pressing the SIGNAL SILENCE key when only troubles exist, gives the same result as
pressing the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key. The SIGNALS SILENCED LED does not light unless
an alarm exists in the system.

2. The control panel sends an Acknowledge message to the remote annunciators, history buffer,
installed printers, and CRT-2s.
Status banner Time and date of Acknowledge

ACKNOWLEDGE
03:15P 041515 Tue

Figure 3.9 Sample Acknowledge Message

3. Check the trouble message for the location and type of trouble.
TROUBL MONITOR MODULE ADDRESS M021 Z00 OPEN CIRCUIT 08:10A 042115 2M021
TROUBL MONITOR MODULE ADDRESS M022 Z00 OPEN CIRCUIT 08:12A 042115 2M022

Figure 3.10 Sample Trouble Messages on CRT-2 or Printer

4. Correct the condition causing the trouble. If the trouble clears, the control panel sends a Clear
Trouble message to the History buffer and installed printers FDU-80 annunciators, and
CRT-2s.
If all troubles clear and no supervisory signals or fire alarms exist, the control panel does the fol-
lowing:
• Returns to Normal operation (indicated by the “System Normal” message)
• Sends a “System Normal” message to the LCD display, History buffer and installed printers,
FDU-80 annunciators, and CRT-2s
• Restores troubles automatically - even if troubles are not acknowledged
If multiple trouble conditions exist in the system, the LCD and optional CRT-2 and FDU-80s auto-
matically step through each trouble every 3 seconds in the following order:
1. Alarms, in order of address
2. Supervisory, in order of address
3. Troubles, in order of address
Press the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key and the display stops on the current trouble event
for 1 minute, then begins to automatically step through remaining troubles. To manually step
through remaining troubles, press the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key.
Refer to Appendix D, “Point and System Troubles Lists”, on page 75 for explanations of troubles
that appear on the display.

26 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Security Alarm Mode of Operation Operation of the Control Panel

3.6 Security Alarm Mode of Operation

3.6.1 How the Control Panel Indicates a Security Alarm
The system goes into Security mode when a monitor module point programmed with a Security
Type Code activates. If no fire alarm exists, the control panel does the following:
• Produces a warbling audible tone
• Turns on the Security relay (TB5)
• Flashes the SECURITY LED (blue)
• Displays a Type Code that indicates the type of security alarm being generated
• Displays ACTIVE in the status banner on the control panel, along with information specific to
the device
• Sends a Security message to the LCD display, remote annunciators, history buffer, installed
printers, and CRT-2s.
• Sends a Security message to the proprietary receiver via the network, if applicable.

NOTE: If a fire alarm exists, and there are silenced alarms (the SIGNALS SILENCED LED is
lighted), a Security alarm will resound the panel sounder.

A Typical security message that appears on LCD display:

Status Banner Type Code Custom descriptor for
this device location

ACTIVE SECURITY INTENSIVE CARE UNIT

EASTERN WING Z004 03:17P 041515 2M147

Extended 12 character Device address

custom label Zone Time and date of trouble

Figure 3.11 Sample Security Alarm Message

3.6.2 How to Respond to a Security Alarm

A Security Type Code latches the control panel. To return the control panel to normal operation,
you must correct the condition causing the security condition, then reset the control panel. If the
control panel indicates a security alarm, take the following action:

NOTE: If a fire alarm exists, and there are silenced alarms (the SIGNALS SILENCED LED is
lighted), a Security alarm will resound the panel sounder.

1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL display key to silence the panel sounder and switch the
SECURITY LED from flashing to steady—regardless of the number of troubles, alarms,
supervisory, and security signals. The control panel sends a Security message to the remote
annunciators, history buffer, installed printers, and CRT-2s.
2. Correct the condition that activated the Security point.
3. When you finish correcting the Security condition, press the SYSTEM RESET key to return the
control panel to normal operation (indicated by the “System Normal” message). The control
panel sends a “System Normal” message to the LCD display, remote annunciators, history
buffer, installed printers, and CRT-2s.

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 27

Operation of the Control Panel Active Supervisory Signal Mode of Operation

3.6.3 Interpreting Security Type Codes

The Type Code that displays in the security alarm message indicates the type of security alarm
being generated by the monitor module that initiates the alarm. For example, a monitor module
with a Type Code of AREA MONITOR indicates an intruder in a protected premises area. The table
below lists the Type Codes that can appear in a security alarm message.

Monitor Modules
Latching
Type Code Purpose What it does
(Y/N)
AREA MONITOR Y Monitors area surveillance equipment, such Lights SECURITY LED, activates CBE
as motion detectors
SECURITY Y Monitors security switches for tampering Lights SECURITY LED, activates CBE
SYS MONITOR Y Monitors critical equipment for security Lights SECURITY LED, activates CBE

Table 3.3 Security Type Codes

3.7 Active Supervisory Signal Mode of Operation

3.7.1 How the Control Panel Indicates an Active Supervisory
The system goes into Supervisory mode when a monitor module point programmed with a Supervi-
sory type code activates. When a Supervisory point activates, the control panel does the following:
• Produces a warbling audible tone
• Turns on the Supervisory relay (TB5)
• Flashes the SUPERVISORY LED (yellow)
• Displays one of the Type Codes listed in Table 3.4.
• Displays ACTIVE in the status banner on the control panel, along with information specific to
the device
• Sends a Supervisory message to the LCD display, remote annunciators, history buffer, installed
printers, and CRT-2s.

NOTE: If a fire alarm exists, and there are silenced alarms (the SIGNALS SILENCED LED is
lighted), a Supervisory alarm will resound the panel sounder.

A Typical Supervisory message that appears on LCD display:

Status Banner Type Code Custom descriptor for
this device location

ACTIVE TAMPER INTENSIVE CARE UNIT

EASTERN WING Z004 03:19P 041515 2M147

Extended 12 character Device address

Zone Time and date of trouble
custom label

Figure 3.12 Sample Supervisory Signal Message

28 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Active Supervisory Signal Mode of Operation Operation of the Control Panel

3.7.2 How to Respond to an Active Supervisory

If a Latching Supervisory Type Code Displays
Some Supervisory Type Codes latch the control panel (Refer to Table 3.4 for a list of these type
codes). To return the control panel to normal operation, you must correct the condition causing the
supervisory condition, then reset the control panel. Take the following action:

NOTE: If a fire alarm exists, and there are silenced alarms (the SIGNALS SILENCED LED is
lighted), a Supervisory alarm will resound the panel sounder.

1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key to silence the panel sounder and switch the
SUPERVISORY LED from flashing to steady—regardless of the number of troubles, alarms, and
supervisory signals. The control panel sends a Supervisory message to the remote
annunciators, history buffer, installed printers, and CRT-2s.
2. Correct the condition that activated the supervisory point.
3. When you finish correcting the latching supervisory condition, press the SYSTEM RESET key to
return the control panel to normal operation (indicated by the “System Normal” message). The
control panel sends a “System Normal” message to the LCD display, remote annunciators,
history buffer, installed printers, and CRT-2s.
If Non-latching Type Code Displays
Some Supervisory Type Codes do not latch the control panel. (Refer to Table 3.4 for a list of these
type codes). The control panel automatically returns to normal operation, when you correct the con-
dition that activates the supervisory point. If the control panel indicates a non-latching supervisory
point, take the following action:

NOTE: If a fire alarm exists, and there are silenced alarms (the SIGNALS SILENCED LED is
lighted), a Supervisory alarm will resound the panel sounder.

1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key to silence the panel sounder and switch the
SUPERVISORY LED from flashing to steady—regardless of the number of troubles, alarms, and
supervisory signals. The control panel sends a Supervisory message to the remote
annunciators, history buffer, installed printers, and CRT-2s.
2. Correct the condition that activated the supervisory point.
3. The control panel automatically returns to normal operation (indicated by the “System
Normal” message) and the control panel sends a “System Normal” message to the LCD
display, remote annunciators, history buffer, installed printers, and CRT-2s.

3.7.3 How to Interpret Supervisory Type Codes

The Type Code that displays in the Supervisory message indicates the function of the point that ini-
tiates the Supervisory. For example, a monitor module with a TAMPER Type Code means that the
monitor module connects to a tamper switch.
Type Codes that can appear in an Supervisory message:

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 29

 Operation of the Control Panel Active Supervisory Signal Mode of Operation

Monitor Modules
Latching
Type Code Purpose What it does
(Y/N)
WATERFLOW S Y Indicates supervisory condition for activated waterflow switch Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
RF SUPERVSRY N Monitors a radio frequency device Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
LATCH SUPERV Y Indicates latching supervisory condition Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
TRACK SUPERV N Indicates tracking supervisory condition Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
SPRINKLR SYS Y Indicates activation of sprinkler system Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
TAMPER Y Indicates activation of tamper switch Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
Detectors
SUP.T(DUCTI) N Ion detector that indicates supervisory (non-alarm) condition Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
SUP.L(DUCTI) Y Ion detector that indicates supervisory (non-alarm) condition Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
SUPT(DUCTL) N Laser detector that indicates supervisory (non-alarm) condition Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
SUPL(DUCTL) Y Laser detector that indicates supervisory (non-alarm) condition Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
SUP.T(DUCTP) N Photo detector that indicates supervisory (non-alarm) condition Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
SUP.L(DUCTP) Y Photo detector that indicates supervisory (non-alarm) condition Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
SUPT(PHOTO) N Photo detector that indicates supervisory (non-alarm) condition Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
SUP.L(PHOTO) Y Photo detector that indicates supervisory (non-alarm) condition Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
SUP.T(ION) N Ion detector that indicates supervisory (non-alarm) condition Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
SUP.L(ION) Y Ion detector that indicates supervisory (non-alarm) condition Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
SUP.L(LASER) Y Laser detector that indicates supervisory (non-alarm) condition Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
SUP.T(LASER) N Laser detector that indicates supervisory (non-alarm) condition Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
P/CO (C SUP)* Y Indicates activation of the Photo, Heat or CO element of a Activation of the Heat or Photo elements will
detector. LED representation of a CO alarm may be performed light an indicator at the control panel.
using an ACS annunciator. Activation of the CO element will light the
SUPERVISORY LED. Activates CBE.
P/CO (P SUP)* Y Indicates activation of the Photo, Heat or CO element of a Activation of the Heat element will light an
detector. FlashScan only. No Pre-Alarm. Requires approval of indicator at the control panel.
AHJ. LED representation of a CO alarm may be performed Activation of the CO element will not light
using an ACS annunciator. Photo element can be programmed and indicator at the control panel.
as latching or tracking for all Photo/CO devices programmed Activation of the Photo element will light the
as this type ID via VeriFire Tools. SUPERVISORY LED. Activates CBE.

NOTE: For Photo/CO detectors:

Detectors programmed as P/CO (P SUP), the heat and CO elements will latch and require a system reset to clear. The Photo element will
latch or track, depending on the Photo/CO (Photo SUP) setting. Detectors programmed as P/CO (C SUP), the heat and Photo elements will
latch and require a system reset to clear. The CO element will latch or track depending on the Photo/CO (CO SUP) setting. For Photo/CO
and CO Detectors programmed as Photo/CO (P SUP) or CO (CO SUP) will either latch and track, depending on the setting.

ACCL (P SUP) Y (see Combination Photoelectric/Heat detector. Photo element Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
note activation generates a supervisory condition FlashScan only.
below) No Pre-Alarm.

ACCL+ (P SUP) Y (see Combination Photoelectric/Heat detector with low temperature Lights SUPERVISORY LED and activates CBE
note warning. Photo element activation generates a supervisory
below) condition. FlashScan only. No Pre-Alarm.

NOTE: For ACCL/ACCL+ detectors:

Detectors programmed as ACCL (P SUP) or ACCL+ (P SUP), the heat element will latch and require a system reset to clear. The Photo
element will latch or track, depending on the ACCL (P SUP) latching setting.

*FlashScan only

Table 3.4 Supervisory Type Codes

30 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Pre-Alarm Warning Mode of Operation Operation of the Control Panel

3.8 Pre-Alarm Warning Mode of Operation

3.8.1 How the Control Panel Indicates a Pre-Alarm Warning
The control panel activates a Pre-Alarm Warning if a detector exceeds the programmed Pre-Alarm
Alert or Action level. When a detector activates a Pre-Alarm, the control panel does the following:
• Pulses the panel sounder
• Flashes the PRE-ALARM LED
• Activates the Pre-Alarm zone (F9)
• Sends a Pre-Alarm message to the LCD display, History buffer and installed printers, FDU-80
annunciators, and CRT-2s
• Displays a PREALARM status banner, the Type Code of the detector, and the Pre-Alarm level
(Alert or Action) on the LCD display, along with information specific to the device as shown
in Figure 3.13.

3.8.2 How to Respond to a Pre-Alarm Warning

Pre-Alarm Alert and Action Levels
The Pre-Alarm function is a programmable option which determines the system’s response to
real-time detector sensing values above the programmed setting. Use the Pre-Alarm function if you
want to get an early warning of incipient or potential fire conditions. The Pre-Alarm function pro-
vides one of two levels of Pre-Alarm as follows:

NOTE: For detailed information on Pre-Alarm applications, refer to the NFS2-640 Programming
Manual.

• Alert – a non-latching condition that causes a Pre-Alarm when a detector reaches the
programmed Pre-Alarm level.
• Action – a latching condition that causes a Pre-Alarm when a detector reaches the programmed
Pre-Alarm level.
Responding to a Pre-Alarm Warning
The Pre-Alarm screen display is the same for both alert and action conditions. Following is a sam-
ple screen for a Pre-Alarm message.

Status banner Type Code Custom descriptor for

this device location
Extended 12
character PREALM SMOKE(PHOTO) INTENSIVE CARE UNIT
custom label EASTERN WING 055%/4 03:20P 041515 1D147
Shows the detector has reached 55% of the Time and date of trouble Device address
programmed Pre-Alarm level. The 55% is a
real-time display and tracks smoke levels Detector programmed for a Pre-Alarm level of 4

Figure 3.13 Sample of an Alert Pre-Alarm Message

An Alert Pre-Alarm automatically restores to normal when the detector sensitivity, programmable
to one of nine settings, drops below the programmed Alert level. Zone F09 automatically clears
when no Pre-Alarm conditions exist.

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 31

Operation of the Control Panel Disabled Points Mode of Operation

An Action Pre-Alarm latches until you reset the system - even if the detector sensitivity drops
below the Action level. Zone F09 activates - but Zone Z00 (general alarm) and the trouble and
alarm relays do not activate. The fifth zone programmed, not the first four, in the detector’s CBE
activates. A subsequent alarm condition for this detector clears the Action indication from the LCD
display.
Interpreting Pre-Alarm Type Codes
The Type Code that displays in the Pre-Alarm warning indicates the function of the point that initi-
ates the Pre-Alarm warning. Refer to the Detectors section of Table 3.1 for the Type Codes that can
appear in a Pre-Alarm warning, and for descriptions of those Type Codes.

3.9 Disabled Points Mode of Operation

The control panel indicates disabled points by displaying a screen for each disabled detector, moni-
tor module, and control/relay module. Disabled points do not cause an alarm or any Con-
trol-by-Event activity. If more than one point is disabled, the control panel displays by priority,
mimicking the alarms.

CAUTION:
! DISABLING A ZONE DISABLES ALL INPUT AND OUTPUT DEVICES ASSOCIATED WITH THE
ZONE.

When one or more points are disabled, the control panel does the following:
• Holds all disabled output points in the off-state
• Flashes the SYSTEM TROUBLE LED
• Lights the POINT DISABLED LED
• Sends a Disabled Point message to the LCD display, History buffer and installed printers,
FDU-80 annunciators, and CRT-2s
• Displays a message for each disabled point

Disable message Custom descriptor for

this device location
Type Code of the disabled device

DISABL TAMPER INTENSIVE CARE UNIT

EASTERN WING 03:20P 041515 1M159

Extended 12 character Time and date of trouble Address of the

custom label disabled device

Figure 3.14 Sample Disabled Point Message

3.10 Non-Alarm Mode of Operation

3.10.1 Purpose of Non-Alarm Points
Non-Alarm points are addressable monitor modules programmed with one of the Non-Alarm Type
Codes listed in Table 3.5. Non-Alarm points, except Non-Fire, operate like monitored system func-
tions that can produce troubles—but with the differences shown in the following sections.

Monitor Modules
Latching
Type Code Purpose What it does
(Y/N)
ACCESS MONTR N Used for monitoring building access Activates CBE

Table 3.5 Non-Alarm Type Codes (1 of 2)

32 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

CO Alarm Mode of Operation Operation of the Control Panel

ACK SWITCH N Performs Acknowledge function Silences panel sounder, gives an

Acknowledge message on the panel LCD
ALLCALL PAGE N Activates all speaker circuits for paging Activates speakers
DRILL SWITCH N Performs Drill function (Not for use in Canadian Activates silenceable outputs
applications.)
FIRE CONTROL N Used for air handler shutdown, intended to override Activates CBE, does NOT light an
normal operating automatic functions indicator at the control panel
NON-FIRE N Used for energy management or other non-fire Activates CBE, does NOT light an
situations. Does not affect operation of the control panel indicator at the control panel
PAS INHIBIT N Inhibits Positive Alarm Sequence Inhibits Positive Alarm Sequence
RESET SWITCH N Performs Reset function Resets control panel
SIL SWITCH N Performs Signal Silence function Turns off all activated silenceable outputs
TELE PAGE N Performs function of Page Button on FFT-7 Allows remote paging to a fire area
ABORT SWITCH N Indicates Active at the panel Aborts activation of a releasing zone

Table 3.5 Non-Alarm Type Codes (2 of 2)

3.10.2 How the Control Panel Indicates an Active Fire Control

Activation of a FIRE CONTROL point causes the control panel to do the following:
• Initiate the monitor module Control-by-Event
• Send a message to the LCD display, History buffer and installed printers, FDU-80
annunciators, and CRT-2s
• Display an ACTIVE status banner and FIRE CONTROL Type Code on the LCD display, along with
information specific to the device
Status banner
Type Code

ACTIVE FIRE CONTROL INTENSIVE CARE UNIT

EASTERN WING Z055 08:59a 071415 1M044

Zone affected by the Fire Control

Figure 3.15 Sample Fire Control Point Display

3.10.3 How the Control Panel Indicates an Active Non-Fire Point

Non-Fire point operation does not affect control panel operation, nor does it display a message at
the panel LCD. Activation of a Non-Fire point activates CBE—but does not cause any indication
on the control panel. For example, you can program a Non-Fire point to turn lights in a zone to a
lower setting when activated. In this case, when the point activates the control panel activates the
point’s CBE to turn the lights down without any audio or visual indication on the control panel.

3.11 CO Alarm Mode of Operation

3.11.1 How the Control Panel Indicates a CO Alarm
When an initiating device (detector or monitor module) activates due to a CO alarm event, the con-
trol panel does the following:
• Produces a pulsed audible tone
• Displays a CO alarm event that indicates the type of device that activated the fire alarm

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 33

Operation of the Control Panel CO Alarm Mode of Operation

• Displays ALARM in the status banner on the LCD display, along with information specific to
the device, as shown below:
CO Alarm Indication Custom descriptor for
Status banner this device location

ALARM: CO INTENSIVE CARE UNIT

EASTERN WING Z004 03:10P 031415 2M147
Extended 12 character
custom label Time and date of trouble Device address
Zone

Figure 3.16 Sample CO Alarm Display

• Sends a CO Alarm message to the LCD display, remote annunciators, History buffer, installed
printers, and CRT-2s.
• Latches the control panel in CO alarm. (You can not return the control panel to normal
operation until you correct the CO alarm condition and reset the control panel)
• Initiates any Control-By-Event actions—activiates ZFC.

3.11.2 How to Respond to a CO Alarm

If the control panel indicates a CO alarm, you can do the following:
• To silence only the panel sounder:
Press the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key. The local sounder will silence.
The control panel will send an acknowledge message to the LCD display, remote annunciators,
history buffer, installed printers, and CRT-2s.
• To silence the panel sounder and any activated outputs that are programmed as silenceable:
Press the SIGNAL SILENCE key. The SIGNALS SILENCED LED will light steady.
The control panel sends an Signal Silenced message to the remote annunciators, history buffer,
installed printers, and CRT-2s. The figure below shows a sample Alarm Silenced message.
Time and date of the
Status banner Alarm Silenced
SIGNALS SILENCED
03:12P 031515 Tue

Figure 3.17 Sample Alarm Silenced Message

1. Check the Alarm message for the location and type of trouble.
2. Correct the condition causing the CO alarm.
3. When you finish correcting the CO alarm condition, press the SYSTEM RESET key to return the
control panel to normal operation (indicated by the “System Normal” message). The control
panel sends a “System Normal” message to the LCD display, History buffer and installed
printers, FDU-80 annunciators, and CRT-2s.

34 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

 Active Trouble Monitor Mode of Operation Operation of the Control Panel

3.11.3 Interpreting CO Alarm/Supervisory Type Codes

The Type Code that displays in the CO Alarm message indicates the function of the point that initi-
ates the CO alarm. For example, a monitor module with a CO MONITOR Type Code means that the
monitor module monitors a conventional CO detector. The table below lists the Type Codes that
can appear in an alarm message:

Latching
Type Code Purpose What it does
(Y/N)

Monitor Modules
CO Monitor* Y Indicates activation of a CO conventional detector Activates CBE, does not light an indicator
at the control panel.

Detectors
PHOTO/CO*,4 Y Indicates activation of the Photo, Heat, or CO element of a Lights FIRE ALARM LED for photo and heat,
detector. no LED will light for a CO alarm. Photo and
heat will activate CBE, CO alarm activates
special function zone FC and sixth CBE
zone only (sixth CBE zone programmable
via VeriFire Tools)
P/CO (P SUP)*,2,4,5 Y Indicates activation of the Photo, Heat or CO element of a Lights FIRE ALARM LED for heat, no LED will
detector. light for a CO alarm, supervisory LED will
light for photo alarm, heat and photo will
activate CBE, CO alarm activates special
function zone FC and sixth CBE zone only
(sixth CBE zone programmable via VeriFire
Tools)
P/CO (C SUP)*,4 Y Indicates activation of the Photo, Heat or CO element of a Lights FIRE ALARM LED for heat and photo
detector. alarms, will light supervisory LED for CO
alarm, photo and heat alarms will activate
CBE, CO alarm will activate sixth CBE
zone only (sixth CBE zone programmable
via VeriFire Tools)

*FlashScan mode only

2
1 Requires approval of AHJ.
3 Not suitable for Canadian applications.
4
LED representation of a CO alarm may be performed using an ACS annunciator.
5 Photo element can be programmed as latching or tracking for all Photo/CO devices
programmed as this type ID via VeriFire Tools.
Table 3.6 CO Alarm Type Codes

3.12 Active Trouble Monitor Mode of Operation

3.12.1 How the Control Panel Indicates an Active Trouble Monitor
Trouble Monitor Points are monitor modules programmed with the following Type Codes:
Latching
Type Code Device Function Point Function
(Y/N)
AUDIO SYSTEM N Used for monitoring audio equipment audio Indicates trouble
amplifiers or associated equipment
EQUIP MONITR N Used for recording access to monitored equipment Activates CBE
POWER MONITR N Used to monitor remote power supplies or other Indicates trouble
external equipment
TROUBLE MON N Used to monitor remote power supplies or other Indicates trouble
external equipment

Table 3.7 Trouble Monitor Type Codes

These types of monitor modules operate like monitored system functions that can produce trou-
bles—but with the following differences:

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 35

Operation of the Control Panel Output Circuit Trouble Mode of Operation

• The LCD display status banner displays ACTIVE as shown:

Status banner Custom descriptor for
Type Code this device location

TROUBL TROUBLE_MON INTENSIVE CARE UNIT

EASTERN WING 09:38A 041515 1M044
Extended 12 character
custom label Time and date of trouble Device address

Figure 4 Sample Trouble Monitor Point Message

• The monitor module is non-latching: the module will return to normal when the trouble
condition no longer exists.
• The monitor modules activate Control-by-Event
• The panel trouble relay transfers (TB4)

3.12.2 How to Respond to an Active Trouble Monitor

If the control panel indicates an active Trouble Monitor Point, take the following action:
1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key to silence the panel sounder and switch the
SYSTEM TROUBLE LED from flashing to steady—regardless of the number of troubles, alarms,
and supervisory signals.
2. The control panel sends an Acknowledge message to the History buffer and installed printers,
FDU-80 annunciators, and CRT-2s. Check the trouble message for the location and type of
trouble.
3. Correct the condition causing the trouble.
4. When the trouble condition is corrected, the panel will return to normal operation (indicated by
the “System Normal” message).
5. The control panel sends a “System Normal” message to the LCD display, History buffer and
installed printers, FDU-80 annunciators, and CRT-2s.

3.13 Output Circuit Trouble Mode of Operation

3.13.1 Overview
Output circuits include NACs, Control/Relay Modules, and Transponder Points. This section con-
tains a description of control panel operation for each type of output circuit.
• Four NACs are included on the control panel
• Control/Relay Modules connected to the control panel on an SLC
• Transponder Points: XPC-8 (CLIP only), or XP6-C (CLIP or FlashScan)

Trouble Type Codes for Control Modules and NAC Circuits

Silenceable
Type Code Configuration Device Function
(Y/N)
CONTROL N NAC Supervised NAC
RELAY N FORM-C relay Relay Output
BELL CIRCUIT N NAC Supervised NAC for notification appliance
STROBE CKT N NAC Supervised NAC for notification appliance
HORN CIRCUIT N NAC Supervised NAC for notification appliance
AUDIBLE CKT N NAC Supervised NAC for notification appliance
SPEAKER N NAC Supervised NAC for speaker circuit
REL END BELL N NAC Supervised NAC for notification appliance
blank N NAC Supervised NAC for undefined device

Table 3.8 Control Module and NAC Circuit Trouble Type Codes (1 of 2)

36 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Output Circuit Trouble Mode of Operation Operation of the Control Panel

RELEASE CKT N NAC Directs outputs to perform a releasing function.

REL CKT ULC N NAC Directs outputs to perform a release function as required by ULC.
REL AUDIBLE N NAC NAC, activated upon release
NONRESET CTL* N NAC Relay output, unaffected by “System Reset” command
TELEPHONE N NAC Standard Telephone circuit
REL CODE BELL** N NAC Supervised NAC (NFS2-640 NAC only)
INSTANT RELE N NAC NAC, short = normal; supervised for open circuits and ground
faults. Always non-silenceable and switch-inhibited.
ALARMS PEND N NAC Output that will activate upon receipt of an alarm condition, and
remain in the alarm state until all alarms have been
acknowledged.
CONTROL NAC** N NAC Supervised NAC
GEN ALARM Y Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP6-C configured as a
Municipal Box Transmitter for NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm
Systems application. This Type ID can also be used for general
alarm activation.
GEN SUPERVIS Y Control Module, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP6-R activated under
any Supervisory condition (includes sprinkler type).
GEN TROUBLE Y Control Module, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP6-R activated under
any System Trouble condition.
GENERAL PEND Y Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP6-C that will activate
upon receipt of an alarm and/or trouble condition, and remain in
the ON state until all events have been ACKNOWLEDGED.
TROUBLE PEND N Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP6-C that will activate
upon receipt of a trouble condition, and remain in the ON state
until all troubles have been ACKNOWLEDGED.
MNS GENERAL1 N NAC Mass Notification supervised output
MNS CONTROL1 N NAC Mass Notification supervised output
MNS STROBE1 N NAC Mass Notification supervised output
MNS SPEAKER1 N NAC Mass Notification supervised output for speaker circuits
MNS RELAY1 N Relay Mass Notification supervised output
* Type Code is Control Module type code only.
** Type Code is NAC Circuit type code only.
1
This type code is not compatible for First Command applications.

Table 3.8 Control Module and NAC Circuit Trouble Type Codes (2 of 2)

3.13.2 How the Control Panel Indicates a NAC Trouble

A Trouble occurring on a NAC causes the control panel to do the following:
• Produce a pulsed audible tone
• Flash the SYSTEM TROUBLE LED
• Turn on the Trouble relay (TB4)
• Send a message to the LCD display, History buffer and installed printers, FDU-80
annunciators, and CRT-2s
• Display a TROUBL status banner and a CONTROL Type Code on the LCD display, along with
information specific to the device
Status banner Custom Description for
Type Code this device location

TROUBL CONTROL FRONT HALLWAY NO. 2

OPEN 09:38A 041515 B02
Type of Trouble Time and date of trouble Device Address

Figure 3.1 Sample of a NAC in Trouble Message

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 37

Operation of the Control Panel Operation of Special System Timers

3.13.3 How the Control Panel Indicates a Control/Relay Trouble

A trouble occurring on a control/relay module or control/relay transponder causes the control panel
to do the following:
• Produce a pulsed audible tone
• Flash the SYSTEM TROUBLE LED
• Turn on the Trouble relay (TB4)
• Send a message to the LCD display, History buffer and installed printers FDU-80
annunciators, and CRT-2s
• Display a TROUBL status banner and CONTROL Type Code on the LCD display, along with
information specific to the device
Status banner Custom Description for
Type Code this device location

TROUBL CONTROL MODULE ADDR 1M044

OPEN 09:38A 041515 1M044
Type of Trouble Time and date of trouble Device Address

Figure 3.2 Sample of a Control/Relay Module in Trouble Message

3.13.4 How to Respond to a NAC or Control/Relay Trouble

If the control panel indicates an active NAC or Control/Relay Trouble, take the following action:
1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key to silence the panel sounder and switch the
SYSTEM TROUBLE LED from flashing to steady—regardless of the number of troubles, alarms,
and supervisory signals.
2. The control panel sends an Acknowledge message to the History buffer and installed printers,
FDU-80 annunciators, and CRT-2s. Check the trouble message for the location and type of
trouble.
3. Correct the condition causing the trouble.
4. When the trouble condition is corrected, the panel will return to normal operation (indicated by
the “System Normal” message).
5. The control panel sends a “System Normal” message to the LCD display, History buffer and
installed printers, FDU-80 annunciators, and CRT-2s.

3.14 Operation of Special System Timers

3.14.1 What are System Timers?
There are user-programmable time delays for three specific functions: the Auto Silence Timer, the
Alarm Verification Timer, and the Silence Inhibit Timer. Figure 3.3 shows a sample System Func-
tion Selection screen with system timer settings. For instructions on changing system functions,
refer to the NFS2-640 Programming Manual.

3.14.2 How to View System Timer Selections

You can use the Read Status Entry option (explained in Chapter 4) to view the current selection for
the System Timers. To do so, press the keys shown below in sequence:

38 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Operation of Special System Timers Operation of the Control Panel

The LCD display shows the current selections for System Functions, which includes the three sys-
tem timers.
Sample LCD display of a System Function screen with system timer selections:
Silence Inhibit Timer set to 180 seconds
Auto Silence Timer set to 600 seconds
Alarm Verification Timer set to 30 seconds
SIL INH=180 AUTO=600 VERIFY=30 USA TIME
TERM=N AC-DLY=Y LocT BLINK=01 ST=4 ACS=N

Figure 3.3 Sample System Function Selection Screen

3.14.3 How System Timers Work

The control panel can operate with special system timers: Auto Silence Timer, Alarm Verification
Timer and Silence Inhibit Timer.
Auto Silence Timer
A timer that functions like pressing the SIGNAL SILENCE key. When the Auto Silence Timer reaches
its programmed value (600-1200 seconds), the control panel automatically shuts off all active out-
puts programmed as silenceable.
When Auto Silence activates, special function zone ZF40 will activate and remain active until a
system reset alarm resound or drill (alarm signal for Canadian applications) is initiated.
Activation of Auto Silence will activate the Signal Silence LED on the fire panel display and any
ACM LED point programmed for Auto Silence.

NOTE: In Canadian applications, if auto silence is enabled, the value must be set to 20 minutes.
An ACS point is required to monitor special function zone ZF40.

Alarm Verification Timer

A timer that directs the control panel to ignore a fire alarm for a smoke detector, programmed for
Alarm Verification, while the Alarm Verification Timer is counting. Table 3.9 contains a summary
of how the Alarm Verification Timer works.

If The control panel does this

A second fire alarm occurs while the Ignores the Alarm Verification Timer
Alarm Verification Timer is counting
The Alarm Verification Timer elapses and Activates the fire alarm
a fire alarm still exists
The Alarm Verification Timer expires and Increments the Alarm Verification counter (up to 99)
a fire alarm no longer exists for the device and returns to normal operation

Table 3.9 Alarm Verification Timer Operation

Silence Inhibit Timer

A timer that disables the SIGNAL SILENCE key function and inhibits reset during countdown for the
programmed time (0-300 seconds) when a fire alarm occurs. A Silence Inhibit Timer starts at the
first fire alarm. Subsequent alarms will not restart the timer until the alarm condition is completely
resolved and a panel reset is performed.

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 39

Operation of the Control Panel Waterflow Circuit Operation

3.15 Waterflow Circuit Operation

If a monitor module programmed with a WATERFLOW Type Code initiates a fire alarm, the control
panel disables the SIGNAL SILENCE key and the Auto Silence Timer. Refer to the NFS2-640 Installa-
tion Manual for information on Waterflow circuits.

NOTE: In firmware version 18.x (or higher), silenceable outputs activated from a WATERFLOW
type code activation can be silenced if the silenceable waterflow option is enabled via VeriFire
Tools.

3.16 Class A and Class X Operation

Class A and Class X are supervised methods of communicating with addressable devices. If the
control panel detects a trouble (open or short), it will attempt to drive both ends of the loop, main-
taining communication in an unsupervised method. The trouble will display on the panel as a Class
A trouble until you correct the condition. Class X configuration of the SLC requires the use of ISO-
X isolator modules.

40 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

 Section 4: Read Status Operation

4.1 Introduction
This section contains instructions and sample screens to show how to access all Read Status func-
tions and menus. For information on Read Status using a CRT-2 refer to “Remote Terminal Access”
on page 67.

4.2 What is Read Status?

Read Status is a control panel function that lets you view system program information—but not
change any programmed settings. The Read Status function lets you do the following:
• View Read Status information without entering a password.
• Enter and operate Read Status functions while the control panel provides full fire protection.
• View Read Status information while a fire alarm or trouble condition exists.

NOTE: If a fire alarm or trouble occurs while you are in Read Status, the control panel
automatically exits Read Status operation and displays the new fire alarm or trouble.

4.2.1 Quick Reference Key Sequences

For quick reference, in the left margin next to each Read Status option is a block that
shows the key sequence needed to view that option.

For example, the block to the left shows how to display the “Read Point” screen:

4.3 Entering Read Status

To enter Read Status, follow these steps:
1. From the “System Normal” screen, press the ENTER key. The control panel displays the
“Entry” screen as shown below;
1=PROGRAMMING 2=READ STATUS ENTRY
(ESCAPE TO ABORT)

2. From the “Entry” screen, press the 2 key. The control panel displays the “Read Status Options”
screen as shown below:.
READ POINT=0 HIST=2 ALARM HIST=4 <ENTER>
PRNT POINT=1 HIST=3 ALARM HIST=5 <ENTER>

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 41

Read Status Operation Viewing and Printing a Read Status

4.4 Viewing and Printing a Read Status

To view or print Read Status information follow the instructions below:

Option Press Lets you

Read Point 0 key, ENTER key View information for a detector, module, NAC or zone
Print Points 1 key, ENTER key Print information for all installed points in the system
Read History 2 key, ENTER key Display the total number of events in the History buffer and step
through each event in sequence
Print History 3 key, ENTER key Print the contents of the History buffer (up to 800 events)
Read Alarm History 4 key, ENTER key View a display of the number of alarms in the Alarm History buffer,
then scroll through each alarm event
Print Alarm History 5 key, ENTER key Print the contents of the Alarm History buffer (up to 200 events)

NOTE: If attempting to read a point that is not installed, the control panel displays “Not Installed”.

During all Read Status operations (except print operations) the control panel starts a 2-minute timer
each time you press a key. If the control panel does not detect a key press for 2 minutes, the control
panel exits Read Status and returns to the “System Normal” display.
In Read Status, you can also do the following:
• Press the ESC key to delete the previous entry.
• Press the SYSTEM RESET key to abort Read Status.

4.4.1 How to View Read Status of Devices, Zones, & System Settings
Overview
Read Point options 0, 2, and 4 in the Read Status Screen let you display and view information for
devices and zones programmed into the control panel, as well as view system and annunciator set-
tings. This section provides instructions and sample displays so you can view Read Status.
Topics covered in this section:

To view Read Status for Refer to

Intelligent Detectors “How to View Read Status for a Detector” on page 43
Control/relay and Monitor “How to View Read Status for a Control/Relay or Monitor
modules Module” on page 44
NAC “How to View Read Status for a NAC” on page 45
Software Zones (Z01-Z99) “How to View Read Status for a Software Zone (Z01-Z99)”
on page 46
Special Zones (F0-F9, FA- FC) “How to View Read Status for a Special Zone (F0-F9, FA-
FC)” on page 46
Releasing Zones (R0-R9) “How to View Read Status for a Releasing Zone (R0-R9)”
on page 47
System Functions “How to Read Status for System Functions” on page 47
Annunciator Selections “How to Read Status for Annunciator Selections” on
page 48

42 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Viewing and Printing a Read Status Read Status Operation

How to Display the Total of Installed Devices

To view the total number of installed devices, enter the “Read Status” screen
by pressing the ENTER key, then 2, then A. A screen similar to the following
will appear:
L1:159Dets, 159Mods L2:055Dets, 047Mods
Panel Outputs: 64 Bells: 04
SB L1:000 SB L2:000

How to Display a Point or Zone for Read Status

From the “Read Status” screen, press 0, then press the ENTER key to
display the “Read Point Entry” screen as shown below:

ZONE=Z,AA,E DETECTOR=*,LDAAA,E
MODULE=#,LMAA,E OUTPUT CKT=8,AA,E

• To view a detector, press DETECTOR , SLC number, detector SLC address, ENTER.
• To view a zone, press , zone number, ENTER.
• To view a monitor or control/relay module, press MODULE , SLC number, module SLC
address, ENTER.
• To view a NAC, press OUTPUT , two-digit address, (for example 01 for B01, etc.), ENTER.
When you select a device or a zone, the control panel displays information for the device or zone,
but does not send this information to the serial ports or the History buffer.
How to View Read Status for a Detector
From the “Read Status” screen, press 0, then press the ENTER
key. You can now view Read Status for a detector as follows:
SLC number followed by three press DETECTOR, enter the SLC number followed by the three
digit address
digit address, then press the ENTER key. For example, to read
next device the status of detector 1D002: press DETECTOR, enter the SLC
number (1), enter address 002, then press the ENTER key. The
previous device control panel now displays information about the detector, as
shown in Figure 4.1.

The display and descriptions of the fields are shown below:

Device status Type Code Label for the detector

NORMAL SMOKE (ION) INTENSIVE CARE UNIT
EASTERN WING Z002 001%A6 6 CV00 1D002
Default CBE zone selection SLC Address (001-159)
D (detector)
Current alarm reading (percent) SLC number (1 or 2)
Alarm sensitivity level
Pre-Alarm sensitivity level Alarm Verification Time
(in seconds)
Alarm Verification selection:
V on; * off
Multidetector selection:
A, B, C, or * (not selected)

Figure 4.1 Sample Detector Read Status Display

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 43

Read Status Operation Viewing and Printing a Read Status

• Device Status The status of the detector: Normal, Alarm, or Test.

• Type Code The software Type Code that identifies the type of detector. (Refer to “Point
Programming” in the NFS2-640 Programming Manual.)
• Default CBE Zone Selection This is the first zone in the 5 zone CBE list. Defaults are Zone
001 (Heat detectors) Zone 002 (Ion detectors) Zone 003 (Photo detectors) Zone 004 (Laser
detectors) Zone 005 (Multisensor). Values may differ depending on point programming.
• Current alarm reading (xxx%) The current alarm reading of the detector, as a percentage of
the alarm sensitivity setting.
• Alarm sensitivity level (Ax) The alarm sensitivity (x=1-9) entered in the Detector Sensitivity
Screen.
• Pre-Alarm sensitivity level The Pre-Alarm Sensitivity (1-9; 0 = Pre-Alarm not used) entered
in the Detector Settings Screen.

NOTE: Refer to “Detector Sensitivity Settings” in the NFS2-640 Programming Manual for more
information on the Pre-Alarm and Alarm Sensitivity settings

• Cooperative Multi-Detector selection A smoke detector programmed to evaluate readings

from nearby detectors in making Alarm or Pre-Alarm decisions. Cooperative Multi-Detector
sensing also allows the combination of ionization with photoelectric technology in reaching an
alarm decision.
* – Multi-not used.
A – combines the detector’s alarm decision with the next SLC address above.
B – combines the detector’s alarm decision with the next SLC address below.
C – combines the detector’s alarm decision with the next SLC address above and the next SLC
address below.
• Alarm Verification (* or V)
* – Alarm Verification not programmed for this detector.
V – Alarm Verification enabled.
Alarm Verification is a user-defined global time function that can reduce the number of
nuisance alarms. Refer to page page 39 for more information.
• Device SLC Address The SLC address of the detector.
How to View Read Status for a Control/Relay or Monitor Module
From the “Read Status” screen, press 0, then press the ENTER
key. You can now view Read Status for a monitor or a con-
SLC address trol/relay module as follows: press MODULE, enter the SLC
address, then press the ENTER key. For example, to read the sta-
next device tus of a FCM-1 module 2M147: press MODULE, enter 2 then
previous device 147, then press the ENTER key. The control panel now displays
information about the module as shown in Figure 4.2.

The display and descriptions of the fields are shown below:

Device status Type Code (CONTROL) Label for the module
Extended 12- OFF CONTROL INTENSIVE CARE UNIT
character DOORHOLDER#2 Z000 *O* 2M147
custom label
Default CBE zone selection
SLC Address (001-159)
M (module)
Switch Inhibit: I selected, * not selected SLC number (1 or 2)

Walk Test selection:

Silenceable: O = selected, * = not selected (default) W selected for Walk Test
* not selected

Figure 4.2 Sample Control/Relay or Monitor Module Read Status Display

44 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Viewing and Printing a Read Status Read Status Operation

• Device Status The status of the module: control/relay module [On (device active) OFF (device
not active] or monitor module (Normal, Alarm, or Test).
• Type Code The software Type Code that identifies the type of module. (Refer to “Point
Programming” in the NFS2-640 Programming Manual.)
• CBE list Only the first zone in the device’s CBE list will be displayed.
• Device SLC Address The SLC address of the module.
• Switch Inhibit (control/relay module only) Displays whether the remote ON/OFF capability
of the device is inhibited. (I=on; *=off).
• Silenceable (control/relay module only) A selection that specifies if the device can be
silenced during an alarm by pressing the signal silence key. Possible values are:
* = output nonsilenceable
F = silenceable, resound by fire alarm
U = silenceable, resound by supervisory alarm
B = silenceable, resound by security alarm
T = silenceable, resound by trouble
O = silenceable, does not resound

NOTE: If the “Strobe” Type ID is used with System Sensor Strobe synchronization, F, U, B, T, or
O will silence the entire circuit, “*” will silence the horn portion only.

Walk Test (control/relay module only) A selection that specifies if the device will activate
during a Walk Test.
How to View Read Status for a NAC
From the “Read Status” screen, press 0, then press the ENTER
key. You can now view Read Status for a NAC as follows:
Device address press OUTPUT, enter the device address, then press the ENTER
next device
key. For example, to read the status of NAC 0-2: press OUT-
PUT, enter 02, then press the ENTER key. The control panel
previous device now displays information for a NAC as shown in Figure 4.3.

The display and descriptions of the fields are shown below:

Device status Type Code (CONTROL) Label for the NAC

OFF CONTROL FRONT HALLWAY NO. 2

Z000 *OW B02
Address (01-04)
Default zone selection B = NAC
Switch Inhibit: I selected, * not selected

Silenceable: O = selected, * = not selected (default) Walk Test selection:

W selected for Walk Test
* not selected

Figure 4.3 Sample NAC Read Status Display

• Device Status The status of the device: ON (device active) OFF (device not active).
• Type Code The software Type Code that identifies the type of NAC. Refer to “Appendix F -
Type Codes” in NFS2-640 Programming Manual.
• CBE List Only the first zone in the NAC’s CBE list will be displayed here.
• Device Address The address of the NAC (01-04)
• Switch Inhibit A selection for disabling the switch function for the control/relay or
transponder output circuit. (I=on; *=off).

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 45

Read Status Operation Viewing and Printing a Read Status

• Silenceable A selection that specifies if the device can be silenced during an alarm by pressing
the SIGNAL SILENCE key. Possible values are:
* = output nonsilenceable
F = silenceable, resound by fire alarm
U = silenceable, resound by supervisory alarm
B = silenceable, resound by security alarm
T = silenceable, resound by trouble
O = silenceable, does not resound

NOTE: If the “Strobe” Type ID is used with System Sensor Strobe synchronization, F,U, B, T,
or O will silence the entire circuit, “*” will silence the horn portion only.

• Walk Test A selection that specifies if the device will activate during a Walk Test.
How to View Read Status for a Software Zone (Z01-Z99)
From the “Read Status” screen, press 0, then press the ENTER
key. You can now view Read Status for a Software Zone as fol-
Software lows: press Z, enter the zone number (01-99), then press the
Zone Number
ENTER key. For example, to read the status of Software Zone 07:
next device press Z, enter 07, then press the ENTER key. The control panel
now displays information for a Software Zone as shown below.
previous device

Zone status (ON or OFF) Custom zone label for the zone
Zone label for zones 01-99 entered in during program Change

OFF SOFTWARE ZONE 3RD FLOOR CAFETERIA

Z07
Zone Number

Figure 4.4 Sample Software Zone Read Status Display

How to View Read Status for a Special Zone (F0-F9, FA-FC)

From the “Read Status” screen, press 0, then press the ENTER
key. You can now view Read Status for a Special Zone as fol-
Special lows: press Z, enter the zone number (F0-F9, FA-FC), then
Zone Number
press the ENTER key. For example, to read the status of Special
next device Zone F8: press Z, enter F8, then press the ENTER key. The con-
trol panel now displays information for a Special Zone as shown
previous device
below.

NOTE: The zone label depends on the type of Special Zone. For example, CODING FUNCTION
CODE TYPE for F8.

Zone status (ON or OFF)

Zone label for Special Function F8

OFF CODING FUNCTION CODE TYPE

MARCH TIME F8
Code Type selection
for Special Zone F8 Indicates Special Zone F8

NOTE: Special Function Zones FA, FB, and FC are represented in VeriFire Tools as ZF10,
ZF16, and ZF18, respectively.

46 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Viewing and Printing a Read Status Read Status Operation

Figure 4.5 Sample Special Zone Read Status Display

How to View Read Status for a Releasing Zone (R0-R9)

From the “Read Status” screen, press 0, then press the ENTER
key. You can now view the Read Status of a Releasing Zone as
Releasing follows: press Z, enter the zone number (R0-R9), then press the
Zone Number
ENTER key. For example, to read the status of Releasing Zone
next device R0, enter Z, enter R0, then press the ENTER key. The control
panel now displays information for a Releasing Zone as shown
previous device
below.
Zone status (ON or OFF)
Zone label for Releasing Function
OFF RELEASE FUNCT RELEASE CONTROL
DELAY=00 ABORT=ULI CROSS=N SOK=0000 R00
Selections for Indicates Special Zone R0
Releasing Zone R0

Figure 4.6 Sample Releasing Zone Read Status Display

How to Read Status for System Functions

The “System Functions” screen specifies global settings for the con-
trol panel. From the “Read Status” screen, press 0, then press the
ENTER key. You can now view Read Status for System Functions as
follows: press Z, enter S0, press the ENTER key. Shown below is a
sample display and description of items for the Read Status of System
Functions:

SIL INH=000 AUTO=000 VERIFY=30 USA TIME

TERM=N AC_DLY=Y LocT BLINK=01 ST=4 ACS=N

Parameter Description Settings

SIL INH=000 Silence Inhibit timer in 000 = no timer; or the timer duration in
seconds. Required in seconds up to 300.
Canada and some areas of
the USA.
AUTO=000 Auto Silence Timer in 000 = no timer; 600-1200 seconds.
seconds.
VERIFY=30 Alarm Verification Timer 00 = no timer; 00-30 seconds.
USA TIME Time and date display USA TIME or EUR TIME
format
TERM=N Terminal supervision YES – To supervise the wiring of an
FDU-80.
NO – No FDU-80 supervision.
AC_DLY=N Delays AC loss reporting YES - AC loss reporting is delayed for
approximately 3 hours.
NO - No AC loss delay.

Table 4.1 System Function Parameters (1 of 2)

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 47

Read Status Operation Viewing and Printing a Read Status

Parameter Description Settings

LocT One of three operating LocT – terminal connected to control
modes of a PC or terminal panel and located in the same room
connected to the control as the control panel.
panel (through TB12 PC LocM – terminal connected to control
Terminal) panel but requires password for
operation.
RemT – terminal connected through a
modem for Read Status operations
only.
BLINK=01 The rate at which all BLINK=00: No blink
intelligent control or all BLINK=01: Devices blink on
monitor modules blink every poll.
during polling BLINK=16: Devices blink every
16th poll.
ST=4 NFPA wiring style operation 4 – Class B SLC or
for the SLC 6 – both Class A and Class X SLC
ACS=N Use ACS Selection Groups N – No annunciator selected or
Y – Select and display ACS Selection
Groups

Table 4.1 System Function Parameters (2 of 2)

How to Read Status for Annunciator Selections

Annunciator Selection screens specify the information that displays
on ACS annunciators. From the “Read Status” screen, press 0, then
press the ENTER key. You can now view Read Status for System Func-
tions as follows: press Z, enter S, enter annunciation selection number
(1-4 for annunciator, 5-8 for other settings), press the ENTER key. Sam-
ple LCD displays for the Read Status of Annunciator Selection are
shown below:

A1=Address ACS selection group

S1 ANNUN SELECTION1: A1=H A2=* A3=* A4=*
A5=* A6=* A7=* A8=* A9=* A10=* A11=*

Figure 4.7 Annunciator Selection 1 Screen

To view the next three annunciator selection screens, press the (NEXT SELECTION) key.
S2 ANNUN SELECTION2: A12=* A13=* A14=*
A15=* A16=* A17=* A18=* UDACT=N

Figure 4.8 Annunciator Selection 2 Screen

If UDACT=N, the control panel displays the Annunciator Selections 3 and 4 screen, addresses
A20-A32, as shown below:
S3 ANNUN SELECTION3: A20=* A21=* A22=*
A23=* A24=* A25=* A26=* A27=* A28=*

S4 ANNUN SELECTION4: A29=* A30=* A31=*

A32=*

Figure 4.9 Annunciator Selections 3 and 4 Screens

48 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Viewing and Printing a Read Status Read Status Operation

See page 42 and 43 of the NFS2 640 Programming Manual.

S5 REGION=0 TBL.REMIND=2 ALA.SCROLL=Y
LOCAL CONTROL=1 IP ACCESS=0 DCC-MODE=N

Figure 4.10 System Function Selection 5 Screen

See page 44 of the NFS2 640 Programming Manual.

S6 FLASHSCAN LIDET LIMOD L2DET L2MOD
Y Y Y Y

Figure 4.11 System Function Selection 6 Screen

See Page 42 of the NFS2 640 Programming Manual.

S7 NODE: 000.XXX, CLASSX:N
THRESHOLD CHANNEL A:H, CHANNEL B:H

Figure 4.12 System Function Selection 7 Screen

• SEC_RLY and SUP_RLY (0= turn on by Fire Alarm, 1= turn on by Security, 2= turn on by
Supervisory).
• BAT_SIZE (1= battery size is greater than 26 Ahr, 0= less than 26 Ahr).
• C_DRILL (custom drill N= No custom drill, Y= Yes).
• TERM_DATA (0= LCD80 Terminal using 7 bit data, 1= LCD80 Terminal using 8 bit data).
• PRT_BAND (0= 2400, 1= 4800, 2= 9600).

S8 SEC_RLY:1 SUP_RLY:2 BAT_SIZE:0 C_DRILL:N

TERM_DATA:0 PRT_BAUD:2 CHARGER:Y

Figure 4.13 System Function Selection 8 Screen

NOTE: Please refer to the VeriFire Tools help file for information on programming the above
screen.

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 49

Read Status Operation Viewing and Printing a Read Status

An Annunciator Selection screen shows the information that will display on the ACS annunciators.

1 through 9 Programmable Annunciator #1 through #9

0 Programmable Annunciator #10

A 8 Systems points + Zones 1-56

B Zones 57-99, 9 F zones, 8 R zones, 4NAC
C Loop 1, Modules 1-64
D Loop 2, Modules 1-64
E Loop 1, Modules 65-128
F Loop 2, Modules 65-128
G Loop 1, Modules 129-159 & Loop 2, Modules 129-159
H Loop 1, Detectors 1-64
I Loop 2, Detectors 1-64
J Loop 1, Detectors 65-128
K Loop 2, Detectors 65-128
L Loop 1, Detectors 129-159 & Loop 2, Detectors 129-159
M Programmable for use with FireVoice NFV-25/50ZS
N 8 Systems points + Zones 1-56, used for remote station communicator (TM-4)
O 8 Systems points + Zones 1-56, used for municipal box trip output (TM-4)
P Loop 1, Modules 65-100, Loop 1, Detectors 1-14 (Detector Maintenance
Reporting)
Q Loop 2, modules 65-100, Loop 2, Detectors 1-14 (Detector Maintenance
Reporting)
R Loop 1, detectors 15-46 (Detector Maintenance Reporting)
S Loop 2, Detectors 15-46 (Detector Maintenance Reporting)
T Loop 1 Detectors 47-78 (Detector Maintenance Reporting)
U Loop 2, Detectors 47-78 (Detector Maintenance Reporting)
V Loop 1, Detectors 79-100 (Detector Maintenance Reporting)
W Loop 2, Detectors 79-100 (Detector Maintenance Reporting)
Annunciator addresses 1 to 19 can be programmed to any one of the above selections. If there is a UDACT
or UDACT-2, selections A-M will be sent to Annunciator addresses 20 to 32 respectively.

Table 4.2 ACS Selection Groups (2 of 2)

The table above contains the ACS display selections. Annunciators set to annunciator address 1 to
19 can be programmed to any one of the above selections. If t here is a UDACT or UDACT-2,
selections A-M will be sent to Annunciator addresses 20 to 32 respectively.

An example of ACS selections in Annunciator Selection Screen 1:

ANNUN SELECTION: A1=H A2=C A3=* A4=*

A5=* A6=* A7=* A8=* A9=* A1-=* A11=*

Figure 4.14 Annunciator Selection Screen 1 Example

NOTE: An ACS selection marked with an asterisk (*) indicates no annunciator selection.

The figure above shows annunciator selections for addresses A1-A2 (addresses A3-A10, marked
with asterisks, are not selected).
• Annunciators set to annunciator address 1 (A1) display the status of detectors 1-64 on SLC 1
(ACS Selection Group H)
• Annunciators set to annunciator address 2 (A2) display the status of intelligent modules 1-64
on SLC-1 (ACS Selection Group C).

50 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Viewing and Printing a Read Status Read Status Operation

How to Read Status for Battery Levels

Pressing the BATTERY LEVEL key on the NFS2-640 keyboard displays information concerning the
state of the battery.
A sample LCD display is shown below.

Battery Voltage: 27.48V

Charger Current: 00.06A

Figure 4.15 Battery Levels

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 51

Read Status Operation Viewing and Printing a Read Status

4.4.2 How to View Read Status for Event and Alarm History
Overview
The control panel maintains a History buffer of the last 800 events, each with a time and date
stamp. History events include the following:
• All alarms, troubles and operator actions, such as: Acknowledge, System Reset, Signal
Silence, Drill, and Walk Test.
• Programming entries (Program Change and Status Change, but not Read Status), along with a
number (0-9) indicating the programming submenu (for example, 0=Clear). For an example,
see Figure 4.18.
You can view events from the History buffer in two forms: by displaying all events (option 2,
HIST=2) or by displaying alarm events only (option 4, ALARM HIST=4).

NOTE: The History buffer contains 800 events total, including the alarm events that display for
Alarm history. The control panel generates Alarm history from the alarm events that exist in the
800-event History buffer.

How to View Read Status for Event History

Option 2 (HIST=2) lets you view the total number of events in the History
buffer (up to 800 events), then view each event in chronological
sequence. From the “Read Status” screen, press 2, then press the ENTER
key to display the “Event History” screen. A sample of the Event History
next event screen is shown below:
previous event

EVENT HISTORY START

EVENTS IN HISTORY: 550

The number of events in the History buffer

Figure 4.16 Sample Event History Display

To display events in the History buffer, do the following:

• Press the NEXT SELECTION key to step through each event from the first entry (oldest event
first) in the History buffer, or
• Press the PREVIOUS SELECTION key to step through each event from the most recent entry in the
History buffer.

NOTE: The NEXT SELECTION key will show the most recent event first, and then move to its
normal function of displaying the oldest events first.

A sample LCD display for a trouble event:

Type of event Type of trouble

TROUBL IN SYSTEM GROUND FAULT

01:46P 041508 Tue

Time and date of the event

Figure 4.17 Sample Trouble Event Display

52 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Viewing and Printing a Read Status Read Status Operation

A sample LCD display for a Program Change event:

Message specifies the
Type of event Program Change option used

PROGRAM CHANGE 5=ZONE LABEL CHG

01:51P 041508 Tue
Time and date of the event

Figure 4.18 Sample Program Change Event Display

How to View Read Status for Alarm History

Option 4 (ALARM HIST=4) lets you view the total number of alarms in
the History buffer (up to 200), then view each alarm in chronological
sequence. From the “Read Status” screen, press 4, then press the ENTER
key to display the “Event History” screen. A sample Alarm History
next event screen is shown below:
previous event

ALARM HISTORY START (ESCAPE TO ABORT)

ALARMS IN HIST: 073
The number of alarms in the History buffe

Figure 4.19 Sample Alarm History Display

To display alarms in the buffer, do the following:

• Press the NEXT SELECTION key to step through each alarm from the first entry (oldest alarm
first) in the buffer, or
• Press the PREVIOUS SELECTION key to step through each alarm from the most recent entry in
the buffer

NOTE: The NEXT SELECTION key will show the most recent event first, and then move to its
normal function of displaying the oldest events first.

A sample display for an alarm event:

Type of event Type Code of the device
(ALARM) that alarmed

ALARM: PULL_STATION INTENSIVE CARE UNIT

EASTERN WING Z004 03:10P 041508 2M147
Time and date of the alarm SLC address of the
device that alarmed

Figure 4.20 Sample Alarm Event Display

4.4.3 How to Print Points, Event and Alarm History

Overview
Read Point options 1, 3, and 5 in the “Read Status” screen let you print points, event history, and
alarm history. This section contains instructions for printing, as well as sample point, event history,
and alarm history printouts.

NOTE: Before printing, make sure your control panel is connected to a compatible printer and
the printer is configured according to the manufacturer’s specifications, and that the correct baud
rate is selected at the panel.

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 53

Read Status Operation Viewing and Printing a Read Status

How to Print Points

Option 1 (PRNT POINT=1) lets you print a list of all points programmed into
the system. From the “Read Status” screen, press 1, then press the ENTER
key to print a list of installed points. A sample Print Point screen is shown
below:

STATUS PRINT

Figure 4.21 Sample Print Point Display

A sample printout of three points using the Print Point option:

NORMAL SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 1D043 Z003 000%A8 8 ** 1D043

NORMAL SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 1D044 Z003 000%A8 8 ** 1D044
NORMAL SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 1D045 Z003 000%A8 8 ** 1D045

How to Print Event History

Option 3 (HIST=3) lets you print a list of all events in the History buffer (up
to 800). From the “Read Status” screen, press 3, then press the ENTER key to
print a list of events. A sample History Print screen is shown below:

HISTORY PRINT

Figure 4.22 Sample History Print Screen

A sample printout of three events in history using the History Print option:
******************** EVENT HISTORY START****************************************
SYSTEM RESET 02:28P 042408 Thu
ALARM: SMOKE (ION) DETECTOR ADDR 1D075 Z002 02:28P 042408 1D075
ALARM: SMOKE (ION) DETECTOR ADDR 1D076 Z002 02:28P 042408 1D076
ACKNOWLEDGE 02:28P 042408 Thu

How to Print Alarm History

Option 5 (ALARM HIST=5) lets you print a list of alarm events in the History
buffer (up to 200). From the “Read Status” screen, press 5, then press the
ENTER key to print a list of alarm events. A sample Print Alarm History
screen is shown below:
ALARM HISTORY PRINT

Figure 4.23 Sample Print Alarm History Display

A sample printout of two alarm events in the History buffer using the Print Alarm History option.
********************ALARM HISTORY START ****************************************
ALARM: SMOKE (ION) DETECTOR ADDR 1D075 Z002 02:28P 012208 1D075
ALARM: SMOKE (ION) DETECTOR ADDR 1D076 Z002 02:28P 012208 1D076
******************* PRINT END ****************************************

54 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Viewing and Printing a Read Status Read Status Operation

4.4.4 How to View and Print Hidden Event and Alarm History
The control panel maintains a copy of the History buffer. For instance, if someone clears the His-
tory buffer using Status Change programming option 4, the control panel retains a copy of the His-
tory buffer. The copy of the preceding History buffer is called a Hidden History buffer and a copy
of the preceding Alarm History is called a Hidden Alarm History buffer.
If you attempt to view or print history and the control panel displays one of the screens shown
below you can use the options listed in the table below to view the contents of a Hidden History
buffer.

HISTORY EMPTY (ESCAPE TO ABORT)

****************************************

Figure 4.24 History Empty Display

ALARM HISTORY EMPTY (ESCAPE TO ABORT)

****************************************

Figure 4.25 Alarm History Empty Display

Options for viewing and printing Hidden History and Hidden Alarm History do not appear in the
LCD display when in Read Status. You can view and print the contents of these Hidden History
buffers using the options listed in the table below. You read and print Hidden History and Hidden
Alarm History the same way you read and print history using the options that appear on the “Read
Status” screen. The table also contains references to the sections that contain instructions for read-
ing and printing history.

To Press Refer to

Read Hidden Alarm History “How to View Read Status for

Alarm History” on page 53

Print Hidden Alarm History “How to Print Alarm History” on

page 54

Read Hidden History “How to View Read Status for

Event History” on page 52

Print Hidden History “How to Print Event History” on

page 54

Table 4.3 Hidden History Selections

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 55

 Appendix A: Special Zone Operation

A.1 Overview
This section contains information for operating the control panel as detailed in the topics listed
below:

Section Special Zone Refer to Page

A.2, "Releasing Zones (R0-R9)" R0-R9 page 56
A.3, "Time, Date, and Holiday Functions" F5, F6, F7 page 59
A.4, "NAC Coding" F8 page 61
A.5, "Presignal and Positive Alarm F0 page 62
Sequence (PAS) Operation"

A.2 Releasing Zones (R0-R9)

A.2.1 Purpose of Releasing Zones

WARNING: WHEN USED FOR CO2 RELEASING APPLICATIONS, OBSERVE PROPER

!
PRECAUTIONS AS STATED IN NFPA 12. DO NOT ENTER THE PROTECTED SPACE UNLESS
PHYSICAL LOCKOUT AND OTHER SAFETY PROCEDURES ARE FULLY COMPLETED.
DO NOT USE SOFTWARE DISABLE FUNCTIONS IN THE PANEL AS LOCKOUT.

The control panel provides ten Releasing Zones (R0-R9). These are special zones that you can use
for up to ten independent releasing operations. This section contains descriptions of each Releasing
Function option and an example of how Releasing Zone options work.
For instructions on programming Releasing Functions, refer to the NFS2-640 Programming Man-
ual.
Each Releasing Zone includes the following releasing options:

Option Description
Cross Zone Cross Zones let you program the control panel to activate a Releasing
Zone when two or more detectors or modules are alarmed. Cross Zone
selections are:
Y Two or more detectors are alarmed that are mapped to one of the ten
Releasing Zones (R0-R9)
Z Two or more detectors are alarmed that are mapped to two different
Software Zones and mapped to one of the ten Releasing Zones (R0-R9).
H At least one smoke detector mapped to one of the ten Releasing Zones
(R0-R9) is alarmed and at least one heat detector mapped to the same
Releasing Zone as the smoke detector is alarmed.
N Cross Zones not used
Delay Timer Select a 0–60 second delay before activating a zone.
Abort An Abort Switch Type Code used to abort activation of a zone.
Manual Release Allows immediate zone activation by overriding the abort function,
cross-zone function, and delay timer.
Soak Timer Automatically shuts off the releasing device after a preprogrammed period
of time. Select 0001-9999 seconds for a Soak Timer or 0000 seconds for
no Soak Timer.

Table A.1 Releasing Options

56 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Releasing Zones (R0-R9) Special Zone Operation

A.2.2 How to View Releasing Zone Selections

You can use the Read Status Entry option to view the current selections for a Releasing Zone. For
example, to view selections for Releasing Zone R1, press the keys in sequence:

A sample LCD display of a Releasing Function selected for Releasing Zone R1:
Status (On or Off) Releasing Function status banner Releasing
Zone R1

OFF RELEASE FUNCT RELEASE CONTROL

DELAY=00 ABORT=ULI CROSS=N SOK=0000 R01

Abort Function selection for the Releasing Zone

Figure A.1 Sample Read Status for a Releasing Zone

A.2.3 How Releasing Zones Operate

The figure below contains an illustrated example of how Releasing Zones work, using cross zone
selections with four detectors and a NAC mapped to Releasing Zone 1 (listed as ZR1 in the CBE
list). Table A.2 lists the cross zone selections and the conditions that activate the Releasing Zone:
PROGRM SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 2D101
01 R1 __ __ __A8P8** 2D101
CBE list = O1 R1

PROGRM SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 2D102

01 R1 __ __ __A8P8** 2D102

CBE list = O1 R1

PROGRM SMOKE (ION) DETECTOR ADDR 2D103

02 R1 __ __ __A8P8** 2D103

CBE list = O2 R1

PROGRM HEAT(ANALOG) DETECTOR ADDR 2D104

02 R1 __ __ __A8P8** 2D104

CBE list = 02 R1

PROGRM RELEASE CKT FRONT HALLWAY NO. 3

R1 __ __ __ __ I** B03

CBE list = R1

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 57

Special Zone Operation Releasing Zones (R0-R9)

Software
Zone Z01

CBE list = Z02 ZR1

Smoke Heat Smoke Smoke

Detector Detector Software
Detector Detector
2D102 2D104 Zone Z02
2D103 2D101

CBE list = Z01 ZR1 CBE list = Z01 ZR1

Releasing
Zone ZR1

NAC
B03

Figure A.2 Illustrated Example of Cross Zone Programming

Listing of each Cross Zone option and the conditions required to activate the Releasing Zone,
according to the example shown in Figure A.2.

Cross Zone Selection

Condition(s) Required to Activate the Releasing zone
(Cross=)
Cross=N An alarm from any detector or module activates the releasing circuit.
Cross=Y An alarm from any two detectors or modules activates the releasing
circuit.
Cross=Z An alarm from two detectors or modules mapped to different Software
Zones, but mapped to the same Releasing Zone.
• An alarm from 2D101 and 2D103 – detectors mapped to different
zones, but both list ZR1 in their CBE.
• An alarm from 2D102 and 2D104 – detectors mapped to different
zones, but both list ZR1 in their CBE.
• An alarm from 2D101 and 2D104 – detectors mapped to different
zones, but both list ZR1 in their CBE.
• An alarm from 2D102 and 2D103 – detectors mapped to different
zones, but both list ZR1 in their CBE.
Cross=H Activation of heat detector 2D104 and one smoke detector (2D101,
2D102, or 2D103).

Table A.2 Example of Cross Zone Selections

58 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Time, Date, and Holiday Functions Special Zone Operation

A.3 Time, Date, and Holiday Functions

A.3.1 Overview
The control panel includes a real-time clock that displays the time-of-day, the date, and the
day-of-week. The clock includes a lithium battery backup. Time displays in a USA format (12-hour
time format with month/day/year) or a EUR (European) format as shown below:
TROUBL CONTROL MODULE ADDR 1M159
OPEN 03:48P 041515 1M159
USA Time and Date format (default)

TROUBL CONTROL MODULE ADDR 1M159

OPEN 15:48 140415 1M159
EUR Time and date format

Figure A.3 Sample USA and EUR Time/Date Formats

The control panel also provides Time Control zones F5 and F6 for time and date control functions
and zone F7 for holiday functions.

A.3.2 How to View Time Control Selections

You can use the Read Status Entry option to view the current selection for the Time function. To do
so, press the following keys in sequence:

or

NOTE: For instructions on programming the Time function, refer to the NFS2-640 Programming
Manual.

The LCD display shows the current selections for the Time Control function. The figure below
shows a sample LCD display of a Time Control function:
Status ON (ON time in effect)
Time Function status banner
ON TIME FUNCTION TIME CONTROL
ON=07:00 OFF=15:00 DAYS=SMTWTF*H F05
ON time for
devices that list Zone F5
F5 Day-of-week selections
OFF time for devices (H=holiday selected)
that list F5

Figure A.4 Sample Read Status for Time Function

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 59

Special Zone Operation Time, Date, and Holiday Functions

A.3.3 How to View Holiday Function Selections

You can use the Read Status Entry option to view the current selection for the Holiday function. To
do so, press the following keys in sequence:

NOTE: For instructions on programming the Holiday function, refer to the NFS2-640
Programming Manual.

The LCD display in Figure A.5 gives an example of an LCD display of a Holiday function:
Status ON (holiday function not in effect)
Holiday Function status banner

ON HOLIDAY FUNCTION 12/15 **/** **/**

**/** **/** **/** **/** **/** **/**
Holiday selections (for zone F7)

Figure A.5 Sample Read Status for Holiday Function

A.3.4 How Time Control and Holiday Functions Work

Time and Holiday activation occurs automatically and does not require operator intervention. All
outputs with a CBE list containing F5 or F6 activate within the times specified for the days of the
week listed in F5 or F6. All smoke detectors with a CBE list containing F5 or F6 switch to their
lowest sensitivity (AL:9) within the times specified for the days of the week listed in ZF5 or ZF6.
Refer to “Intelligent Sensing Applications” in the NFS2-640 Programming Manual for details on
setting detector sensitivity.
Time Control is active for all days of the week listed in F5 or F6. Holidays listed in F7 are excluded
unless you list Holidays (H) in the day-of-week selection of F5 and F6 (shown in Figure A.4). Enter
the time functions in a 24-hour format with the OFF time later than the ON time. After changing
programming using Time Control, always reset the control panel.

NOTE: You can turn a NON FIRE control point on and off, by listing zone F5 or F6 in the CBE list
of a control/relay module.

You can use Time Control zones F5 and F6 to program non-fire applications such as turning lights
on and off, setting a thermostat, and so on. For example, you can program zones F5 and F6 to acti-
vate outputs at one time of day and deactivate outputs at later time, on specified days of a week.
Table A.3 contains descriptions of additional Time Control applications:

Application Requirement
Control day and night sensitivity of List zone F5 or F6 in the detector CBE. This
intelligent, addressable detectors automatically sets the detector sensitivity to the
minimum setting (AL:9) during the day and
automatically returns detector sensitivity to
programmed sensitivity during the evening.
Control a specific date of year Input up to nine date in the Holiday selection screen
for Special Zone F7, then list zone F7 (Holiday) in the
CBE of a device.

Table A.3 Time Control Applications

60 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

NAC Coding Special Zone Operation

A.4 NAC Coding

A.4.1 Overview of Coding
A Coding selection is the Code Type that pulses when the control panel activates a NAC mapped to
Special Zone F8. Special Zone F8 provides coding selections (see Table A.4) that you can list in the
CBE of a NAC. To use a Code Type, program a NAC to list Zone F8 (reserved for a Code Type) in
the NAC CBE list.

NOTE: Control modules (FCM-1, FRM-1) cannot be coded.

The table below contains descriptions of the signals that correspond to each NAC Code Type:

Coding Selection Signal Notes

March Time (default) 120 PPM (pulses Per minute) Default selection for NACs mapped to F8.
Two-Stage Alert signal (20 PPM) or Alert signal – When an alarm occurs and not activated by
General Alarm signal (Temporal another zone, the output pulses at 20 PPM.
pattern) General Alarm signal – If not acknowledged within 5 minutes,
the control panel switches from 20 PPM to Temporal pattern.
California 10 sec. On, 5 sec. Off, repeats n/a
Temporal 0.5 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 0.5 off, Used as a standard general EVAC signal.
0.5 on, 1.5 off, repeats
Two-Stage Canada Alert signal (20 PPM) Operates the same as Two-Stage except it will only switch to
(3 minutes) Drill Switch (Alarm Signal Mode second stage:
for Canadian Applications) • by activation of Drill Switch, or
activation switches to Temporal • the three minute timer expires, or
pattern • through a CBE event (General Alarm Z00 plus Zones 1-99 or
Logic Zones 1-20)
NOTE: In Canadian applications ACM-24AT control point is
required for Automatic Alarm Signal Cancel. Acknowledge will
not cancel the Two-Stage Timer.
NOTE: For Canadian applications using Two-Stage with the
ACPS-610, see the ACPS-610 manual for additional
programming instructions.
Two-Stage Canada Alert signal (20 PPM) Operates the same as Two-Stage except it will only switch to
(5 minutes) Drill Switch (Alarm Signal Mode second stage:
for Canadian Applications) • by activation of Drill Switch, or
activation switches to Temporal • the five minute timer expires, or
pattern • through a CBE event (General Alarm Z00 plus Zones 1-99 or
Logic Zones 1-20)
NOTE: In Canadian applications ACM-24AT control point is
required for Automatic Alarm Signal Cancel. Acknowledge will
not cancel the Two-Stage Timer.
NOTE: For Canadian applications using Two-Stage with the
ACPS-610, see the ACPS-610 manual for additional
programming instructions.
Two-Stage Canada Alert signal (20 PPM) Operates the same as Two-Stage except it will only switch to
Manual Drill Switch (Alarm Signal Mode second stage:
for Canadian Applications) • by activation of Drill Switch, or
activation or CBE switches to • through a CBE event (General Alarm Z00 plus Zones 1-99 or
Temporal pattern Logic Zones 1-20)
System Sensor Strobe Synchronizes System Sensor ADA horn/strobes.
Gentex Strobe Synchronizes Gentex Horn/Strobes (Applies to NAC on CPU2-
640 only)
Wheelock Strobe Synchronizes Wheelock Horn/Strobes (Applies to NAC on
CPU2-640 only)

Table A.4 F8 Code Types and Audio Signals

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 61

Special Zone Operation Presignal and Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) Operation

A.4.2 How to View Coding (F8) Selections

You can use the Read Status Entry option to view the current selection for the Coding function. To
do so, press the following keys in sequence:

NOTE: For instructions on programming the Coding function, refer to the NFS2-640
Programming Manual.

The LCD display shows the current selections for the Code Type. Figure A.6 shows a sample LCD
display of a Code Type selection of March Time:
Status Coding Function status banner
OFF CODING FUNCTION CODE TYPE
MARCH TIME F08
Coding selection Zone F08

Figure A.6 Sample Read Status for Coding Function

A.4.3 How to Respond to an Alarm with Coding

If an alarm occurs with a Coding selection, the control panel latches the control panel in alarm and
pulses outputs mapped to F8 at the pulse specified by the Coding selection (see Table A.4). To
silence the outputs, press the SIGNAL SILENCE key.

A.5 Presignal and Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) Operation

A.5.1 Overview
This section describes the Presignal and PAS selection, and provides instructions on how to do the
following:
• View Presignal and PAS selections
• Respond to an alarm with Presignal
• Operate the control panel with a Presignal Delay Timer only
• Operate the control panel with a Presignal Delay Timer and PAS

A.5.2 What is Presignal and PAS?

Presignal is a feature that initially causes alarm signals to only sound in specific areas, monitored
by qualified persons. This allows delay of the alarm from 60 to180 seconds after the start of alarm
processing. The control panel Presignal feature provides two selections:

NOTE: Presignal differs from the Alarm Verification Timer which does not require human
intervention.

• A Presignal Delay Timer (60-180 seconds) that delays activation of all outputs with a CBE that
includes Special Zone F0.
• A PAS selection, in addition to the Presignal Delay Timer, that allows a 15-second time period
for acknowledging an alarm signal from a fire detection/initiating device. If the alarm is not
acknowledged within 15 seconds, all local and remote outputs activate immediately and
automatically.

62 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Presignal and Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) Operation Special Zone Operation

An illustration of Presignal and PAS timing.

Presignal Delay Timer (60-180)

PAS (15s)

If PAS=Y, alarm activates

outputs if not acknowledged
Initial alarm Alarm activates outputs,
annunciation if panel is not reset.

Figure A.7 Presignal and PAS Time

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 63

Special Zone Operation Presignal and Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) Operation

A.5.3 How to View Presignal and PAS Selections

You can use the Read Status Entry option to view the current selection for the Presignal function.
To do so, press the keys in sequence:

NOTE: For instructions on programming the Presignal function, refer to the NFS2-640
Programming Manual.

The LCD display shows the current selections for the Presignal function. The figure below shows a
sample LCD display of a Presignal function selected for PAS and a Presignal Delay Timer of 60
seconds:
Status Off Presignal Function status banner

OFF PRESIGNAL FUNCT PRESIGNAL DELAY

DELAY-060 PAS=YES FOO
Presignal Delay=60 PAS selected Zone F00
Seconds

Figure A.8 Sample Read Status for Presignal Function

NOTE: If any monitor modules are programmed with a PAS INHIBIT Type Code and a fire alarm
occurs, zone F0 goes false and aborts the Presignal Delay Timer.

A.5.4 How to Respond to an Alarm with Presignal Delay Timer (no PAS)
If an alarm occurs with a Presignal Delay Timer (60-180 seconds), the control panel displays the
type of device and the SLC address of the device causing the alarm. If a second alarm occurs during
the Presignal Delay Timer, the control panel aborts the Presignal Delay Timer and activates all pro-
grammed outputs. A sample Alarm screen for a monitor module is shown below:

Status banner ALARM Type Code MONITOR

ALARM: MONITOR MODULE ADDR 1M147

Z004 10:14A 041515 1M147
First zone in the CBE list SLC address of the
(blank if no zone listed) activated initiating device

Figure A.9 Sample Alarm Display Screen

The FIRE ALARM LED flashes and the panel sounder pulses a steady tone. The control panel latches
until the alarm is corrected and you press the SYSTEM RESET key to reset the control panel. You
have the duration of the Presignal Delay Timer (60-180 seconds) to respond to the alarm before the
control panel automatically activates all outputs programmed to F0. You can take the following
actions:
• To silence the panel sounder and change the FIRE ALARM LED from flashing to steady, press
the ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key.
• To abort the Presignal Delay Timer, press the SYSTEM RESET key.
• To manually activate all outputs programmed to F0, press the DRILL key (Alarm Signal for
Canadian applications). The Manual Evacuate screen appears, the panel sounder pulses and the
FIRE ALARM LED changes from flashing to steady. The Manual Evacuate screen and Alarm
screen display alternately at 3-second intervals.
If the Presignal Delay Timer reaches its programmed value, without operator intervention, the con-
trol panel activates all outputs programmed to F0.

64 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Presignal and Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) Operation Special Zone Operation

A.5.5 How to Respond to an Alarm with Presignal Delay Timer

(PAS selected)
If an alarm occurs with a Presignal Delay Timer (60-180 seconds) and PAS selected, the control
panel displays an Alarm screen that shows the type of device and the SLC address of the device
causing the alarm. When an alarm comes from an initiating device with a CBE list that includes F0
(with PAS selected), the control panel delays the following outputs:
• System Alarm relay
• TM-4 Polarity Reversal Alarm output
• TM-4 Municipal Box output

NOTE: These outputs do not delay for Presignal operations without PAS selected.

If a second alarm occurs during the Presignal Delay Timer, the control panel aborts the Presignal
Delay Timer and activates all programmed outputs.
A sample Alarm screen for a monitor module:

Status banner ALARM Type Code MONITOR

ALARM: MONITOR MODULE ADDR 1M147

Z004 10:14A 071415 1M147
SLC address of the
activated initiating device

Figure A.10 Sample Alarm Display Screen

The FIRE ALARM LED flashes and the panel sounder pulses a steady tone. The control panel latches
until the alarm is corrected and you press the SYSTEM RESET key to reset the control panel. You
have 15 seconds to acknowledge the alarm or the control panel automatically activates all outputs
programmed to F0. If you acknowledge the alarm within 15 seconds, the control panel increases the
delay time to the full Presignal Delay Timer (60-180 seconds). You have the duration of the Presig-
nal Delay Timer to respond to the alarm before the control panel activates all outputs programmed
to F0. You can take the following actions:
• To increase the delay to the full programmed Presignal Delay Timer, press the
ACKNOWLEDGE/SCROLL DISPLAY key. The panel sounder goes silent and the FIRE ALARM LED
changes from flashing to steady.
• To abort the Presignal Delay Timer, press the SYSTEM RESET key.
• To manually activate all outputs programmed to F0, press the DRILL (Alarm Signal in Canadian
applications) key. The Manual Evacuate screen appears, the panel sounder pulses and the FIRE
ALARM LED changes from flashing to steady. The Manual Evacuate screen and Alarm screen
display alternately at 3-second intervals.
If the Presignal Delay Timer reaches its programmed value, without operator intervention, the con-
trol panel activates all outputs programmed to F0.

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 65

 Appendix B: Intelligent Detector Functions
NOTE: For instructions on selecting Intelligent Detector Functions, refer to the NFS2-640
Programming Manual.

Descriptions for Intelligent Detector Functions

Function Description
Analog Display The control panel reads and displays analog information from the 318
analog detectors (159 per SLC). The display shows the sensed air at
the detector as a percentage of the alarm threshold for each detector.
Sensitivity Adjust Nine selections for manually setting intelligent detector alarm levels
within the UL range. If using ionization detectors in duct applications,
set Sensitivity Adjust to Level 1.
Refer to the NFS2-640 Programming Manual for detector sensitivity
information.
Day/Night Sensitivity You can program the system to automatically force smoke detectors to
Operation minimum sensitivity during the day. Refer to “Time, Date, and Holiday
Functions” on page 59.
Maintenance Alert When compensation reaches the limit of the amount of drift
compensation that can be safely applied, the control panel reports a
trouble condition, according to National Fire Alarm Code standards.
This condition also activates if the detector remains at very high or very
low measured air levels for an extended time.
Automatic Test The control panel performs an automatic test of each detector every
Operation 320 minutes. Failure to meet the test limits causes an Auto Test Fail
trouble.
Type Code The control panel monitors hardware device Type Codes for each
Supervision installed device at regular intervals (an interval can take up to 40
minutes for a full capacity system). If a mismatch of type compared to
the program occurs, the control panel generates a point trouble labeled
Invalid Type.
LED Control A global program selection to prevent detector LEDs from blinking as a
Operation result of polling during normal operation. A typical application is a
sleeping area where a blinking light can distract people. As a standard
function, independent of this programming selection, the control panel
allows all LEDs to turn on in alarm.
Alarm Verification Timer The control panel performs alarm verification on programmed
and Verification Counter intelligent smoke detectors. The Alarm Verification Timer is a global
Operation program selection of 0–240 seconds (ULC installations can not exceed
30 seconds/ Can not exceed 60 seconds for UL 864). Each detector
includes a Verification Counter, which displays the number of times
that a detector entered verification but did not time-out to alarm. The
Verification Counter increments to 99 and holds.

Table B.1 Intelligent Detector Functions

66 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

 Appendix C: Remote Terminal Access

C.1 General Description

The control panel can communicate with a remote terminal or computer connected to the EIA-232
PC/Terminal port. Refer to the NFS2-640 Installation Manual for installation information.

NOTE: See the NFS2-640 Programming Manual for instructions on enabling the CRT.

This port may be set up for interactive operation or for monitoring only. Interactive operation
requires that all equipment be UL-listed under UL Standard for Safety UL 864 and be installed and
set up as directed under Local Terminal Mode (LocT) or Local Monitor Mode (LocM).
ITE (Information Technology Equipment) equipment listed under UL 1950 is allowed for ancillary
system monitoring when the system is installed and set up as directed under Remote Terminal
Mode (RemT).

C.2 Operating Modes

The control panel provides three operating modes for the CPU EIA-232 PC/Terminal port:
• Local Terminal - LocT
• Local Monitor - LocM
• Remote Monitor - RemM
You select the operating mode during control panel programming (Global System Functions). For
more information, refer to the NFS2-640 Programming Manual.
The following subsections outline the functions, password requirements, and additional informa-
tion for each operating mode.

C.2.1 Local Terminal Mode (LocT)

Functions, passwords, and special requirements of Local Terminal Mode (LocT) are:

Functions: Read Status, Alter Status, and Control Functions (Table C.1).
Passwords: User-defined password for Alter Status functions.
Requirements: The terminal must be mounted in a UL 864 listed enclosure or positioned to provide
equivalent protection against unauthorized use.

Functions available with the Local Terminal Mode:

Function Lets you...

Read Status • Display the status of an individual point (Detector, Module, or Zone).
• Display a list of all the points in Alarm or trouble.
• Display a list of all programmed points in the system.
• Step through the History buffer event by event.
• Display the entire History buffer.
• Step through Alarm History
• Display the entire Alarm History

Alter Status • Disable/Enable an individual point.

• Change the sensitivity of a detector.
• Clear the verification counter of all detectors.
• Clear the entire History buffer.
• Set the Intelligent Sensing alert and action levels.

Table C.1 Local Terminal Mode Functions (1 of 2)

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 67

Remote Terminal Access Operating Modes

Function Lets you...

Control Functions • Acknowledge.

• Signal Silence.
• System Reset.
• Drill.

Table C.1 Local Terminal Mode Functions (2 of 2)

C.2.2 Local Monitor Mode (LocM)

Functions, passwords, and special requirements of Local Monitor Mode (LocM) are:

Functions: Read Status, Alter Status, and Control Functions (Table C.2).

Passwords: User-defined password for Alter Status and Control functions.

Requirements: Password security feature for Control Functions eliminates the need for mounting the
CRT-2 in an enclosure.

Functions available with the Local Monitor Mode:

Function Lets you...

Read Status • Display the status of an individual point (Detector, Module, or Zone).
• Display a list of all the points in Alarm or trouble.
• Display a list of all programmed points in the system.
• Step through the History buffer event by event.
• Display the entire History buffer.
• Step through Alarm History
• Display the entire Alarm History

Alter Status • Disable/Enable an individual point.

• Change the sensitivity of a detector.
• Clear the verification counter of all detectors.
• Clear the entire History buffer.
• Set the Intelligent Sensing alert and action levels.

Control Functions • Acknowledge

• Signal Silence
• System Reset
• Drill

Table C.2 Local Monitor Mode Functions

C.2.3 Remote Terminal Mode (RemT)

Functions, passwords, and special requirements of Remote Terminal Mode (RemT) are:

Functions: Read Status only. See Table C.3.

Passwords: None

Requirements: Use with UL ITE-listed terminals, including personal computers with the VeriFire™
Tools or terminal emulation software. Intended for terminals connected through
modems, including FSK modems connected through a public switched telephone
network.

68 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Using the CRT-2 for Read Status Remote Terminal Access

Functions available with the Remote Terminal Mode:

Functions Lets you...

Read Status • Display the status of an individual point (Detector, Module, or Zone).
• Display a list of all the points in Alarm or trouble.
• Display a list of all programmed points in the system.
• Step through the History buffer event by event.
• Display the entire History buffer.
• Step through Alarm History
• Display the entire Alarm History

Alter Status • N/A

Control Functions • N/A

Table C.3 Remote Terminal Mode Functions

C.3 Using the CRT-2 for Read Status

C.3.1 Overview
This section shows how to perform Read Status functions from a CRT-2.

NOTE: See the NFS2-640 Programming Manual for instructions on enabling the CRT port.

For more information see the “Read Status” section of this manual.

Function Lets you...

Read Point Read the status of any point in the system (detectors, modules, software
zones, and system parameters).

Alm/Tbl Status Display a list of all devices in the system that are in Alarm or trouble.

Read All Points Display a list of all points programmed in the system. This list will display the
status of all addressable detectors, modules, system parameters and
software zones.

History Step Step through the History buffer one event at a time.

History All Send the entire History buffer to the CRT, from the most recent event to the
oldest event.

Alarm History Step Step through Alarm History one alarm at a time.

Alarm History All Display a history list of all alarms.

Table C.4 Read Status Functions

C.3.2 Accessing Read Status Options

Access the Read Status function from the CRT-2 by following these steps.
1. Turn on the CRT-2, which is connected to the control panel.
2. Press the Read Status function key. The control panel displays the “Read Status” menu
options:

Rd Point=1, Rd Alm/Tbl=2, All Points=3, Hist:Step=4/All=5, Ala-Hist:Step=6/All=7

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 69

Remote Terminal Access Using the CRT-2 for Read Status

From the Read Status menu, you can select options 1-7.

C.3.3 Read Point

From the Read Status menu, select option 1 - Read Point. The CRT-2 displays the following:

Press <1> <ENTER>

Type (n)D(nnn), (n)M(nnn), Z(nn), F(n),, R(n), Ex, Lx or S(n) then hit Enter

Address (01-159)
SLC number Number

Enter the following:

1. Enter the SLC number “1” or “2”.

NOTE: Press F5 to scroll forward through a list of devices. Press F6 to scroll back through a list
of devices.

2. Enter the first letter of the device, using upper case letters.
• Detector = “D”
• Module = “M”
• Zone = “Z”
• Special Function = “F”
• Releasing Zone = “R”
• E Zone = “E”
• L Zone = “L”
• System Parameter = “S”
3. Enter the address or number of the device.
4. Press “ENTER”.
Example Read points for detectors 1D001 and 1D002 on SLC 1:

Press <1> <D> <0> <0> <1> <ENTER>

NORMAL SMOKE(PHOTO) INTENSIVE CARE UNIT NURSE LOUNGE Z050 020%A6 6 CV30 1D001

Press <NEXT>

NORMAL SMOKE (ION) DETECTOR ADDR 1D002 Z002 000%A6 6 ** 1D002

C.3.4 Display Devices in Alarm or Trouble

From the “Read Status” menu, select option 2 - Read Alarms/Troubles. The CRT-2 will display the
alarm and trouble history.

70 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Using the CRT-2 for Read Status Remote Terminal Access

The semicolon, a control character in networking applications, separates the hour and minute of
events displayed from history. If events display as they occur, a colon separates the hour and min-
ute.

Press <2> <ENTER> Semicolon

TROUBL SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 1D003 INVREP 01;09P 041615 1D003

TROUBL SMOKE (ION) DETECTOR ADDR 1D004 INVREP 01;09P 041615 1D004
TROUBL HEAT(FIXED) DETECTOR ADDR 1D006 INVREP 01;09P 041615 1D006
TROUBL MONITOR MODULE ADDR 1M041 INVREP 01;09P 041615 1M041
TROUBL IN SYSTEM GROUND FAULT 01;09P 041615 Wed
TROUBL IN SYSTEM BATTERY 01;09P 041615 Wed

C.3.5 Display All Programmed Points

From the “Read Status” menu, select option 3 - All Points. This option lets you view the status of
all addressable detectors, modules, system parameters, and software zones.

NORMAL SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 1D002 Z003 000%A8 8 ** 1D002

NORMAL SMOKE (ION) DETECTOR ADDR 1D003 Z002 020%A6 6 ** 1D003
NORMAL HEAT(FIXED) DETECTOR ADDR 1D006 Z001 050% * 1D006
NORMAL SMOKE(LASER) DETECTOR ADDR 1D099 Z004 000%A6 6 *V00 1D099
OFF RELEASE CKT MODULE ADDR 1M001 ZR00 I** 1M001
NORMAL MONITOR MODULE ADDR 1M001 ZR00 I** 1M001
OFF RELAY MODULE ADDR 1M033 Z000 *FW 1M033
OFF SOFTWARE ZONE Zone 01 Z01

C.3.6 Step-through History

From the “Read Status” menu, select option 4 - Step-through History. This option lets you step
through all history events one at a time.

C.3.7 View All History

From the “Read Status” menu, select option 5 - History ALL. The entire history of events will dis-
play on the screen.

C.3.8 Step-through Alarm History

From the “Read Status” menu, select option 6 - Step-through Alarm History. This option lets you
step through the panel’s alarm history one event at a time.

C.3.9 View All Alarm History

From the “Read Status” menu, select option 7 - Alarm History All. The entire history of alarm
events will display on the screen, from most recent to oldest.
Press <6> <ENTER>

************************ EVENT HISTORY START ***********************************

ALARM: MAN_RELEASE MODULE ADDR 1M065 10:21A 041515 1M065
ALARM: MAN_RELEASE MODULE ADDR 1M065 10:19A 041515 1M065
ALARM: MAN_RELEASE MODULE ADDR 1M065 03:20P 041415 1M065
ALARM: SMOKE (ION) DETECTOR ADDR 1D129 03:20P 041415 1M065

Step through the Alarm History buffer one event at a time by pressing the Next F5 or Prior F6 func-
tion keys.

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 71

Remote Terminal Access Using the CRT-2 for Alter Status

C.4 Using the CRT-2 for Alter Status

C.4.1 Overview
This section shows how to Alter Status functions from a CRT-2.

NOTE: The panel must be in Local Terminal Mode (LocT) or Local Monitor Mode (LocM).

NOTE: See the NFS2-640 Programming Manual for instructions on enabling the CRT port.

Function Lets you...

Disable Enable or disable detectors or modules.

Alarm/Pre-Alarm Change the Alarm and Pre-Alarm levels of any addressable detector in the
system.

Clear Verification Clear the verification counter for all the addressable detectors in the system.

Clear History Clear the contents of the History buffer.

Set Action/Alert Set the Pre-Alarm for Alert or Action.

Table C.5 Alter Status Functions

C.4.2 Accessing Alter Status Options

Access Alter Status function from the CRT-2 by following these steps.
1. Turn on the CRT-2 connected to the control panel.
2. Press the Alter Status function key. The control panel displays the Password screen.
Press <ALTER STATUS>

Enter Status CHange Password or Escape to Abort

3. Enter the Status Change Password. The factory default Status Change Password is 11111.The
password does not display on the CRT-2. Five asterisks will appear in place of the password.
Press <1><1><1><1><1><ENTER>

*****

The Alter Status Options menu appears.

1=Disable 2=Alarm/Prealarm 3=Clear Verification 4=Clear History 5=Alert/Action

From the Alter Status Options menu, you can select 1-5.

72 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Using the CRT-2 for Alter Status Remote Terminal Access

C.4.3 Enable or Disable Detectors, Modules or Zones

From the “Alter Status” menu select option 1 - Disable. Disable lets you enable or disable detec-
tors, modules, or zones.
SLC Number
Press <1><ENTER> Address (01-159)

Disable/Enable. Type nD(nnn) / nMnnn / P(nn) / Z(nn) then Enter

STATUS CHANGE Dis/Ena point 8:29A Tue 04/15/15

Number

Enter the following:

1. Enter the SLC loop number 1 or 2.
2. Enter the first letter to read one of the following, using upper case letters:
3. Detector = D
Module = M
NAC = P
Zone - Z
4. Enter the address or number of the device.
5. Press ENTER and a display similar to the following will appear.
EXAMPLE Disable Detector address 101 on SLC1:

Press <1><D><1><0><1><ENTER>

D101 Now Enabled, Enter E(Enable) / D(Disable) or Esc. to Abort

Press D to Disable (E to Enable); then press ENTER.

Press <D><ENTER>

Device now disabled

TROUBL SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 101 Z03 DEVICE DISABLED 08:29A Tue 04/15/15 D101

C.4.4 Change Alarm and Pre-Alarm Levels

This option lets you change the Alarm and Pre-alarm levels of any addressable detector in the sys-
tem. Follow these steps.
1. From the “Alter Status” menu select option 2 - Alarm/Pre-alarm.
Press <2><ENTER>

Det. Alarm/Prealarm level, type address D(

TROUBL SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDR 101 Z03 DEVICE DISABLED 08:29A Tue 04/15/15 D101

2. Enter the address of the detector you wish to change. For example, change alarm and pre-alarm
levels for detector 102 on SLC 1 to Alarm Level 4 & Pre-alarm Level 2.
Press <1><D><1><0><2><ENTER><A><5><P><2><ENTER>

STATUS CHANGE Alarm/Prealarm level 08:29A Tue 04/15/15

D102 sens. at level 5, Prealarm at level 3, Enter AxPx to change, Esc. to Abort
D102 now set at new Alarm level 5 and new Pre-alarm level 2

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 73

Remote Terminal Access Using the CRT-2 for Alter Status

C.4.5 Clear Verification Counter

Clear verification lets you clear the verification counter for all the addressable detectors in the sys-
tem.

Press <3><ENTER>

STATUS CHANGE Clear verify count 08:29A Tue 04/15/15

C.4.6 Clear the Entire History Buffer

Clear History lets you clear the entire History buffer.

Press <4><ENTER>

***************History Clear*************************

C.4.7 Set the Pre-Alarm for Alert or Action

Set Action/Alert lets you set the Pre-alarm for Alert or Action. For example, change Pre-alarm
from “Alert” to “Action” as follows:

Press <5><ENTER>

Set Pre-alarm Alert (NO)/Action(YES). Type N or Y then Enter

STATUS CHANGE Change Alert/Action 08:29A Tue 04/15/15

Press <Y><ENTER>

Pre-alarm now set for ACTION

74 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

 Appendix D: Point and System Troubles Lists
There are a variety of point or system trouble types that may appear in a trouble message. The
tables below give lists of the troubles and indications of their cause.

D.1 Point (Device) Troubles

A message from the “Trouble Type” column in the following table will appear in the upper right corner of
the panel display when a point (device) trouble occurs. Use this table to help determine what the trouble is.

POINT TROUBLES
TROUBLE TYPE TROUBLE DESCRIPTION ACTION
AC FAILURE The auxiliary power supply has lost AC power. Determine whether there is an AC power loss or whether
the power supply and wiring is correct.
ADRFLT .Detector and new sounder base address doesn’t match. Or the ACPS Readdress the incorrect device.
address is incorrect.
ALIGN A beam detector is in configuration mode. No action is necessary, as the trouble will clear when the
configuration is complete. However, the detector will not
detect a fire while this trouble exists.
BLOCK Something has come between the detector’s beam and its reflector. Investigate and clear the blockage.
CHGFLT* The power supply’s battery charger is not working properly. Correct the fault.
CO 6MN The CO (carbon monoxide) detection element on a detector has six Replace the detector.
months left to expiration. (This trouble generates in FlashScan mode
only. CLIP mode will generate a LO VAL error, if applicable.)
CO EXP The CO (carbon monoxide) detection element on a detector has Replace the detector.
reached the expiration date. (This trouble generates in FlashScan mode
only. CLIP mode will generate a LO VAL error, if applicable.)
CO TBL The CO element on a detector is not working properly. (This trouble Replace the detector.
generates in FlashScan mode only. CLIP mode will generate a LO VAL
error, if applicable.)
DIRTY 1 The detector is dirty and needs cleaning Clean the detector.
DIRTY 2 The detector requires cleaning immediately. It is a false alarm risk. Clean the detector immediately.
DISABL The point has been disabled. Service and re-enable the point.
DUAL ADDRESS There is more than one device of a single type (detector or module) with Readdress the incorrect device.
the same SLC address. A detector and a module can share the same
address on an SLC, but two detectors, or two modules, can not. Not that
some addressable devices (e.g. certain power supplies and RFXs) may
not appear to be detectors or modules, but are addressed on the SLC
as such.
GNDFLT There is a ground fault on the main or auxiliary power supply. Correct the fault.
HI BAT The auxiliary power supply’s battery charge is too high. Check the batteries for problems. Replace batteries if
necessary.
INVREP The device has returned a response to the panel that the panel did not Check the device for functionality, addressing and wiring.
expect.
IR TBL The infrared element is not working properly on an FSC-851 Replace the detector.
IntelliQuaddetector. (This trouble generates in FlashScan mode only.
CLIP mode will generate a LO VAL error.)
LO BAT The auxiliary power supply’s battery charge is low. Check the batteries for problems. Replace batteries if
necessary.
LO TEMP The temperature read by a Heat+ or Acclimate™+ detector is too low. Raise the heat in the area of the detector.
LO VAL The detector chamber reading is too low; the detector is not operating The detector must be removed and replaced by an
properly. Or (CLIP Mode only) the thermistors, CO element, or infra-red authorized service representative.
element on an FSC-851 IntelliQuad detector is not working properly, or
the FSC-851 IntelliQuad is experiencing a freeze warning.
NO ANS The device (module or detector) is not responding to the poll. Either the Determine whether the device is functional, and
device is not working or it is not connected properly. connected and addressed properly on the SLC.
NO SIG The device (module or detector) is not responding to the poll. Either the Determine whether the device is functional, and
device is not working or it is not connected properly. connected and addressed properly on the SLC.
OPEN The module device has an open circuit on its supervised wiring. Check the connections from the module to the input or
output device to which it is wired.
OPEN ON x There is an open on speaker circuit x. Locate the open and fix.
PSFAIL The power supply is not working properly. Check the battery for problems. Replace battery if
necessary.

Table D.1 Point (Device) Troubles (1 of 2)

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 75

Point and System Troubles Lists System Troubles

POINT TROUBLES
TROUBLE TYPE TROUBLE DESCRIPTION ACTION
PRLOSS The output module or new sounder base lost power. Turn power back on.
SHORT The module device has a short circuit on its supervised wiring. Check the connections from the module to the input or
output device to which it is wired.
SHORT ON x. There is a short on speaker circuit x. Locate the short and fix.
TEST F This detector has failed the FACP’s periodic detector test for alarm The detector should be removed and replaced by an
capabilities. authorized service representative.
THERM The thermistors are not functioning properly on an FSC-851 IntelliQuad Replace the detector.
detector. (This trouble generates in FlashScan mode only. CLIP mode
will generate a LO VAL error.)
VER HI This detector, which has been programmed to participate in alarm Check the detector and the nearby conditions to
verification, has gone into and come out of verification its programmed determine the problem.
limit without going into alarm. Either something is wrong with the
detector or there is a condition nearby (such as someone smoking) that
causes it to go into verification frequently.
XP TBL XPIQ general trouble. Check the XPIQ point for problems.
* This trouble may be fire panel or backup battery related. Test and replace backup batteries if necessary.

Table D.1 Point (Device) Troubles (2 of 2)

D.2 System Troubles

A message from the “Trouble Type” column in the following table will appear in the panel display
when a system trouble occurs. Use this table to help determine the cause of the trouble.

SYSTEM TROUBLES
TROUBLE MESSAGE
TROUBLE DESCRIPTION ACTION
TYPE
AC FAIL The main power supply has lost AC power. Investigate whether there is an AC power loss, or
whether the PS is correctly installed and wired.
ADV WALK TEST There is an Advanced Walk Test in progress. No action is required.
ANNUN x NO ANSWER The annunciator at address x is not responding. Determine whether the device is functional, and
connected and addressed properly.
ANNUN x TROUBLE The annunciator at address x is in trouble. Determine if the ACS module is functional, correctly
installed, and configured properly.
AUXILIARY TROUBLE An auxiliary device connected to the CPU2-640 at J6 is in Check the wiring and source.
trouble or the cable is missing.
BASIC WALK TEST A Basic Walk Test is in progress. No action is required.
BATTERY The main power supply’s battery charge is too high or too Check batteries, replace if necessary.
low.
BAT.BACKUP RAM RAM battery backup is low. Replace battery.
CHARGER FAIL* The main power supply’s battery charger is not working Correct the fault.
properly.
CORRUPT LOGIC EQUAT The database that houses the panel’s logic equations is The database must be re-downloaded, or all
corrupt. programming must be cleared and re-entered.
DRILL ACTIVATED Drill has been activated. No action is required.
DVC ANALOG OUT x TBL A trouble has occurred on DVC-AO analog output x (1-4). Investigate and fix.
The analog output is configured for class X, but no audio
signal is returned.
DVC AUDIO LIB. CORRUP The audio library is corrupt. The library must be re-downloaded, or all
programming must be cleared and re-entered. If the
trouble still does not clear, contact Technical Services.
DVC AUDIO LIB. INCOMP The audio library is not compatible with the Check the version using VeriFire Tools. Correct
programming database. and re-download the database and audio library.
DVC BUZZER OFF-LINE The piezo is disabled. Re-enable the piezo at switch 5 on the DVC.
DVC DAA DOWNLOADING A DAA download is in progress. No action is required.
DVC DATABASE CORRUPT The database that houses the DVC’s programming is The database must be re-downloaded, or all
corrupt. programming must be cleared and re-entered. If the
trouble still does not clear, contact Technical Services.

Table D.2 System Troubles

76 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

System Troubles Point and System Troubles Lists

SYSTEM TROUBLES
TROUBLE MESSAGE
TROUBLE DESCRIPTION ACTION
TYPE
DVC DBASE INCOMPAT The programming database version is not compatible The correct application or database version must
with the application version. be downloaded.
DVC DVC AUX TROUBLE This trouble is generated when the auxiliary input is Check the wiring and source.
supervised (as determined in VeriFire Tools
programming) and no signal is coming from the input.
DVC EXT RAM ERROR The external RAM test failed. Service is required.
DVC FFT TROUBLE There is a short or open on the FFT riser. Check that the 4-wire switch is correctly set and that
there is an end-of-line resistor in place for 2-wire
operation. Investigate for a break or short on the
wiring.
DVC FLASH IMAGE ERR The DVC software is corrupt. Re-download the panel code software from VeriFire
tools. If the trouble still does not clear, call Technical
Services.
DVC LOADING NO SERV A program or database download is in progress. The Proper authorities should be notified while a download
panel is NOT providing fire protection during the is in progress so that other means of fire protection
download. can be supplied.
DVC LOCAL MIC. TBL The local microphone is in trouble. There is no Investigate whether the mic is plugged into the DVC
communication, or paging has been enabled for over 28 or whether there is a problem with the local mic.
seconds and no signal has been received.
DVC LOCAL PHONE TBL The local FFT handset is in trouble. There is no Investigate whether the handset is plugged into the
communication, or paging has been enabled for over 28 DVC or whether there is a problem with the local
seconds and no signal has been received. handset.
DVC NVRAM BATT TBL Battery backup and/or clock backup is low. Replace the battery. Refer to the DVC Series Manual
for replacement instructions.
DVC PROGRAM CORRUPT The database that houses the DVC’s programming is The database must be re-downloaded, or all
corrupt. programming must be cleared and re-entered. If the
trouble still does not clear, contact Technical Services.
DVC REM. MIC. TBL The remote microphone is in trouble. It is installed and Check wiring and connections.
supervised, but no signal is coming from it.
DVC SELF TEST FAIL The diagnostic test failed on the DVC. Reboot the unit. If the problem does not clear, call
Technical Services.
DVC SOFT. MISMATCH One or more DAL device has a software revision that Update the DAA software to match.
does not match other DAL device software revisions.
EPROM ERROR The application and/or boot code is corrupt. Service is required.
EXCEEDED CONN. LIMIT More than two panels have been connected to a high- Remove extra panel(s).
speed network communications module.
EXTERNAL RAM ERROR The external RAM test failed. Service is required.
GROUND FAULT A ground fault has occurred within the panel. Locate the ground fault and repair.
GROUND FAULT LOOP x There is a ground fault on loop x. Locate the ground fault and repair.
HS-NCM SNIFFER ACTIV The panel is in a diagnostic mode. No action is required.
INTERNAL RAM ERROR The internal RAM test failed. Service is required.
LCD80 SUPERVISORY Communication has been lost with the LCD-80. Check connections to the LCD-80 Annunciator.
LOADING.NO SERVICE A program or database download is in progress. The Proper authorities should be notified while a download
panel is NOT providing fire protection during the is in progress so that other means of fire protection
download. can be supplied.
MASTER BOX TROUBLE A TM-4 connected to a municipal box is in trouble. Reset the master box.
MASTER BOX NO ANSWER A TM-4 connected to a municipal box is not responding. Determine whether the device is functional and
connected properly.
NCM COMM FAILURE Communication is lost between the CPU2-640 and the Check to see if the NUP cable is properly installed
network communications module or DVC. and the network communications module or DVC is
functional.
NETWORK FAIL PORT x Communication lost between NCM Port x and Check wiring and verify the node is online.
corresponding node.
NETWORK INCOMPATIBLE The brand of this panel is incompatible with this network. Verify all nodes are branded for the same OEM.
NFPA 24HR REMINDER This message occurs every day at 11 AM if any troubles Resolve any troubles on the system.
exist.
NO DEV. INST ON L1 No devices are installed on the system. Install SLC and run autoprogram.

Table D.2 System Troubles

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 77

Point and System Troubles Lists System Troubles

SYSTEM TROUBLES
TROUBLE MESSAGE
TROUBLE DESCRIPTION ACTION
TYPE
PANEL DOOR OPEN The panel door is open. Close door.
POWER SUPPLY COMM There has been a communication failure with the power Service is required.
FAIL supply.
PROGRAM CORRUPTED The database that houses the panel’s programming is The database must be re-downloaded, or all
corrupt. programming must be cleared and re-entered. If the
trouble still does not clear, contact Technical Services.
PROGRAM MODE A user is currently accessing the panel’s programming No action is required / Exit the Programming mode.
ACTIVATED menus.
RELEASE DEV. DISABLE Releasing devices have been disabled. Enable the devices.
SELF TEST FAILED Diagnostic test failed. Call Technical Services.
CLASS A POS. LOOP x There is an open circuit on the positive side of loop x. Class A and Class X are supervised methods of
communicating with addressable devices. If the control panel detects a trouble (open), it will drive both ends of
the loop, maintaining communication in an unsupervised method. The latching trouble will display on the panel as
a Class A trouble until you correct the condition and press RESET. Class X configuration of the SLC requires the
use of ISO-X isolator modules.
CLASS A NEG. LOOP x There is an open circuit on the negative side of loop x. Class A and Class X are supervised methods of
communicating with addressable devices. If the control panel detects a trouble (open), it will drive both ends of
the loop, maintaining communication in an unsupervised method. The latching trouble will display on the panel as
a Class A trouble until you correct the condition and press RESET. Class X configuration of the SLC requires the
use of ISO-X isolator modules.
CLASS A SHORT LOOP x Class A and Class X are supervised methods of communicating with addressable devices. If the control panel
detects a trouble (open or short), it will drive both ends of the loop, maintaining communication in an
unsupervised method. The latching trouble will display on the panel as a Class A trouble until you correct the
condition and press RESET. Class X configuration of the SLC requires the use of ISO-X isolator modules.
SYS INITIALIZATION The devices are initializing. No action is required, as the trouble will clear when
initialization is completed. However, devices will not
report off-normal events while this trouble exists.
TERM. SUPERVISORY There is a communication error with the CRT-2. Check connections to the CRT-2 terminal.
UDACT NO ANSWER The UDACT or UDACT-2 is not responding. Determine whether the UDACT/UDACT-2 is
functional, and connected and addressed properly.
UDACT TROUBLE The UDACT or UDACT-2 is in trouble. Determine if the UDACT/UDACT-2 is functional and
wired correctly.
* This trouble may be fire panel or backup battery related. Test and replace backup batteries if necessary/

Table D.2 System Troubles

78 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

 Notes

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 79

 Index
A Discharge LED 13
Drill control key 14
Abort 56
Abort Active LED 13
Acknowledge/Scroll Display control key 13 F
Active Supervisory Signal 28–30 Fire Alarm 18–19
panel indication 28 LED 13
response to 29 panel indication 18
Type Codes 29 response to a 19, 34, 62
Alarm Verification Timer 38, 66 Fire Control Type Code, active point 33
Alarm. See Fire Alarm 18, 33
Analog Display 66
Annunciator Selections, read status 48
H
Auto Silence Timer 38 Hidden History, read status and print 55
Automatic Test Operation 66 History, event and alarm, read status 52
Holiday Functions 59
to view selections 60
B
Battery Levels, read status 51
I
Increment Number key 15
C ISO-X module 40, 78
Caution
Disabling a zone disables all input and out-
put... 32
L
CO Alarm 33–35 Lamp Test control key 15
panel indication 33 Latching Supervisory Type Code 29
Coding Latching/non-latching type codes. See particular
to view F8 selections 62 type code for definition.
Coding, NAC 61 LED Control Operation 66
Control Keys 13 LEDs, table of 12
Control/Relay Module Trouble Local Control setting and control keys 13
panel indication 38 LocM (Local Monitor) 67, 68
response to 38 LocT (Local Terminal Mode) 67
Type Codes 36
Control/Relay Module, read status 44 M
Controls Active LED 12 Maintenance Alert 66
Cooperative Multi-Detector, read status 44 Manual Release 56
Cross Zone 56 Mass Notification 21–25
Cross Zone Programming illustration 58 MN Alarm
CRT-2 and Read Status 69 panel indication 21
Accessing 69 response to a 22
CRT-2 and Read Status. See Appendix C MN Supervisory
panel indication 22
D response to a 23
Date Functions 59 MN Trouble
Day/Night Sensitivity Operation 66 panel indication 23
Delay Timer 56 response to a 24
Detector Monitor Module
fire alarm type codes 20, 35 fire alarm type codes 19, 25, 35
Functions 66 non-alarm type codes 32
Read Status 44 Read Status 44
supervisory alarm type codes 30 security type codes 28
Disabled Points 32 supervisory alarm type codes 30

80 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

Index N–T

trouble monitor type codes 36 releasing zone selections

MRD-1 10 software zones 46
Special Zone (F0-F9) 46
N System Functions 47
total of installed devices 43
NAC Trouble using a CRT. See Appendix C
panel indication 37 Recall Last Entry key 15
response to 38 Releasing Zone (R0-R9), read status 47
Type Codes 36
Releasing Zones (R0-R9) 56–58
NAC, read status 45
Remote Terminal Access 67–74
Non-Alarm Points 32
RemT, Remote Terminal Mode 67, 68
Non-Fire Point, active, panel indication 33
Non-latching Supervisory Type Code 29
Normal Mode of Operation 18 S
Security Alarm 27
O panel indication 27
response to a 27
Output Circuit Trouble 36–38
Security LED 13
Sensitivity Adjust 66
P Shortcuts to Operating Functions 11
Partial Signal Silence 14 Signal Silence control key 14
Point (Device) Troubles table 75 Signals Silenced LED 13
Point Disabled LED 13 Silence Inhibit Timer 38, 39
Power LED 12 Soak Timer 56
Pre-alarm LED 13 Software Zone (Z01-Z99), read status 46
Pre-Alarm Warning 31, 35 Special Zone Operation 56–65
action level 31 Special Zone, read status 46
alert level 31 Supervisory LED 13
panel indication 31 System Functions, read status 47
response to 31 System Normal Message 18
Pre-Discharge LED 12 System Reset control key 14
Presignal and Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) System Timers 38
response to Presignal Delay Timer alarm Alarm Verification Timer 38
(no PAS) 64 Auto Silence Timer 38
response to Presignal Delay Timer alarm Silence Inhibit Timer 38, 39
(PAS selected) 65 to view selections 38
to view selections 64 System Trouble 25–26
panel indication 25
response to 26
R System Trouble LED 13
Read Status 41–55 System Troubles 76
to enter 41
to print 53
alarm history 54 T
event history 54 Time Functions 59
points 53 to view selections 59
print hidden event and alarm history Timers. See System Timers 38
55 Transponder Points 36
print points 54 Trouble Monitor 35
to view 42 response to 36
annunciator selections 48 trouble monitor type codes 35
battery levels 51 Troubles
detector information 43 Point 75
devices, zones, system settings 42 System 76
event and alarm history 52 Type Code Supervision 66
point or zone information 43 Type Codes
Releasing Zone (R0-R9) 47 Fire Alarm 19, 35
Mass Notification 25

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 81

W–X Index

Non-alarm 32
Security 28
Supervisory 30
Trouble 35

W
Warning
When used for CO2 releasing applica-
tions... 17, 56
Waterflow Circuit operation 40

X
XP6-C 36
XPC transponder points 36

82 NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19

 Manufacturer Warranties and Limitation of Liability
Manufacturer Warranties. Subject to the limitations set forth herein, Manufacturer
warrants that the Products manufactured by it in its Northford, Connecticut facility
and sold by it to its authorized Distributors shall be free, under normal use and
service, from defects in material and workmanship for a period of thirty six months
(36) months from the date of manufacture (effective Jan. 1, 2009). The Products
manufactured and sold by Manufacturer are date stamped at the time of production.
Manufacturer does not warrant Products that are not manufactured by it in its
Northford, Connecticut facility but assigns to its Distributor, to the extent possible,
any warranty offered by the manufacturer of such product. This warranty shall be
void if a Product is altered, serviced or repaired by anyone other than Manufacturer
or its authorized Distributors. This warranty shall also be void if there is a failure to
maintain the Products and the systems in which they operate in proper working
conditions.
MANUFACTURER MAKES NO FURTHER WARRANTIES, AND DISCLAIMS ANY
AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS, TRADEMARKS, PROGRAMS AND SERVICES
RENDERED BY MANUFACTURER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,
INFRINGEMENT, TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. MANUFACTURER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH WHICH MAY ARISE IN THE COURSE OF, OR AS
A RESULT OF, PERSONAL, COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL USES OF ITS
PRODUCTS.
This document constitutes the only warranty made by Manufacturer with respect to
its products and replaces all previous warranties and is the only warranty made by
Manufacturer. No increase or alteration, written or verbal, of the obligation of this
warranty is authorized. Manufacturer does not represent that its products will
prevent any loss by fire or otherwise.
Warranty Claims. Manufacturer shall replace or repair, at Manufacturer's discretion,
each part returned by its authorized Distributor and acknowledged by Manufacturer
to be defective, provided that such part shall have been returned to Manufacturer
with all charges prepaid and the authorized Distributor has completed Manufacturer's
Return Material Authorization form. The replacement part shall come from
Manufacturer's stock and may be new or refurbished. THE FOREGOING IS
DISTRIBUTOR'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY IN THE EVENT OF A
WARRANTY CLAIM.

Warn-HL-08-2009.fm

NFS2-640 Operations P/N 52743:L4 06/10/19 83

NOTIFIER
12 Clintonville Road
Northford, CT 06472-1610 USA
203-484-7161
www.notifier.com